[gtkmm] Regenerated GTK+ XML for documetntation.
- From: Murray Cumming <murrayc src gnome org>
- To: commits-list gnome org
- Cc:
- Subject: [gtkmm] Regenerated GTK+ XML for documetntation.
- Date: Wed, 1 Sep 2010 10:26:56 +0000 (UTC)
commit a59d75a28c236e39d9fc1a172460d7f887a28031
Author: Murray Cumming <murrayc murrayc com>
Date: Wed Sep 1 12:26:34 2010 +0200
Regenerated GTK+ XML for documetntation.
* gtk/src/gtk_docs.xml: Regenerated with docextract_to_xml.py.
ChangeLog | 6 +
gtk/src/gtk_docs.xml |22493 ++++++++++++++++++++++++++------------------------
2 files changed, 11642 insertions(+), 10857 deletions(-)
---
diff --git a/ChangeLog b/ChangeLog
index a627b38..d3fc976 100644
--- a/ChangeLog
+++ b/ChangeLog
@@ -1,5 +1,11 @@
2010-09-01 Murray Cumming <murrayc murrayc com>
+ Regenerated GTK+ XML for documetntation.
+
+ * gtk/src/gtk_docs.xml: Regenerated with docextract_to_xml.py.
+
+2010-09-01 Murray Cumming <murrayc murrayc com>
+
Added SizeRequest.
* tools/extra_defs_gen/generate_defs_gtk.cc: Added SizeRequest, though it
diff --git a/gtk/src/gtk_docs.xml b/gtk/src/gtk_docs.xml
index 3fd1673..1f1530c 100644
--- a/gtk/src/gtk_docs.xml
+++ b/gtk/src/gtk_docs.xml
@@ -16,51 +16,46 @@ by typing in text.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_status_icon_set_from_file">
+<function name="gtk_page_setup_get_paper_height">
<description>
-Makes @status_icon display the file @filename.
-See gtk_status_icon_new_from_file() for details.
+Returns the paper height in units of @unit.
-Since: 2.10
+Note that this function takes orientation, but
+not margins into consideration.
+See gtk_page_setup_get_page_height().
+
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="status_icon">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkStatusIcon
+<parameter name="setup">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPageSetup
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="filename">
-<parameter_description> a filename
+<parameter name="unit">
+<parameter_description> the unit for the return value
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the paper height.
+
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_set_tooltip_row">
+<function name="gtk_entry_get_has_frame">
<description>
-Sets the tip area of @tooltip to be the area covered by the row at @path.
-See also gtk_tree_view_set_tooltip_column() for a simpler alternative.
-See also gtk_tooltip_set_tip_area().
+Gets the value set by gtk_entry_set_has_frame().
-Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeView
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="tooltip">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTooltip
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="path">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTreePath
+<parameter name="entry">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkEntry
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> whether the entry has a beveled frame
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_icon_theme_has_icon">
@@ -87,6 +82,48 @@ icon for @icon_name.
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_action_group_add_radio_actions">
+<description>
+This is a convenience routine to create a group of radio actions and
+add them to the action group.
+
+The "changed" signal of the first radio action is connected to the
+ on_change callback and the accel paths of the actions are set to
+<literal><Actions>/<replaceable>group-name</replaceable>/<replaceable>action-name</replaceable></literal>.
+
+Since: 2.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="action_group">
+<parameter_description> the action group
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="entries">
+<parameter_description> an array of radio action descriptions
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="n_entries">
+<parameter_description> the number of entries
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="value">
+<parameter_description> the value of the action to activate initially, or -1 if
+no action should be activated
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="on_change">
+<parameter_description> the callback to connect to the changed signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="user_data">
+<parameter_description> data to pass to the action callbacks
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_clipboard_set_with_owner">
<description>
Virtually sets the contents of the specified clipboard by providing
@@ -170,86 +207,68 @@ boundary algorithms).
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tool_palette_set_group_position">
+<function name="gtk_accel_label_set_accel_closure">
<description>
-Sets the position of the group as an index of the tool palette.
-If position is 0 the group will become the first child, if position is
--1 it will become the last child.
-
-Since: 2.20
+Sets the closure to be monitored by this accelerator label. The closure
+must be connected to an accelerator group; see gtk_accel_group_connect().
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="palette">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolPalette
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="group">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItemGroup which is a child of palette
+<parameter name="accel_label">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAccelLabel
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="position">
-<parameter_description> a new index for group
+<parameter name="accel_closure">
+<parameter_description> the closure to monitor for accelerator changes.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_entry_get_has_frame">
+<function name="gtk_font_selection_get_face_list">
<description>
-Gets the value set by gtk_entry_set_has_frame().
+This returns the #GtkTreeView which lists all styles available for
+the selected font. For example, 'Regular', 'Bold', etc.
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="entry">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkEntry
+<parameter name="fontsel">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFontSelection
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> whether the entry has a beveled frame
+<return> A #GtkWidget that is part of @fontsel
+
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_theme_choose_icon">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_set_tooltip_row">
<description>
-Looks up a named icon and returns a structure containing
-information such as the filename of the icon. The icon
-can then be rendered into a pixbuf using
-gtk_icon_info_load_icon(). (gtk_icon_theme_load_icon()
-combines these two steps if all you need is the pixbuf.)
-
-If @icon_names contains more than one name, this function
-tries them all in the given order before falling back to
-inherited icon themes.
+Sets the tip area of @tooltip to be the area covered by the row at @path.
+See also gtk_tree_view_set_tooltip_column() for a simpler alternative.
+See also gtk_tooltip_set_tip_area().
Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="icon_theme">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkIconTheme
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="icon_names">
-<parameter_description> %NULL-terminated array of icon names to lookup
+<parameter name="tree_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeView
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="size">
-<parameter_description> desired icon size
+<parameter name="tooltip">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTooltip
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="flags">
-<parameter_description> flags modifying the behavior of the icon lookup
+<parameter name="path">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTreePath
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a #GtkIconInfo structure containing information
-about the icon, or %NULL if the icon wasn't found. Free with
-gtk_icon_info_free()
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_font_button_set_use_size">
@@ -272,6 +291,27 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_button_new_with_mnemonic">
+<description>
+Creates a new #GtkButton containing a label.
+If characters in @label are preceded by an underscore, they are underlined.
+If you need a literal underscore character in a label, use '__' (two
+underscores). The first underlined character represents a keyboard
+accelerator called a mnemonic.
+Pressing Alt and that key activates the button.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="label">
+<parameter_description> The text of the button, with an underscore in front of the
+mnemonic character
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> a new #GtkButton
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_label_get_text">
<description>
Fetches the text from a label widget, as displayed on the
@@ -291,33 +331,56 @@ string used by the label, and must not be modified.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_recent_manager_lookup_item">
+<function name="gtk_file_chooser_set_uri">
<description>
-Searches for a URI inside the recently used resources list, and
-returns a structure containing informations about the resource
-like its MIME type, or its display name.
+Sets the file referred to by @uri as the current file for the file chooser,
+by changing to the URI's parent folder and actually selecting the URI in the
+list. If the @chooser is %GTK_FILE_CHOOSER_ACTION_SAVE mode, the URI's base
+name will also appear in the dialog's file name entry.
-Since: 2.10
+If the URI isn't in the current folder of @chooser, then the current folder
+of @chooser will be changed to the folder containing @uri. This is equivalent
+to a sequence of gtk_file_chooser_unselect_all() followed by
+gtk_file_chooser_select_uri().
+
+Note that the URI must exist, or nothing will be done except for the
+directory change.
+If you are implementing a <guimenuitem>File/Save As...</guimenuitem> dialog,
+you should use this function if you already have a file name to which the
+user may save; for example, when the user opens an existing file and then
+does <guimenuitem>File/Save As...</guimenuitem> on it. If you don't have
+a file name already — for example, if the user just created a new
+file and is saving it for the first time, do not call this function.
+Instead, use something similar to this:
+|[
+if (document_is_new)
+{
+/ * the user just created a new document * /
+gtk_file_chooser_set_current_folder_uri (chooser, default_folder_for_saving);
+gtk_file_chooser_set_current_name (chooser, "Untitled document");
+}
+else
+{
+/ * the user edited an existing document * /
+gtk_file_chooser_set_uri (chooser, existing_uri);
+}
+]|
+
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="manager">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentManager
+<parameter name="chooser">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="uri">
-<parameter_description> a URI
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="error">
-<parameter_description> a return location for a #GError, or %NULL
+<parameter_description> the URI to set as current
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a #GtkRecentInfo structure containing information
-about the resource pointed by @uri, or %NULL if the URI was
-not registered in the recently used resources list. Free with
-gtk_recent_info_unref().
+<return> %TRUE if both the folder could be changed and the URI was
+selected successfully, %FALSE otherwise.
</return>
</function>
@@ -351,42 +414,25 @@ Since: 2.16
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_action_group_add_radio_actions">
+<function name="gtk_file_chooser_set_preview_widget_active">
<description>
-This is a convenience routine to create a group of radio actions and
-add them to the action group.
-
-The "changed" signal of the first radio action is connected to the
- on_change callback and the accel paths of the actions are set to
-<literal><Actions>/<replaceable>group-name</replaceable>/<replaceable>action-name</replaceable></literal>.
+Sets whether the preview widget set by
+gtk_file_chooser_set_preview_widget() should be shown for the
+current filename. When @active is set to false, the file chooser
+may display an internally generated preview of the current file
+or it may display no preview at all. See
+gtk_file_chooser_set_preview_widget() for more details.
Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="action_group">
-<parameter_description> the action group
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="entries">
-<parameter_description> an array of radio action descriptions
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="n_entries">
-<parameter_description> the number of entries
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="value">
-<parameter_description> the value of the action to activate initially, or -1 if
-no action should be activated
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="on_change">
-<parameter_description> the callback to connect to the changed signal
+<parameter name="chooser">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="user_data">
-<parameter_description> data to pass to the action callbacks
+<parameter name="active">
+<parameter_description> whether to display the user-specified preview widget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -439,6 +485,31 @@ Sets a child property for @child and @container.
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_cell_layout_reorder">
+<description>
+Re-inserts @cell at @position. Note that @cell has already to be packed
+into @cell_layout for this to function properly.
+
+Since: 2.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="cell_layout">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkCellLayout.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="cell">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkCellRenderer to reorder.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="position">
+<parameter_description> New position to insert @cell at.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_tree_view_set_rules_hint">
<description>
This function tells GTK+ that the user interface for your
@@ -514,6 +585,26 @@ Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_window_set_default_icon_list">
+<description>
+Sets an icon list to be used as fallback for windows that haven't
+had gtk_window_set_icon_list() called on them to set up a
+window-specific icon list. This function allows you to set up the
+icon for all windows in your app at once.
+
+See gtk_window_set_icon_list() for more details.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="list">
+<parameter_description> a list of #GdkPixbuf
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_text_view_get_accepts_tab">
<description>
Returns whether pressing the Tab key inserts a tab characters.
@@ -534,20 +625,34 @@ Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_get_sort_indicator">
+<function name="gtk_window_set_geometry_hints">
<description>
-Gets the value set by gtk_tree_view_column_set_sort_indicator().
+This function sets up hints about how a window can be resized by
+the user. You can set a minimum and maximum size; allowed resize
+increments (e.g. for xterm, you can only resize by the size of a
+character); aspect ratios; and more. See the #GdkGeometry struct.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_column">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeViewColumn
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="geometry_widget">
+<parameter_description> widget the geometry hints will be applied to or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="geometry">
+<parameter_description> struct containing geometry information or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="geom_mask">
+<parameter_description> mask indicating which struct fields should be paid attention to
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> whether the sort indicator arrow is displayed
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_notebook_set_tab_reorderable">
@@ -575,6 +680,55 @@ Since: 2.10
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_window_set_default_size">
+<description>
+Sets the default size of a window. If the window's "natural" size
+(its size request) is larger than the default, the default will be
+ignored. More generally, if the default size does not obey the
+geometry hints for the window (gtk_window_set_geometry_hints() can
+be used to set these explicitly), the default size will be clamped
+to the nearest permitted size.
+
+Unlike gtk_widget_set_size_request(), which sets a size request for
+a widget and thus would keep users from shrinking the window, this
+function only sets the initial size, just as if the user had
+resized the window themselves. Users can still shrink the window
+again as they normally would. Setting a default size of -1 means to
+use the "natural" default size (the size request of the window).
+
+For more control over a window's initial size and how resizing works,
+investigate gtk_window_set_geometry_hints().
+
+For some uses, gtk_window_resize() is a more appropriate function.
+gtk_window_resize() changes the current size of the window, rather
+than the size to be used on initial display. gtk_window_resize() always
+affects the window itself, not the geometry widget.
+
+The default size of a window only affects the first time a window is
+shown; if a window is hidden and re-shown, it will remember the size
+it had prior to hiding, rather than using the default size.
+
+Windows can't actually be 0x0 in size, they must be at least 1x1, but
+passing 0 for @width and @height is OK, resulting in a 1x1 default size.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="width">
+<parameter_description> width in pixels, or -1 to unset the default width
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="height">
+<parameter_description> height in pixels, or -1 to unset the default height
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_text_buffer_set_mark">
<description>
Move the mark to the given position, if not @should_exist,
@@ -610,6 +764,63 @@ immediately
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_dialog_run">
+<description>
+Blocks in a recursive main loop until the @dialog either emits the
+#GtkDialog::response signal, or is destroyed. If the dialog is
+destroyed during the call to gtk_dialog_run(), gtk_dialog_run() returns
+#GTK_RESPONSE_NONE. Otherwise, it returns the response ID from the
+::response signal emission.
+
+Before entering the recursive main loop, gtk_dialog_run() calls
+gtk_widget_show() on the dialog for you. Note that you still
+need to show any children of the dialog yourself.
+
+During gtk_dialog_run(), the default behavior of #GtkWidget::delete-event
+is disabled; if the dialog receives ::delete_event, it will not be
+destroyed as windows usually are, and gtk_dialog_run() will return
+#GTK_RESPONSE_DELETE_EVENT. Also, during gtk_dialog_run() the dialog
+will be modal. You can force gtk_dialog_run() to return at any time by
+calling gtk_dialog_response() to emit the ::response signal. Destroying
+the dialog during gtk_dialog_run() is a very bad idea, because your
+post-run code won't know whether the dialog was destroyed or not.
+
+After gtk_dialog_run() returns, you are responsible for hiding or
+destroying the dialog if you wish to do so.
+
+Typical usage of this function might be:
+|[
+gint result = gtk_dialog_run (GTK_DIALOG (dialog));
+switch (result)
+{
+case GTK_RESPONSE_ACCEPT:
+do_application_specific_something ();
+break;
+default:
+do_nothing_since_dialog_was_cancelled ();
+break;
+}
+gtk_widget_destroy (dialog);
+]|
+
+Note that even though the recursive main loop gives the effect of a
+modal dialog (it prevents the user from interacting with other
+windows in the same window group while the dialog is run), callbacks
+such as timeouts, IO channel watches, DND drops, etc, <emphasis>will</emphasis>
+be triggered during a gtk_dialog_run() call.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="dialog">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkDialog
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> response ID
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_accel_group_new">
<description>
Creates a new #GtkAccelGroup.
@@ -661,25 +872,6 @@ to the slider.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_set_clickable">
-<description>
-Sets the header to be active if @active is %TRUE. When the header is active,
-then it can take keyboard focus, and can be clicked.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_column">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeViewColumn.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="clickable">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE if the header is active.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_icon_info_load_symbolic">
<description>
Loads an icon, modifying it to match the system colours for the foreground,
@@ -819,6 +1011,26 @@ The returned list must be freed with g_list_free ().
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_recent_chooser_set_select_multiple">
+<description>
+Sets whether @chooser can select multiple items.
+
+Since: 2.10
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="chooser">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentChooser
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="select_multiple">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE if @chooser can select more than one item
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_text_buffer_select_range">
<description>
This function moves the "insert" and "selection_bound" marks
@@ -849,22 +1061,59 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_recent_info_get_uri">
+<function name="gtk_widget_send_focus_change">
<description>
-Gets the URI of the resource.
+Sends the focus change @event to @widget
-Since: 2.10
+This function is not meant to be used by applications. The only time it
+should be used is when it is necessary for a #GtkWidget to assign focus
+to a widget that is semantically owned by the first widget even though
+it's not a direct child - for instance, a search entry in a floating
+window similar to the quick search in #GtkTreeView.
+
+An example of its usage is:
+
+|[
+GdkEvent *fevent = gdk_event_new (GDK_FOCUS_CHANGE);
+
+fevent->focus_change.type = GDK_FOCUS_CHANGE;
+fevent->focus_change.in = TRUE;
+fevent->focus_change.window = gtk_widget_get_window (widget);
+if (fevent->focus_change.window != NULL)
+g_object_ref (fevent->focus_change.window);
+
+gtk_widget_send_focus_change (widget, fevent);
+
+gdk_event_free (event);
+]|
+
+Since: 2.20
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="info">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentInfo
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="event">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkEvent of type GDK_FOCUS_CHANGE
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the URI of the resource. The returned string is
-owned by the recent manager, and should not be freed.
+<return> the return value from the event signal emission: %TRUE
+if the event was handled, and %FALSE otherwise
+
+</return>
+</function>
+<function name="gtk_image_menu_item_new">
+<description>
+Creates a new #GtkImageMenuItem with an empty label.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+</parameters>
+<return> a new #GtkImageMenuItem.
</return>
</function>
@@ -957,61 +1206,23 @@ Since: 2.12
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_paint_expander">
+<function name="gtk_about_dialog_get_website_label">
<description>
-Draws an expander as used in #GtkTreeView. @x and @y specify the
-center the expander. The size of the expander is determined by the
-"expander-size" style property of @widget. (If widget is not
-specified or doesn't have an "expander-size" property, an
-unspecified default size will be used, since the caller doesn't
-have sufficient information to position the expander, this is
-likely not useful.) The expander is expander_size pixels tall
-in the collapsed position and expander_size pixels wide in the
-expanded position.
+Returns the label used for the website link.
+
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="style">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="state_type">
-<parameter_description> a state
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="area">
-<parameter_description> clip rectangle, or %NULL if the
-output should not be clipped
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> the widget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="detail">
-<parameter_description> a style detail
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="x">
-<parameter_description> the x position to draw the expander at
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="y">
-<parameter_description> the y position to draw the expander at
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="expander_style">
-<parameter_description> the style to draw the expander in; determines
-whether the expander is collapsed, expanded, or in an
-intermediate state.
+<parameter name="about">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAboutDialog
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> The label used for the website link. The string is
+owned by the about dialog and must not be modified.
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_text_iter_inside_word">
@@ -1033,32 +1244,6 @@ correct fix would be to the Pango word break algorithms).
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_binding_entry_skip">
-<description>
-Install a binding on @binding_set which causes key lookups
-to be aborted, to prevent bindings from lower priority sets
-to be activated.
-
-Since: 2.12
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="binding_set">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkBindingSet to skip an entry of
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="keyval">
-<parameter_description> key value of binding to skip
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="modifiers">
-<parameter_description> key modifier of binding to skip
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_assistant_set_page_complete">
<description>
Sets whether @page contents are complete. This will make
@@ -1084,41 +1269,27 @@ Since: 2.10
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_cell_renderer_set_sensitive">
+<function name="gtk_tree_store_iter_is_valid">
<description>
-Sets the cell renderer's sensitivity.
+WARNING: This function is slow. Only use it for debugging and/or testing
+purposes.
-Since: 2.18
+Checks if the given iter is a valid iter for this #GtkTreeStore.
+
+Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="cell">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkCellRenderer
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="sensitive">
-<parameter_description> the sensitivity of the cell
+<parameter name="tree_store">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeStore.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_button_get_event_window">
-<description>
-Returns the button's event window if it is realized, %NULL otherwise.
-This function should be rarely needed.
-
-Since: 2.22
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="button">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkButton
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeIter.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> @button's event window.
+<return> %TRUE if the iter is valid, %FALSE if the iter is invalid.
</return>
</function>
@@ -1161,7 +1332,7 @@ inserted text.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="text">
-<parameter_description> UTF-8 format text to insert
+<parameter_description> text in UTF-8 format
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="len">
@@ -1344,6 +1515,38 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_application_set_action_group">
+<description>
+Set @group as this application's global action group.
+This will ensure the operating system interface uses
+these actions as follows:
+
+<itemizedlist>
+<listitem>In GNOME 2 this exposes the actions for scripting.</listitem>
+<listitem>In GNOME 3, this function populates the application menu.</listitem>
+<listitem>In Windows prior to version 7, this function does nothing.</listitem>
+<listitem>In Windows 7, this function adds "Tasks" to the Jump List.</listitem>
+<listitem>In Mac OS X, this function extends the Dock menu.</listitem>
+</itemizedlist>
+
+It is an error to call this function more than once.
+
+Since: 3.0
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="app">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkApplication
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="group">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkActionGroup
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_font_button_get_use_size">
<description>
Returns whether the selected size is used in the label.
@@ -1401,50 +1604,21 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_list_store_insert_before">
+<function name="gtk_print_context_get_width">
<description>
-Inserts a new row before @sibling. If @sibling is %NULL, then the row will
-be appended to the end of the list. @iter will be changed to point to this
-new row. The row will be empty after this function is called. To fill in
-values, you need to call gtk_list_store_set() or gtk_list_store_set_value().
+Obtains the width of the #GtkPrintContext, in pixels.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="list_store">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkListStore
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> An unset #GtkTreeIter to set to the new row
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="sibling">
-<parameter_description> A valid #GtkTreeIter, or %NULL
+<parameter name="context">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintContext
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_button_new_with_mnemonic">
-<description>
-Creates a new #GtkButton containing a label.
-If characters in @label are preceded by an underscore, they are underlined.
-If you need a literal underscore character in a label, use '__' (two
-underscores). The first underlined character represents a keyboard
-accelerator called a mnemonic.
-Pressing Alt and that key activates the button.
+<return> the width of @context
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="label">
-<parameter_description> The text of the button, with an underscore in front of the
-mnemonic character
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> a new #GtkButton
</return>
</function>
@@ -1463,30 +1637,6 @@ a widget to be mapped if it isn't already.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_info_get_builtin_pixbuf">
-<description>
-Gets the built-in image for this icon, if any. To allow
-GTK+ to use built in icon images, you must pass the
-%GTK_ICON_LOOKUP_USE_BUILTIN to
-gtk_icon_theme_lookup_icon().
-
-Since: 2.4
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="icon_info">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkIconInfo structure
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the built-in image pixbuf, or %NULL. No
-extra reference is added to the returned pixbuf, so if
-you want to keep it around, you must use g_object_ref().
-The returned image must not be modified.
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_menu_tool_button_new">
<description>
Creates a new #GtkMenuToolButton using @icon_widget as icon and
@@ -1510,20 +1660,31 @@ Since: 2.6
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_file_chooser_set_show_hidden">
+<function name="gtk_widget_modify_cursor">
<description>
-Sets whether hidden files and folders are displayed in the file selector.
+Sets the cursor color to use in a widget, overriding the
+#GtkWidget:cursor-color and #GtkWidget:secondary-cursor-color
+style properties. All other style values are left untouched.
+See also gtk_widget_modify_style().
-Since: 2.6
+Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="chooser">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="show_hidden">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE if hidden files and folders should be displayed.
+<parameter name="primary">
+<parameter_description> the color to use for primary cursor (does not need to be
+allocated), or %NULL to undo the effect of previous calls to
+of gtk_widget_modify_cursor().
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="secondary">
+<parameter_description> the color to use for secondary cursor (does not need to be
+allocated), or %NULL to undo the effect of previous calls to
+of gtk_widget_modify_cursor().
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -1585,19 +1746,23 @@ otherwise %FALSE.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_hide">
+<function name="gtk_tool_item_get_visible_vertical">
<description>
-Reverses the effects of gtk_widget_show(), causing the widget to be
-hidden (invisible to the user).
+Returns whether @tool_item is visible when the toolbar is docked vertically.
+See gtk_tool_item_set_visible_vertical().
+
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+<parameter name="tool_item">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItem
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> Whether @tool_item is visible when the toolbar is docked vertically
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_paper_size_new">
@@ -1702,47 +1867,78 @@ Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_container_set_focus_child">
+<function name="gtk_expander_set_spacing">
<description>
-Sets, or unsets if @child is %NULL, the focused child of @container.
+Sets the spacing field of @expander, which is the number of pixels to
+place between expander and the child.
-This function emits the GtkContainer::set_focus_child signal of
- container Implementations of #GtkContainer can override the
-default behaviour by overriding the class closure of this signal.
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="container">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkContainer
+<parameter name="expander">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkExpander
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="child">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget, or %NULL
+<parameter name="spacing">
+<parameter_description> distance between the expander and child in pixels.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_expander_set_spacing">
+<function name="gtk_recent_manager_lookup_item">
<description>
-Sets the spacing field of @expander, which is the number of pixels to
-place between expander and the child.
+Searches for a URI inside the recently used resources list, and
+returns a structure containing informations about the resource
+like its MIME type, or its display name.
-Since: 2.4
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="expander">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkExpander
+<parameter name="manager">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentManager
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="spacing">
-<parameter_description> distance between the expander and child in pixels.
+<parameter name="uri">
+<parameter_description> a URI
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="error">
+<parameter_description> a return location for a #GError, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> a #GtkRecentInfo structure containing information
+about the resource pointed by @uri, or %NULL if the URI was
+not registered in the recently used resources list. Free with
+gtk_recent_info_unref().
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_text_iter_forward_sentence_ends">
+<description>
+Calls gtk_text_iter_forward_sentence_end() @count times (or until
+gtk_text_iter_forward_sentence_end() returns %FALSE). If @count is
+negative, moves backward instead of forward.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="count">
+<parameter_description> number of sentences to move
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if @iter moved and is not the end iterator
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_icon_view_get_markup_column">
@@ -1869,6 +2065,30 @@ are both visible.
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_file_filter_get_needed">
+<description>
+Gets the fields that need to be filled in for the structure
+passed to gtk_file_filter_filter()
+
+This function will not typically be used by applications; it
+is intended principally for use in the implementation of
+#GtkFileChooser.
+
+Since: 2.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="filter">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFileFilter
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> bitfield of flags indicating needed fields when
+calling gtk_file_filter_filter()
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_text_iter_backward_visible_lines">
<description>
Moves @count visible lines backward, if possible (if @count would move
@@ -1897,20 +2117,27 @@ Since: 2.8
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_get_resizable">
+<function name="gtk_style_set_background">
<description>
-Returns %TRUE if the @tree_column can be resized by the end user.
-
+Sets the background of @window to the background color or pixmap
+specified by @style for the given state.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_column">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeViewColumn
+<parameter name="style">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="state_type">
+<parameter_description> a state
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE, if the @tree_column can be resized.
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_list_store_insert">
@@ -1940,96 +2167,83 @@ gtk_list_store_set() or gtk_list_store_set_value().
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tool_item_group_get_n_items">
+<function name="gtk_page_setup_get_page_height">
<description>
-Gets the number of tool items in @group.
+Returns the page height in units of @unit.
-Since: 2.20
+Note that this function takes orientation and
+margins into consideration.
+See gtk_page_setup_get_paper_height().
+
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="group">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItemGroup
+<parameter name="setup">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPageSetup
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="unit">
+<parameter_description> the unit for the return value
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the number of tool items in @group
+<return> the page height.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_test_find_widget">
+<function name="gtk_tool_item_group_get_n_items">
<description>
-This function will search the descendants of @widget for a widget
-of type @widget_type that has a label matching @label_pattern next
-to it. This is most useful for automated GUI testing, e.g. to find
-the "OK" button in a dialog and synthesize clicks on it.
-However see gtk_test_find_label(), gtk_test_find_sibling() and
-gtk_test_widget_click() for possible caveats involving the search of
-such widgets and synthesizing widget events.
+Gets the number of tool items in @group.
-Since: 2.14
+Since: 2.20
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> Container widget, usually a GtkWindow.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="label_pattern">
-<parameter_description> Shell-glob pattern to match a label string.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="widget_type">
-<parameter_description> Type of a aearched for label sibling widget.
+<parameter name="group">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItemGroup
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a valid widget if any is found or %NULL.
+<return> the number of tool items in @group
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_entry_buffer_new">
+<function name="gtk_button_get_relief">
<description>
-Create a new GtkEntryBuffer object.
+Returns the current relief style of the given #GtkButton.
-Optionally, specify initial text to set in the buffer.
-
-Since: 2.18
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="initial_chars">
-<parameter_description> initial buffer text, or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="n_initial_chars">
-<parameter_description> number of characters in @initial_chars, or -1
+<parameter name="button">
+<parameter_description> The #GtkButton you want the #GtkReliefStyle from.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> A new GtkEntryBuffer object.
-
+<return> The current #GtkReliefStyle
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_selection_data_get_target">
+<function name="gtk_color_selection_set_has_opacity_control">
<description>
-Retrieves the target of the selection.
+Sets the @colorsel to use or not use opacity.
-Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="selection_data">
-<parameter_description> a pointer to a #GtkSelectionData structure.
+<parameter name="colorsel">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkColorSelection.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="has_opacity">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE if @colorsel can set the opacity, %FALSE otherwise.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the target of the selection.
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_widget_unmap">
@@ -2149,16 +2363,36 @@ output should not be clipped
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_action_unblock_activate">
+<function name="gtk_list_store_set_valuesv">
<description>
-Reenable activation signals from the action
+A variant of gtk_list_store_set_valist() which
+takes the columns and values as two arrays, instead of
+varargs. This function is mainly intended for
+language-bindings and in case the number of columns to
+change is not known until run-time.
-Since: 2.16
+Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="action">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkAction
+<parameter name="list_store">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkListStore
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> A valid #GtkTreeIter for the row being modified
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="columns">
+<parameter_description> an array of column numbers
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="values">
+<parameter_description> an array of GValues
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="n_values">
+<parameter_description> the length of the @columns and @values arrays
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -2243,31 +2477,23 @@ using the "start-interactive-search" key binding.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_set_tooltip_window">
+<function name="gtk_icon_view_get_model">
<description>
-Replaces the default, usually yellow, window used for displaying
-tooltips with @custom_window. GTK+ will take care of showing and
-hiding @custom_window at the right moment, to behave likewise as
-the default tooltip window. If @custom_window is %NULL, the default
-tooltip window will be used.
-
-If the custom window should have the default theming it needs to
-have the name "gtk-tooltip", see gtk_widget_set_name().
+Returns the model the #GtkIconView is based on. Returns %NULL if the
+model is unset.
-Since: 2.12
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="custom_window">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow, or %NULL
+<parameter name="icon_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIconView
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> A #GtkTreeModel, or %NULL if none is currently being used.
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_rc_reparse_all_for_settings">
@@ -2347,46 +2573,47 @@ the model will sort using this function.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_notebook_get_menu_label">
+<function name="gtk_text_iter_forward_cursor_positions">
<description>
-Retrieves the menu label widget of the page containing @child.
+Moves up to @count cursor positions. See
+gtk_text_iter_forward_cursor_position() for details.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="notebook">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkNotebook
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="child">
-<parameter_description> a widget contained in a page of @notebook
+<parameter name="count">
+<parameter_description> number of positions to move
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the menu label, or %NULL if the
-notebook page does not have a menu label other
-than the default (the tab label).
+<return> %TRUE if we moved and the new position is dereferenceable
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_drag_source_add_image_targets">
+<function name="gtk_notebook_get_menu_label">
<description>
-Add the writable image targets supported by #GtkSelection to
-the target list of the drag source. The targets
-are added with @info = 0. If you need another value,
-use gtk_target_list_add_image_targets() and
-gtk_drag_source_set_target_list().
+Retrieves the menu label widget of the page containing @child.
-Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget that's is a drag source
+<parameter name="notebook">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkNotebook
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="child">
+<parameter_description> a widget contained in a page of @notebook
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the menu label, or %NULL if the
+notebook page does not have a menu label other
+than the default (the tab label).
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_expander_new_with_mnemonic">
@@ -2601,22 +2828,6 @@ used.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_color_selection_get_current_alpha">
-<description>
-Returns the current alpha value.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="colorsel">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkColorSelection.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> an integer between 0 and 65535.
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_window_get_default_icon_list">
<description>
Gets the value set by gtk_window_set_default_icon_list().
@@ -2725,33 +2936,6 @@ uneditable text).
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_settings_get_int_with_default">
-<description>
-Returns the value of @key, interpreted as
-an integer, or the default value.
-
-Since: 2.10
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="settings">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="key">
-<parameter_description> a key
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="def">
-<parameter_description> the default value
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the integer value of @key
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_text_iter_starts_word">
<description>
Determines whether @iter begins a natural-language word. Word
@@ -2806,6 +2990,30 @@ Sets the growth behavior of @tree_column to @type.
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_assistant_update_buttons_state">
+<description>
+Forces @assistant to recompute the buttons state.
+
+GTK+ automatically takes care of this in most situations,
+e.g. when the user goes to a different page, or when the
+visibility or completeness of a page changes.
+
+One situation where it can be necessary to call this
+function is when changing a value on the current page
+affects the future page flow of the assistant.
+
+Since: 2.10
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="assistant">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAssistant
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_drag_set_icon_widget">
<description>
Changes the icon for a widget to a given widget. GTK+
@@ -2872,36 +3080,38 @@ is %TRUE.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_accelerator_parse">
+<function name="gtk_print_context_get_hard_margins">
<description>
-Parses a string representing an accelerator. The
-format looks like "<Control>a" or "<Shift><Alt>F1" or
-"<Release>z" (the last one is for key release).
-The parser is fairly liberal and allows lower or upper case,
-and also abbreviations such as "<Ctl>" and "<Ctrl>".
-Key names are parsed using gdk_keyval_from_name(). For character keys the
-name is not the symbol, but the lowercase name, e.g. one would use
-"<Ctrl>minus" instead of "<Ctrl>-".
+Obtains the hardware printer margins of the #GtkPrintContext, in units.
-If the parse fails, @accelerator_key and @accelerator_mods will
-be set to 0 (zero).
+Since: 2.20
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="accelerator">
-<parameter_description> string representing an accelerator
+<parameter name="context">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintContext
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="accelerator_key">
-<parameter_description> return location for accelerator keyval
+<parameter name="top">
+<parameter_description> top hardware printer margin
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="accelerator_mods">
-<parameter_description> return location for accelerator modifier mask
+<parameter name="bottom">
+<parameter_description> bottom hardware printer margin
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="left">
+<parameter_description> left hardware printer margin
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="right">
+<parameter_description> right hardware printer margin
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if the hard margins were retrieved
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_widget_set_has_tooltip">
@@ -3072,6 +3282,29 @@ dragging the header.
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_paper_size_get_height">
+<description>
+Gets the paper height of the #GtkPaperSize, in
+units of @unit.
+
+Since: 2.10
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="size">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPaperSize object
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="unit">
+<parameter_description> the unit for the return value
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the paper height
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_entry_set_icon_sensitive">
<description>
Sets the sensitivity for the specified icon.
@@ -3140,24 +3373,6 @@ Since: 2.18
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tool_palette_get_hadjustment">
-<description>
-Gets the horizontal adjustment of the tool palette.
-
-Since: 2.20
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="palette">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolPalette
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the horizontal adjustment of @palette
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_icon_source_set_state">
<description>
Sets the widget state this icon source is intended to be used
@@ -3219,26 +3434,22 @@ Tags in the view's buffer may override the default.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_entry_layout_index_to_text_index">
+<function name="gtk_scale_button_get_adjustment">
<description>
-Converts from a position in the entry contents (returned
-by gtk_entry_get_text()) to a position in the
-entry's #PangoLayout (returned by gtk_entry_get_layout(),
-with text retrieved via pango_layout_get_text()).
+Gets the #GtkAdjustment associated with the #GtkScaleButton's scale.
+See gtk_range_get_adjustment() for details.
+Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="entry">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkEntry
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="layout_index">
-<parameter_description> byte index into the entry layout text
+<parameter name="button">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkScaleButton
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> byte index into the entry contents
+<return> the adjustment associated with the scale
+
</return>
</function>
@@ -3431,55 +3642,86 @@ Since: 2.14
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_convert_bin_window_to_widget_coords">
+<function name="gtk_wrap_box_get_minimum_line_children">
<description>
-Converts bin_window coordinates (see gtk_tree_view_get_bin_window())
-to widget relative coordinates.
+Gets the minimum amount of children per line.
-Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeView
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="bx">
-<parameter_description> bin_window X coordinate
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="by">
-<parameter_description> bin_window Y coordinate
+<parameter name="box">
+<parameter_description> An #GtkWrapBox
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="wx">
-<parameter_description> return location for widget X coordinate
+</parameters>
+<return> The minimum amount of children per line.
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_widget_get_has_window">
+<description>
+Determines whether @widget has a #GdkWindow of its own. See
+gtk_widget_set_has_window().
+
+Since: 2.18
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="wy">
-<parameter_description> return location for widget Y coordinate
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if @widget has a window, %FALSE otherwise
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_widget_get_child_visible">
+<description>
+Gets the value set with gtk_widget_set_child_visible().
+If you feel a need to use this function, your code probably
+needs reorganization.
+
+This function is only useful for container implementations and
+never should be called by an application.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if the widget is mapped with the parent.
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_selection_data_get_format">
+<function name="gtk_check_menu_item_set_inconsistent">
<description>
-Retrieves the format of the selection.
+If the user has selected a range of elements (such as some text or
+spreadsheet cells) that are affected by a boolean setting, and the
+current values in that range are inconsistent, you may want to
+display the check in an "in between" state. This function turns on
+"in between" display. Normally you would turn off the inconsistent
+state again if the user explicitly selects a setting. This has to be
+done manually, gtk_check_menu_item_set_inconsistent() only affects
+visual appearance, it doesn't affect the semantics of the widget.
-Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="selection_data">
-<parameter_description> a pointer to a #GtkSelectionData structure.
+<parameter name="check_menu_item">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkCheckMenuItem
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="setting">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE to display an "inconsistent" third state check
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the format of the selection.
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_adjustment_configure">
@@ -3556,19 +3798,31 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_set_ref">
+<function name="gtk_print_settings_to_file">
<description>
-Increments the reference count on @icon_set.
+This function saves the print settings from @settings to @file_name. If the
+file could not be loaded then error is set to either a #GFileError or
+#GKeyFileError.
+Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="icon_set">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkIconSet.
+<parameter name="settings">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="file_name">
+<parameter_description> the file to save to
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="error">
+<parameter_description> return location for errors, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> @icon_set.
+<return> %TRUE on success
+
</return>
</function>
@@ -3599,6 +3853,36 @@ Since: 2.20
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_icon_view_get_cursor">
+<description>
+Fills in @path and @cell with the current cursor path and cell.
+If the cursor isn't currently set, then * path will be %NULL.
+If no cell currently has focus, then * cell will be %NULL.
+
+The returned #GtkTreePath must be freed with gtk_tree_path_free().
+
+Since: 2.8
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="icon_view">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkIconView
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="path">
+<parameter_description> Return location for the current cursor path, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="cell">
+<parameter_description> Return location the current focus cell, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if the cursor is set.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_recent_info_get_mime_type">
<description>
Gets the MIME type of the resource.
@@ -3669,36 +3953,24 @@ indicates the mnemonic accelerator keys.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_layout_validate_yrange">
+<function name="gtk_progress_bar_get_text">
<description>
-Ensure that a region of a #GtkTextLayout is valid. The ::changed
-signal will be emitted if any lines are validated.
+Retrieves the text displayed superimposed on the progress bar,
+if any, otherwise %NULL. The return value is a reference
+to the text, not a copy of it, so will become invalid
+if you change the text in the progress bar.
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="layout">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextLayout
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="anchor">
-<parameter_description> iter pointing into a line that will be used as the
-coordinate origin
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="y0_">
-<parameter_description> offset from the top of the line pointed to by @anchor at
-which to begin validation. (The offset here is in pixels
-after validation.)
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="y1_">
-<parameter_description> offset from the top of the line pointed to by @anchor at
-which to end validation. (The offset here is in pixels
-after validation.)
+<parameter name="pbar">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkProgressBar
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> text, or %NULL; this string is owned by the widget
+and should not be modified or freed.
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_text_iter_get_line_offset">
@@ -3719,28 +3991,23 @@ The first character on the line has offset 0.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_target_list_find">
+<function name="gtk_radio_menu_item_new_with_label">
<description>
-Looks up a given target in a #GtkTargetList.
+Creates a new #GtkRadioMenuItem whose child is a simple #GtkLabel.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="list">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTargetList
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="target">
-<parameter_description> an interned atom representing the target to search for
+<parameter name="group">
+<parameter_description>
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="info">
-<parameter_description> a pointer to the location to store application info for target,
-or %NULL
+<parameter name="label">
+<parameter_description> the text for the label
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the target was found, otherwise %FALSE
+<return> A new #GtkRadioMenuItem
</return>
</function>
@@ -3782,112 +4049,35 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_about_dialog_set_wrap_license">
-<description>
-Sets whether the license text in @about is
-automatically wrapped.
-
-Since: 2.8
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="about">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkAboutDialog
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="wrap_license">
-<parameter_description> whether to wrap the license
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_window_set_default_size">
+<function name="gtk_widget_reset_shapes">
<description>
-Sets the default size of a window. If the window's "natural" size
-(its size request) is larger than the default, the default will be
-ignored. More generally, if the default size does not obey the
-geometry hints for the window (gtk_window_set_geometry_hints() can
-be used to set these explicitly), the default size will be clamped
-to the nearest permitted size.
-
-Unlike gtk_widget_set_size_request(), which sets a size request for
-a widget and thus would keep users from shrinking the window, this
-function only sets the initial size, just as if the user had
-resized the window themselves. Users can still shrink the window
-again as they normally would. Setting a default size of -1 means to
-use the "natural" default size (the size request of the window).
-
-For more control over a window's initial size and how resizing works,
-investigate gtk_window_set_geometry_hints().
-
-For some uses, gtk_window_resize() is a more appropriate function.
-gtk_window_resize() changes the current size of the window, rather
-than the size to be used on initial display. gtk_window_resize() always
-affects the window itself, not the geometry widget.
-
-The default size of a window only affects the first time a window is
-shown; if a window is hidden and re-shown, it will remember the size
-it had prior to hiding, rather than using the default size.
-
-Windows can't actually be 0x0 in size, they must be at least 1x1, but
-passing 0 for @width and @height is OK, resulting in a 1x1 default size.
+Recursively resets the shape on this widget and its descendants.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="width">
-<parameter_description> width in pixels, or -1 to unset the default width
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="height">
-<parameter_description> height in pixels, or -1 to unset the default height
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_action_group_add_radio_actions_full">
+<function name="gtk_about_dialog_set_wrap_license">
<description>
-This variant of gtk_action_group_add_radio_actions() adds a
-#GDestroyNotify callback for @user_data.
+Sets whether the license text in @about is
+automatically wrapped.
-Since: 2.4
+Since: 2.8
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="action_group">
-<parameter_description> the action group
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="entries">
-<parameter_description> an array of radio action descriptions
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="n_entries">
-<parameter_description> the number of entries
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="value">
-<parameter_description> the value of the action to activate initially, or -1 if
-no action should be activated
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="on_change">
-<parameter_description> the callback to connect to the changed signal
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="user_data">
-<parameter_description> data to pass to the action callbacks
+<parameter name="about">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAboutDialog
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="destroy">
-<parameter_description> destroy notification callback for @user_data
+<parameter name="wrap_license">
+<parameter_description> whether to wrap the license
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -3930,23 +4120,6 @@ Gets the type hint for this window. See gtk_window_set_type_hint().
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_get_widget">
-<description>
-Returns the #GtkWidget in the button on the column header. If a custom
-widget has not been set then %NULL is returned.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_column">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeViewColumn.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> The #GtkWidget in the column header, or %NULL
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_paper_size_new_custom">
<description>
Creates a new #GtkPaperSize object with the
@@ -4003,6 +4176,27 @@ a notification area.
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_status_icon_new_from_stock">
+<description>
+Creates a status icon displaying a stock icon. Sample stock icon
+names are #GTK_STOCK_OPEN, #GTK_STOCK_QUIT. You can register your
+own stock icon names, see gtk_icon_factory_add_default() and
+gtk_icon_factory_add().
+
+Since: 2.10
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="stock_id">
+<parameter_description> a stock icon id
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> a new #GtkStatusIcon
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_cell_renderer_text_set_fixed_height_from_font">
<description>
Sets the height of a renderer to explicitly be determined by the "font" and
@@ -4027,35 +4221,33 @@ the height is determined by the properties again.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_drag_dest_find_target">
+<function name="gtk_text_buffer_get_iter_at_line_index">
<description>
-Looks for a match between @context->targets and the
- dest_target_list, returning the first matching target, otherwise
-returning %GDK_NONE. @dest_target_list should usually be the return
-value from gtk_drag_dest_get_target_list(), but some widgets may
-have different valid targets for different parts of the widget; in
-that case, they will have to implement a drag_motion handler that
-passes the correct target list to this function.
-
+Obtains an iterator pointing to @byte_index within the given line.
+ byte_index must be the start of a UTF-8 character, and must not be
+beyond the end of the line. Note <emphasis>bytes</emphasis>, not
+characters; UTF-8 may encode one character as multiple bytes.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> drag destination widget
+<parameter name="buffer">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextBuffer
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="context">
-<parameter_description> drag context
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> iterator to initialize
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="target_list">
-<parameter_description> list of droppable targets, or %NULL to use
-gtk_drag_dest_get_target_list (@widget).
+<parameter name="line_number">
+<parameter_description> line number counting from 0
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="byte_index">
+<parameter_description> byte index from start of line
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> first target that the source offers and the dest can accept, or %GDK_NONE
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_entry_set_has_frame">
@@ -4076,60 +4268,47 @@ Sets whether the entry has a beveled frame around it.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_dialog_run">
+<function name="gtk_color_button_set_alpha">
<description>
-Blocks in a recursive main loop until the @dialog either emits the
-#GtkDialog::response signal, or is destroyed. If the dialog is
-destroyed during the call to gtk_dialog_run(), gtk_dialog_run() returns
-#GTK_RESPONSE_NONE. Otherwise, it returns the response ID from the
-::response signal emission.
-
-Before entering the recursive main loop, gtk_dialog_run() calls
-gtk_widget_show() on the dialog for you. Note that you still
-need to show any children of the dialog yourself.
-
-During gtk_dialog_run(), the default behavior of #GtkWidget::delete-event
-is disabled; if the dialog receives ::delete_event, it will not be
-destroyed as windows usually are, and gtk_dialog_run() will return
-#GTK_RESPONSE_DELETE_EVENT. Also, during gtk_dialog_run() the dialog
-will be modal. You can force gtk_dialog_run() to return at any time by
-calling gtk_dialog_response() to emit the ::response signal. Destroying
-the dialog during gtk_dialog_run() is a very bad idea, because your
-post-run code won't know whether the dialog was destroyed or not.
+Sets the current opacity to be @alpha.
-After gtk_dialog_run() returns, you are responsible for hiding or
-destroying the dialog if you wish to do so.
+Since: 2.4
-Typical usage of this function might be:
-|[
-gint result = gtk_dialog_run (GTK_DIALOG (dialog));
-switch (result)
-{
-case GTK_RESPONSE_ACCEPT:
-do_application_specific_something ();
-break;
-default:
-do_nothing_since_dialog_was_cancelled ();
-break;
-}
-gtk_widget_destroy (dialog);
-]|
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="color_button">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkColorButton.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="alpha">
+<parameter_description> an integer between 0 and 65535.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
-Note that even though the recursive main loop gives the effect of a
-modal dialog (it prevents the user from interacting with other
-windows in the same window group while the dialog is run), callbacks
-such as timeouts, IO channel watches, DND drops, etc, <emphasis>will</emphasis>
-be triggered during a gtk_dialog_run() call.
+<function name="gtk_window_is_active">
+<description>
+Returns whether the window is part of the current active toplevel.
+(That is, the toplevel window receiving keystrokes.)
+The return value is %TRUE if the window is active toplevel
+itself, but also if it is, say, a #GtkPlug embedded in the active toplevel.
+You might use this function if you wanted to draw a widget
+differently in an active window from a widget in an inactive window.
+See gtk_window_has_toplevel_focus()
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="dialog">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkDialog
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> response ID
+<return> %TRUE if the window part of the current active window.
+
</return>
</function>
@@ -4150,49 +4329,44 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_spin_button_set_adjustment">
+<function name="gtk_arrow_set">
<description>
-Replaces the #GtkAdjustment associated with @spin_button.
+Sets the direction and style of the #GtkArrow, @arrow.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="spin_button">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkSpinButton
+<parameter name="arrow">
+<parameter_description> a widget of type #GtkArrow.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="adjustment">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkAdjustment to replace the existing adjustment
+<parameter name="arrow_type">
+<parameter_description> a valid #GtkArrowType.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="shadow_type">
+<parameter_description> a valid #GtkShadowType.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_container_forall">
+<function name="gtk_print_settings_get_resolution">
<description>
-Invokes @callback on each child of @container, including children
-that are considered "internal" (implementation details of the
-container). "Internal" children generally weren't added by the user
-of the container, but were added by the container implementation
-itself. Most applications should use gtk_container_foreach(),
-rather than gtk_container_forall().
+Gets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_RESOLUTION.
+
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="container">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkContainer
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="callback">
-<parameter_description> a callback
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="callback_data">
-<parameter_description> callback user data
+<parameter name="settings">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the resolution in dpi
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_text_buffer_get_slice">
@@ -4256,26 +4430,6 @@ in #GtkEntry, or 0 if there is no maximum.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_action_set_visible_horizontal">
-<description>
-Sets whether @action is visible when horizontal
-
-Since: 2.16
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="action">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkAction
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="visible_horizontal">
-<parameter_description> whether the action is visible horizontally
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_combo_box_entry_set_text_column">
<description>
Sets the model column which @entry_box should use to get strings from
@@ -4600,37 +4754,31 @@ Since: 3.0
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_settings_load_key_file">
+<function name="gtk_container_child_set_valist">
<description>
-Reads the print settings from the group @group_name in @key_file. If the
-file could not be loaded then error is set to either a #GFileError or
-#GKeyFileError.
-
-Since: 2.14
+Sets one or more child properties for @child and @container.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="settings">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
+<parameter name="container">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkContainer
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="key_file">
-<parameter_description> the #GKeyFile to retrieve the settings from
+<parameter name="child">
+<parameter_description> a widget which is a child of @container
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="group_name">
-<parameter_description> the name of the group to use, or %NULL to use the default
-"Print Settings"
+<parameter name="first_property_name">
+<parameter_description> the name of the first property to set
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="error">
-<parameter_description> return location for errors, or %NULL
+<parameter name="var_args">
+<parameter_description> a %NULL-terminated list of property names and values, starting
+with @first_prop_name
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE on success
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_notebook_set_tab_pos">
@@ -4755,26 +4903,6 @@ See gtk_text_buffer_move_mark() for details.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_file_chooser_button_set_title">
-<description>
-Modifies the @title of the browse dialog used by @button.
-
-Since: 2.6
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="button">
-<parameter_description> the button widget to modify.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="title">
-<parameter_description> the new browse dialog title.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_icon_theme_new">
<description>
Creates a new icon theme object. Icon theme objects are used
@@ -5116,6 +5244,29 @@ Since: 2.6
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_icon_view_set_markup_column">
+<description>
+Sets the column with markup information for @icon_view to be
+ column The markup column must be of type #G_TYPE_STRING.
+If the markup column is set to something, it overrides
+the text column set by gtk_icon_view_set_text_column().
+
+Since: 2.6
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="icon_view">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkIconView.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="column">
+<parameter_description> A column in the currently used model, or -1 to display no text
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_text_buffer_remove_selection_clipboard">
<description>
Removes a #GtkClipboard added with
@@ -5197,32 +5348,6 @@ and position to their child widgets.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_store_prepend">
-<description>
-Prepends a new row to @tree_store. If @parent is non-%NULL, then it will prepend
-the new row before the first child of @parent, otherwise it will prepend a row
-to the top level. @iter will be changed to point to this new row. The row
-will be empty after this function is called. To fill in values, you need to
-call gtk_tree_store_set() or gtk_tree_store_set_value().
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_store">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeStore
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> An unset #GtkTreeIter to set to the prepended row
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="parent">
-<parameter_description> A valid #GtkTreeIter, or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_toggle_action_set_draw_as_radio">
<description>
Sets whether the action should have proxies like a radio action.
@@ -5327,100 +5452,135 @@ Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_window_get_icon_list">
+<function name="gtk_text_iter_backward_lines">
<description>
-Retrieves the list of icons set by gtk_window_set_icon_list().
-The list is copied, but the reference count on each
-member won't be incremented.
+Moves @count lines backward, if possible (if @count would move
+past the start or end of the buffer, moves to the start or end of
+the buffer). The return value indicates whether the iterator moved
+onto a dereferenceable position; if the iterator didn't move, or
+moved onto the end iterator, then %FALSE is returned. If @count is 0,
+the function does nothing and returns %FALSE. If @count is negative,
+moves forward by 0 - @count lines.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="count">
+<parameter_description> number of lines to move backward
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> copy of window's icon list
+<return> whether @iter moved and is dereferenceable
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_show_about_dialog">
+<function name="gtk_tool_item_group_get_ellipsize">
<description>
-This is a convenience function for showing an application's about box.
-The constructed dialog is associated with the parent window and
-reused for future invocations of this function.
+Gets the ellipsization mode of @group.
-Since: 2.6
+Since: 2.20
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="parent">
-<parameter_description> transient parent, or %NULL for none
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="first_property_name">
-<parameter_description> the name of the first property
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="Varargs">
-<parameter_description> value of first property, followed by more properties, %NULL-terminated
+<parameter name="group">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItemGroup
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the #PangoEllipsizeMode of @group
+
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_selection_unselect_range">
+<function name="gtk_page_setup_load_key_file">
<description>
-Unselects a range of nodes, determined by @start_path and @end_path
-inclusive.
+Reads the page setup from the group @group_name in the key file
+ key_file
-Since: 2.2
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="selection">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeSelection.
+<parameter name="setup">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPageSetup
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="start_path">
-<parameter_description> The initial node of the range.
+<parameter name="key_file">
+<parameter_description> the #GKeyFile to retrieve the page_setup from
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="end_path">
-<parameter_description> The initial node of the range.
+<parameter name="group_name">
+<parameter_description> the name of the group in the key_file to read, or %NULL
+to use the default name "Page Setup"
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="error">
+<parameter_description> return location for an error, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE on success
+
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_rc_parse_color">
+<function name="gtk_widget_send_expose">
<description>
-Parses a color in the <link linkend="color=format">format</link> expected
-in a RC file.
+Very rarely-used function. This function is used to emit
+an expose event signals on a widget. This function is not
+normally used directly. The only time it is used is when
+propagating an expose event to a child %NO_WINDOW widget, and
+that is normally done using gtk_container_propagate_expose().
-Note that theme engines should use gtk_rc_parse_color_full() in
-order to support symbolic colors.
+If you want to force an area of a window to be redrawn,
+use gdk_window_invalidate_rect() or gdk_window_invalidate_region().
+To cause the redraw to be done immediately, follow that call
+with a call to gdk_window_process_updates().
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="scanner">
-<parameter_description> a #GScanner
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="color">
-<parameter_description> a pointer to a #GdkColor structure in which to store the result
+<parameter name="event">
+<parameter_description> a expose #GdkEvent
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %G_TOKEN_NONE if parsing succeeded, otherwise the token
-that was expected but not found
+<return> return from the event signal emission (%TRUE if
+the event was handled)
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_button_set_image">
+<description>
+Set the image of @button to the given widget. Note that
+it depends on the #GtkSettings:gtk-button-images setting whether the
+image will be displayed or not, you don't have to call
+gtk_widget_show() on @image yourself.
+
+Since: 2.6
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="button">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkButton
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="image">
+<parameter_description> a widget to set as the image for the button
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_tree_view_get_grid_lines">
<description>
Returns which grid lines are enabled in @tree_view.
@@ -5479,6 +5639,23 @@ Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_handle_box_get_handle_position">
+<description>
+Gets the handle position of the handle box. See
+gtk_handle_box_set_handle_position().
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="handle_box">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkHandleBox
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the current handle position.
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_print_operation_set_embed_page_setup">
<description>
Embed page size combo box and orientation combo box into page setup page.
@@ -5579,6 +5756,25 @@ Since: 2.6
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_tree_row_reference_inserted">
+<description>
+Lets a set of row reference created by gtk_tree_row_reference_new_proxy()
+know that the model emitted the "row_inserted" signal.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="proxy">
+<parameter_description> A #GObject
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="path">
+<parameter_description> The row position that was inserted
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_dialog_add_buttons">
<description>
Adds more buttons, same as calling gtk_dialog_add_button()
@@ -5676,6 +5872,25 @@ GDK_TYPE_PIXBUF);</literal> will create a new #GtkTreeStore with three col
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_selection_data_get_text">
+<description>
+Gets the contents of the selection data as a UTF-8 string.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="selection_data">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkSelectionData
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> if the selection data contained a recognized
+text type and it could be converted to UTF-8, a newly allocated
+string containing the converted text, otherwise %NULL.
+If the result is non-%NULL it must be freed with g_free().
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_clipboard_get_owner">
<description>
If the clipboard contents callbacks were set with
@@ -5923,30 +6138,22 @@ Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_rc_find_pixmap_in_path">
+<function name="gtk_tool_item_group_get_label_widget">
<description>
-Looks up a file in pixmap path for the specified #GtkSettings.
-If the file is not found, it outputs a warning message using
-g_warning() and returns %NULL.
+Gets the label widget of @group.
+See gtk_tool_item_group_set_label_widget().
+Since: 2.20
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="settings">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkSettings
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="scanner">
-<parameter_description> Scanner used to get line number information for the
-warning message, or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="pixmap_file">
-<parameter_description> name of the pixmap file to locate.
+<parameter name="group">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItemGroup
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the filename.
+<return> the label widget of @group
+
</return>
</function>
@@ -5968,55 +6175,39 @@ Since: 2.6
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_page_setup_load_file">
+<function name="gtk_tool_palette_unset_style">
<description>
-Reads the page setup from the file @file_name.
-See gtk_page_setup_to_file().
+Unsets a toolbar style set with gtk_tool_palette_set_style(),
+so that user preferences will be used to determine the toolbar style.
-Since: 2.14
+Since: 2.20
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="setup">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPageSetup
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="file_name">
-<parameter_description> the filename to read the page setup from
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="error">
-<parameter_description> return location for an error, or %NULL
+<parameter name="palette">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolPalette
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE on success
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_cell_renderer_set_alignment">
+<function name="gtk_action_get_is_important">
<description>
-Sets the renderer's alignment within its available space.
+Checks whether @action is important or not
-Since: 2.18
+Since: 2.16
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="cell">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkCellRenderer
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="xalign">
-<parameter_description> the x alignment of the cell renderer
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="yalign">
-<parameter_description> the y alignment of the cell renderer
+<parameter name="action">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAction
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> whether @action is important
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_status_icon_get_screen">
@@ -6037,119 +6228,73 @@ Since: 2.12
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_paint_box_gap">
+<function name="gtk_page_setup_new_from_key_file">
<description>
-Draws a box in @window using the given style and state and shadow type,
-leaving a gap in one side.
+Reads the page setup from the group @group_name in the key file
+ key_file Returns a new #GtkPageSetup object with the restored
+page setup, or %NULL if an error occurred.
+
+Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="style">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="state_type">
-<parameter_description> a state
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="shadow_type">
-<parameter_description> type of shadow to draw
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="area">
-<parameter_description> clip rectangle, or %NULL if the
-output should not be clipped
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> the widget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="detail">
-<parameter_description> a style detail
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="x">
-<parameter_description> x origin of the rectangle
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="y">
-<parameter_description> y origin of the rectangle
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="width">
-<parameter_description> width of the rectangle
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="height">
-<parameter_description> width of the rectangle
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="gap_side">
-<parameter_description> side in which to leave the gap
+<parameter name="key_file">
+<parameter_description> the #GKeyFile to retrieve the page_setup from
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="gap_x">
-<parameter_description> starting position of the gap
+<parameter name="group_name">
+<parameter_description> the name of the group in the key_file to read, or %NULL
+to use the default name "Page Setup"
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="gap_width">
-<parameter_description> width of the gap
+<parameter name="error">
+<parameter_description> return location for an error, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the restored #GtkPageSetup
+
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_drag_dest_add_text_targets">
+<function name="gtk_icon_source_set_size">
<description>
-Add the text targets supported by #GtkSelection to
-the target list of the drag destination. The targets
-are added with @info = 0. If you need another value,
-use gtk_target_list_add_text_targets() and
-gtk_drag_dest_set_target_list().
+Sets the icon size this icon source is intended to be used
+with.
-Since: 2.6
+Setting the icon size on an icon source makes no difference
+if the size is wildcarded. Therefore, you should usually
+call gtk_icon_source_set_size_wildcarded() to un-wildcard it
+in addition to calling this function.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget that's a drag destination
+<parameter name="source">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIconSource
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="size">
+<parameter_description> icon size this source applies to
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_entry_completion_set_text_column">
+<function name="gtk_viewport_get_hadjustment">
<description>
-Convenience function for setting up the most used case of this code: a
-completion list with just strings. This function will set up @completion
-to have a list displaying all (and just) strings in the completion list,
-and to get those strings from @column in the model of @completion.
-
-This functions creates and adds a #GtkCellRendererText for the selected
-column. If you need to set the text column, but don't want the cell
-renderer, use g_object_set() to set the ::text_column property directly.
+Returns the horizontal adjustment of the viewport.
-Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="completion">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkEntryCompletion.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="column">
-<parameter_description> The column in the model of @completion to get strings from.
+<parameter name="viewport">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkViewport.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the horizontal adjustment of @viewport.
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_status_icon_new_from_file">
@@ -6215,47 +6360,21 @@ the @assistant, if the @assistant has no pages, -1 will be returned
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_send_focus_change">
+<function name="gtk_recent_info_get_uri">
<description>
-Sends the focus change @event to @widget
-
-This function is not meant to be used by applications. The only time it
-should be used is when it is necessary for a #GtkWidget to assign focus
-to a widget that is semantically owned by the first widget even though
-it's not a direct child - for instance, a search entry in a floating
-window similar to the quick search in #GtkTreeView.
-
-An example of its usage is:
-
-|[
-GdkEvent *fevent = gdk_event_new (GDK_FOCUS_CHANGE);
-
-fevent->focus_change.type = GDK_FOCUS_CHANGE;
-fevent->focus_change.in = TRUE;
-fevent->focus_change.window = gtk_widget_get_window (widget);
-if (fevent->focus_change.window != NULL)
-g_object_ref (fevent->focus_change.window);
-
-gtk_widget_send_focus_change (widget, fevent);
-
-gdk_event_free (event);
-]|
+Gets the URI of the resource.
-Since: 2.20
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="event">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkEvent of type GDK_FOCUS_CHANGE
+<parameter name="info">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentInfo
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the return value from the event signal emission: %TRUE
-if the event was handled, and %FALSE otherwise
+<return> the URI of the resource. The returned string is
+owned by the recent manager, and should not be freed.
</return>
</function>
@@ -6303,22 +6422,6 @@ free the list itself using g_list_free().
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_cell_renderer_toggle_get_radio">
-<description>
-Returns whether we're rendering radio toggles rather than checkboxes.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="toggle">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkCellRendererToggle
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if we're rendering radio toggles rather than checkboxes
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_style_attach">
<description>
Attaches a style to a window; this process allocates the
@@ -6350,45 +6453,42 @@ a reference count belonging to the caller.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_model_filter_new">
+<function name="gtk_button_new_with_label">
<description>
-Creates a new #GtkTreeModel, with @child_model as the child_model
-and @root as the virtual root.
+Creates a #GtkButton widget with a #GtkLabel child containing the given
+text.
-Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="child_model">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeModel.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="root">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreePath or %NULL.
+<parameter name="label">
+<parameter_description> The text you want the #GtkLabel to hold.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> A new #GtkTreeModel.
-
+<return> The newly created #GtkButton widget.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_printer_is_paused">
+<function name="gtk_tree_model_filter_new">
<description>
-Returns whether the printer is currently paused.
-A paused printer still accepts jobs, but it is not
-printing them.
+Creates a new #GtkTreeModel, with @child_model as the child_model
+and @root as the virtual root.
-Since: 2.14
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="printer">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrinter
+<parameter name="child_model">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeModel.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="root">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreePath or %NULL.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if @printer is paused
+<return> A new #GtkTreeModel.
</return>
</function>
@@ -6414,72 +6514,96 @@ Since: 2.14
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_notebook_insert_page">
+<function name="gtk_text_iter_forward_to_tag_toggle">
<description>
-Insert a page into @notebook at the given position.
+Moves forward to the next toggle (on or off) of the
+#GtkTextTag @tag, or to the next toggle of any tag if
+ tag is %NULL. If no matching tag toggles are found,
+returns %FALSE, otherwise %TRUE. Does not return toggles
+located at @iter, only toggles after @iter. Sets @iter to
+the location of the toggle, or to the end of the buffer
+if no toggle is found.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="notebook">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkNotebook
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="child">
-<parameter_description> the #GtkWidget to use as the contents of the page.
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="tab_label">
-<parameter_description> the #GtkWidget to be used as the label for the page,
-or %NULL to use the default label, 'page N'.
+<parameter name="tag">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextTag, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="position">
-<parameter_description> the index (starting at 0) at which to insert the page,
-or -1 to append the page after all other pages.
+</parameters>
+<return> whether we found a tag toggle after @iter
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_icon_factory_lookup_default">
+<description>
+Looks for an icon in the list of default icon factories. For
+display to the user, you should use gtk_style_lookup_icon_set() on
+the #GtkStyle for the widget that will display the icon, instead of
+using this function directly, so that themes are taken into
+account.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="stock_id">
+<parameter_description> an icon name
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the index (starting from 0) of the inserted
-page in the notebook, or -1 if function fails
+<return> a #GtkIconSet, or %NULL
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_style_get_property">
+<function name="gtk_cell_size_request_get_width">
<description>
-Gets the value of a style property of @widget.
+Retreives a renderer's natural size when rendered to @widget.
+
+Since: 3.0
</description>
<parameters>
+<parameter name="cell">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkCellSizeRequest instance
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+<parameter_description> the #GtkWidget this cell will be rendering to
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="property_name">
-<parameter_description> the name of a style property
+<parameter name="minimum_size">
+<parameter_description> location to store the minimum size, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="value">
-<parameter_description> location to return the property value
+<parameter name="natural_size">
+<parameter_description> location to store the natural size, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_row_reference_inserted">
+<function name="gtk_button_set_relief">
<description>
-Lets a set of row reference created by gtk_tree_row_reference_new_proxy()
-know that the model emitted the "row_inserted" signal.
+Sets the relief style of the edges of the given #GtkButton widget.
+Three styles exist, GTK_RELIEF_NORMAL, GTK_RELIEF_HALF, GTK_RELIEF_NONE.
+The default style is, as one can guess, GTK_RELIEF_NORMAL.
+
+<!-- FIXME: put pictures of each style -->
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="proxy">
-<parameter_description> A #GObject
+<parameter name="button">
+<parameter_description> The #GtkButton you want to set relief styles of.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="path">
-<parameter_description> The row position that was inserted
+<parameter name="newstyle">
+<parameter_description> The GtkReliefStyle as described above.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -6674,18 +6798,47 @@ gtk_binding_entry_add_signal() on @binding_set.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tool_palette_get_drag_target_group">
+<function name="gtk_accel_map_add_filter">
<description>
-Get the target entry for a dragged #GtkToolItemGroup.
+Adds a filter to the global list of accel path filters.
-Since: 2.20
+Accel map entries whose accel path matches one of the filters
+are skipped by gtk_accel_map_foreach().
+
+This function is intended for GTK+ modules that create their own
+menus, but don't want them to be saved into the applications accelerator
+map dump.
</description>
<parameters>
+<parameter name="filter_pattern">
+<parameter_description> a pattern (see #GPatternSpec)
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the #GtkTargetEntry for a dragged group
+<return></return>
+</function>
-</return>
+<function name="gtk_cell_view_set_model">
+<description>
+Sets the model for @cell_view. If @cell_view already has a model
+set, it will remove it before setting the new model. If @model is
+%NULL, then it will unset the old model.
+
+Since: 2.6
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="cell_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkCellView
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="model">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeModel
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_viewport_get_view_window">
@@ -6793,29 +6946,20 @@ Since: 3.0
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_scrolled_window_set_policy">
+<function name="gtk_action_set_short_label">
<description>
-Sets the scrollbar policy for the horizontal and vertical scrollbars.
+Sets a shorter label text on @action.
-The policy determines when the scrollbar should appear; it is a value
-from the #GtkPolicyType enumeration. If %GTK_POLICY_ALWAYS, the
-scrollbar is always present; if %GTK_POLICY_NEVER, the scrollbar is
-never present; if %GTK_POLICY_AUTOMATIC, the scrollbar is present only
-if needed (that is, if the slider part of the bar would be smaller
-than the trough - the display is larger than the page size).
+Since: 2.16
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="scrolled_window">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkScrolledWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="hscrollbar_policy">
-<parameter_description> policy for horizontal bar
+<parameter name="action">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAction
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="vscrollbar_policy">
-<parameter_description> policy for vertical bar
+<parameter name="short_label">
+<parameter_description> the label text to set
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -6865,31 +7009,6 @@ Since: 2.14
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_info_get_filename">
-<description>
-Gets the filename for the icon. If the
-%GTK_ICON_LOOKUP_USE_BUILTIN flag was passed
-to gtk_icon_theme_lookup_icon(), there may be
-no filename if a builtin icon is returned; in this
-case, you should use gtk_icon_info_get_builtin_pixbuf().
-
-Since: 2.4
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="icon_info">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkIconInfo
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the filename for the icon, or %NULL
-if gtk_icon_info_get_builtin_pixbuf() should
-be used instead. The return value is owned by
-GTK+ and should not be modified or freed.
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_widget_class_find_style_property">
<description>
Finds a style property of a widget class by name.
@@ -6912,51 +7031,6 @@ style property with that name.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_layout_get_line_yrange">
-<description>
-Find the range of y coordinates for the paragraph containing
-the given iter.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="layout">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextLayout
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="y">
-<parameter_description> location to store the top of the paragraph in pixels,
-or %NULL.
- height location to store the height of the paragraph in pixels,
-or %NULL.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_combo_box_popup">
-<description>
-Pops up the menu or dropdown list of @combo_box.
-
-This function is mostly intended for use by accessibility technologies;
-applications should have little use for it.
-
-Since: 2.4
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="combo_box">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkComboBox
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_text_mark_get_deleted">
<description>
Returns %TRUE if the mark has been removed from its buffer
@@ -7004,23 +7078,61 @@ Creates a new #GtkStatusbar ready for messages.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_about_dialog_get_website_label">
+<function name="gtk_paint_expander">
<description>
-Returns the label used for the website link.
-
-Since: 2.6
+Draws an expander as used in #GtkTreeView. @x and @y specify the
+center the expander. The size of the expander is determined by the
+"expander-size" style property of @widget. (If widget is not
+specified or doesn't have an "expander-size" property, an
+unspecified default size will be used, since the caller doesn't
+have sufficient information to position the expander, this is
+likely not useful.) The expander is expander_size pixels tall
+in the collapsed position and expander_size pixels wide in the
+expanded position.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="about">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkAboutDialog
+<parameter name="style">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="state_type">
+<parameter_description> a state
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="area">
+<parameter_description> clip rectangle, or %NULL if the
+output should not be clipped
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> the widget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="detail">
+<parameter_description> a style detail
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="x">
+<parameter_description> the x position to draw the expander at
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="y">
+<parameter_description> the y position to draw the expander at
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="expander_style">
+<parameter_description> the style to draw the expander in; determines
+whether the expander is collapsed, expanded, or in an
+intermediate state.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> The label used for the website link. The string is
-owned by the about dialog and must not be modified.
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_text_view_buffer_to_window_coords">
@@ -7061,25 +7173,70 @@ gtk_text_view_set_border_window_size()).
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_paper_size_get_height">
+<function name="gtk_cell_size_request_get_width_for_height">
<description>
-Gets the paper height of the #GtkPaperSize, in
-units of @unit.
+Retreives a cell renderers's minimum and natural width if it were rendered to
+ widget with the specified @height.
-Since: 2.10
+Since: 3.0
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="size">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPaperSize object
+<parameter name="cell">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkCellSizeRequest instance
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="unit">
-<parameter_description> the unit for the return value
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkWidget this cell will be rendering to
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="height">
+<parameter_description> the size which is available for allocation
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="minimum_width">
+<parameter_description> location for storing the minimum size, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="natural_width">
+<parameter_description> location for storing the preferred size, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the paper height
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_icon_view_unset_model_drag_dest">
+<description>
+Undoes the effect of gtk_icon_view_enable_model_drag_dest(). Calling this
+method sets #GtkIconView:reorderable to %FALSE.
+
+Since: 2.8
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="icon_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIconView
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_printer_is_default">
+<description>
+Returns whether the printer is the default printer.
+
+Since: 2.10
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="printer">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrinter
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if @printer is the default
</return>
</function>
@@ -7235,47 +7392,58 @@ Since: 2.18
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_model_sort_clear_cache">
+<function name="gtk_window_get_frame_dimensions">
<description>
-This function should almost never be called. It clears the @tree_model_sort
-of any cached iterators that haven't been reffed with
-gtk_tree_model_ref_node(). This might be useful if the child model being
-sorted is static (and doesn't change often) and there has been a lot of
-unreffed access to nodes. As a side effect of this function, all unreffed
-iters will be invalid.
+(Note: this is a special-purpose function intended for the
+framebuffer port; see gtk_window_set_has_frame(). It will not
+return the size of the window border drawn by the <link
+linkend="gtk-X11-arch">window manager</link>, which is the normal
+case when using a windowing system. See
+gdk_window_get_frame_extents() to get the standard window border
+extents.)
+
+Retrieves the dimensions of the frame window for this toplevel.
+See gtk_window_set_has_frame(), gtk_window_set_frame_dimensions().
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_model_sort">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeModelSort
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="left">
+<parameter_description> location to store the width of the frame at the left, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="top">
+<parameter_description> location to store the height of the frame at the top, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="right">
+<parameter_description> location to store the width of the frame at the returns, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="bottom">
+<parameter_description> location to store the height of the frame at the bottom, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_container_set_border_width">
+<function name="gtk_tree_model_sort_clear_cache">
<description>
-Sets the border width of the container.
-
-The border width of a container is the amount of space to leave
-around the outside of the container. The only exception to this is
-#GtkWindow; because toplevel windows can't leave space outside,
-they leave the space inside. The border is added on all sides of
-the container. To add space to only one side, one approach is to
-create a #GtkAlignment widget, call gtk_widget_set_size_request()
-to give it a size, and place it on the side of the container as
-a spacer.
+This function should almost never be called. It clears the @tree_model_sort
+of any cached iterators that haven't been reffed with
+gtk_tree_model_ref_node(). This might be useful if the child model being
+sorted is static (and doesn't change often) and there has been a lot of
+unreffed access to nodes. As a side effect of this function, all unreffed
+iters will be invalid.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="container">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkContainer
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="border_width">
-<parameter_description> amount of blank space to leave <emphasis>outside</emphasis>
-the container. Valid values are in the range 0-65535 pixels.
+<parameter name="tree_model_sort">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeModelSort
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -7387,46 +7555,42 @@ Since: 2.16
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_container_set_focus_chain">
+<function name="gtk_tool_item_set_homogeneous">
<description>
-Sets a focus chain, overriding the one computed automatically by GTK+.
+Sets whether @tool_item is to be allocated the same size as other
+homogeneous items. The effect is that all homogeneous items will have
+the same width as the widest of the items.
-In principle each widget in the chain should be a descendant of the
-container, but this is not enforced by this method, since it's allowed
-to set the focus chain before you pack the widgets, or have a widget
-in the chain that isn't always packed. The necessary checks are done
-when the focus chain is actually traversed.
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="container">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkContainer
+<parameter name="tool_item">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItem
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="focusable_widgets">
-<parameter_description> the new focus chain
+<parameter name="homogeneous">
+<parameter_description> whether @tool_item is the same size as other homogeneous items
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tool_item_set_homogeneous">
+<function name="gtk_cell_renderer_set_sensitive">
<description>
-Sets whether @tool_item is to be allocated the same size as other
-homogeneous items. The effect is that all homogeneous items will have
-the same width as the widest of the items.
+Sets the cell renderer's sensitivity.
-Since: 2.4
+Since: 2.18
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tool_item">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItem
+<parameter name="cell">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkCellRenderer
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="homogeneous">
-<parameter_description> whether @tool_item is the same size as other homogeneous items
+<parameter name="sensitive">
+<parameter_description> the sensitivity of the cell
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -7468,6 +7632,24 @@ Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_combo_box_get_column_span_column">
+<description>
+Returns the column with column span information for @combo_box.
+
+Since: 2.6
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="combo_box">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkComboBox
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the column span column.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_toggle_button_set_mode">
<description>
Sets whether the button is displayed as a separate indicator and label.
@@ -7568,6 +7750,37 @@ if no transient parent has been set.
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_window_set_has_frame">
+<description>
+(Note: this is a special-purpose function for the framebuffer port,
+that causes GTK+ to draw its own window border. For most applications,
+you want gtk_window_set_decorated() instead, which tells the window
+manager whether to draw the window border.)
+
+If this function is called on a window with setting of %TRUE, before
+it is realized or showed, it will have a "frame" window around
+ window->window, accessible in @window->frame. Using the signal
+frame_event you can receive all events targeted at the frame.
+
+This function is used by the linux-fb port to implement managed
+windows, but it could conceivably be used by X-programs that
+want to do their own window decorations.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="setting">
+<parameter_description> a boolean
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_tree_view_convert_widget_to_bin_window_coords">
<description>
Converts widget coordinates to coordinates for the bin_window
@@ -7680,33 +7893,6 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_status_icon_set_tooltip_markup">
-<description>
-Sets @markup as the contents of the tooltip, which is marked up with
-the <link linkend="PangoMarkupFormat">Pango text markup language</link>.
-
-This function will take care of setting #GtkStatusIcon:has-tooltip to %TRUE
-and of the default handler for the #GtkStatusIcon::query-tooltip signal.
-
-See also the #GtkStatusIcon:tooltip-markup property and
-gtk_tooltip_set_markup().
-
-Since: 2.16
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="status_icon">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkStatusIcon
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="markup">
-<parameter_description> the contents of the tooltip for @status_icon, or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_new_with_attributes">
<description>
Creates a new #GtkTreeViewColumn with a number of default values. This is
@@ -7845,6 +8031,43 @@ Create a new #GtkSizeGroup.
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_clipboard_request_rich_text">
+<description>
+Requests the contents of the clipboard as rich text. When the rich
+text is later received, @callback will be called.
+
+The @text parameter to @callback will contain the resulting rich
+text if the request succeeded, or %NULL if it failed. The @length
+parameter will contain @text's length. This function can fail for
+various reasons, in particular if the clipboard was empty or if the
+contents of the clipboard could not be converted into rich text form.
+
+Since: 2.10
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="clipboard">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkClipboard
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="buffer">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextBuffer
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="callback">
+<parameter_description> a function to call when the text is received,
+or the retrieval fails. (It will always be called
+one way or the other.)
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="user_data">
+<parameter_description> user data to pass to @callback.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_button_get_image">
<description>
Gets the widget that is currenty set as the image of @button.
@@ -7973,6 +8196,27 @@ Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_window_set_skip_taskbar_hint">
+<description>
+Windows may set a hint asking the desktop environment not to display
+the window in the task bar. This function sets this hint.
+
+Since: 2.2
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="setting">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE to keep this window from appearing in the task bar
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_page_setup_get_paper_width">
<description>
Returns the paper width in units of @unit.
@@ -8078,62 +8322,47 @@ Creates a copy of @source; mostly useful for language bindings.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_settings_get_paper_size">
+<function name="gtk_icon_view_set_tooltip_item">
<description>
-Gets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_PAPER_FORMAT,
-converted to a #GtkPaperSize.
+Sets the tip area of @tooltip to be the area covered by the item at @path.
+See also gtk_icon_view_set_tooltip_column() for a simpler alternative.
+See also gtk_tooltip_set_tip_area().
-Since: 2.10
+Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="settings">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
+<parameter name="icon_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIconView
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="tooltip">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTooltip
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="path">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTreePath
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the paper size
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_render_icon">
+<function name="gtk_print_settings_get_default_source">
<description>
-A convenience function that uses the theme engine and RC file
-settings for @widget to look up @stock_id and render it to
-a pixbuf. @stock_id should be a stock icon ID such as
-#GTK_STOCK_OPEN or #GTK_STOCK_OK. @size should be a size
-such as #GTK_ICON_SIZE_MENU. @detail should be a string that
-identifies the widget or code doing the rendering, so that
-theme engines can special-case rendering for that widget or code.
-
-The pixels in the returned #GdkPixbuf are shared with the rest of
-the application and should not be modified. The pixbuf should be freed
-after use with g_object_unref().
+Gets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_DEFAULT_SOURCE.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="stock_id">
-<parameter_description> a stock ID
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="size">
-<parameter_description> (type int) a stock size. A size of (GtkIconSize)-1 means
-render at the size of the source and don't scale (if there are
-multiple source sizes, GTK+ picks one of the available sizes).
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="detail">
-<parameter_description> render detail to pass to theme engine
+<parameter name="settings">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a new pixbuf, or %NULL if the stock ID wasn't known
+<return> the default source
+
</return>
</function>
@@ -8162,43 +8391,27 @@ otherwise %FALSE.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_set_mapped">
+<function name="gtk_entry_get_icon_stock">
<description>
-Marks the widget as being realized.
-
-This function should only ever be called in a derived widget's
-"map" or "unmap" implementation.
+Retrieves the stock id used for the icon, or %NULL if there is
+no icon or if the icon was set by some other method (e.g., by
+pixbuf, icon name or gicon).
-Since: 2.20
+Since: 2.16
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="mapped">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE to mark the widget as mapped
+<parameter name="entry">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkEntry
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_tree_row_reference_get_model">
-<description>
-Returns the model that the row reference is monitoring.
-
-Since: 2.8
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="reference">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeRowReference
+<parameter name="icon_pos">
+<parameter_description> Icon position
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the model
+<return> A stock id, or %NULL if no icon is set or if the icon
+wasn't set from a stock id
</return>
</function>
@@ -8298,89 +8511,93 @@ or a method on the #GtkTreeModel interface is called.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_scale_new">
+<function name="gtk_file_chooser_button_get_title">
<description>
-Creates a new #GtkScale.
+Retrieves the title of the browse dialog used by @button. The returned value
+should not be modified or freed.
-Since: 3.0
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="orientation">
-<parameter_description> the scale's orientation.
+<parameter name="button">
+<parameter_description> the button widget to examine.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="adjustment">
-<parameter_description> the #GtkAdjustment which sets the range of the scale, or
-%NULL to create a new adjustment.
+</parameters>
+<return> a pointer to the browse dialog's title.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_notebook_get_tab_hborder">
+<description>
+Returns the horizontal width of a tab border.
+
+Since: 2.22
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="notebook">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkNotebook
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a new #GtkScale
+<return> horizontal width of a tab border
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_selection_convert">
+<function name="gtk_icon_theme_lookup_by_gicon">
<description>
-Requests the contents of a selection. When received,
-a "selection-received" signal will be generated.
+Looks up an icon and returns a structure containing
+information such as the filename of the icon.
+The icon can then be rendered into a pixbuf using
+gtk_icon_info_load_icon().
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> The widget which acts as requestor
+<parameter name="icon_theme">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIconTheme
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="selection">
-<parameter_description> Which selection to get
+<parameter name="icon">
+<parameter_description> the #GIcon to look up
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="target">
-<parameter_description> Form of information desired (e.g., STRING)
+<parameter name="size">
+<parameter_description> desired icon size
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="time_">
-<parameter_description> Time of request (usually of triggering event)
- In emergency, you could use #GDK_CURRENT_TIME
+<parameter name="flags">
+<parameter_description> flags modifying the behavior of the icon lookup
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if requested succeeded. %FALSE if we could not process
-request. (e.g., there was already a request in process for
-this widget).
+<return> a #GtkIconInfo structure containing
+information about the icon, or %NULL if the icon
+wasn't found. Free with gtk_icon_info_free()
+
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_set_reorderable">
+<function name="gtk_widget_get_extension_events">
<description>
-This function is a convenience function to allow you to reorder
-models that support the #GtkDragSourceIface and the
-#GtkDragDestIface. Both #GtkTreeStore and #GtkListStore support
-these. If @reorderable is %TRUE, then the user can reorder the
-model by dragging and dropping rows. The developer can listen to
-these changes by connecting to the model's row_inserted and
-row_deleted signals. The reordering is implemented by setting up
-the tree view as a drag source and destination. Therefore, drag and
-drop can not be used in a reorderable view for any other purpose.
+Retrieves the extension events the widget will receive; see
+gdk_input_set_extension_events().
-This function does not give you any degree of control over the order -- any
-reordering is allowed. If more control is needed, you should probably
-handle drag and drop manually.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_view">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeView.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="reorderable">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE, if the tree can be reordered.
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> extension events for @widget
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_page_setup_to_file">
@@ -8499,63 +8716,17 @@ Since: 2.18
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_window_set_icon_list">
-<description>
-Sets up the icon representing a #GtkWindow. The icon is used when
-the window is minimized (also known as iconified). Some window
-managers or desktop environments may also place it in the window
-frame, or display it in other contexts.
-
-gtk_window_set_icon_list() allows you to pass in the same icon in
-several hand-drawn sizes. The list should contain the natural sizes
-your icon is available in; that is, don't scale the image before
-passing it to GTK+. Scaling is postponed until the last minute,
-when the desired final size is known, to allow best quality.
-
-By passing several sizes, you may improve the final image quality
-of the icon, by reducing or eliminating automatic image scaling.
-
-Recommended sizes to provide: 16x16, 32x32, 48x48 at minimum, and
-larger images (64x64, 128x128) if you have them.
-
-See also gtk_window_set_default_icon_list() to set the icon
-for all windows in your application in one go.
-
-Note that transient windows (those who have been set transient for another
-window using gtk_window_set_transient_for()) will inherit their
-icon from their transient parent. So there's no need to explicitly
-set the icon on transient windows.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="list">
-<parameter_description> list of #GdkPixbuf
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_tool_button_get_label_widget">
+<function name="gtk_rc_get_im_module_file">
<description>
-Returns the widget used as label on @button. See
-gtk_tool_button_set_label_widget().
-
-Since: 2.4
+Obtains the path to the IM modules file. See the documentation
+of the <link linkend="im-module-file"><envar>GTK_IM_MODULE_FILE</envar></link>
+environment variable for more details.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="button">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolButton
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> The widget used as label on @button, or %NULL.
-
+<return> a newly-allocated string containing the name of the file
+listing the IM modules available for loading
</return>
</function>
@@ -8577,20 +8748,31 @@ Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_scale_get_draw_value">
+<function name="gtk_accel_group_query">
<description>
-Returns whether the current value is displayed as a string
-next to the slider.
-
+Queries an accelerator group for all entries matching @accel_key and
+ accel_mods
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="scale">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkScale
+<parameter name="accel_group">
+<parameter_description> the accelerator group to query
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="accel_key">
+<parameter_description> key value of the accelerator
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="accel_mods">
+<parameter_description> modifier combination of the accelerator
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="n_entries">
+<parameter_description> location to return the number of entries found, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> whether the current value is displayed as a string
+<return> an array of @n_entries #GtkAccelGroupEntry elements, or %NULL. The array is owned by GTK+ and must not be freed.
</return>
</function>
@@ -8675,42 +8857,54 @@ Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_combo_box_get_active_iter">
+<function name="gtk_editable_delete_text">
<description>
-Sets @iter to point to the current active item, if it exists.
+Deletes a sequence of characters. The characters that are deleted are
+those characters at positions from @start_pos up to, but not including
+ end_pos If @end_pos is negative, then the the characters deleted
+are those from @start_pos to the end of the text.
-Since: 2.4
+Note that the positions are specified in characters, not bytes.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="combo_box">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkComboBox
+<parameter name="editable">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkEditable
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> The uninitialized #GtkTreeIter
+<parameter name="start_pos">
+<parameter_description> start position
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="end_pos">
+<parameter_description> end position
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE, if @iter was set
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_new_with_model">
+<function name="gtk_wrap_box_set_natural_line_children">
<description>
-Creates a new #GtkTreeView widget with the model initialized to @model.
+Sets the natural length of items to request and
+allocate space for in @box's orientation.
+Setting the natural amount of children per line
+limits the overall natural size request to be no more
+than @n_children items long in the given orientation.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="model">
-<parameter_description> the model.
+<parameter name="box">
+<parameter_description> An #GtkWrapBox
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="n_children">
+<parameter_description> The natural amount of children per line.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> A newly created #GtkTreeView widget.
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_accessible_get_widget">
@@ -8768,6 +8962,29 @@ Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_tool_palette_get_drag_item">
+<description>
+Get the dragged item from the selection.
+This could be a #GtkToolItem or a #GtkToolItemGroup.
+
+Since: 2.20
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="palette">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolPalette
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="selection">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkSelectionData
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the dragged item in selection
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_icon_source_set_size_wildcarded">
<description>
If the icon size is wildcarded, this source can be used as the base
@@ -8819,19 +9036,31 @@ Since: 2.18
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_ensure_style">
+<function name="gtk_notebook_set_action_widget">
<description>
-Ensures that @widget has a style (@widget->style). Not a very useful
-function; most of the time, if you want the style, the widget is
-realized, and realized widgets are guaranteed to have a style
-already.
+Sets @widget as one of the action widgets. Depending on the pack type
+the widget will be placed before or after the tabs. You can use
+a #GtkBox if you need to pack more than one widget on the same side.
+
+Note that action widgets are "internal" children of the notebook and thus
+not included in the list returned from gtk_container_foreach().
+
+Since: 2.20
</description>
<parameters>
+<parameter name="notebook">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkNotebook
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
<parameter name="widget">
<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
+<parameter name="pack_type">
+<parameter_description> pack type of the action widget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
@@ -8888,43 +9117,36 @@ gtk_adjustment_set_value ().
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tool_item_set_visible_horizontal">
+<function name="gtk_print_settings_set_scale">
<description>
-Sets whether @tool_item is visible when the toolbar is docked horizontally.
+Sets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_SCALE.
-Since: 2.4
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tool_item">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItem
+<parameter name="settings">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="visible_horizontal">
-<parameter_description> Whether @tool_item is visible when in horizontal mode
+<parameter name="scale">
+<parameter_description> the scale in percent
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_image_set_from_animation">
+<function name="gtk_vseparator_new">
<description>
-Causes the #GtkImage to display the given animation (or display
-nothing, if you set the animation to %NULL).
+Creates a new #GtkVSeparator.
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="image">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkImage
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="animation">
-<parameter_description> the #GdkPixbufAnimation
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> a new #GtkVSeparator.
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_widget_get_parent_window">
@@ -8943,55 +9165,6 @@ Gets @widget's parent window.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_drag_source_row_draggable">
-<description>
-Asks the #GtkTreeDragSource whether a particular row can be used as
-the source of a DND operation. If the source doesn't implement
-this interface, the row is assumed draggable.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="drag_source">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeDragSource
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="path">
-<parameter_description> row on which user is initiating a drag
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the row can be dragged
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_size_request_get_width">
-<description>
-Retrieves a widget's initial minimum and natural width.
-
-<note><para>This call is specific to height-for-width
-requests.</para></note>
-
-Since: 3.0
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkSizeRequest instance
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="minimum_width">
-<parameter_description> location to store the minimum width, or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="natural_width">
-<parameter_description> location to store the natural width, or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_window_move">
<description>
Asks the <link linkend="gtk-X11-arch">window manager</link> to move
@@ -9048,25 +9221,6 @@ The gtk_window_get_position() documentation may also be relevant.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_set_title">
-<description>
-Sets the title of the @tree_column. If a custom widget has been set, then
-this value is ignored.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_column">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeViewColumn.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="title">
-<parameter_description> The title of the @tree_column.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_entry_get_inner_border">
<description>
This function returns the entry's #GtkEntry:inner-border property. See
@@ -9121,20 +9275,66 @@ a unique name which needs to be specified upon creation.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_size_register_alias">
+<function name="gtk_entry_set_icon_drag_source">
<description>
-Registers @alias as another name for @target.
-So calling gtk_icon_size_from_name() with @alias as argument
-will return @target.
+Sets up the icon at the given position so that GTK+ will start a drag
+operation when the user clicks and drags the icon.
+
+To handle the drag operation, you need to connect to the usual
+#GtkWidget::drag-data-get (or possibly #GtkWidget::drag-data-delete)
+signal, and use gtk_entry_get_current_icon_drag_source() in
+your signal handler to find out if the drag was started from
+an icon.
+
+By default, GTK+ uses the icon as the drag icon. You can use the
+#GtkWidget::drag-begin signal to set a different icon. Note that you
+have to use g_signal_connect_after() to ensure that your signal handler
+gets executed after the default handler.
+
+Since: 2.16
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="alias">
-<parameter_description> an alias for @target
+<parameter name="entry">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIconEntry
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="target">
-<parameter_description> an existing icon size
+<parameter name="icon_pos">
+<parameter_description> icon position
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="target_list">
+<parameter_description> the targets (data formats) in which the data can be provided
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="actions">
+<parameter_description> a bitmask of the allowed drag actions
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_cell_renderer_stop_editing">
+<description>
+Informs the cell renderer that the editing is stopped.
+If @canceled is %TRUE, the cell renderer will emit the
+#GtkCellRenderer::editing-canceled signal.
+
+This function should be called by cell renderer implementations
+in response to the #GtkCellEditable::editing-done signal of
+#GtkCellEditable.
+
+Since: 2.6
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="cell">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkCellRenderer
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="canceled">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE if the editing has been canceled
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -9247,6 +9447,28 @@ Since: 2.6
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_file_chooser_button_new">
+<description>
+Creates a new file-selecting button widget.
+
+Since: 2.6
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="title">
+<parameter_description> the title of the browse dialog.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="action">
+<parameter_description> the open mode for the widget.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> a new button widget.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_color_button_new">
<description>
Creates a new color button. This returns a widget in the form of
@@ -9290,6 +9512,24 @@ in a drag_data_get handler.
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_recent_action_get_show_numbers">
+<description>
+Returns the value set by gtk_recent_chooser_menu_set_show_numbers().
+
+Since: 2.12
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="action">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentAction
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if numbers should be shown.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_text_view_get_visible_rect">
<description>
Fills @visible_rect with the currently-visible
@@ -9310,26 +9550,39 @@ with gtk_text_view_buffer_to_window_coords().
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_action_set_accel_path">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_get_min_width">
<description>
-Sets the accel path for this action. All proxy widgets associated
-with the action will have this accel path, so that their
-accelerators are consistent.
+Returns the minimum width in pixels of the @tree_column, or -1 if no minimum
+width is set.
-Note that @accel_path string will be stored in a #GQuark. Therefore, if you
-pass a static string, you can save some memory by interning it first with
-g_intern_static_string().
-Since: 2.4
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="tree_column">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeViewColumn.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> The minimum width of the @tree_column.
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_widget_class_install_style_property_parser">
+<description>
+Installs a style property on a widget class.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="action">
-<parameter_description> the action object
+<parameter name="klass">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidgetClass
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="accel_path">
-<parameter_description> the accelerator path
+<parameter name="pspec">
+<parameter_description> the #GParamSpec for the style property
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="parser">
+<parameter_description> the parser for the style property
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -9449,6 +9702,39 @@ Determines whether the color selector has a color palette.
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_about_dialog_set_translator_credits">
+<description>
+Sets the translator credits string which is displayed in
+the translators tab of the secondary credits dialog.
+
+The intended use for this string is to display the translator
+of the language which is currently used in the user interface.
+Using gettext(), a simple way to achieve that is to mark the
+string for translation:
+|[
+gtk_about_dialog_set_translator_credits (about, _("translator-credits"));
+]|
+It is a good idea to use the customary msgid "translator-credits" for this
+purpose, since translators will already know the purpose of that msgid, and
+since #GtkAboutDialog will detect if "translator-credits" is untranslated
+and hide the tab.
+
+Since: 2.6
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="about">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAboutDialog
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="translator_credits">
+<parameter_description> the translator credits
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_rc_get_im_module_path">
<description>
Obtains the path in which to look for IM modules. See the documentation
@@ -9616,32 +9902,6 @@ Since: 2.6
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_view_set_tooltip_item">
-<description>
-Sets the tip area of @tooltip to be the area covered by the item at @path.
-See also gtk_icon_view_set_tooltip_column() for a simpler alternative.
-See also gtk_tooltip_set_tip_area().
-
-Since: 2.12
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="icon_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkIconView
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="tooltip">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTooltip
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="path">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTreePath
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_text_view_get_border_window_size">
<description>
Gets the width of the specified border window. See
@@ -9819,29 +10079,6 @@ user can't interact with them. Insensitive widgets are known as
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_spin_button_set_increments">
-<description>
-Sets the step and page increments for spin_button. This affects how
-quickly the value changes when the spin button's arrows are activated.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="spin_button">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkSpinButton
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="step">
-<parameter_description> increment applied for a button 1 press.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="page">
-<parameter_description> increment applied for a button 2 press.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_target_list_new">
<description>
Creates a new #GtkTargetList from an array of #GtkTargetEntry.
@@ -9862,40 +10099,26 @@ Creates a new #GtkTargetList from an array of #GtkTargetEntry.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_scale_add_mark">
+<function name="gtk_widget_set_visible">
<description>
-Adds a mark at @value.
-
-A mark is indicated visually by drawing a tick mark next to the scale,
-and GTK+ makes it easy for the user to position the scale exactly at the
-marks value.
-
-If @markup is not %NULL, text is shown next to the tick mark.
+Sets the visibility state of @widget. Note that setting this to
+%TRUE doesn't mean the widget is actually viewable, see
+gtk_widget_get_visible().
-To remove marks from a scale, use gtk_scale_clear_marks().
+This function simply calls gtk_widget_show() or gtk_widget_hide()
+but is nicer to use when the visibility of the widget depends on
+some condition.
-Since: 2.16
+Since: 2.18
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="scale">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkScale
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="value">
-<parameter_description> the value at which the mark is placed, must be between
-the lower and upper limits of the scales' adjustment
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="position">
-<parameter_description> where to draw the mark. For a horizontal scale, #GTK_POS_TOP
-is drawn above the scale, anything else below. For a vertical scale,
-#GTK_POS_LEFT is drawn to the left of the scale, anything else to the
-right.
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="markup">
-<parameter_description> Text to be shown at the mark, using <link linkend="PangoMarkupFormat">Pango markup</link>, or %NULL
+<parameter name="visible">
+<parameter_description> whether the widget should be shown or not
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -10107,83 +10330,6 @@ Since: 2.10
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_window_set_has_frame">
-<description>
-(Note: this is a special-purpose function for the framebuffer port,
-that causes GTK+ to draw its own window border. For most applications,
-you want gtk_window_set_decorated() instead, which tells the window
-manager whether to draw the window border.)
-
-If this function is called on a window with setting of %TRUE, before
-it is realized or showed, it will have a "frame" window around
- window->window, accessible in @window->frame. Using the signal
-frame_event you can receive all events targeted at the frame.
-
-This function is used by the linux-fb port to implement managed
-windows, but it could conceivably be used by X-programs that
-want to do their own window decorations.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="setting">
-<parameter_description> a boolean
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_tool_item_toolbar_reconfigured">
-<description>
-Emits the signal #GtkToolItem::toolbar_reconfigured on @tool_item.
-#GtkToolbar and other #GtkToolShell implementations use this function
-to notify children, when some aspect of their configuration changes.
-
-Since: 2.14
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="tool_item">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItem
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_set_sort_order">
-<description>
-Changes the appearance of the sort indicator.
-
-This <emphasis>does not</emphasis> actually sort the model. Use
-gtk_tree_view_column_set_sort_column_id() if you want automatic sorting
-support. This function is primarily for custom sorting behavior, and should
-be used in conjunction with gtk_tree_sortable_set_sort_column() to do
-that. For custom models, the mechanism will vary.
-
-The sort indicator changes direction to indicate normal sort or reverse sort.
-Note that you must have the sort indicator enabled to see anything when
-calling this function; see gtk_tree_view_column_set_sort_indicator().
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_column">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeViewColumn
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="order">
-<parameter_description> sort order that the sort indicator should indicate
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_widget_queue_draw">
<description>
Equivalent to calling gtk_widget_queue_draw_area() for the
@@ -10260,6 +10406,28 @@ Most programs should not need to call this function.
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_text_iter_get_visible_text">
+<description>
+Like gtk_text_iter_get_text (), but invisible text is not included.
+Invisible text is usually invisible because a #GtkTextTag with the
+"invisible" attribute turned on has been applied to it.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="start">
+<parameter_description> iterator at start of range
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="end">
+<parameter_description> iterator at end of range
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> string containing visible text in the range
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_entry_buffer_emit_deleted_text">
<description>
Used when subclassing #GtkEntryBuffer
@@ -10284,6 +10452,42 @@ Since: 2.18
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_accel_map_change_entry">
+<description>
+Changes the @accel_key and @accel_mods currently associated with @accel_path.
+Due to conflicts with other accelerators, a change may not always be possible,
+ replace indicates whether other accelerators may be deleted to resolve such
+conflicts. A change will only occur if all conflicts could be resolved (which
+might not be the case if conflicting accelerators are locked). Successful
+changes are indicated by a %TRUE return value.
+
+Note that @accel_path string will be stored in a #GQuark. Therefore, if you
+pass a static string, you can save some memory by interning it first with
+g_intern_static_string().
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="accel_path">
+<parameter_description> a valid accelerator path
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="accel_key">
+<parameter_description> the new accelerator key
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="accel_mods">
+<parameter_description> the new accelerator modifiers
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="replace">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE if other accelerators may be deleted upon conflicts
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if the accelerator could be changed, %FALSE otherwise
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_window_get_skip_taskbar_hint">
<description>
Gets the value set by gtk_window_set_skip_taskbar_hint()
@@ -10333,38 +10537,25 @@ Since: 2.8
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_set_cell_data_func">
+<function name="gtk_selection_data_get_pixbuf">
<description>
-Sets the #GtkTreeViewColumnFunc to use for the column. This
-function is used instead of the standard attributes mapping for
-setting the column value, and should set the value of @tree_column's
-cell renderer as appropriate. @func may be %NULL to remove an
-older one.
+Gets the contents of the selection data as a #GdkPixbuf.
+
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_column">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeViewColumn
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="cell_renderer">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkCellRenderer
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="func">
-<parameter_description> The #GtkTreeViewColumnFunc to use.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="func_data">
-<parameter_description> The user data for @func.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="destroy">
-<parameter_description> The destroy notification for @func_data
+<parameter name="selection_data">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkSelectionData
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> if the selection data contained a recognized
+image type and it could be converted to a #GdkPixbuf, a
+newly allocated pixbuf is returned, otherwise %NULL.
+If the result is non-%NULL it must be freed with g_object_unref().
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_widget_common_ancestor">
@@ -10430,28 +10621,6 @@ Since: 2.10
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_expander_set_expanded">
-<description>
-Sets the state of the expander. Set to %TRUE, if you want
-the child widget to be revealed, and %FALSE if you want the
-child widget to be hidden.
-
-Since: 2.4
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="expander">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkExpander
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="expanded">
-<parameter_description> whether the child widget is revealed
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_list_store_set_value">
<description>
Sets the data in the cell specified by @iter and @column.
@@ -10491,6 +10660,9 @@ x and y offsets (if set) of the cell relative to this location.
Please note that the values set in @width and @height, as well as those
in @x_offset and @y_offset are inclusive of the xpad and ypad properties.
+
+Deprecated: 3.0: Use gtk_cell_size_request_get_size() instead.
+
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="cell">
@@ -10586,6 +10758,40 @@ Since: 2.2
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_cell_view_get_desired_height_for_width_of_row">
+<description>
+Sets @minimum_size and @natural_size to the height desired by @cell_view
+if it were allocated a width of @avail_size to display the model row
+pointed to by @path.
+
+Since: 3.0
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="cell_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkCellView
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="path">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTreePath
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="avail_size">
+<parameter_description> available width
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="minimum_size">
+<parameter_description> location to store the minimum height
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="natural_size">
+<parameter_description> location to store the natural height
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_text_layout_is_valid">
<description>
Check if there are any invalid regions in a #GtkTextLayout's buffer
@@ -10719,6 +10925,35 @@ returned, but usually you don't need it.
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_rc_parse_color_full">
+<description>
+Parses a color in the <link linkend="color=format">format</link> expected
+in a RC file. If @style is not %NULL, it will be consulted to resolve
+references to symbolic colors.
+
+Since: 2.12
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="scanner">
+<parameter_description> a #GScanner
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="style">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkRcStyle, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="color">
+<parameter_description> a pointer to a #GdkColor structure in which to store the result
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %G_TOKEN_NONE if parsing succeeded, otherwise the token
+that was expected but not found
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_tree_view_set_level_indentation">
<description>
Sets the amount of extra indentation for child levels to use in @tree_view
@@ -10763,42 +10998,84 @@ Since: 2.6
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_iter_ends_line">
+<function name="gtk_tree_get_row_drag_data">
<description>
-Returns %TRUE if @iter points to the start of the paragraph
-delimiter characters for a line (delimiters will be either a
-newline, a carriage return, a carriage return followed by a
-newline, or a Unicode paragraph separator character). Note that an
-iterator pointing to the \n of a \r\n pair will not be counted as
-the end of a line, the line ends before the \r. The end iterator is
-considered to be at the end of a line, even though there are no
-paragraph delimiter chars there.
+Obtains a @tree_model and @path from selection data of target type
+%GTK_TREE_MODEL_ROW. Normally called from a drag_data_received handler.
+This function can only be used if @selection_data originates from the same
+process that's calling this function, because a pointer to the tree model
+is being passed around. If you aren't in the same process, then you'll
+get memory corruption. In the #GtkTreeDragDest drag_data_received handler,
+you can assume that selection data of type %GTK_TREE_MODEL_ROW is
+in from the current process. The returned path must be freed with
+gtk_tree_path_free().
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> an iterator
+<parameter name="selection_data">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkSelectionData
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="tree_model">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeModel
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="path">
+<parameter_description> row in @tree_model
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> whether @iter is at the end of a line
+<return> %TRUE if @selection_data had target type %GTK_TREE_MODEL_ROW and
+is otherwise valid
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_accel_group_from_accel_closure">
+<function name="gtk_rc_get_style_by_paths">
<description>
-Finds the #GtkAccelGroup to which @closure is connected;
-see gtk_accel_group_connect().
+Creates up a #GtkStyle from styles defined in a RC file by providing
+the raw components used in matching. This function may be useful
+when creating pseudo-widgets that should be themed like widgets but
+don't actually have corresponding GTK+ widgets. An example of this
+would be items inside a GNOME canvas widget.
+
+The action of gtk_rc_get_style() is similar to:
+|[
+gtk_widget_path (widget, NULL, &path, NULL);
+gtk_widget_class_path (widget, NULL, &class_path, NULL);
+gtk_rc_get_style_by_paths (gtk_widget_get_settings (widget),
+path, class_path,
+G_OBJECT_TYPE (widget));
+]|
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="closure">
-<parameter_description> a #GClosure
+<parameter name="settings">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkSettings object
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="widget_path">
+<parameter_description> the widget path to use when looking up the style, or %NULL
+if no matching against the widget path should be done
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="class_path">
+<parameter_description> the class path to use when looking up the style, or %NULL
+if no matching against the class path should be done.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="type">
+<parameter_description> a type that will be used along with parent types of this type
+when matching against class styles, or #G_TYPE_NONE
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the #GtkAccelGroup to which @closure is connected, or %NULL.
+<return> A style created by matching with the supplied paths,
+or %NULL if nothing matching was specified and the default style should
+be used. The returned value is owned by GTK+ as part of an internal cache,
+so you must call g_object_ref() on the returned value if you want to
+keep a reference to it.
</return>
</function>
@@ -11056,6 +11333,22 @@ Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_button_enter">
+<description>
+Emits a #GtkButton::enter signal to the given #GtkButton.
+
+Deprecated: 2.20: Use the #GtkWidget::enter-notify-event signal.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="button">
+<parameter_description> The #GtkButton you want to send the signal to.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_selection_data_get_targets">
<description>
Gets the contents of @selection_data as an array of targets.
@@ -11202,35 +11495,30 @@ focused widget is activated.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_selection_owner_set_for_display">
+<function name="gtk_entry_set_icon_from_pixbuf">
<description>
-Claim ownership of a given selection for a particular widget, or,
-if @widget is %NULL, release ownership of the selection.
+Sets the icon shown in the specified position using a pixbuf.
-Since: 2.2
+If @pixbuf is %NULL, no icon will be shown in the specified position.
+
+Since: 2.16
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="display">
-<parameter_description> the #Gdkdisplay where the selection is set
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> new selection owner (a #GdkWidget), or %NULL.
+<parameter name="entry">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkEntry
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="selection">
-<parameter_description> an interned atom representing the selection to claim.
+<parameter name="icon_pos">
+<parameter_description> Icon position
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="time_">
-<parameter_description> timestamp with which to claim the selection
+<parameter name="pixbuf">
+<parameter_description> A #GdkPixbuf, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> TRUE if the operation succeeded
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_text_buffer_set_modified">
@@ -11310,38 +11598,44 @@ to free it
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_get_clipboard">
+<function name="gtk_paper_size_get_name">
<description>
-Returns the clipboard object for the given selection to
-be used with @widget. @widget must have a #GdkDisplay
-associated with it, so must be attached to a toplevel
-window.
+Gets the name of the #GtkPaperSize.
-Since: 2.2
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="selection">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkAtom which identifies the clipboard
-to use. %GDK_SELECTION_CLIPBOARD gives the
-default clipboard. Another common value
-is %GDK_SELECTION_PRIMARY, which gives
-the primary X selection.
+<parameter name="size">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPaperSize object
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the appropriate clipboard object. If no
-clipboard already exists, a new one will
-be created. Once a clipboard object has
-been created, it is persistent for all time.
+<return> the name of @size
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_print_settings_set_page_set">
+<description>
+Sets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_PAGE_SET.
+
+Since: 2.10
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="settings">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="page_set">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPageSet value
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_icon_view_get_orientation">
<description>
Returns the value of the ::orientation property which determines
@@ -11387,28 +11681,6 @@ popped up initially.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_settings_has_key">
-<description>
-Returns %TRUE, if a value is associated with @key.
-
-Since: 2.10
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="settings">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="key">
-<parameter_description> a key
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE, if @key has a value
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_tree_model_row_has_child_toggled">
<description>
Emits the "row-has-child-toggled" signal on @tree_model. This should be
@@ -11432,24 +11704,24 @@ called by models after the child state of a node changes.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_buffer_add_selection_clipboard">
+<function name="gtk_ui_manager_get_action_groups">
<description>
-Adds @clipboard to the list of clipboards in which the selection
-contents of @buffer are available. In most cases, @clipboard will be
-the #GtkClipboard of type %GDK_SELECTION_PRIMARY for a view of @buffer.
+Returns the list of action groups associated with @self.
+
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="buffer">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextBuffer
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="clipboard">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkClipboard
+<parameter name="self">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkUIManager object
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> a #GList of
+action groups. The list is owned by GTK+
+and should not be modified.
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_text_iter_get_bytes_in_line">
@@ -11479,39 +11751,23 @@ including the paragraph delimiters.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_im_context_simple_add_table">
+<function name="gtk_toolbar_get_relief_style">
<description>
-Adds an additional table to search to the input context.
-Each row of the table consists of @max_seq_len key symbols
-followed by two #guint16 interpreted as the high and low
-words of a #gunicode value. Tables are searched starting
-from the last added.
+Returns the relief style of buttons on @toolbar. See
+gtk_button_set_relief().
-The table must be sorted in dictionary order on the
-numeric value of the key symbol fields. (Values beyond
-the length of the sequence should be zero.)
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="context_simple">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkIMContextSimple
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="data">
-<parameter_description> the table
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="max_seq_len">
-<parameter_description> Maximum length of a sequence in the table
-(cannot be greater than #GTK_MAX_COMPOSE_LEN)
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="n_seqs">
-<parameter_description> number of sequences in the table
+<parameter name="toolbar">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolbar
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> The relief style of buttons on @toolbar.
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_page_setup_get_paper_size">
@@ -11589,6 +11845,24 @@ Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_icon_source_get_icon_name">
+<description>
+Retrieves the source icon name, or %NULL if none is set. The
+icon_name is not a copy, and should not be modified or expected to
+persist beyond the lifetime of the icon source.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="source">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIconSource
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> icon name. This string must not be modified or freed.
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_progress_bar_set_text">
<description>
Causes the given @text to appear superimposed on the progress bar.
@@ -11627,42 +11901,88 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_window_get_focus_on_map">
+<function name="gtk_selection_data_set">
<description>
-Gets the value set by gtk_window_set_focus_on_map().
-
-Since: 2.6
+Stores new data into a #GtkSelectionData object. Should
+<emphasis>only</emphasis> be called from a selection handler callback.
+Zero-terminates the stored data.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
+<parameter name="selection_data">
+<parameter_description> a pointer to a #GtkSelectionData structure.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="type">
+<parameter_description> the type of selection data
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="format">
+<parameter_description> format (number of bits in a unit)
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="data">
+<parameter_description> pointer to the data (will be copied)
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="length">
+<parameter_description> length of the data
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if window should receive the input focus when
-mapped.
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_file_chooser_get_select_multiple">
+<function name="gtk_container_set_focus_vadjustment">
<description>
-Gets whether multiple files can be selected in the file
-selector. See gtk_file_chooser_set_select_multiple().
+Hooks up an adjustment to focus handling in a container, so when a
+child of the container is focused, the adjustment is scrolled to
+show that widget. This function sets the vertical alignment. See
+gtk_scrolled_window_get_vadjustment() for a typical way of obtaining
+the adjustment and gtk_container_set_focus_hadjustment() for setting
+the horizontal adjustment.
-Since: 2.4
+The adjustments have to be in pixel units and in the same coordinate
+system as the allocation for immediate children of the container.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="chooser">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
+<parameter name="container">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkContainer
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="adjustment">
+<parameter_description> an adjustment which should be adjusted when the focus
+is moved among the descendents of @container
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if multiple files can be selected.
+<return></return>
+</function>
-</return>
+<function name="gtk_assistant_set_current_page">
+<description>
+Switches the page to @page_num. Note that this will only be necessary
+in custom buttons, as the @assistant flow can be set with
+gtk_assistant_set_forward_page_func().
+
+Since: 2.10
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="assistant">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAssistant
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="page_num">
+<parameter_description> index of the page to switch to, starting from 0.
+If negative, the last page will be used. If greater
+than the number of pages in the @assistant, nothing
+will be done.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_style_apply_default_background">
@@ -11710,6 +12030,29 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_tool_item_set_use_drag_window">
+<description>
+Sets whether @tool_item has a drag window. When %TRUE the
+toolitem can be used as a drag source through gtk_drag_source_set().
+When @tool_item has a drag window it will intercept all events,
+even those that would otherwise be sent to a child of @tool_item.
+
+Since: 2.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="tool_item">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItem
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="use_drag_window">
+<parameter_description> Whether @tool_item has a drag window.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_file_chooser_button_get_focus_on_click">
<description>
Returns whether the button grabs focus when it is clicked with the mouse.
@@ -11747,6 +12090,25 @@ gtk_container_set_resize_mode ().
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_set_clickable">
+<description>
+Sets the header to be active if @active is %TRUE. When the header is active,
+then it can take keyboard focus, and can be clicked.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="tree_column">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeViewColumn.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="clickable">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE if the header is active.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_tree_store_insert_with_values">
<description>
Creates a new row at @position. @iter will be changed to point to this
@@ -11996,52 +12358,41 @@ will then disallow lowering the dialog below the parent.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_style_set_background">
+<function name="gtk_icon_size_register_alias">
<description>
-Sets the background of @window to the background color or pixmap
-specified by @style for the given state.
+Registers @alias as another name for @target.
+So calling gtk_icon_size_from_name() with @alias as argument
+will return @target.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="style">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
+<parameter name="alias">
+<parameter_description> an alias for @target
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="state_type">
-<parameter_description> a state
+<parameter name="target">
+<parameter_description> an existing icon size
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_page_setup_get_page_height">
+<function name="gtk_label_get_mnemonic_widget">
<description>
-Returns the page height in units of @unit.
-
-Note that this function takes orientation and
-margins into consideration.
-See gtk_page_setup_get_paper_height().
+Retrieves the target of the mnemonic (keyboard shortcut) of this
+label. See gtk_label_set_mnemonic_widget().
-Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="setup">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPageSetup
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="unit">
-<parameter_description> the unit for the return value
+<parameter name="label">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkLabel
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the page height.
-
+<return> the target of the label's mnemonic, or %NULL if none
+has been set and the default algorithm will be used.
</return>
</function>
@@ -12156,56 +12507,58 @@ the current label is removed.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_context_get_hard_margins">
+<function name="gtk_accelerator_parse">
<description>
-Obtains the hardware printer margins of the #GtkPrintContext, in units.
+Parses a string representing an accelerator. The
+format looks like "<Control>a" or "<Shift><Alt>F1" or
+"<Release>z" (the last one is for key release).
+The parser is fairly liberal and allows lower or upper case,
+and also abbreviations such as "<Ctl>" and "<Ctrl>".
+Key names are parsed using gdk_keyval_from_name(). For character keys the
+name is not the symbol, but the lowercase name, e.g. one would use
+"<Ctrl>minus" instead of "<Ctrl>-".
-Since: 2.20
+If the parse fails, @accelerator_key and @accelerator_mods will
+be set to 0 (zero).
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="context">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintContext
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="top">
-<parameter_description> top hardware printer margin
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="bottom">
-<parameter_description> bottom hardware printer margin
+<parameter name="accelerator">
+<parameter_description> string representing an accelerator
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="left">
-<parameter_description> left hardware printer margin
+<parameter name="accelerator_key">
+<parameter_description> return location for accelerator keyval
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="right">
-<parameter_description> right hardware printer margin
+<parameter name="accelerator_mods">
+<parameter_description> return location for accelerator modifier mask
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the hard margins were retrieved
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_scale_button_get_adjustment">
+<function name="gtk_entry_layout_index_to_text_index">
<description>
-Gets the #GtkAdjustment associated with the #GtkScaleButton's scale.
-See gtk_range_get_adjustment() for details.
+Converts from a position in the entry contents (returned
+by gtk_entry_get_text()) to a position in the
+entry's #PangoLayout (returned by gtk_entry_get_layout(),
+with text retrieved via pango_layout_get_text()).
-Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="button">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkScaleButton
+<parameter name="entry">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkEntry
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="layout_index">
+<parameter_description> byte index into the entry layout text
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the adjustment associated with the scale
-
+<return> byte index into the entry contents
</return>
</function>
@@ -12238,128 +12591,77 @@ column.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_dialog_set_alternative_button_order_from_array">
+<function name="gtk_about_dialog_get_license">
<description>
-Sets an alternative button order. If the
-#GtkSettings:gtk-alternative-button-order setting is set to %TRUE,
-the dialog buttons are reordered according to the order of the
-response ids in @new_order.
-
-See gtk_dialog_set_alternative_button_order() for more information.
-
-This function is for use by language bindings.
+Returns the license information.
Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="dialog">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkDialog
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="n_params">
-<parameter_description> the number of response ids in @new_order
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="new_order">
-<parameter_description> an array of response ids of @dialog's buttons
+<parameter name="about">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAboutDialog
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> The license information. The string is owned by the about
+dialog and must not be modified.
+
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_source_set_size">
+<function name="gtk_range_get_slider_range">
<description>
-Sets the icon size this icon source is intended to be used
-with.
+This function returns sliders range along the long dimension,
+in widget->window coordinates.
-Setting the icon size on an icon source makes no difference
-if the size is wildcarded. Therefore, you should usually
-call gtk_icon_source_set_size_wildcarded() to un-wildcard it
-in addition to calling this function.
+This function is useful mainly for #GtkRange subclasses.
+
+Since: 2.20
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="source">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkIconSource
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="size">
-<parameter_description> icon size this source applies to
+<parameter name="range">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkRange
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_radio_menu_item_new_with_label">
-<description>
-Creates a new #GtkRadioMenuItem whose child is a simple #GtkLabel.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="group">
-<parameter_description>
+<parameter name="slider_start">
+<parameter_description> return location for the slider's start, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="label">
-<parameter_description> the text for the label
+<parameter name="slider_end">
+<parameter_description> return location for the slider's end, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> A new #GtkRadioMenuItem
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_binding_set_activate">
+<function name="gtk_container_forall">
<description>
-Find a key binding matching @keyval and @modifiers within
- binding_set and activate the binding on @object.
-
+Invokes @callback on each child of @container, including children
+that are considered "internal" (implementation details of the
+container). "Internal" children generally weren't added by the user
+of the container, but were added by the container implementation
+itself. Most applications should use gtk_container_foreach(),
+rather than gtk_container_forall().
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="binding_set">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkBindingSet set to activate
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="keyval">
-<parameter_description> key value of the binding
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="modifiers">
-<parameter_description> key modifier of the binding
+<parameter name="container">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkContainer
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="object">
-<parameter_description> object to activate when binding found
+<parameter name="callback">
+<parameter_description> a callback
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if a binding was found and activated
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_widget_is_toplevel">
-<description>
-Determines whether @widget is a toplevel widget. Currently only
-#GtkWindow and #GtkInvisible are toplevel widgets. Toplevel
-widgets have no parent widget.
-
-Since: 2.18
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+<parameter name="callback_data">
+<parameter_description> callback user data
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if @widget is a toplevel, %FALSE otherwise
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_file_chooser_dialog_new">
@@ -12397,31 +12699,37 @@ Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_container_child_set_valist">
+<function name="gtk_print_settings_load_key_file">
<description>
-Sets one or more child properties for @child and @container.
+Reads the print settings from the group @group_name in @key_file. If the
+file could not be loaded then error is set to either a #GFileError or
+#GKeyFileError.
+
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="container">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkContainer
+<parameter name="settings">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="child">
-<parameter_description> a widget which is a child of @container
+<parameter name="key_file">
+<parameter_description> the #GKeyFile to retrieve the settings from
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="first_property_name">
-<parameter_description> the name of the first property to set
+<parameter name="group_name">
+<parameter_description> the name of the group to use, or %NULL to use the default
+"Print Settings"
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="var_args">
-<parameter_description> a %NULL-terminated list of property names and values, starting
-with @first_prop_name
+<parameter name="error">
+<parameter_description> return location for errors, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE on success
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_stock_list_ids">
@@ -12480,28 +12788,24 @@ a class used in gtk_binding_set_by_class().
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_image_set_from_gicon">
+<function name="gtk_expander_get_label_fill">
<description>
-See gtk_image_new_from_gicon() for details.
+Returns whether the label widget will fill all available horizontal
+space allocated to @expander.
-Since: 2.14
+Since: 2.22
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="image">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkImage
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="icon">
-<parameter_description> an icon
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="size">
-<parameter_description> an icon size
+<parameter name="expander">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkExpander
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if the label widget will fill all available horizontal
+space
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_tree_view_set_show_expanders">
@@ -12530,33 +12834,72 @@ Since: 2.12
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_page_setup_new_from_key_file">
+<function name="gtk_paint_box_gap">
<description>
-Reads the page setup from the group @group_name in the key file
- key_file Returns a new #GtkPageSetup object with the restored
-page setup, or %NULL if an error occurred.
-
-Since: 2.12
+Draws a box in @window using the given style and state and shadow type,
+leaving a gap in one side.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="key_file">
-<parameter_description> the #GKeyFile to retrieve the page_setup from
+<parameter name="style">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="group_name">
-<parameter_description> the name of the group in the key_file to read, or %NULL
-to use the default name "Page Setup"
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="error">
-<parameter_description> return location for an error, or %NULL
+<parameter name="state_type">
+<parameter_description> a state
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="shadow_type">
+<parameter_description> type of shadow to draw
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="area">
+<parameter_description> clip rectangle, or %NULL if the
+output should not be clipped
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> the widget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="detail">
+<parameter_description> a style detail
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="x">
+<parameter_description> x origin of the rectangle
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="y">
+<parameter_description> y origin of the rectangle
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="width">
+<parameter_description> width of the rectangle
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="height">
+<parameter_description> width of the rectangle
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="gap_side">
+<parameter_description> side in which to leave the gap
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="gap_x">
+<parameter_description> starting position of the gap
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="gap_width">
+<parameter_description> width of the gap
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the restored #GtkPageSetup
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_notebook_set_scrollable">
@@ -12600,6 +12943,50 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_recent_chooser_get_show_not_found">
+<description>
+Retrieves whether @chooser should show the recently used resources that
+were not found.
+
+Since: 2.10
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="chooser">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentChooser
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if the resources not found should be displayed, and
+%FALSE otheriwse.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_cell_renderer_set_padding">
+<description>
+Sets the renderer's padding.
+
+Since: 2.18
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="cell">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkCellRenderer
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="xpad">
+<parameter_description> the x padding of the cell renderer
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="ypad">
+<parameter_description> the y padding of the cell renderer
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_widget_has_grab">
<description>
Determines whether the widget is currently grabbing events, so it
@@ -12621,26 +13008,49 @@ Since: 2.18
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_cell_view_set_model">
+<function name="gtk_tool_palette_get_drag_target_group">
<description>
-Sets the model for @cell_view. If @cell_view already has a model
-set, it will remove it before setting the new model. If @model is
-%NULL, then it will unset the old model.
+Get the target entry for a dragged #GtkToolItemGroup.
-Since: 2.6
+Since: 2.20
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="cell_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkCellView
+</parameters>
+<return> the #GtkTargetEntry for a dragged group
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_selection_owner_set_for_display">
+<description>
+Claim ownership of a given selection for a particular widget, or,
+if @widget is %NULL, release ownership of the selection.
+
+Since: 2.2
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="display">
+<parameter_description> the #Gdkdisplay where the selection is set
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="model">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeModel
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> new selection owner (a #GdkWidget), or %NULL.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="selection">
+<parameter_description> an interned atom representing the selection to claim.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="time_">
+<parameter_description> timestamp with which to claim the selection
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> TRUE if the operation succeeded
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_ui_manager_add_ui">
@@ -12865,6 +13275,34 @@ Unselects the specified iterator.
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_container_set_border_width">
+<description>
+Sets the border width of the container.
+
+The border width of a container is the amount of space to leave
+around the outside of the container. The only exception to this is
+#GtkWindow; because toplevel windows can't leave space outside,
+they leave the space inside. The border is added on all sides of
+the container. To add space to only one side, one approach is to
+create a #GtkAlignment widget, call gtk_widget_set_size_request()
+to give it a size, and place it on the side of the container as
+a spacer.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="container">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkContainer
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="border_width">
+<parameter_description> amount of blank space to leave <emphasis>outside</emphasis>
+the container. Valid values are in the range 0-65535 pixels.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_notebook_set_tab_label_text">
<description>
Creates a new label and sets it as the tab label for the page
@@ -12888,23 +13326,6 @@ containing @child.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tool_palette_unset_style">
-<description>
-Unsets a toolbar style set with gtk_tool_palette_set_style(),
-so that user preferences will be used to determine the toolbar style.
-
-Since: 2.20
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="palette">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolPalette
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_calendar_new">
<description>
Creates a new calendar, with the current date being selected.
@@ -12988,25 +13409,6 @@ Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_color_selection_set_has_opacity_control">
-<description>
-Sets the @colorsel to use or not use opacity.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="colorsel">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkColorSelection.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="has_opacity">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE if @colorsel can set the opacity, %FALSE otherwise.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_expander_get_use_markup">
<description>
Returns whether the label's text is interpreted as marked up with
@@ -13059,35 +13461,23 @@ Since: 2.6
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_aspect_frame_set">
+<function name="gtk_spin_button_set_increments">
<description>
-Set parameters for an existing #GtkAspectFrame.
+Sets the step and page increments for spin_button. This affects how
+quickly the value changes when the spin button's arrows are activated.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="aspect_frame">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkAspectFrame
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="xalign">
-<parameter_description> Horizontal alignment of the child within the allocation of
-the #GtkAspectFrame. This ranges from 0.0 (left aligned)
-to 1.0 (right aligned)
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="yalign">
-<parameter_description> Vertical alignment of the child within the allocation of
-the #GtkAspectFrame. This ranges from 0.0 (left aligned)
-to 1.0 (right aligned)
+<parameter name="spin_button">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkSpinButton
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="ratio">
-<parameter_description> The desired aspect ratio.
+<parameter name="step">
+<parameter_description> increment applied for a button 1 press.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="obey_child">
-<parameter_description> If %TRUE, @ratio is ignored, and the aspect
-ratio is taken from the requistion of the child.
+<parameter name="page">
+<parameter_description> increment applied for a button 2 press.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -13122,62 +13512,23 @@ with @first_prop_name
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_accel_map_change_entry">
+<function name="gtk_label_get_max_width_chars">
<description>
-Changes the @accel_key and @accel_mods currently associated with @accel_path.
-Due to conflicts with other accelerators, a change may not always be possible,
- replace indicates whether other accelerators may be deleted to resolve such
-conflicts. A change will only occur if all conflicts could be resolved (which
-might not be the case if conflicting accelerators are locked). Successful
-changes are indicated by a %TRUE return value.
+Retrieves the desired maximum width of @label, in characters. See
+gtk_label_set_width_chars().
-Note that @accel_path string will be stored in a #GQuark. Therefore, if you
-pass a static string, you can save some memory by interning it first with
-g_intern_static_string().
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="accel_path">
-<parameter_description> a valid accelerator path
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="accel_key">
-<parameter_description> the new accelerator key
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="accel_mods">
-<parameter_description> the new accelerator modifiers
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="replace">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE if other accelerators may be deleted upon conflicts
+<parameter name="label">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkLabel
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the accelerator could be changed, %FALSE otherwise
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_container_set_resize_mode">
-<description>
-Sets the resize mode for the container.
-
-The resize mode of a container determines whether a resize request
-will be passed to the container's parent, queued for later execution
-or executed immediately.
+<return> the maximum width of the label in characters.
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="container">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkContainer
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="resize_mode">
-<parameter_description> the new resize mode
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_window_get_has_frame">
@@ -13252,14 +13603,20 @@ on #GtkWidget.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_pop_colormap">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_get_rules_hint">
<description>
-Removes a colormap pushed with gtk_widget_push_colormap().
+Gets the setting set by gtk_tree_view_set_rules_hint().
+
</description>
<parameters>
+<parameter name="tree_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeView
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if rules are useful for the user of this tree
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_rc_get_style">
@@ -13285,6 +13642,22 @@ style around, you should add a reference yourself.
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_wrap_box_get_horizontal_spacing">
+<description>
+Gets the horizontal spacing.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="box">
+<parameter_description> An #GtkWrapBox
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> The horizontal spacing.
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_text_mark_get_name">
<description>
Returns the mark name; returns NULL for anonymous marks.
@@ -13467,67 +13840,6 @@ Returns the tree view associated with @selection.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_list_store_set_valuesv">
-<description>
-A variant of gtk_list_store_set_valist() which
-takes the columns and values as two arrays, instead of
-varargs. This function is mainly intended for
-language-bindings and in case the number of columns to
-change is not known until run-time.
-
-Since: 2.12
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="list_store">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkListStore
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> A valid #GtkTreeIter for the row being modified
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="columns">
-<parameter_description> an array of column numbers
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="values">
-<parameter_description> an array of GValues
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="n_values">
-<parameter_description> the length of the @columns and @values arrays
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_assistant_set_page_title">
-<description>
-Sets a title for @page. The title is displayed in the header
-area of the assistant when @page is the current page.
-
-Since: 2.10
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="assistant">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkAssistant
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="page">
-<parameter_description> a page of @assistant
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="title">
-<parameter_description> the new title for @page
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_print_settings_get_use_color">
<description>
Gets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_USE_COLOR.
@@ -13572,42 +13884,24 @@ visual appearance, it doesn't affect the semantics of the button.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_file_chooser_button_get_width_chars">
-<description>
-Retrieves the width in characters of the @button widget's entry and/or label.
-
-Since: 2.6
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="button">
-<parameter_description> the button widget to examine.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> an integer width (in characters) that the button will use to size itself.
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_cell_renderer_set_padding">
+<function name="gtk_image_set_from_gicon">
<description>
-Sets the renderer's padding.
+See gtk_image_new_from_gicon() for details.
-Since: 2.18
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="cell">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkCellRenderer
+<parameter name="image">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkImage
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="xpad">
-<parameter_description> the x padding of the cell renderer
+<parameter name="icon">
+<parameter_description> an icon
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="ypad">
-<parameter_description> the y padding of the cell renderer
+<parameter name="size">
+<parameter_description> an icon size
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -13671,6 +13965,33 @@ to it, you have to call g_object_ref() on it.
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_page_setup_load_file">
+<description>
+Reads the page setup from the file @file_name.
+See gtk_page_setup_to_file().
+
+Since: 2.14
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="setup">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPageSetup
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="file_name">
+<parameter_description> the filename to read the page setup from
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="error">
+<parameter_description> return location for an error, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE on success
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_widget_set_extension_events">
<description>
Sets the extension events mask to @mode. See #GdkExtensionMode
@@ -13735,25 +14056,22 @@ Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_settings_get">
+<function name="gtk_text_iter_ends_sentence">
<description>
-Looks up the string value associated with @key.
+Determines whether @iter ends a sentence. Sentence boundaries are
+determined by Pango and should be correct for nearly any language
+(if not, the correct fix would be to the Pango text boundary
+algorithms).
-Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="settings">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="key">
-<parameter_description> a key
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the string value for @key
-
+<return> %TRUE if @iter is at the end of a sentence.
</return>
</function>
@@ -13857,20 +14175,44 @@ Since 2.22
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_view_set_pixels_below_lines">
+<function name="gtk_entry_get_current_icon_drag_source">
<description>
-Sets the default number of pixels of blank space
-to put below paragraphs in @text_view. May be overridden
-by tags applied to @text_view's buffer.
+Returns the index of the icon which is the source of the current
+DND operation, or -1.
+
+This function is meant to be used in a #GtkWidget::drag-data-get
+callback.
+
+Since: 2.16
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="text_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextView
+<parameter name="entry">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIconEntry
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="pixels_below_lines">
-<parameter_description> pixels below paragraphs
+</parameters>
+<return> index of the icon which is the source of the current
+DND operation, or -1.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_page_setup_set_paper_size_and_default_margins">
+<description>
+Sets the paper size of the #GtkPageSetup and modifies
+the margins according to the new paper size.
+
+Since: 2.10
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="setup">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPageSetup
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="size">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPaperSize
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -14062,36 +14404,21 @@ wasn't set from an icon name
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_menu_set_accel_path">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_set_resizable">
<description>
-Sets an accelerator path for this menu from which accelerator paths
-for its immediate children, its menu items, can be constructed.
-The main purpose of this function is to spare the programmer the
-inconvenience of having to call gtk_menu_item_set_accel_path() on
-each menu item that should support runtime user changable accelerators.
-Instead, by just calling gtk_menu_set_accel_path() on their parent,
-each menu item of this menu, that contains a label describing its purpose,
-automatically gets an accel path assigned. For example, a menu containing
-menu items "New" and "Exit", will, after
-<literal>gtk_menu_set_accel_path (menu, "<Gnumeric-Sheet>/File");</literal>
-has been called, assign its items the accel paths:
-<literal>"<Gnumeric-Sheet>/File/New"</literal> and <literal>"<Gnumeric-Sheet>/File/Exit"</literal>.
-Assigning accel paths to menu items then enables the user to change
-their accelerators at runtime. More details about accelerator paths
-and their default setups can be found at gtk_accel_map_add_entry().
-
-Note that @accel_path string will be stored in a #GQuark. Therefore, if you
-pass a static string, you can save some memory by interning it first with
-g_intern_static_string().
+If @resizable is %TRUE, then the user can explicitly resize the column by
+grabbing the outer edge of the column button. If resizable is %TRUE and
+sizing mode of the column is #GTK_TREE_VIEW_COLUMN_AUTOSIZE, then the sizing
+mode is changed to #GTK_TREE_VIEW_COLUMN_GROW_ONLY.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="menu">
-<parameter_description> a valid #GtkMenu
+<parameter name="tree_column">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeViewColumn
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="accel_path">
-<parameter_description> a valid accelerator path
+<parameter name="resizable">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE, if the column can be resized
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -14116,29 +14443,6 @@ per pulse is determined by gtk_progress_bar_set_pulse_step()).
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_spin_button_get_range">
-<description>
-Gets the range allowed for @spin_button. See
-gtk_spin_button_set_range().
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="spin_button">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkSpinButton
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="min">
-<parameter_description> location to store minimum allowed value, or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="max">
-<parameter_description> location to store maximum allowed value, or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_label_set_single_line_mode">
<description>
Sets whether the label is in single line mode.
@@ -14159,21 +14463,20 @@ Since: 2.6
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_entry_get_progress_pulse_step">
+<function name="gtk_toolbar_get_icon_size">
<description>
-Retrieves the pulse step set with gtk_entry_set_progress_pulse_step().
+Retrieves the icon size for the toolbar. See gtk_toolbar_set_icon_size().
-Since: 2.16
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="entry">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkEntry
+<parameter name="toolbar">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolbar
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a fraction from 0.0 to 1.0
-
+<return> the current icon size for the icons on
+the toolbar.
</return>
</function>
@@ -14322,66 +14625,85 @@ realized.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_button_get_use_stock">
+<function name="gtk_drag_source_add_image_targets">
<description>
-Returns whether the button label is a stock item.
+Add the writable image targets supported by #GtkSelection to
+the target list of the drag source. The targets
+are added with @info = 0. If you need another value,
+use gtk_target_list_add_image_targets() and
+gtk_drag_source_set_target_list().
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="button">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkButton
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget that's is a drag source
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the button label is used to
-select a stock item instead of being
-used directly as the label text.
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_page_setup_get_right_margin">
+<function name="gtk_wrap_box_set_spreading">
<description>
-Gets the right margin in units of @unit.
-
-Since: 2.10
+Sets the spreading mode for @box's children.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="setup">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPageSetup
+<parameter name="box">
+<parameter_description> An #GtkWrapBox
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="unit">
-<parameter_description> the unit for the return value
+<parameter name="spreading">
+<parameter_description> The #GtkWrapBoxSpreading to use.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the right margin
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_status_icon_new_from_icon_name">
+<function name="gtk_button_get_use_stock">
<description>
-Creates a status icon displaying an icon from the current icon theme.
-If the current icon theme is changed, the icon will be updated
-appropriately.
+Returns whether the button label is a stock item.
-Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="icon_name">
-<parameter_description> an icon name
+<parameter name="button">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkButton
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a new #GtkStatusIcon
-
+<return> %TRUE if the button label is used to
+select a stock item instead of being
+used directly as the label text.
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_text_buffer_get_bounds">
+<description>
+Retrieves the first and last iterators in the buffer, i.e. the
+entire buffer lies within the range [ start,@end).
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="buffer">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextBuffer
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="start">
+<parameter_description> iterator to initialize with first position in the buffer
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="end">
+<parameter_description> iterator to initialize with the end iterator
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_print_job_set_track_print_status">
<description>
If track_status is %TRUE, the print job will try to continue report
@@ -14466,28 +14788,6 @@ Since: 2.10
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_settings_get_int">
-<description>
-Returns the integer value of @key, or 0.
-
-Since: 2.10
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="settings">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="key">
-<parameter_description> a key
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the integer value of @key
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_notebook_get_show_tabs">
<description>
Returns whether the tabs of the notebook are shown. See
@@ -14505,50 +14805,20 @@ gtk_notebook_set_show_tabs().
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_get_tooltip_column">
+<function name="gtk_drag_source_add_text_targets">
<description>
-Returns the column of @tree_view's model which is being used for
-displaying tooltips on @tree_view's rows.
-
-Since: 2.12
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeView
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the index of the tooltip column that is currently being
-used, or -1 if this is disabled.
-
-</return>
-</function>
+Add the text targets supported by #GtkSelection to
+the target list of the drag source. The targets
+are added with @info = 0. If you need another value,
+use gtk_target_list_add_text_targets() and
+gtk_drag_source_set_target_list().
-<function name="gtk_print_context_set_hard_margins">
-<description>
-set the hard margins in pixel coordinates
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="context">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintContext
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="top">
-<parameter_description> top hardware printer margin
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="bottom">
-<parameter_description> bottom hardware printer margin
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="left">
-<parameter_description> left hardware printer margin
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="right">
-<parameter_description> right hardware printer margin
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget that's is a drag source
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -14619,53 +14889,47 @@ pairs, ending with %NULL
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_window_set_geometry_hints">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_set_spacing">
<description>
-This function sets up hints about how a window can be resized by
-the user. You can set a minimum and maximum size; allowed resize
-increments (e.g. for xterm, you can only resize by the size of a
-character); aspect ratios; and more. See the #GdkGeometry struct.
-
+Sets the spacing field of @tree_column, which is the number of pixels to
+place between cell renderers packed into it.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="geometry_widget">
-<parameter_description> widget the geometry hints will be applied to or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="geometry">
-<parameter_description> struct containing geometry information or %NULL
+<parameter name="tree_column">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeViewColumn.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="geom_mask">
-<parameter_description> mask indicating which struct fields should be paid attention to
+<parameter name="spacing">
+<parameter_description> distance between cell renderers in pixels.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_set_spacing">
+<function name="gtk_entry_buffer_new">
<description>
-Sets the spacing field of @tree_column, which is the number of pixels to
-place between cell renderers packed into it.
+Create a new GtkEntryBuffer object.
+
+Optionally, specify initial text to set in the buffer.
+
+Since: 2.18
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_column">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeViewColumn.
+<parameter name="initial_chars">
+<parameter_description> initial buffer text, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="spacing">
-<parameter_description> distance between cell renderers in pixels.
+<parameter name="n_initial_chars">
+<parameter_description> number of characters in @initial_chars, or -1
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> A new GtkEntryBuffer object.
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_label_set_max_width_chars">
@@ -14712,42 +14976,27 @@ Since: 2.8
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_accel_group_connect">
+<function name="gtk_icon_view_path_is_selected">
<description>
-Installs an accelerator in this group. When @accel_group is being activated
-in response to a call to gtk_accel_groups_activate(), @closure will be
-invoked if the @accel_key and @accel_mods from gtk_accel_groups_activate()
-match those of this connection.
-
-The signature used for the @closure is that of #GtkAccelGroupActivate.
+Returns %TRUE if the icon pointed to by @path is currently
+selected. If @path does not point to a valid location, %FALSE is returned.
-Note that, due to implementation details, a single closure can only be
-connected to one accelerator group.
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="accel_group">
-<parameter_description> the accelerator group to install an accelerator in
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="accel_key">
-<parameter_description> key value of the accelerator
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="accel_mods">
-<parameter_description> modifier combination of the accelerator
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="accel_flags">
-<parameter_description> a flag mask to configure this accelerator
+<parameter name="icon_view">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkIconView.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="closure">
-<parameter_description> closure to be executed upon accelerator activation
+<parameter name="path">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreePath to check selection on.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if @path is selected.
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_widget_activate">
@@ -14789,37 +15038,6 @@ not be %TRUE for the widget.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_model_rows_reordered">
-<description>
-Emits the "rows-reordered" signal on @tree_model. This should be called by
-models when their rows have been reordered.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_model">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeModel
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="path">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreePath pointing to the tree node whose children have been
-reordered
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> A valid #GtkTreeIter pointing to the node whose children have been
-reordered, or %NULL if the depth of @path is 0.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="new_order">
-<parameter_description> an array of integers mapping the current position of each child
-to its old position before the re-ordering,
-i.e. @new_order<literal>[newpos] = oldpos</literal>.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_binding_set_by_class">
<description>
This function returns the binding set named after the type name of
@@ -14864,32 +15082,20 @@ moves backward by 0 - @count lines.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_settings_get_double_with_default">
+<function name="gtk_info_bar_get_message_type">
<description>
-Returns the floating point number represented by
-the value that is associated with @key, or @default_val
-if the value does not represent a floating point number.
-
-Floating point numbers are parsed with g_ascii_strtod().
+Returns the message type of the message area.
-Since: 2.10
+Since: 2.18
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="settings">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="key">
-<parameter_description> a key
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="def">
-<parameter_description> the default value
+<parameter name="info_bar">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkInfoBar
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the floating point number associated with @key
+<return> the message type of the message area.
</return>
</function>
@@ -14907,7 +15113,7 @@ Since: 2.4
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="child">
-<parameter_description> a child of @widget
+<parameter_description> a child of @widget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -14975,24 +15181,6 @@ tags in @text_view's buffer.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_unix_dialog_get_selected_printer">
-<description>
-Gets the currently selected printer.
-
-Since: 2.10
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="dialog">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintUnixDialog
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the currently selected printer
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_aspect_frame_new">
<description>
Create a new #GtkAspectFrame.
@@ -15141,95 +15329,95 @@ Gets the visual that will be used to render @widget.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_entry_get_icon_tooltip_text">
+<function name="gtk_accel_group_connect">
<description>
-Gets the contents of the tooltip on the icon at the specified
-position in @entry.
+Installs an accelerator in this group. When @accel_group is being activated
+in response to a call to gtk_accel_groups_activate(), @closure will be
+invoked if the @accel_key and @accel_mods from gtk_accel_groups_activate()
+match those of this connection.
-Since: 2.16
+The signature used for the @closure is that of #GtkAccelGroupActivate.
+
+Note that, due to implementation details, a single closure can only be
+connected to one accelerator group.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="entry">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkEntry
+<parameter name="accel_group">
+<parameter_description> the accelerator group to install an accelerator in
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="icon_pos">
-<parameter_description> the icon position
+<parameter name="accel_key">
+<parameter_description> key value of the accelerator
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="accel_mods">
+<parameter_description> modifier combination of the accelerator
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="accel_flags">
+<parameter_description> a flag mask to configure this accelerator
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="closure">
+<parameter_description> closure to be executed upon accelerator activation
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the tooltip text, or %NULL. Free the returned string
-with g_free() when done.
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_file_filter_add_custom">
+<function name="gtk_color_selection_is_adjusting">
<description>
-Adds rule to a filter that allows files based on a custom callback
-function. The bitfield @needed which is passed in provides information
-about what sorts of information that the filter function needs;
-this allows GTK+ to avoid retrieving expensive information when
-it isn't needed by the filter.
+Gets the current state of the @colorsel.
-Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="filter">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFileFilter
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="needed">
-<parameter_description> bitfield of flags indicating the information that the custom
-filter function needs.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="func">
-<parameter_description> callback function; if the function returns %TRUE, then
-the file will be displayed.
+<parameter name="colorsel">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkColorSelection.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="data">
-<parameter_description> data to pass to @func
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if the user is currently dragging a color around, and %FALSE
+if the selection has stopped.
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_vbox_new">
+<description>
+Creates a new #GtkVBox.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="homogeneous">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE if all children are to be given equal space allotments.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="notify">
-<parameter_description> function to call to free @data when it is no longer needed.
+<parameter name="spacing">
+<parameter_description> the number of pixels to place by default between children.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> a new #GtkVBox.
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_set_device_events">
+<function name="gtk_print_settings_set_n_copies">
<description>
-Sets the device event mask (see #GdkEventMask) for a widget. The event
-mask determines which events a widget will receive from @device. Keep
-in mind that different widgets have different default event masks, and by
-changing the event mask you may disrupt a widget's functionality,
-so be careful. This function must be called while a widget is
-unrealized. Consider gtk_widget_add_device_events() for widgets that are
-already realized, or if you want to preserve the existing event
-mask. This function can't be used with #GTK_NO_WINDOW widgets;
-to get events on those widgets, place them inside a #GtkEventBox
-and receive events on the event box.
+Sets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_N_COPIES.
-Since: 3.0
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="device">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkDevice
+<parameter name="settings">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="events">
-<parameter_description> event mask
+<parameter name="num_copies">
+<parameter_description> the number of copies
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -15334,64 +15522,66 @@ Since: 2.18
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_set_resizable">
+<function name="gtk_menu_set_accel_path">
<description>
-If @resizable is %TRUE, then the user can explicitly resize the column by
-grabbing the outer edge of the column button. If resizable is %TRUE and
-sizing mode of the column is #GTK_TREE_VIEW_COLUMN_AUTOSIZE, then the sizing
-mode is changed to #GTK_TREE_VIEW_COLUMN_GROW_ONLY.
+Sets an accelerator path for this menu from which accelerator paths
+for its immediate children, its menu items, can be constructed.
+The main purpose of this function is to spare the programmer the
+inconvenience of having to call gtk_menu_item_set_accel_path() on
+each menu item that should support runtime user changable accelerators.
+Instead, by just calling gtk_menu_set_accel_path() on their parent,
+each menu item of this menu, that contains a label describing its purpose,
+automatically gets an accel path assigned. For example, a menu containing
+menu items "New" and "Exit", will, after
+<literal>gtk_menu_set_accel_path (menu, "<Gnumeric-Sheet>/File");</literal>
+has been called, assign its items the accel paths:
+<literal>"<Gnumeric-Sheet>/File/New"</literal> and <literal>"<Gnumeric-Sheet>/File/Exit"</literal>.
+Assigning accel paths to menu items then enables the user to change
+their accelerators at runtime. More details about accelerator paths
+and their default setups can be found at gtk_accel_map_add_entry().
+
+Note that @accel_path string will be stored in a #GQuark. Therefore, if you
+pass a static string, you can save some memory by interning it first with
+g_intern_static_string().
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_column">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeViewColumn
+<parameter name="menu">
+<parameter_description> a valid #GtkMenu
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="resizable">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE, if the column can be resized
+<parameter name="accel_path">
+<parameter_description> a valid accelerator path
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_view_get_model">
+<function name="gtk_binding_entry_skip">
<description>
-Returns the model the #GtkIconView is based on. Returns %NULL if the
-model is unset.
+Install a binding on @binding_set which causes key lookups
+to be aborted, to prevent bindings from lower priority sets
+to be activated.
-Since: 2.6
+Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="icon_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkIconView
+<parameter name="binding_set">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkBindingSet to skip an entry of
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> A #GtkTreeModel, or %NULL if none is currently being used.
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_file_chooser_get_preview_file">
-<description>
-Gets the #GFile that should be previewed in a custom preview
-Internal function, see gtk_file_chooser_get_preview_uri().
-
-Since: 2.14
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="chooser">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
+<parameter name="keyval">
+<parameter_description> key value of binding to skip
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="modifiers">
+<parameter_description> key modifier of binding to skip
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the #GFile for the file to preview, or %NULL if no file
-is selected. Free with g_object_unref().
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_print_operation_set_support_selection">
@@ -15562,46 +15752,42 @@ g_slist_free() when you are done with it.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_iter_inside_sentence">
+<function name="gtk_file_chooser_get_select_multiple">
<description>
-Determines whether @iter is inside a sentence (as opposed to in
-between two sentences, e.g. after a period and before the first
-letter of the next sentence). Sentence boundaries are determined
-by Pango and should be correct for nearly any language (if not, the
-correct fix would be to the Pango text boundary algorithms).
+Gets whether multiple files can be selected in the file
+selector. See gtk_file_chooser_set_select_multiple().
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
+<parameter name="chooser">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if @iter is inside a sentence.
+<return> %TRUE if multiple files can be selected.
+
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_iter_compare">
+<function name="gtk_text_iter_inside_sentence">
<description>
-A qsort()-style function that returns negative if @lhs is less than
- rhs, positive if @lhs is greater than @rhs, and 0 if they're equal.
-Ordering is in character offset order, i.e. the first character in the buffer
-is less than the second character in the buffer.
+Determines whether @iter is inside a sentence (as opposed to in
+between two sentences, e.g. after a period and before the first
+letter of the next sentence). Sentence boundaries are determined
+by Pango and should be correct for nearly any language (if not, the
+correct fix would be to the Pango text boundary algorithms).
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="lhs">
+<parameter name="iter">
<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="rhs">
-<parameter_description> another #GtkTextIter
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> -1 if @lhs is less than @rhs, 1 if @lhs is greater, 0 if they are equal
+<return> %TRUE if @iter is inside a sentence.
</return>
</function>
@@ -15684,77 +15870,20 @@ Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_settings_set_page_set">
-<description>
-Sets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_PAGE_SET.
-
-Since: 2.10
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="settings">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="page_set">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPageSet value
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_radio_menu_item_new_from_widget">
-<description>
-Creates a new #GtkRadioMenuItem adding it to the same group as @group.
-
-Since: 2.4
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="group">
-<parameter_description> An existing #GtkRadioMenuItem
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> The new #GtkRadioMenuItem
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_toolbar_get_icon_size">
-<description>
-Retrieves the icon size for the toolbar. See gtk_toolbar_set_icon_size().
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="toolbar">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolbar
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the current icon size for the icons on
-the toolbar.
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_activatable_get_use_action_appearance">
+<function name="gtk_entry_get_progress_pulse_step">
<description>
-Gets whether this activatable should reset its layout
-and appearance when setting the related action or when
-the action changes appearance.
+Retrieves the pulse step set with gtk_entry_set_progress_pulse_step().
Since: 2.16
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="activatable">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkActivatable
+<parameter name="entry">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkEntry
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> whether @activatable uses its actions appearance.
+<return> a fraction from 0.0 to 1.0
</return>
</function>
@@ -15860,6 +15989,31 @@ establishes a grab when shown
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_file_chooser_set_filter">
+<description>
+Sets the current filter; only the files that pass the
+filter will be displayed. If the user-selectable list of filters
+is non-empty, then the filter should be one of the filters
+in that list. Setting the current filter when the list of
+filters is empty is useful if you want to restrict the displayed
+set of files without letting the user change it.
+
+Since: 2.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="chooser">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="filter">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFileFilter
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_status_icon_set_tooltip_text">
<description>
Sets @text as the contents of the tooltip.
@@ -15946,23 +16100,24 @@ Since: 2.18
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_clear_attributes">
+<function name="gtk_file_chooser_get_preview_file">
<description>
-Clears all existing attributes previously set with
-gtk_tree_view_column_set_attributes().
+Gets the #GFile that should be previewed in a custom preview
+Internal function, see gtk_file_chooser_get_preview_uri().
+
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_column">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeViewColumn
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="cell_renderer">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkCellRenderer to clear the attribute mapping on.
+<parameter name="chooser">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the #GFile for the file to preview, or %NULL if no file
+is selected. Free with g_object_unref().
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_text_iter_forward_to_end">
@@ -16004,25 +16159,6 @@ Since: 2.10
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tool_item_get_text_size_group">
-<description>
-Returns the size group used for labels in @tool_item. Custom subclasses of
-#GtkToolItem should call this function and use the size group for labels.
-
-Since: 2.20
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="tool_item">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItem
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> a #GtkSizeGroup
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_tree_model_get_string_from_iter">
<description>
Generates a string representation of the iter. This string is a ':'
@@ -16047,6 +16183,29 @@ Since: 2.2
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_text_iter_ends_line">
+<description>
+Returns %TRUE if @iter points to the start of the paragraph
+delimiter characters for a line (delimiters will be either a
+newline, a carriage return, a carriage return followed by a
+newline, or a Unicode paragraph separator character). Note that an
+iterator pointing to the \n of a \r\n pair will not be counted as
+the end of a line, the line ends before the \r. The end iterator is
+considered to be at the end of a line, even though there are no
+paragraph delimiter chars there.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> an iterator
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> whether @iter is at the end of a line
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_file_chooser_remove_shortcut_folder">
<description>
Removes a folder from a file chooser's list of shortcut folders.
@@ -16076,22 +16235,35 @@ See also: gtk_file_chooser_add_shortcut_folder()
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_image_set_from_icon_set">
+<function name="gtk_aspect_frame_set">
<description>
-See gtk_image_new_from_icon_set() for details.
+Set parameters for an existing #GtkAspectFrame.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="image">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkImage
+<parameter name="aspect_frame">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAspectFrame
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="icon_set">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkIconSet
+<parameter name="xalign">
+<parameter_description> Horizontal alignment of the child within the allocation of
+the #GtkAspectFrame. This ranges from 0.0 (left aligned)
+to 1.0 (right aligned)
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="size">
-<parameter_description> a stock icon size
+<parameter name="yalign">
+<parameter_description> Vertical alignment of the child within the allocation of
+the #GtkAspectFrame. This ranges from 0.0 (left aligned)
+to 1.0 (right aligned)
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="ratio">
+<parameter_description> The desired aspect ratio.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="obey_child">
+<parameter_description> If %TRUE, @ratio is ignored, and the aspect
+ratio is taken from the requistion of the child.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -16173,37 +16345,6 @@ not be modified or freed.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_clipboard_request_text">
-<description>
-Requests the contents of the clipboard as text. When the text is
-later received, it will be converted to UTF-8 if necessary, and
- callback will be called.
-
-The @text parameter to @callback will contain the resulting text if
-the request succeeded, or %NULL if it failed. This could happen for
-various reasons, in particular if the clipboard was empty or if the
-contents of the clipboard could not be converted into text form.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="clipboard">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkClipboard
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="callback">
-<parameter_description> a function to call when the text is received,
-or the retrieval fails. (It will always be called
-one way or the other.)
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="user_data">
-<parameter_description> user data to pass to @callback.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_cell_get_position">
<description>
Obtains the horizontal position and size of a cell in a column. If the
@@ -16269,30 +16410,6 @@ aligned with the menu popup position (only useful for GtkOptionMenu).
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_window_is_active">
-<description>
-Returns whether the window is part of the current active toplevel.
-(That is, the toplevel window receiving keystrokes.)
-The return value is %TRUE if the window is active toplevel
-itself, but also if it is, say, a #GtkPlug embedded in the active toplevel.
-You might use this function if you wanted to draw a widget
-differently in an active window from a widget in an inactive window.
-See gtk_window_has_toplevel_focus()
-
-Since: 2.4
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the window part of the current active window.
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_text_iter_forward_to_line_end">
<description>
Moves the iterator to point to the paragraph delimiter characters,
@@ -16467,30 +16584,6 @@ if no file is selected. Free with g_free()
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_assistant_update_buttons_state">
-<description>
-Forces @assistant to recompute the buttons state.
-
-GTK+ automatically takes care of this in most situations,
-e.g. when the user goes to a different page, or when the
-visibility or completeness of a page changes.
-
-One situation where it can be necessary to call this
-function is when changing a value on the current page
-affects the future page flow of the assistant.
-
-Since: 2.10
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="assistant">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkAssistant
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_radio_action_set_current_value">
<description>
Sets the currently active group member to the member with value
@@ -16512,23 +16605,20 @@ Since: 2.10
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_font_selection_get_face">
+<function name="gtk_im_multicontext_get_context_id">
<description>
-Gets the #PangoFontFace representing the selected font group
-details (i.e. family, slant, weight, width, etc).
+Gets the id of the currently active slave of the @context.
-Since: 2.14
+Since: 2.16
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="fontsel">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFontSelection
+<parameter name="context">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIMMulticontext
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> A #PangoFontFace representing the selected font
-group details. The returned object is owned by @fontsel and
-must not be modified or freed.
+<return> the id of the currently active slave
</return>
</function>
@@ -16637,21 +16727,27 @@ Since: 2.18
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_get_can_focus">
+<function name="gtk_icon_info_get_filename">
<description>
-Determines whether @widget can own the input focus. See
-gtk_widget_set_can_focus().
+Gets the filename for the icon. If the
+%GTK_ICON_LOOKUP_USE_BUILTIN flag was passed
+to gtk_icon_theme_lookup_icon(), there may be
+no filename if a builtin icon is returned; in this
+case, you should use gtk_icon_info_get_builtin_pixbuf().
-Since: 2.18
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+<parameter name="icon_info">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIconInfo
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if @widget can own the input focus, %FALSE otherwise
+<return> the filename for the icon, or %NULL
+if gtk_icon_info_get_builtin_pixbuf() should
+be used instead. The return value is owned by
+GTK+ and should not be modified or freed.
</return>
</function>
@@ -16698,20 +16794,20 @@ group.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_file_chooser_unselect_all">
+<function name="gtk_range_get_value">
<description>
-Unselects all the files in the current folder of a file chooser.
+Gets the current value of the range.
-Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="chooser">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
+<parameter name="range">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkRange
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> current value of the range.
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_entry_buffer_get_text">
@@ -16827,45 +16923,6 @@ in @path, or %NULL
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_theme_add_builtin_icon">
-<description>
-Registers a built-in icon for icon theme lookups. The idea
-of built-in icons is to allow an application or library
-that uses themed icons to function requiring files to
-be present in the file system. For instance, the default
-images for all of GTK+'s stock icons are registered
-as built-icons.
-
-In general, if you use gtk_icon_theme_add_builtin_icon()
-you should also install the icon in the icon theme, so
-that the icon is generally available.
-
-This function will generally be used with pixbufs loaded
-via gdk_pixbuf_new_from_inline().
-
-Since: 2.4
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="icon_name">
-<parameter_description> the name of the icon to register
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="size">
-<parameter_description> the size at which to register the icon (different
-images can be registered for the same icon name
-at different sizes.)
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="pixbuf">
-<parameter_description> #GdkPixbuf that contains the image to use
-for @icon_name.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_cell_editable_editing_done">
<description>
Emits the #GtkCellEditable::editing-done signal.
@@ -16903,18 +16960,28 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_set_vadjustment">
+<function name="gtk_widget_modify_symbolic_color">
<description>
-Sets the #GtkAdjustment for the current vertical aspect.
+Sets a symbolic color for a widget.
+All other style values are left untouched. See also
+gtk_widget_modify_style().
+
+Since: 3.0
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_view">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeView
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="adjustment">
-<parameter_description> The #GtkAdjustment to set, or %NULL
+<parameter name="name">
+<parameter_description> the name of the symbolic color to modify
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="color">
+<parameter_description> the color to assign (does not need to be allocated),
+or %NULL to undo the effect of previous calls to
+of gtk_widget_modify_symbolic_color().
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -17086,14 +17153,26 @@ will disable caching.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_row_reference_free">
+<function name="gtk_text_layout_get_line_yrange">
<description>
-Free's @reference. @reference may be %NULL.
+Find the range of y coordinates for the paragraph containing
+the given iter.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="reference">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeRowReference, or %NULL
+<parameter name="layout">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextLayout
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="y">
+<parameter_description> location to store the top of the paragraph in pixels,
+or %NULL.
+ height location to store the height of the paragraph in pixels,
+or %NULL.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -17124,6 +17203,49 @@ font is selected. You must free this string with g_free().
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_recent_chooser_get_limit">
+<description>
+Gets the number of items returned by gtk_recent_chooser_get_items()
+and gtk_recent_chooser_get_uris().
+
+Since: 2.10
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="chooser">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentChooser
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> A positive integer, or -1 meaning that all items are
+returned.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_action_set_visible">
+<description>
+Sets the ::visible property of the action to @visible. Note that
+this doesn't necessarily mean effective visibility. See
+gtk_action_is_visible()
+for that.
+
+Since: 2.6
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="action">
+<parameter_description> the action object
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="visible">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE to make the action visible
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_cell_view_set_background_color">
<description>
Sets the background color of @view.
@@ -17243,33 +17365,22 @@ g_free().
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_size_request_get_width_for_height">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_get_expand">
<description>
-Retrieves a widget's desired width if it would be given
-the specified @height.
+Return %TRUE if the column expands to take any available space.
-Since: 3.0
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkSizeRequest instance
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="height">
-<parameter_description> the height which is available for allocation
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="minimum_width">
-<parameter_description> location for storing the minimum width, or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="natural_width">
-<parameter_description> location for storing the natural width, or %NULL
+<parameter name="tree_column">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeViewColumn
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE, if the column expands
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_cell_renderer_combo_new">
@@ -17362,23 +17473,97 @@ Like gtk_text_iter_forward_cursor_position(), but moves backward.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_buffer_get_bounds">
+<function name="gtk_calendar_set_detail_func">
<description>
-Retrieves the first and last iterators in the buffer, i.e. the
-entire buffer lies within the range [ start,@end).
+Installs a function which provides Pango markup with detail information
+for each day. Examples for such details are holidays or appointments. That
+information is shown below each day when #GtkCalendar:show-details is set.
+A tooltip containing with full detail information is provided, if the entire
+text should not fit into the details area, or if #GtkCalendar:show-details
+is not set.
+
+The size of the details area can be restricted by setting the
+#GtkCalendar:detail-width-chars and #GtkCalendar:detail-height-rows
+properties.
+
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="buffer">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextBuffer
+<parameter name="calendar">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkCalendar.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="start">
-<parameter_description> iterator to initialize with first position in the buffer
+<parameter name="func">
+<parameter_description> a function providing details for each day.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="end">
-<parameter_description> iterator to initialize with the end iterator
+<parameter name="data">
+<parameter_description> data to pass to @func invokations.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="destroy">
+<parameter_description> a function for releasing @data.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_widget_get_has_tooltip">
+<description>
+Returns the current value of the has-tooltip property. See
+GtkWidget:has-tooltip for more information.
+
+Since: 2.12
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> current value of has-tooltip on @widget.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_page_setup_get_right_margin">
+<description>
+Gets the right margin in units of @unit.
+
+Since: 2.10
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="setup">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPageSetup
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="unit">
+<parameter_description> the unit for the return value
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the right margin
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_drag_source_set_icon_stock">
+<description>
+Sets the icon that will be used for drags from a particular source
+to a stock icon.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="stock_id">
+<parameter_description> the ID of the stock icon to use
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -17501,21 +17686,19 @@ Since: 2.6
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_combo_box_set_add_tearoffs">
+<function name="gtk_tree_path_append_index">
<description>
-Sets whether the popup menu should have a tearoff
-menu item.
-
-Since: 2.6
+Appends a new index to a path. As a result, the depth of the path is
+increased.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="combo_box">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkComboBox
+<parameter name="path">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreePath.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="add_tearoffs">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE to add tearoff menu items
+<parameter name="index_">
+<parameter_description> The index.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -17572,50 +17755,6 @@ use @selection is #GTK_SELECTION_MULTIPLE.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_toggle_tool_button_get_active">
-<description>
-Queries a #GtkToggleToolButton and returns its current state.
-Returns %TRUE if the toggle button is pressed in and %FALSE if it is raised.
-
-Since: 2.4
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="button">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToggleToolButton
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the toggle tool button is pressed in, %FALSE if not
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_page_setup_to_key_file">
-<description>
-This function adds the page setup from @setup to @key_file.
-
-Since: 2.12
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="setup">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPageSetup
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="key_file">
-<parameter_description> the #GKeyFile to save the page setup to
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="group_name">
-<parameter_description> the group to add the settings to in @key_file,
-or %NULL to use the default name "Page Setup"
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_accessible_connect_widget_destroyed">
<description>
This function specifies the callback function to be called when the widget
@@ -17654,42 +17793,20 @@ Since: 2.10
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_box_pack_end">
+<function name="gtk_print_settings_set_quality">
<description>
-Adds @child to @box, packed with reference to the end of @box.
-The @child is packed after (away from end of) any other child
-packed with reference to the end of @box.
+Sets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_QUALITY.
+
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="box">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkBox
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="child">
-<parameter_description> the #GtkWidget to be added to @box
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="expand">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE if the new child is to be given extra space allocated
-to @box. The extra space will be divided evenly between all children
-of @box that use this option
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="fill">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE if space given to @child by the @expand option is
-actually allocated to @child, rather than just padding it. This
-parameter has no effect if @expand is set to %FALSE. A child is
-always allocated the full height of a #GtkHBox and the full width
-of a #GtkVBox. This option affects the other dimension
+<parameter name="settings">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="padding">
-<parameter_description> extra space in pixels to put between this child and its
-neighbors, over and above the global amount specified by
-#GtkBox:spacing property. If @child is a widget at one of the
-reference ends of @box, then @padding pixels are also put between
- child and the reference edge of @box
+<parameter name="quality">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintQuality value
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -17748,6 +17865,34 @@ device, otherwise return %NULL.
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_editable_get_selection_bounds">
+<description>
+Retrieves the selection bound of the editable. start_pos will be filled
+with the start of the selection and @end_pos with end. If no text was
+selected both will be identical and %FALSE will be returned.
+
+Note that positions are specified in characters, not bytes.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="editable">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkEditable
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="start_pos">
+<parameter_description> location to store the starting position, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="end_pos">
+<parameter_description> location to store the end position, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if an area is selected, %FALSE otherwise
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_tree_model_get_path">
<description>
Returns a newly-created #GtkTreePath referenced by @iter. This path should
@@ -17854,38 +17999,6 @@ Sets whether the statusbar has a resize grip.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_application_set_action_group">
-<description>
-Set @group as this application's global action group.
-This will ensure the operating system interface uses
-these actions as follows:
-
-<itemizedlist>
-<listitem>In GNOME 2 this exposes the actions for scripting.</listitem>
-<listitem>In GNOME 3, this function populates the application menu.</listitem>
-<listitem>In Windows prior to version 7, this function does nothing.</listitem>
-<listitem>In Windows 7, this function adds "Tasks" to the Jump List.</listitem>
-<listitem>In Mac OS X, this function extends the Dock menu.</listitem>
-</itemizedlist>
-
-It is an error to call this function more than once.
-
-Since: 3.0
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="app">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkApplication
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="group">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkActionGroup
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_assistant_remove_action_widget">
<description>
Removes a widget from the action area of a #GtkAssistant.
@@ -17927,20 +18040,20 @@ e.g. use 1 to display 1.0, 2 to display 1.00, etc
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_drag_source_add_text_targets">
+<function name="gtk_print_unix_dialog_set_has_selection">
<description>
-Add the text targets supported by #GtkSelection to
-the target list of the drag source. The targets
-are added with @info = 0. If you need another value,
-use gtk_target_list_add_text_targets() and
-gtk_drag_source_set_target_list().
+Sets whether a selection exists.
-Since: 2.6
+Since: 2.18
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget that's is a drag source
+<parameter name="dialog">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintUnixDialog
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="has_selection">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE indicates that a selection exists
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -18012,29 +18125,22 @@ function is used by language bindings.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tool_item_group_insert">
+<function name="gtk_widget_get_state">
<description>
-Inserts @item at @position in the list of children of @group.
+Returns the widget's state. See gtk_widget_set_state().
-Since: 2.20
+Since: 2.18
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="group">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItemGroup
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="item">
-<parameter_description> the #GtkToolItem to insert into @group
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="position">
-<parameter_description> the position of @item in @group, starting with 0.
-The position -1 means end of list.
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the state of @widget.
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_print_settings_get_double">
@@ -18123,20 +18229,30 @@ by default.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_color_button_set_alpha">
+<function name="gtk_print_context_set_hard_margins">
<description>
-Sets the current opacity to be @alpha.
-
-Since: 2.4
+set the hard margins in pixel coordinates
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="color_button">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkColorButton.
+<parameter name="context">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintContext
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="alpha">
-<parameter_description> an integer between 0 and 65535.
+<parameter name="top">
+<parameter_description> top hardware printer margin
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="bottom">
+<parameter_description> bottom hardware printer margin
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="left">
+<parameter_description> left hardware printer margin
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="right">
+<parameter_description> right hardware printer margin
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -18195,6 +18311,25 @@ Since: 2.12
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_text_view_set_left_margin">
+<description>
+Sets the default left margin for text in @text_view.
+Tags in the buffer may override the default.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="text_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextView
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="left_margin">
+<parameter_description> left margin in pixels
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_print_operation_set_defer_drawing">
<description>
Sets up the #GtkPrintOperation to wait for calling of
@@ -18252,22 +18387,25 @@ method to clear the preedit state.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_action_get_visible_horizontal">
+<function name="gtk_target_table_free">
<description>
-Checks whether @action is visible when horizontal
+This function frees a target table as returned by
+gtk_target_table_new_from_list()
-Since: 2.16
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="action">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkAction
+<parameter name="targets">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTargetEntry array
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="n_targets">
+<parameter_description> the number of entries in the array
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> whether @action is visible when horizontal
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_font_button_get_use_font">
@@ -18360,65 +18498,86 @@ Since: 2.6
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_application_add_window">
+<function name="gtk_layout_new">
<description>
-Adds a window to the #GtkApplication.
+Creates a new #GtkLayout. Unless you have a specific adjustment
+you'd like the layout to use for scrolling, pass %NULL for
+ hadjustment and @vadjustment.
-If the user closes all of the windows added to @app, the default
-behaviour is to call gtk_application_quit().
-If your application uses only a single toplevel window, you can
-use gtk_application_get_window(). If you are using a sub-class
-of #GtkApplication you should call gtk_application_create_window()
-to let the #GtkApplication instance create a #GtkWindow and add
-it to the list of toplevels of the application. You should call
-this function only to add #GtkWindow<!-- -->s that you created
-directly using gtk_window_new().
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="hadjustment">
+<parameter_description> horizontal scroll adjustment, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="vadjustment">
+<parameter_description> vertical scroll adjustment, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> a new #GtkLayout
+</return>
+</function>
-Since: 3.0
+<function name="gtk_alignment_set_padding">
+<description>
+Sets the padding on the different sides of the widget.
+The padding adds blank space to the sides of the widget. For instance,
+this can be used to indent the child widget towards the right by adding
+padding on the left.
+
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="app">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkApplication
+<parameter name="alignment">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAlignment
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a toplevel window to add to @app
+<parameter name="padding_top">
+<parameter_description> the padding at the top of the widget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="padding_bottom">
+<parameter_description> the padding at the bottom of the widget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="padding_left">
+<parameter_description> the padding at the left of the widget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="padding_right">
+<parameter_description> the padding at the right of the widget.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_mark_new">
+<function name="gtk_page_setup_to_key_file">
<description>
-Creates a text mark. Add it to a buffer using gtk_text_buffer_add_mark().
-If @name is %NULL, the mark is anonymous; otherwise, the mark can be
-retrieved by name using gtk_text_buffer_get_mark(). If a mark has left
-gravity, and text is inserted at the mark's current location, the mark
-will be moved to the left of the newly-inserted text. If the mark has
-right gravity (@left_gravity = %FALSE), the mark will end up on the
-right of newly-inserted text. The standard left-to-right cursor is a
-mark with right gravity (when you type, the cursor stays on the right
-side of the text you're typing).
+This function adds the page setup from @setup to @key_file.
Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="name">
-<parameter_description> mark name or %NULL
+<parameter name="setup">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPageSetup
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="left_gravity">
-<parameter_description> whether the mark should have left gravity
+<parameter name="key_file">
+<parameter_description> the #GKeyFile to save the page setup to
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="group_name">
+<parameter_description> the group to add the settings to in @key_file,
+or %NULL to use the default name "Page Setup"
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> new #GtkTextMark
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_icon_info_copy">
@@ -18439,23 +18598,30 @@ Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tool_item_get_text_alignment">
+<function name="gtk_print_settings_load_file">
<description>
-Returns the text alignment used for @tool_item. Custom subclasses of
-#GtkToolItem should call this function to find out how text should
-be aligned.
+Reads the print settings from @file_name. If the file could not be loaded
+then error is set to either a #GFileError or #GKeyFileError.
+See gtk_print_settings_to_file().
-Since: 2.20
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tool_item">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItem:
+<parameter name="settings">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="file_name">
+<parameter_description> the filename to read the settings from
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="error">
+<parameter_description> return location for errors, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a #gfloat indicating the horizontal text alignment
-used for @tool_item
+<return> %TRUE on success
</return>
</function>
@@ -18576,23 +18742,26 @@ Since: 2.12
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_cell_renderer_toggle_get_activatable">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_set_fixed_width">
<description>
-Returns whether the cell renderer is activatable. See
-gtk_cell_renderer_toggle_set_activatable().
-
-Since: 2.18
+Sets the size of the column in pixels. This is meaningful only if the sizing
+type is #GTK_TREE_VIEW_COLUMN_FIXED. The size of the column is clamped to
+the min/max width for the column. Please note that the min/max width of the
+column doesn't actually affect the "fixed_width" property of the widget, just
+the actual size when displayed.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="toggle">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkCellRendererToggle
+<parameter name="tree_column">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeViewColumn.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="fixed_width">
+<parameter_description> The size to set @tree_column to. Must be greater than 0.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the cell renderer is activatable.
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_entry_completion_set_minimum_key_length">
@@ -18618,6 +18787,87 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_assistant_set_page_header_image">
+<description>
+Sets a header image for @page. This image is displayed in the header
+area of the assistant when @page is the current page.
+
+Since: 2.10
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="assistant">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAssistant
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="page">
+<parameter_description> a page of @assistant
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="pixbuf">
+<parameter_description> the new header image @page
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_paint_tab">
+<description>
+Draws an option menu tab (i.e. the up and down pointing arrows)
+in the given rectangle on @window using the given parameters.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="style">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="state_type">
+<parameter_description> a state
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="shadow_type">
+<parameter_description> the type of shadow to draw
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="area">
+<parameter_description> clip rectangle, or %NULL if the
+output should not be clipped
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> the widget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="detail">
+<parameter_description> a style detail
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="x">
+<parameter_description> x origin of the rectangle to draw the tab in
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="y">
+<parameter_description> y origin of the rectangle to draw the tab in
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="width">
+<parameter_description> the width of the rectangle to draw the tab in
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="height">
+<parameter_description> the height of the rectangle to draw the tab in
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_container_set_reallocate_redraws">
<description>
Sets the @reallocate_redraws flag of the container to the given value.
@@ -18709,24 +18959,6 @@ Since: 2.12
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_selection_get_select_function">
-<description>
-Returns the current selection function.
-
-Since: 2.14
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="selection">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeSelection.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> The function.
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_entry_completion_insert_prefix">
<description>
Requests a prefix insertion.
@@ -18764,31 +18996,6 @@ Since: 2.6
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_selection_owner_set">
-<description>
-Claims ownership of a given selection for a particular widget,
-or, if @widget is %NULL, release ownership of the selection.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget, or %NULL.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="selection">
-<parameter_description> an interned atom representing the selection to claim
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="time_">
-<parameter_description> timestamp with which to claim the selection
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the operation succeeded
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_entry_completion_set_inline_completion">
<description>
Sets whether the common prefix of the possible completions should
@@ -18829,25 +19036,24 @@ gtk_get_default_language ().
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_file_chooser_add_filter">
+<function name="gtk_tool_palette_set_drag_source">
<description>
-Adds @filter to the list of filters that the user can select between.
-When a filter is selected, only files that are passed by that
-filter are displayed.
-
-Note that the @chooser takes ownership of the filter, so you have to
-ref and sink it if you want to keep a reference.
+Sets the tool palette as a drag source.
+Enables all groups and items in the tool palette as drag sources
+on button 1 and button 3 press with copy and move actions.
+See gtk_drag_source_set().
-Since: 2.4
+Since: 2.20
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="chooser">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
+<parameter name="palette">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolPalette
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="filter">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFileFilter
+<parameter name="targets">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkToolPaletteDragTarget<!-- -->s
+which the widget should support
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -19019,75 +19225,27 @@ Since: 2.6
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_cell_renderer_toggle_set_radio">
-<description>
-If @radio is %TRUE, the cell renderer renders a radio toggle
-(i.e. a toggle in a group of mutually-exclusive toggles).
-If %FALSE, it renders a check toggle (a standalone boolean option).
-This can be set globally for the cell renderer, or changed just
-before rendering each cell in the model (for #GtkTreeView, you set
-up a per-row setting using #GtkTreeViewColumn to associate model
-columns with cell renderer properties).
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="toggle">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkCellRendererToggle
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="radio">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE to make the toggle look like a radio button
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_tree_model_get_iter">
+<function name="gtk_range_get_range_rect">
<description>
-Sets @iter to a valid iterator pointing to @path.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_model">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeModel.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> The uninitialized #GtkTreeIter.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="path">
-<parameter_description> The #GtkTreePath.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE, if @iter was set.
-</return>
-</function>
+This function returns the area that contains the range's trough
+and its steppers, in widget->window coordinates.
-<function name="gtk_icon_view_path_is_selected">
-<description>
-Returns %TRUE if the icon pointed to by @path is currently
-selected. If @path does not point to a valid location, %FALSE is returned.
+This function is useful mainly for #GtkRange subclasses.
-Since: 2.6
+Since: 2.20
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="icon_view">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkIconView.
+<parameter name="range">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkRange
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="path">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreePath to check selection on.
+<parameter name="range_rect">
+<parameter_description> return location for the range rectangle
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if @path is selected.
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_accel_map_add_entry">
@@ -19129,99 +19287,54 @@ g_intern_static_string().
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_buffer_register_serialize_format">
+<function name="gtk_combo_box_set_model">
<description>
-This function registers a rich text serialization @function along with
-its @mime_type with the passed @buffer.
+Sets the model used by @combo_box to be @model. Will unset a previously set
+model (if applicable). If model is %NULL, then it will unset the model.
-Since: 2.10
+Note that this function does not clear the cell renderers, you have to
+call gtk_cell_layout_clear() yourself if you need to set up different
+cell renderers for the new model.
+
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="buffer">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextBuffer
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="mime_type">
-<parameter_description> the format's mime-type
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="function">
-<parameter_description> the serialize function to register
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="user_data">
-<parameter_description> %function's user_data
+<parameter name="combo_box">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkComboBox
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="user_data_destroy">
-<parameter_description> a function to call when @user_data is no longer needed
+<parameter name="model">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeModel
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the #GdkAtom that corresponds to the newly registered
-format's mime-type.
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_theme_lookup_by_gicon">
+<function name="gtk_printer_get_capabilities">
<description>
-Looks up an icon and returns a structure containing
-information such as the filename of the icon.
-The icon can then be rendered into a pixbuf using
-gtk_icon_info_load_icon().
-
-Since: 2.14
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="icon_theme">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkIconTheme
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="icon">
-<parameter_description> the #GIcon to look up
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="size">
-<parameter_description> desired icon size
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="flags">
-<parameter_description> flags modifying the behavior of the icon lookup
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> a #GtkIconInfo structure containing
-information about the icon, or %NULL if the icon
-wasn't found. Free with gtk_icon_info_free()
+Returns the printer's capabilities.
-</return>
-</function>
+This is useful when you're using #GtkPrintUnixDialog's manual-capabilities
+setting and need to know which settings the printer can handle and which
+you must handle yourself.
-<function name="gtk_tool_button_set_label_widget">
-<description>
-Sets @label_widget as the widget that will be used as the label
-for @button. If @label_widget is %NULL the "label" property is used
-as label. If "label" is also %NULL, the label in the stock item
-determined by the "stock_id" property is used as label. If
-"stock_id" is also %NULL, @button does not have a label.
+This will return 0 unless the printer's details are available, see
+gtk_printer_has_details() and gtk_printer_request_details().
-Since: 2.4
+Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="button">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolButton
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="label_widget">
-<parameter_description> the widget used as label, or %NULL
+<parameter name="printer">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrinter
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the printer's capabilities
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_recent_chooser_menu_get_show_numbers">
@@ -19263,27 +19376,21 @@ with g_slist_free(), and the files with g_object_unref().
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_misc_get_alignment">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_get_visible">
<description>
-Gets the X and Y alignment of the widget within its allocation.
-See gtk_misc_set_alignment().
+Returns %TRUE if @tree_column is visible.
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="misc">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkMisc
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="xalign">
-<parameter_description> location to store X alignment of @misc, or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="yalign">
-<parameter_description> location to store Y alignment of @misc, or %NULL
+<parameter name="tree_column">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeViewColumn.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> whether the column is visible or not. If it is visible, then
+the tree will show the column.
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_print_settings_set_printer">
@@ -19307,49 +19414,28 @@ Since: 2.10
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_color_button_get_color">
+<function name="gtk_tree_model_sort_convert_path_to_child_path">
<description>
-Sets @color to be the current color in the #GtkColorButton widget.
-
-Since: 2.4
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="color_button">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkColorButton.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="color">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkColor to fill in with the current color.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
+Converts @sorted_path to a path on the child model of @tree_model_sort.
+That is, @sorted_path points to a location in @tree_model_sort. The
+returned path will point to the same location in the model not being
+sorted. If @sorted_path does not point to a location in the child model,
+%NULL is returned.
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_set_attributes">
-<description>
-Sets the attributes in the list as the attributes of @tree_column.
-The attributes should be in attribute/column order, as in
-gtk_tree_view_column_add_attribute(). All existing attributes
-are removed, and replaced with the new attributes.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_column">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeViewColumn.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="cell_renderer">
-<parameter_description> the #GtkCellRenderer we're setting the attributes of
+<parameter name="tree_model_sort">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeModelSort
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="Varargs">
-<parameter_description> A %NULL-terminated list of attributes.
+<parameter name="sorted_path">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreePath to convert
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> A newly allocated #GtkTreePath, or %NULL
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_file_chooser_error_quark">
@@ -19366,40 +19452,53 @@ Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_source_get_direction">
+<function name="gtk_print_settings_unset">
<description>
-Obtains the text direction this icon source applies to. The return
-value is only useful/meaningful if the text direction is <emphasis>not</emphasis>
-wildcarded.
+Removes any value associated with @key.
+This has the same effect as setting the value to %NULL.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="source">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkIconSource
+<parameter name="settings">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="key">
+<parameter_description> a key
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> text direction this source matches
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_plug_get_socket_window">
+<function name="gtk_cell_layout_pack_start">
<description>
-Retrieves the socket the plug is embedded in.
+Packs the @cell into the beginning of @cell_layout. If @expand is %FALSE,
+then the @cell is allocated no more space than it needs. Any unused space
+is divided evenly between cells for which @expand is %TRUE.
-Since: 2.14
+Note that reusing the same cell renderer is not supported.
+
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="plug">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPlug
+<parameter name="cell_layout">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkCellLayout.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="cell">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkCellRenderer.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="expand">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE if @cell is to be given extra space allocated to @cell_layout.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the window of the socket, or %NULL
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_text_buffer_get_mark">
@@ -19451,27 +19550,21 @@ Since: 2.10
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_paper_size_get_width">
+<function name="gtk_tree_model_sort_reset_default_sort_func">
<description>
-Gets the paper width of the #GtkPaperSize, in
-units of @unit.
-
-Since: 2.10
+This resets the default sort function to be in the 'unsorted' state. That
+is, it is in the same order as the child model. It will re-sort the model
+to be in the same order as the child model only if the #GtkTreeModelSort
+is in 'unsorted' state.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="size">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPaperSize object
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="unit">
-<parameter_description> the unit for the return value
+<parameter name="tree_model_sort">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeModelSort
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the paper width
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_list_store_swap">
@@ -19656,51 +19749,46 @@ signal is emitted with response IDs from #GtkResponseType. See
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_window_get_default_icon_name">
+<function name="gtk_dialog_get_response_for_widget">
<description>
-Returns the fallback icon name for windows that has been set
-with gtk_window_set_default_icon_name(). The returned
-string is owned by GTK+ and should not be modified. It
-is only valid until the next call to
-gtk_window_set_default_icon_name().
+Gets the response id of a widget in the action area
+of a dialog.
-Since: 2.16
+Since: 2.8
</description>
<parameters>
+<parameter name="dialog">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkDialog
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a widget in the action area of @dialog
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the fallback icon name for windows
+<return> the response id of @widget, or %GTK_RESPONSE_NONE
+if @widget doesn't have a response id set.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_set_direction">
+<function name="gtk_window_get_default_icon_name">
<description>
-Sets the reading direction on a particular widget. This direction
-controls the primary direction for widgets containing text,
-and also the direction in which the children of a container are
-packed. The ability to set the direction is present in order
-so that correct localization into languages with right-to-left
-reading directions can be done. Generally, applications will
-let the default reading direction present, except for containers
-where the containers are arranged in an order that is explicitely
-visual rather than logical (such as buttons for text justification).
+Returns the fallback icon name for windows that has been set
+with gtk_window_set_default_icon_name(). The returned
+string is owned by GTK+ and should not be modified. It
+is only valid until the next call to
+gtk_window_set_default_icon_name().
-If the direction is set to %GTK_TEXT_DIR_NONE, then the value
-set by gtk_widget_set_default_direction() will be used.
+Since: 2.16
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="dir">
-<parameter_description> the new direction
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the fallback icon name for windows
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_menu_bar_get_pack_direction">
@@ -19722,30 +19810,24 @@ Since: 2.8
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_entry_get_icon_pixbuf">
+<function name="gtk_im_context_set_cursor_location">
<description>
-Retrieves the image used for the icon.
-
-Unlike the other methods of setting and getting icon data, this
-method will work regardless of whether the icon was set using a
-#GdkPixbuf, a #GIcon, a stock item, or an icon name.
-
-Since: 2.16
+Notify the input method that a change in cursor
+position has been made. The location is relative to the client
+window.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="entry">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkEntry
+<parameter name="context">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIMContext
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="icon_pos">
-<parameter_description> Icon position
+<parameter name="area">
+<parameter_description> new location
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> A #GdkPixbuf, or %NULL if no icon is set for this position.
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_tree_view_set_hadjustment">
@@ -19940,6 +20022,36 @@ submenu is passed.
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_style_lookup_color">
+<description>
+Looks up @color_name in the style's logical color mappings,
+filling in @color and returning %TRUE if found, otherwise
+returning %FALSE. Do not cache the found mapping, because
+it depends on the #GtkStyle and might change when a theme
+switch occurs.
+
+Since: 2.10
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="style">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="color_name">
+<parameter_description> the name of the logical color to look up
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="color">
+<parameter_description> the #GdkColor to fill in
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if the mapping was found.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_recent_chooser_set_show_tips">
<description>
Sets whether to show a tooltips containing the full path of each
@@ -19990,37 +20102,48 @@ the return value is 0.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_selection_data_free">
+<function name="gtk_entry_completion_get_text_column">
<description>
-Frees a #GtkSelectionData structure returned from
-gtk_selection_data_copy().
+Returns the column in the model of @completion to get strings from.
+
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="data">
-<parameter_description> a pointer to a #GtkSelectionData structure.
+<parameter name="completion">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkEntryCompletion
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the column containing the strings
+
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_mount_operation_get_screen">
+<function name="gtk_text_view_forward_display_line">
<description>
-Gets the screen on which windows of the #GtkMountOperation
-will be shown.
+Moves the given @iter forward by one display (wrapped) line.
+A display line is different from a paragraph. Paragraphs are
+separated by newlines or other paragraph separator characters.
+Display lines are created by line-wrapping a paragraph. If
+wrapping is turned off, display lines and paragraphs will be the
+same. Display lines are divided differently for each view, since
+they depend on the view's width; paragraphs are the same in all
+views, since they depend on the contents of the #GtkTextBuffer.
-Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="op">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkMountOperation
+<parameter name="text_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextView
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the screen on which windows of @op are shown
-
+<return> %TRUE if @iter was moved and is not on the end iterator
</return>
</function>
@@ -20110,15 +20233,22 @@ Sets the widget to be monitored by this accelerator label.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_get_default_colormap">
+<function name="gtk_text_iter_starts_sentence">
<description>
-Obtains the default colormap used to create widgets.
+Determines whether @iter begins a sentence. Sentence boundaries are
+determined by Pango and should be correct for nearly any language
+(if not, the correct fix would be to the Pango text boundary
+algorithms).
</description>
<parameters>
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> default widget colormap
+<return> %TRUE if @iter is at the start of a sentence.
</return>
</function>
@@ -20136,12 +20266,12 @@ Unselects all the nodes.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_get_has_window">
+<function name="gtk_widget_set_colormap">
<description>
-Determines whether @widget has a #GdkWindow of its own. See
-gtk_widget_set_has_window().
-
-Since: 2.18
+Sets the colormap for the widget to the given value. Widget must not
+have been previously realized. This probably should only be used
+from an <function>init()</function> function (i.e. from the constructor
+for the widget).
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -20149,10 +20279,12 @@ Since: 2.18
<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
+<parameter name="colormap">
+<parameter_description> a colormap
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if @widget has a window, %FALSE otherwise
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_clipboard_clear">
@@ -20191,30 +20323,6 @@ Since: 2.2
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_cell_renderer_get_alignment">
-<description>
-Fills in @xalign and @yalign with the appropriate values of @cell.
-
-Since: 2.18
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="cell">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkCellRenderer
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="xalign">
-<parameter_description> location to fill in with the x alignment of the cell, or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="yalign">
-<parameter_description> location to fill in with the y alignment of the cell, or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_range_set_lower_stepper_sensitivity">
<description>
Sets the sensitivity policy for the stepper that points to the
@@ -20259,24 +20367,21 @@ See gtk_misc_set_padding().
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_get_child_visible">
+<function name="gtk_selection_data_get_format">
<description>
-Gets the value set with gtk_widget_set_child_visible().
-If you feel a need to use this function, your code probably
-needs reorganization.
-
-This function is only useful for container implementations and
-never should be called by an application.
+Retrieves the format of the selection.
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+<parameter name="selection_data">
+<parameter_description> a pointer to a #GtkSelectionData structure.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the widget is mapped with the parent.
+<return> the format of the selection.
+
</return>
</function>
@@ -20426,29 +20531,6 @@ be popped up or -1, if no monitor has been set
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_hsv_is_adjusting">
-<description>
-An HSV color selector can be said to be adjusting if multiple rapid
-changes are being made to its value, for example, when the user is
-adjusting the value with the mouse. This function queries whether
-the HSV color selector is being adjusted or not.
-
-Since: 2.14
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="hsv">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkHSV
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if clients can ignore changes to the color value,
-since they may be transitory, or %FALSE if they should consider
-the color value status to be final.
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_window_set_keep_above">
<description>
Asks to keep @window above, so that it stays on top. Note that
@@ -20630,6 +20712,24 @@ Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_handle_box_get_snap_edge">
+<description>
+Gets the edge used for determining reattachment of the handle box. See
+gtk_handle_box_set_snap_edge().
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="handle_box">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkHandleBox
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the edge used for determining reattachment, or (GtkPositionType)-1 if this
+is determined (as per default) from the handle position.
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_recent_info_get_icon">
<description>
Retrieves the icon of size @size associated to the resource MIME type.
@@ -20673,50 +20773,6 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_entry_set_icon_from_pixbuf">
-<description>
-Sets the icon shown in the specified position using a pixbuf.
-
-If @pixbuf is %NULL, no icon will be shown in the specified position.
-
-Since: 2.16
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="entry">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkEntry
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="icon_pos">
-<parameter_description> Icon position
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="pixbuf">
-<parameter_description> A #GdkPixbuf, or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_recent_action_get_show_numbers">
-<description>
-Returns the value set by gtk_recent_chooser_menu_set_show_numbers().
-
-Since: 2.12
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="action">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentAction
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if numbers should be shown.
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_scale_get_value_pos">
<description>
Gets the position in which the current value is displayed.
@@ -20847,25 +20903,20 @@ language</link>. See gtk_label_set_use_markup ().
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_iter_get_visible_text">
+<function name="gtk_cell_renderer_toggle_get_active">
<description>
-Like gtk_text_iter_get_text (), but invisible text is not included.
-Invisible text is usually invisible because a #GtkTextTag with the
-"invisible" attribute turned on has been applied to it.
+Returns whether the cell renderer is active. See
+gtk_cell_renderer_toggle_set_active().
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="start">
-<parameter_description> iterator at start of range
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="end">
-<parameter_description> iterator at end of range
+<parameter name="toggle">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkCellRendererToggle
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> string containing visible text in the range
+<return> %TRUE if the cell renderer is active.
</return>
</function>
@@ -20887,32 +20938,89 @@ Sets the shadow type for @frame.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_check_menu_item_set_inconsistent">
+<function name="gtk_container_propagate_expose">
<description>
-If the user has selected a range of elements (such as some text or
-spreadsheet cells) that are affected by a boolean setting, and the
-current values in that range are inconsistent, you may want to
-display the check in an "in between" state. This function turns on
-"in between" display. Normally you would turn off the inconsistent
-state again if the user explicitly selects a setting. This has to be
-done manually, gtk_check_menu_item_set_inconsistent() only affects
-visual appearance, it doesn't affect the semantics of the widget.
+When a container receives an expose event, it must send synthetic
+expose events to all children that don't have their own #GdkWindows.
+This function provides a convenient way of doing this. A container,
+when it receives an expose event, calls gtk_container_propagate_expose()
+once for each child, passing in the event the container received.
+
+gtk_container_propagate_expose() takes care of deciding whether
+an expose event needs to be sent to the child, intersecting
+the event's area with the child area, and sending the event.
+In most cases, a container can simply either simply inherit the
+#GtkWidget::expose implementation from #GtkContainer, or, do some drawing
+and then chain to the ::expose implementation from #GtkContainer.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="check_menu_item">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkCheckMenuItem
+<parameter name="container">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkContainer
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="setting">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE to display an "inconsistent" third state check
+<parameter name="child">
+<parameter_description> a child of @container
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="event">
+<parameter_description> a expose event sent to container
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_text_iter_forward_search">
+<description>
+Searches forward for @str. Any match is returned by setting
+ match_start to the first character of the match and @match_end to the
+first character after the match. The search will not continue past
+ limit Note that a search is a linear or O(n) operation, so you
+may wish to use @limit to avoid locking up your UI on large
+buffers.
+
+If the #GTK_TEXT_SEARCH_VISIBLE_ONLY flag is present, the match may
+have invisible text interspersed in @str. i.e. @str will be a
+possibly-noncontiguous subsequence of the matched range. similarly,
+if you specify #GTK_TEXT_SEARCH_TEXT_ONLY, the match may have
+pixbufs or child widgets mixed inside the matched range. If these
+flags are not given, the match must be exact; the special 0xFFFC
+character in @str will match embedded pixbufs or child widgets.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> start of search
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="str">
+<parameter_description> a search string
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="flags">
+<parameter_description> flags affecting how the search is done
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="match_start">
+<parameter_description> return location for start of match, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="match_end">
+<parameter_description> return location for end of match, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="limit">
+<parameter_description> bound for the search, or %NULL for the end of the buffer
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> whether a match was found
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_icon_view_get_item_row">
<description>
Gets the row in which the item @path is currently
@@ -20956,34 +21064,25 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_window_set_wmclass">
+<function name="gtk_tool_item_get_text_alignment">
<description>
-Don't use this function. It sets the X Window System "class" and
-"name" hints for a window. According to the ICCCM, you should
-always set these to the same value for all windows in an
-application, and GTK+ sets them to that value by default, so calling
-this function is sort of pointless. However, you may want to call
-gtk_window_set_role() on each window in your application, for the
-benefit of the session manager. Setting the role allows the window
-manager to restore window positions when loading a saved session.
+Returns the text alignment used for @tool_item. Custom subclasses of
+#GtkToolItem should call this function to find out how text should
+be aligned.
+Since: 2.20
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="wmclass_name">
-<parameter_description> window name hint
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="wmclass_class">
-<parameter_description> window class hint
+<parameter name="tool_item">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItem:
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> a #gfloat indicating the horizontal text alignment
+used for @tool_item
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_file_chooser_get_filename">
@@ -21127,34 +21226,6 @@ Since: 2.12
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_remove_accelerator">
-<description>
-Removes an accelerator from @widget, previously installed with
-gtk_widget_add_accelerator().
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> widget to install an accelerator on
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="accel_group">
-<parameter_description> accel group for this widget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="accel_key">
-<parameter_description> GDK keyval of the accelerator
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="accel_mods">
-<parameter_description> modifier key combination of the accelerator
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> whether an accelerator was installed and could be removed
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_scrolled_window_get_vadjustment">
<description>
Returns the vertical scrollbar's adjustment, used to connect the
@@ -21320,25 +21391,23 @@ Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_unix_dialog_set_current_page">
+<function name="gtk_entry_completion_get_completion_prefix">
<description>
-Sets the current page number. If @current_page is not -1, this enables
-the current page choice for the range of pages to print.
+Get the original text entered by the user that triggered
+the completion or %NULL if there's no completion ongoing.
-Since: 2.10
+Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="dialog">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintUnixDialog
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="current_page">
-<parameter_description> the current page number.
+<parameter name="completion">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkEntryCompletion
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the prefix for the current completion
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_message_dialog_set_image">
@@ -21448,24 +21517,23 @@ so expect those.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_cell_renderer_get_padding">
+<function name="gtk_widget_set_realized">
<description>
-Fills in @xpad and @ypad with the appropriate values of @cell.
+Marks the widget as being realized.
-Since: 2.18
+This function should only ever be called in a derived widget's
+"realize" or "unrealize" implementation.
+
+Since: 2.20
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="cell">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkCellRenderer
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="xpad">
-<parameter_description> location to fill in with the x padding of the cell, or %NULL
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="ypad">
-<parameter_description> location to fill in with the y padding of the cell, or %NULL
+<parameter name="realized">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE to mark the widget as realized
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -21586,25 +21654,49 @@ g_strfreev() to free it.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_accel_label_set_accel_closure">
+<function name="gtk_tool_button_set_label_widget">
<description>
-Sets the closure to be monitored by this accelerator label. The closure
-must be connected to an accelerator group; see gtk_accel_group_connect().
+Sets @label_widget as the widget that will be used as the label
+for @button. If @label_widget is %NULL the "label" property is used
+as label. If "label" is also %NULL, the label in the stock item
+determined by the "stock_id" property is used as label. If
+"stock_id" is also %NULL, @button does not have a label.
+
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="accel_label">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkAccelLabel
+<parameter name="button">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolButton
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="accel_closure">
-<parameter_description> the closure to monitor for accelerator changes.
+<parameter name="label_widget">
+<parameter_description> the widget used as label, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_menu_bar_get_child_pack_direction">
+<description>
+Retrieves the current child pack direction of the menubar.
+See gtk_menu_bar_set_child_pack_direction().
+
+Since: 2.8
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="menubar">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkMenuBar
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the child pack direction
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_text_tag_get_priority">
<description>
Get the tag priority.
@@ -21680,19 +21772,22 @@ of this function won't own a new reference.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_get_sort_order">
+<function name="gtk_entry_get_progress_fraction">
<description>
-Gets the value set by gtk_tree_view_column_set_sort_order().
+Returns the current fraction of the task that's been completed.
+See gtk_entry_set_progress_fraction().
+Since: 2.16
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_column">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeViewColumn
+<parameter name="entry">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkEntry
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the sort order the sort indicator is indicating
+<return> a fraction from 0.0 to 1.0
+
</return>
</function>
@@ -21716,6 +21811,24 @@ for center, 1.0 for right.
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_radio_menu_item_new_from_widget">
+<description>
+Creates a new #GtkRadioMenuItem adding it to the same group as @group.
+
+Since: 2.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="group">
+<parameter_description> An existing #GtkRadioMenuItem
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> The new #GtkRadioMenuItem
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_radio_action_get_current_value">
<description>
Obtains the value property of the currently active member of
@@ -21803,46 +21916,36 @@ within the preedit string.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_set_can_focus">
+<function name="gtk_text_layout_validate_yrange">
<description>
-Specifies whether @widget can own the input focus. See
-gtk_widget_grab_focus() for actually setting the input focus on a
-widget.
-
-Since: 2.18
+Ensure that a region of a #GtkTextLayout is valid. The ::changed
+signal will be emitted if any lines are validated.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+<parameter name="layout">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextLayout
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="can_focus">
-<parameter_description> whether or not @widget can own the input focus.
+<parameter name="anchor">
+<parameter_description> iter pointing into a line that will be used as the
+coordinate origin
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_progress_bar_get_text">
-<description>
-Retrieves the text displayed superimposed on the progress bar,
-if any, otherwise %NULL. The return value is a reference
-to the text, not a copy of it, so will become invalid
-if you change the text in the progress bar.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="pbar">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkProgressBar
+<parameter name="y0_">
+<parameter_description> offset from the top of the line pointed to by @anchor at
+which to begin validation. (The offset here is in pixels
+after validation.)
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="y1_">
+<parameter_description> offset from the top of the line pointed to by @anchor at
+which to end validation. (The offset here is in pixels
+after validation.)
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> text, or %NULL; this string is owned by the widget
-and should not be modified or freed.
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_list_store_insert_with_values">
@@ -21936,24 +22039,6 @@ Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_activatable_get_related_action">
-<description>
-Gets the related #GtkAction for @activatable.
-
-Since: 2.16
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="activatable">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkActivatable
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the related #GtkAction if one is set.
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_combo_box_set_wrap_width">
<description>
Sets the wrap width of @combo_box to be @width. The wrap width is basically
@@ -21976,46 +22061,65 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_enable_model_drag_source">
+<function name="gtk_target_list_find">
<description>
-Turns @tree_view into a drag source for automatic DND. Calling this
-method sets #GtkTreeView:reorderable to %FALSE.
+Looks up a given target in a #GtkTargetList.
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeView
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="start_button_mask">
-<parameter_description> Mask of allowed buttons to start drag
+<parameter name="list">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTargetList
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="targets">
-<parameter_description> the table of targets that the drag will support
+<parameter name="target">
+<parameter_description> an interned atom representing the target to search for
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="n_targets">
-<parameter_description> the number of items in @targets
+<parameter name="info">
+<parameter_description> a pointer to the location to store application info for target,
+or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="actions">
-<parameter_description> the bitmask of possible actions for a drag from this
-widget
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if the target was found, otherwise %FALSE
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_size_group_get_widgets">
+<description>
+Returns the list of widgets associated with @size_group.
+
+Since: 2.10
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="size_group">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkSizeGroup
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> a #GSList of
+widgets. The list is owned by GTK+ and should not be modified.
+
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_path_free">
+<function name="gtk_widget_set_allocation">
<description>
-Frees @path.
+Sets the widget's allocation. This should not be used
+directly, but from within a widget's size_allocate method.
+
+Since: 2.18
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="path">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreePath.
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="allocation">
+<parameter_description> a pointer to a #GtkAllocation to copy from
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -22182,21 +22286,19 @@ needs, use gtk_spin_button_set_digits() to correct it.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_label_get_use_underline">
+<function name="gtk_icon_source_get_state_wildcarded">
<description>
-Returns whether an embedded underline in the label indicates a
-mnemonic. See gtk_label_set_use_underline().
+Gets the value set by gtk_icon_source_set_state_wildcarded().
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="label">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkLabel
+<parameter name="source">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIconSource
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE whether an embedded underline in the label indicates
-the mnemonic accelerator keys.
+<return> %TRUE if this icon source is a base for any widget state variant
</return>
</function>
@@ -22291,20 +22393,22 @@ that somewhat like strcmp() returning 0 for equality
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_window_set_default_icon_list">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_row_activated">
<description>
-Sets an icon list to be used as fallback for windows that haven't
-had gtk_window_set_icon_list() called on them to set up a
-window-specific icon list. This function allows you to set up the
-icon for all windows in your app at once.
-
-See gtk_window_set_icon_list() for more details.
-
+Activates the cell determined by @path and @column.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="list">
-<parameter_description> (element-type GdkPixbuf) (transfer container) a list of #GdkPixbuf
+<parameter name="tree_view">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeView
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="path">
+<parameter_description> The #GtkTreePath to be activated.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="column">
+<parameter_description> The #GtkTreeViewColumn to be activated.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -22337,34 +22441,6 @@ Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_theme_get_for_screen">
-<description>
-Gets the icon theme object associated with @screen; if this
-function has not previously been called for the given
-screen, a new icon theme object will be created and
-associated with the screen. Icon theme objects are
-fairly expensive to create, so using this function
-is usually a better choice than calling than gtk_icon_theme_new()
-and setting the screen yourself; by using this function
-a single icon theme object will be shared between users.
-
-Since: 2.4
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="screen">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkScreen
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> A unique #GtkIconTheme associated with
-the given screen. This icon theme is associated with
-the screen and can be used as long as the screen
-is open. Do not ref or unref it.
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_file_chooser_set_current_folder_file">
<description>
Sets the current folder for @chooser from a #GFile.
@@ -22427,73 +22503,61 @@ is searched in the current directory.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_operation_get_status_string">
+<function name="gtk_status_icon_set_from_file">
<description>
-Returns a string representation of the status of the
-print operation. The string is translated and suitable
-for displaying the print status e.g. in a #GtkStatusbar.
-
-Use gtk_print_operation_get_status() to obtain a status
-value that is suitable for programmatic use.
+Makes @status_icon display the file @filename.
+See gtk_status_icon_new_from_file() for details.
-Since: 2.10
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="op">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintOperation
+<parameter name="status_icon">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkStatusIcon
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="filename">
+<parameter_description> a filename
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a string representation of the status
-of the print operation
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_page_setup_get_paper_height">
+<function name="gtk_window_begin_resize_drag">
<description>
-Returns the paper height in units of @unit.
-
-Note that this function takes orientation, but
-not margins into consideration.
-See gtk_page_setup_get_page_height().
+Starts resizing a window. This function is used if an application
+has window resizing controls. When GDK can support it, the resize
+will be done using the standard mechanism for the <link
+linkend="gtk-X11-arch">window manager</link> or windowing
+system. Otherwise, GDK will try to emulate window resizing,
+potentially not all that well, depending on the windowing system.
-Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="setup">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPageSetup
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="unit">
-<parameter_description> the unit for the return value
+<parameter name="button">
+<parameter_description> mouse button that initiated the drag
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the paper height.
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_widget_set_realized">
-<description>
-Marks the widget as being realized.
-
-This function should only ever be called in a derived widget's
-"realize" or "unrealize" implementation.
-
-Since: 2.20
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+<parameter name="edge">
+<parameter_description> position of the resize control
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="realized">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE to mark the widget as realized
+<parameter name="root_x">
+<parameter_description> X position where the user clicked to initiate the drag, in root window coordinates
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="root_y">
+<parameter_description> Y position where the user clicked to initiate the drag
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="timestamp">
+<parameter_description> timestamp from the click event that initiated the drag
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -22539,6 +22603,26 @@ Since: 2.6
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_color_button_get_color">
+<description>
+Sets @color to be the current color in the #GtkColorButton widget.
+
+Since: 2.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="color_button">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkColorButton.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="color">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkColor to fill in with the current color.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_action_group_add_action">
<description>
Adds an action object to the action group. Note that this function
@@ -22641,24 +22725,40 @@ Returns %TRUE if the @tree_column can be reordered by the user.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_recent_chooser_set_select_multiple">
+<function name="gtk_notebook_append_page_menu">
<description>
-Sets whether @chooser can select multiple items.
+Appends a page to @notebook, specifying the widget to use as the
+label in the popup menu.
-Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="chooser">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentChooser
+<parameter name="notebook">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkNotebook
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="select_multiple">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE if @chooser can select more than one item
+<parameter name="child">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkWidget to use as the contents of the page.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="tab_label">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkWidget to be used as the label for the page,
+or %NULL to use the default label, 'page N'.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="menu_label">
+<parameter_description> the widget to use as a label for the page-switch
+menu, if that is enabled. If %NULL, and @tab_label
+is a #GtkLabel or %NULL, then the menu label will be
+a newly created label with the same text as @tab_label;
+If @tab_label is not a #GtkLabel, @menu_label must be
+specified if the page-switch menu is to be used.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the index (starting from 0) of the appended
+page in the notebook, or -1 if function fails
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_icon_view_select_path">
@@ -22728,6 +22828,31 @@ Gets the value of a child property for @child and @container.
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_text_buffer_register_deserialize_tagset">
+<description>
+This function registers GTK+'s internal rich text serialization
+format with the passed @buffer. See
+gtk_text_buffer_register_serialize_tagset() for details.
+
+Since: 2.10
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="buffer">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextBuffer
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="tagset_name">
+<parameter_description> an optional tagset name, on %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the #GdkAtom that corresponds to the newly registered
+format's mime-type.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_text_attributes_new">
<description>
Creates a #GtkTextAttributes, which describes
@@ -22903,23 +23028,20 @@ You must free this iter with gtk_tree_iter_free().
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_recent_chooser_get_filter">
+<function name="gtk_action_unblock_activate">
<description>
-Gets the #GtkRecentFilter object currently used by @chooser to affect
-the display of the recently used resources.
+Reenable activation signals from the action
-Since: 2.10
+Since: 2.16
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="chooser">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentChooser
+<parameter name="action">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAction
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a #GtkRecentFilter object.
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_widget_get_tooltip_window">
@@ -22942,28 +23064,50 @@ Since: 2.12
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_selection_data_targets_include_rich_text">
+<function name="gtk_init_with_args">
<description>
-Given a #GtkSelectionData object holding a list of targets,
-determines if any of the targets in @targets can be used to
-provide rich text.
+This function does the same work as gtk_init_check().
+Additionally, it allows you to add your own commandline options,
+and it automatically generates nicely formatted
+<option>--help</option> output. Note that your program will
+be terminated after writing out the help output.
-Since: 2.10
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="selection_data">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkSelectionData object
+<parameter name="argc">
+<parameter_description> a pointer to the number of command line arguments.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="buffer">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextBuffer
+<parameter name="argv">
+<parameter_description> a pointer to the array of command line arguments.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="parameter_string">
+<parameter_description> a string which is displayed in
+the first line of <option>--help</option> output, after
+<literal><replaceable>programname</replaceable> [OPTION...]</literal>
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="entries">
+<parameter_description> a %NULL-terminated array of #GOptionEntry<!-- -->s
+describing the options of your program
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="translation_domain">
+<parameter_description> a translation domain to use for translating
+the <option>--help</option> output for the options in @entries
+and the @parameter_string with gettext(), or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="error">
+<parameter_description> a return location for errors
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if @selection_data holds a list of targets,
-and a suitable target for rich text is included,
-otherwise %FALSE.
+<return> %TRUE if the GUI has been successfully initialized,
+%FALSE otherwise.
</return>
</function>
@@ -23053,27 +23197,6 @@ Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_status_icon_new_from_stock">
-<description>
-Creates a status icon displaying a stock icon. Sample stock icon
-names are #GTK_STOCK_OPEN, #GTK_STOCK_QUIT. You can register your
-own stock icon names, see gtk_icon_factory_add_default() and
-gtk_icon_factory_add().
-
-Since: 2.10
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="stock_id">
-<parameter_description> a stock icon id
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> a new #GtkStatusIcon
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_text_iter_is_cursor_position">
<description>
See gtk_text_iter_forward_cursor_position() or #PangoLogAttr or
@@ -23200,35 +23323,6 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_buffer_get_iter_at_line_index">
-<description>
-Obtains an iterator pointing to @byte_index within the given line.
- byte_index must be the start of a UTF-8 character, and must not be
-beyond the end of the line. Note <emphasis>bytes</emphasis>, not
-characters; UTF-8 may encode one character as multiple bytes.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="buffer">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextBuffer
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> iterator to initialize
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="line_number">
-<parameter_description> line number counting from 0
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="byte_index">
-<parameter_description> byte index from start of line
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_tool_item_get_visible_horizontal">
<description>
Returns whether the @tool_item is visible on toolbars that are
@@ -23249,6 +23343,26 @@ docked horizontally.
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_action_set_visible_horizontal">
+<description>
+Sets whether @action is visible when horizontal
+
+Since: 2.16
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="action">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAction
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="visible_horizontal">
+<parameter_description> whether the action is visible horizontally
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_cell_layout_clear_attributes">
<description>
Clears all existing attributes previously set with
@@ -23455,6 +23569,24 @@ typing.
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_range_get_fill_level">
+<description>
+Gets the current position of the fill level indicator.
+
+Since: 2.12
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="range">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkRange
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> The current fill level
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_box_pack_start">
<description>
Adds @child to @box, packed with reference to the start of @box.
@@ -23592,49 +23724,35 @@ longer found in the model!
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_iter_forward_to_tag_toggle">
+<function name="gtk_notebook_insert_page">
<description>
-Moves forward to the next toggle (on or off) of the
-#GtkTextTag @tag, or to the next toggle of any tag if
- tag is %NULL. If no matching tag toggles are found,
-returns %FALSE, otherwise %TRUE. Does not return toggles
-located at @iter, only toggles after @iter. Sets @iter to
-the location of the toggle, or to the end of the buffer
-if no toggle is found.
+Insert a page into @notebook at the given position.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
+<parameter name="notebook">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkNotebook
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="tag">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextTag, or %NULL
+<parameter name="child">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkWidget to use as the contents of the page.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> whether we found a tag toggle after @iter
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_tooltip_trigger_tooltip_query">
-<description>
-Triggers a new tooltip query on @display, in order to update the current
-visible tooltip, or to show/hide the current tooltip. This function is
-useful to call when, for example, the state of the widget changed by a
-key press.
-
-Since: 2.12
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="display">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkDisplay
+<parameter name="tab_label">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkWidget to be used as the label for the page,
+or %NULL to use the default label, 'page N'.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="position">
+<parameter_description> the index (starting at 0) at which to insert the page,
+or -1 to append the page after all other pages.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the index (starting from 0) of the inserted
+page in the notebook, or -1 if function fails
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_text_buffer_deserialize_set_can_create_tags">
@@ -23715,21 +23833,20 @@ Deprecated: 3.0: Use gtk_size_request_get_size() instead.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_entry_set_progress_pulse_step">
+<function name="gtk_editable_set_editable">
<description>
-Sets the fraction of total entry width to move the progress
-bouncing block for each call to gtk_entry_progress_pulse().
-
-Since: 2.16
+Determines if the user can edit the text in the editable
+widget or not.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="entry">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkEntry
+<parameter name="editable">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkEditable
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="fraction">
-<parameter_description> fraction between 0.0 and 1.0
+<parameter name="is_editable">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE if the user is allowed to edit the text
+in the widget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -23774,26 +23891,22 @@ Since: 2.16
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_arrow_set">
+<function name="gtk_combo_box_get_row_span_column">
<description>
-Sets the direction and style of the #GtkArrow, @arrow.
+Returns the column with row span information for @combo_box.
+
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="arrow">
-<parameter_description> a widget of type #GtkArrow.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="arrow_type">
-<parameter_description> a valid #GtkArrowType.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="shadow_type">
-<parameter_description> a valid #GtkShadowType.
+<parameter name="combo_box">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkComboBox
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the row span column.
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_menu_item_get_accel_path">
@@ -23817,22 +23930,31 @@ functionality, or %NULL if not set
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_settings_get_resolution">
+<function name="gtk_status_icon_set_tooltip_markup">
<description>
-Gets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_RESOLUTION.
+Sets @markup as the contents of the tooltip, which is marked up with
+the <link linkend="PangoMarkupFormat">Pango text markup language</link>.
-Since: 2.10
+This function will take care of setting #GtkStatusIcon:has-tooltip to %TRUE
+and of the default handler for the #GtkStatusIcon::query-tooltip signal.
+
+See also the #GtkStatusIcon:tooltip-markup property and
+gtk_tooltip_set_markup().
+
+Since: 2.16
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="settings">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
+<parameter name="status_icon">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkStatusIcon
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="markup">
+<parameter_description> the contents of the tooltip for @status_icon, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the resolution in dpi
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_radio_menu_item_new_with_mnemonic">
@@ -23895,34 +24017,6 @@ pairs, ending with %NULL
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_image_get_image">
-<description>
-Gets the #GdkImage and mask being displayed by the #GtkImage.
-The storage type of the image must be %GTK_IMAGE_EMPTY or
-%GTK_IMAGE_IMAGE (see gtk_image_get_storage_type()).
-The caller of this function does not own a reference to the
-returned image and mask.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="image">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkImage
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="gdk_image">
-<parameter_description> return location for
-a #GtkImage, or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="mask">
-<parameter_description> return location for a
-#GdkBitmap, or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_window_group_add_window">
<description>
Adds a window to a #GtkWindowGroup.
@@ -23985,20 +24079,68 @@ Since: 2.2
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_rc_get_im_module_file">
+<function name="gtk_tool_button_get_label_widget">
<description>
-Obtains the path to the IM modules file. See the documentation
-of the <link linkend="im-module-file"><envar>GTK_IM_MODULE_FILE</envar></link>
-environment variable for more details.
+Returns the widget used as label on @button. See
+gtk_tool_button_set_label_widget().
+
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
+<parameter name="button">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolButton
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a newly-allocated string containing the name of the file
-listing the IM modules available for loading
+<return> The widget used as label on @button, or %NULL.
+
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_message_dialog_format_secondary_markup">
+<description>
+Sets the secondary text of the message dialog to be @message_format (with
+printf()-style), which is marked up with the
+<link linkend="PangoMarkupFormat">Pango text markup language</link>.
+
+Note that setting a secondary text makes the primary text become
+bold, unless you have provided explicit markup.
+
+Due to an oversight, this function does not escape special XML characters
+like gtk_message_dialog_new_with_markup() does. Thus, if the arguments
+may contain special XML characters, you should use g_markup_printf_escaped()
+to escape it.
+
+<informalexample><programlisting>
+gchar *msg;
+
+msg = g_markup_printf_escaped (message_format, ...);
+gtk_message_dialog_format_secondary_markup (message_dialog, "%s", msg);
+g_free (msg);
+</programlisting></informalexample>
+
+Since: 2.6
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="message_dialog">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkMessageDialog
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="message_format">
+<parameter_description> printf()-style markup string (see
+ <link linkend="PangoMarkupFormat">Pango markup format</link>), or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="Varargs">
+<parameter_description> arguments for @message_format
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_text_iter_get_pixbuf">
<description>
If the element at @iter is a pixbuf, the pixbuf is returned
@@ -24017,48 +24159,60 @@ If the element at @iter is a pixbuf, the pixbuf is returned
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_page_setup_get_page_width">
+<function name="gtk_spin_button_set_adjustment">
<description>
-Returns the page width in units of @unit.
-
-Note that this function takes orientation and
-margins into consideration.
-See gtk_page_setup_get_paper_width().
-
-Since: 2.10
+Replaces the #GtkAdjustment associated with @spin_button.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="setup">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPageSetup
+<parameter name="spin_button">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkSpinButton
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="unit">
-<parameter_description> the unit for the return value
+<parameter name="adjustment">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAdjustment to replace the existing adjustment
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the page width.
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_printer_get_location">
+<function name="gtk_mount_operation_set_parent">
<description>
-Returns a description of the location of the printer.
+Sets the transient parent for windows shown by the
+#GtkMountOperation.
-Since: 2.10
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="printer">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrinter
+<parameter name="op">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkMountOperation
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="parent">
+<parameter_description> transient parent of the window, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the location of @printer
+<return></return>
+</function>
-</return>
+<function name="gtk_widget_ensure_style">
+<description>
+Ensures that @widget has a style (@widget->style). Not a very useful
+function; most of the time, if you want the style, the widget is
+realized, and realized widgets are guaranteed to have a style
+already.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_range_set_slider_size_fixed">
@@ -24306,19 +24460,23 @@ has been set to the resulting #GtkRequisition.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_buffer_new">
+<function name="gtk_recent_info_get_age">
<description>
-Creates a new text buffer.
+Gets the number of days elapsed since the last update of the resource
+pointed by @info.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="table">
-<parameter_description> a tag table, or %NULL to create a new one
+<parameter name="info">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentInfo
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a new text buffer
+<return> a positive integer containing the number of days elapsed
+since the time this resource was last modified.
+
</return>
</function>
@@ -24364,21 +24522,43 @@ Since: 2.18
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_notebook_prev_page">
+<function name="gtk_tool_item_group_set_label">
<description>
-Switches to the previous page. Nothing happens if the current page
-is the first page.
+Sets the label of the tool item group. The label is displayed in the header
+of the group.
+
+Since: 2.20
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="notebook">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkNotebook
+<parameter name="group">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItemGroup
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="label">
+<parameter_description> the new human-readable label of of the group
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_accel_group_from_accel_closure">
+<description>
+Finds the #GtkAccelGroup to which @closure is connected;
+see gtk_accel_group_connect().
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="closure">
+<parameter_description> a #GClosure
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the #GtkAccelGroup to which @closure is connected, or %NULL.
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_recent_chooser_set_filter">
<description>
Sets @filter as the current #GtkRecentFilter object used by @chooser
@@ -24559,27 +24739,36 @@ if there's no ancestor.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_action_set_visible">
+<function name="gtk_widget_get_clipboard">
<description>
-Sets the ::visible property of the action to @visible. Note that
-this doesn't necessarily mean effective visibility. See
-gtk_action_is_visible()
-for that.
+Returns the clipboard object for the given selection to
+be used with @widget. @widget must have a #GdkDisplay
+associated with it, so must be attached to a toplevel
+window.
-Since: 2.6
+Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="action">
-<parameter_description> the action object
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="visible">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE to make the action visible
+<parameter name="selection">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkAtom which identifies the clipboard
+to use. %GDK_SELECTION_CLIPBOARD gives the
+default clipboard. Another common value
+is %GDK_SELECTION_PRIMARY, which gives
+the primary X selection.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the appropriate clipboard object. If no
+clipboard already exists, a new one will
+be created. Once a clipboard object has
+been created, it is persistent for all time.
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_printer_get_backend">
@@ -24664,28 +24853,6 @@ the default "Print Settings"
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_image_set_from_stock">
-<description>
-See gtk_image_new_from_stock() for details.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="image">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkImage
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="stock_id">
-<parameter_description> a stock icon name
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="size">
-<parameter_description> a stock icon size
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_statusbar_get_message_area">
<description>
Retrieves the box containing the label widget.
@@ -24754,19 +24921,22 @@ functionality.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_spin_button_get_value">
+<function name="gtk_entry_completion_get_inline_completion">
<description>
-Get the value in the @spin_button.
+Returns whether the common prefix of the possible completions should
+be automatically inserted in the entry.
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="spin_button">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkSpinButton
+<parameter name="completion">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkEntryCompletion
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the value of @spin_button
+<return> %TRUE if inline completion is turned on
+
</return>
</function>
@@ -24869,20 +25039,14 @@ may be %NULL
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_get_rules_hint">
+<function name="gtk_widget_pop_colormap">
<description>
-Gets the setting set by gtk_tree_view_set_rules_hint().
-
+Removes a colormap pushed with gtk_widget_push_colormap().
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeView
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if rules are useful for the user of this tree
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_paper_size_copy">
@@ -24941,6 +25105,32 @@ gtk_text_buffer_insert_with_tags() is just a convenience function.
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_tree_store_prepend">
+<description>
+Prepends a new row to @tree_store. If @parent is non-%NULL, then it will prepend
+the new row before the first child of @parent, otherwise it will prepend a row
+to the top level. @iter will be changed to point to this new row. The row
+will be empty after this function is called. To fill in values, you need to
+call gtk_tree_store_set() or gtk_tree_store_set_value().
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="tree_store">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeStore
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> An unset #GtkTreeIter to set to the prepended row
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="parent">
+<parameter_description> A valid #GtkTreeIter, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_spin_button_get_increments">
<description>
Gets the current step and page the increments used by @spin_button. See
@@ -24984,22 +25174,25 @@ Since: 2.10
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_iter_ends_sentence">
+<function name="gtk_print_settings_get">
<description>
-Determines whether @iter ends a sentence. Sentence boundaries are
-determined by Pango and should be correct for nearly any language
-(if not, the correct fix would be to the Pango text boundary
-algorithms).
+Looks up the string value associated with @key.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
+<parameter name="settings">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="key">
+<parameter_description> a key
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if @iter is at the end of a sentence.
+<return> the string value for @key
+
</return>
</function>
@@ -25050,6 +25243,28 @@ Since: 2.10
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_expander_set_label_fill">
+<description>
+Sets whether the label widget should fill all available horizontal space
+allocated to @expander.
+
+Since: 2.22
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="expander">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkExpander
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="label_fill">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE if the label should should fill all available horizontal
+space
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_label_set_ellipsize">
<description>
Sets the mode used to ellipsize (add an ellipsis: "...") to the text
@@ -25112,9 +25327,9 @@ Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_settings_get_duplex">
+<function name="gtk_print_settings_get_int">
<description>
-Gets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_DUPLEX.
+Returns the integer value of @key, or 0.
Since: 2.10
@@ -25124,30 +25339,14 @@ Since: 2.10
<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> whether to print the output in duplex.
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_text_view_set_editable">
-<description>
-Sets the default editability of the #GtkTextView. You can override
-this default setting with tags in the buffer, using the "editable"
-attribute of tags.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="text_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextView
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="setting">
-<parameter_description> whether it's editable
+<parameter name="key">
+<parameter_description> a key
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the integer value of @key
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_window_set_decorated">
@@ -25179,23 +25378,68 @@ policy involved.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_get_expander_column">
+<function name="gtk_tool_item_group_get_label">
<description>
-Returns the column that is the current expander column. This
-column has the expander arrow drawn next to it.
+Gets the label of @group.
+Since: 2.20
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_view">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeView
+<parameter name="group">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItemGroup
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> The expander column.
+<return> the label of @group. The label is an internal string of @group
+and must not be modified. Note that %NULL is returned if a custom
+label has been set with gtk_tool_item_group_set_label_widget()
+
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_box_pack_end">
+<description>
+Adds @child to @box, packed with reference to the end of @box.
+The @child is packed after (away from end of) any other child
+packed with reference to the end of @box.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="box">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkBox
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="child">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkWidget to be added to @box
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="expand">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE if the new child is to be given extra space allocated
+to @box. The extra space will be divided evenly between all children
+of @box that use this option
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="fill">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE if space given to @child by the @expand option is
+actually allocated to @child, rather than just padding it. This
+parameter has no effect if @expand is set to %FALSE. A child is
+always allocated the full height of a #GtkHBox and the full width
+of a #GtkVBox. This option affects the other dimension
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="padding">
+<parameter_description> extra space in pixels to put between this child and its
+neighbors, over and above the global amount specified by
+#GtkBox:spacing property. If @child is a widget at one of the
+reference ends of @box, then @padding pixels are also put between
+ child and the reference edge of @box
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_info_bar_get_content_area">
<description>
Returns the content area of @info_bar.
@@ -25214,44 +25458,53 @@ Since: 2.18
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_info_bar_get_message_type">
+<function name="gtk_print_settings_get_double_with_default">
<description>
-Returns the message type of the message area.
+Returns the floating point number represented by
+the value that is associated with @key, or @default_val
+if the value does not represent a floating point number.
-Since: 2.18
+Floating point numbers are parsed with g_ascii_strtod().
+
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="info_bar">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkInfoBar
+<parameter name="settings">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="key">
+<parameter_description> a key
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="def">
+<parameter_description> the default value
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the message type of the message area.
+<return> the floating point number associated with @key
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_view_get_default_attributes">
+<function name="gtk_status_icon_new_from_icon_name">
<description>
-Obtains a copy of the default text attributes. These are the
-attributes used for text unless a tag overrides them.
-You'd typically pass the default attributes in to
-gtk_text_iter_get_attributes() in order to get the
-attributes in effect at a given text position.
-
-The return value is a copy owned by the caller of this function,
-and should be freed.
+Creates a status icon displaying an icon from the current icon theme.
+If the current icon theme is changed, the icon will be updated
+appropriately.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="text_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextView
+<parameter name="icon_name">
+<parameter_description> an icon name
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a new #GtkTextAttributes
+<return> a new #GtkStatusIcon
+
</return>
</function>
@@ -25366,50 +25619,20 @@ unrefd.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_settings_set_n_copies">
+<function name="gtk_text_tag_table_get_size">
<description>
-Sets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_N_COPIES.
-
-Since: 2.10
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="settings">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="num_copies">
-<parameter_description> the number of copies
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
+Returns the size of the table (number of tags)
-<function name="gtk_image_get_icon_set">
-<description>
-Gets the icon set and size being displayed by the #GtkImage.
-The storage type of the image must be %GTK_IMAGE_EMPTY or
-%GTK_IMAGE_ICON_SET (see gtk_image_get_storage_type()).
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="image">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkImage
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="icon_set">
-<parameter_description> location to store a
-#GtkIconSet, or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="size">
-<parameter_description> location to store a stock
-icon size, or %NULL
+<parameter name="table">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextTagTable
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> number of tags in @table
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_entry_im_context_filter_keypress">
@@ -25443,23 +25666,24 @@ Since: 2.22
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_has_rc_style">
+<function name="gtk_menu_bar_set_child_pack_direction">
<description>
-Determines if the widget style has been looked up through the rc mechanism.
+Sets how widgets should be packed inside the children of a menubar.
-Since: 2.20
+Since: 2.8
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+<parameter name="menubar">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkMenuBar
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="child_pack_dir">
+<parameter_description> a new #GtkPackDirection
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the widget has been looked up through the rc
-mechanism, %FALSE otherwise.
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_entry_set_alignment">
@@ -25576,21 +25800,39 @@ Since: 2.12
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_about_dialog_set_artists">
+<function name="gtk_icon_theme_add_builtin_icon">
<description>
-Sets the strings which are displayed in the artists tab
-of the secondary credits dialog.
+Registers a built-in icon for icon theme lookups. The idea
+of built-in icons is to allow an application or library
+that uses themed icons to function requiring files to
+be present in the file system. For instance, the default
+images for all of GTK+'s stock icons are registered
+as built-icons.
-Since: 2.6
+In general, if you use gtk_icon_theme_add_builtin_icon()
+you should also install the icon in the icon theme, so
+that the icon is generally available.
+
+This function will generally be used with pixbufs loaded
+via gdk_pixbuf_new_from_inline().
+
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="about">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkAboutDialog
+<parameter name="icon_name">
+<parameter_description> the name of the icon to register
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="artists">
-<parameter_description> a %NULL-terminated array of strings
+<parameter name="size">
+<parameter_description> the size at which to register the icon (different
+images can be registered for the same icon name
+at different sizes.)
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="pixbuf">
+<parameter_description> #GdkPixbuf that contains the image to use
+for @icon_name.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -25646,14 +25888,22 @@ Removes a focus chain explicitly set with gtk_container_set_focus_chain().
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_reset_shapes">
+<function name="gtk_about_dialog_set_logo_icon_name">
<description>
-Recursively resets the shape on this widget and its descendants.
+Sets the pixbuf to be displayed as logo in the about dialog.
+If it is %NULL, the default window icon set with
+gtk_window_set_default_icon() will be used.
+
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+<parameter name="about">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAboutDialog
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="icon_name">
+<parameter_description> an icon name, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -25733,64 +25983,42 @@ Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_file_chooser_get_preview_uri">
+<function name="gtk_scrolled_window_set_placement">
<description>
-Gets the URI that should be previewed in a custom preview
-widget. See gtk_file_chooser_set_preview_widget().
-
-Since: 2.4
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="chooser">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the URI for the file to preview, or %NULL if no file is
-selected. Free with g_free().
-
-</return>
-</function>
+Sets the placement of the contents with respect to the scrollbars
+for the scrolled window.
-<function name="gtk_assistant_set_current_page">
-<description>
-Switches the page to @page_num. Note that this will only be necessary
-in custom buttons, as the @assistant flow can be set with
-gtk_assistant_set_forward_page_func().
+The default is %GTK_CORNER_TOP_LEFT, meaning the child is
+in the top left, with the scrollbars underneath and to the right.
+Other values in #GtkCornerType are %GTK_CORNER_TOP_RIGHT,
+%GTK_CORNER_BOTTOM_LEFT, and %GTK_CORNER_BOTTOM_RIGHT.
-Since: 2.10
+See also gtk_scrolled_window_get_placement() and
+gtk_scrolled_window_unset_placement().
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="assistant">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkAssistant
+<parameter name="scrolled_window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkScrolledWindow
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="page_num">
-<parameter_description> index of the page to switch to, starting from 0.
-If negative, the last page will be used. If greater
-than the number of pages in the @assistant, nothing
-will be done.
+<parameter name="window_placement">
+<parameter_description> position of the child window
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_view_set_left_margin">
+<function name="gtk_editable_copy_clipboard">
<description>
-Sets the default left margin for text in @text_view.
-Tags in the buffer may override the default.
+Copies the contents of the currently selected content in the editable and
+puts it on the clipboard.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="text_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextView
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="left_margin">
-<parameter_description> left margin in pixels
+<parameter name="editable">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkEditable
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -25817,30 +26045,22 @@ Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_selection_data_set_text">
+<function name="gtk_cell_renderer_toggle_get_activatable">
<description>
-Sets the contents of the selection from a UTF-8 encoded string.
-The string is converted to the form determined by
- selection_data->target.
+Returns whether the cell renderer is activatable. See
+gtk_cell_renderer_toggle_set_activatable().
+Since: 2.18
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="selection_data">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkSelectionData
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="str">
-<parameter_description> a UTF-8 string
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="len">
-<parameter_description> the length of @str, or -1 if @str is nul-terminated.
+<parameter name="toggle">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkCellRendererToggle
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the selection was successfully set,
-otherwise %FALSE.
+<return> %TRUE if the cell renderer is activatable.
+
</return>
</function>
@@ -25989,65 +26209,73 @@ does not point to a valid location, %FALSE is returned
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_dialog_get_response_for_widget">
+<function name="gtk_cell_view_get_desired_width_of_row">
<description>
-Gets the response id of a widget in the action area
-of a dialog.
+Sets @minimum_size and @natural_size to the width desired by @cell_view
+to display the model row pointed to by @path.
-Since: 2.8
+Since: 3.0
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="dialog">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkDialog
+<parameter name="cell_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkCellView
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a widget in the action area of @dialog
+<parameter name="path">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTreePath
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="minimum_size">
+<parameter_description> location to store the minimum size
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="natural_size">
+<parameter_description> location to store the natural size
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the response id of @widget, or %GTK_RESPONSE_NONE
-if @widget doesn't have a response id set.
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_im_context_set_cursor_location">
+<function name="gtk_range_get_inverted">
<description>
-Notify the input method that a change in cursor
-position has been made. The location is relative to the client
-window.
+Gets the value set by gtk_range_set_inverted().
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="context">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkIMContext
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="area">
-<parameter_description> new location
+<parameter name="range">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkRange
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if the range is inverted
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_about_dialog_set_program_name">
+<function name="gtk_widget_set_window">
<description>
-Sets the name to display in the about dialog.
-If this is not set, it defaults to g_get_application_name().
+Sets a widget's window. This function should only be used in a
+widget's GtkWidget::realize() implementation. The %window passed is
+usually either new window created with gdk_window_new(), or the
+window of its parent widget as returned by
+gtk_widget_get_parent_window().
-Since: 2.12
+Widgets must indicate whether they will create their own #GdkWindow
+by calling gtk_widget_set_has_window(). This is usually done in the
+widget's init() function.
+
+Since: 2.18
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="about">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkAboutDialog
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="name">
-<parameter_description> the program name
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -26099,6 +26327,29 @@ mnemonics on menu items on the overflow menu.
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_file_chooser_get_filenames">
+<description>
+Lists all the selected files and subfolders in the current folder of
+ chooser The returned names are full absolute paths. If files in the current
+folder cannot be represented as local filenames they will be ignored. (See
+gtk_file_chooser_get_uris())
+
+Since: 2.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="chooser">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> a #GSList containing the filenames of all selected
+files and subfolders in the current folder. Free the returned list
+with g_slist_free(), and the filenames with g_free().
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_page_setup_unix_dialog_new">
<description>
Creates a new page setup dialog.
@@ -26121,6 +26372,27 @@ Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_expand_to_path">
+<description>
+Expands the row at @path. This will also expand all parent rows of
+ path as necessary.
+
+Since: 2.2
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="tree_view">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeView.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="path">
+<parameter_description> path to a row.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_table_get_row_spacing">
<description>
Gets the amount of space between row @row, and
@@ -26223,72 +26495,6 @@ Since: 2.16
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_window_get_size">
-<description>
-Obtains the current size of @window. If @window is not onscreen,
-it returns the size GTK+ will suggest to the <link
-linkend="gtk-X11-arch">window manager</link> for the initial window
-size (but this is not reliably the same as the size the window
-manager will actually select). The size obtained by
-gtk_window_get_size() is the last size received in a
-#GdkEventConfigure, that is, GTK+ uses its locally-stored size,
-rather than querying the X server for the size. As a result, if you
-call gtk_window_resize() then immediately call
-gtk_window_get_size(), the size won't have taken effect yet. After
-the window manager processes the resize request, GTK+ receives
-notification that the size has changed via a configure event, and
-the size of the window gets updated.
-
-Note 1: Nearly any use of this function creates a race condition,
-because the size of the window may change between the time that you
-get the size and the time that you perform some action assuming
-that size is the current size. To avoid race conditions, connect to
-"configure-event" on the window and adjust your size-dependent
-state to match the size delivered in the #GdkEventConfigure.
-
-Note 2: The returned size does <emphasis>not</emphasis> include the
-size of the window manager decorations (aka the window frame or
-border). Those are not drawn by GTK+ and GTK+ has no reliable
-method of determining their size.
-
-Note 3: If you are getting a window size in order to position
-the window onscreen, there may be a better way. The preferred
-way is to simply set the window's semantic type with
-gtk_window_set_type_hint(), which allows the window manager to
-e.g. center dialogs. Also, if you set the transient parent of
-dialogs with gtk_window_set_transient_for() window managers
-will often center the dialog over its parent window. It's
-much preferred to let the window manager handle these
-things rather than doing it yourself, because all apps will
-behave consistently and according to user prefs if the window
-manager handles it. Also, the window manager can take the size
-of the window decorations/border into account, while your
-application cannot.
-
-In any case, if you insist on application-specified window
-positioning, there's <emphasis>still</emphasis> a better way than
-doing it yourself - gtk_window_set_position() will frequently
-handle the details for you.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="width">
-<parameter_description> return location for width, or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="height">
-<parameter_description> return location for height, or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_rc_reset_styles">
<description>
This function recomputes the styles for all widgets that use a
@@ -26339,22 +26545,19 @@ you can't place the same widget inside two different containers.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_entry_get_progress_fraction">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_get_sort_order">
<description>
-Returns the current fraction of the task that's been completed.
-See gtk_entry_set_progress_fraction().
+Gets the value set by gtk_tree_view_column_set_sort_order().
-Since: 2.16
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="entry">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkEntry
+<parameter name="tree_column">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeViewColumn
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a fraction from 0.0 to 1.0
-
+<return> the sort order the sort indicator is indicating
</return>
</function>
@@ -26398,26 +26601,6 @@ Since: 2.8
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_get_search_entry">
-<description>
-Returns the #GtkEntry which is currently in use as interactive search
-entry for @tree_view. In case the built-in entry is being used, %NULL
-will be returned.
-
-Since: 2.10
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_view">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeView
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the entry currently in use as search entry.
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_button_box_set_child_secondary">
<description>
Sets whether @child should appear in a secondary group of children.
@@ -26474,6 +26657,24 @@ Since: 2.20
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_label_get_use_underline">
+<description>
+Returns whether an embedded underline in the label indicates a
+mnemonic. See gtk_label_set_use_underline().
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="label">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkLabel
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE whether an embedded underline in the label indicates
+the mnemonic accelerator keys.
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_print_operation_preview_is_selected">
<description>
Returns whether the given page is included in the set of pages that
@@ -26497,6 +26698,34 @@ Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_icon_theme_get_for_screen">
+<description>
+Gets the icon theme object associated with @screen; if this
+function has not previously been called for the given
+screen, a new icon theme object will be created and
+associated with the screen. Icon theme objects are
+fairly expensive to create, so using this function
+is usually a better choice than calling than gtk_icon_theme_new()
+and setting the screen yourself; by using this function
+a single icon theme object will be shared between users.
+
+Since: 2.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="screen">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkScreen
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> A unique #GtkIconTheme associated with
+the given screen. This icon theme is associated with
+the screen and can be used as long as the screen
+is open. Do not ref or unref it.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_spin_button_set_digits">
<description>
Set the precision to be displayed by @spin_button. Up to 20 digit precision
@@ -26552,24 +26781,23 @@ Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_theme_get_example_icon_name">
+<function name="gtk_container_child_type">
<description>
-Gets the name of an icon that is representative of the
-current theme (for instance, to use when presenting
-a list of themes to the user.)
+Returns the type of the children supported by the container.
+
+Note that this may return %G_TYPE_NONE to indicate that no more
+children can be added, e.g. for a #GtkPaned which already has two
+children.
-Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="icon_theme">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkIconTheme
+<parameter name="container">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkContainer
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the name of an example icon or %NULL.
-Free with g_free().
-
+<return> a #GType.
</return>
</function>
@@ -26630,21 +26858,16 @@ Invisible text is usually invisible because a #GtkTextTag with the
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_range_get_fill_level">
+<function name="gtk_button_new">
<description>
-Gets the current position of the fill level indicator.
+Creates a new #GtkButton widget. To add a child widget to the button,
+use gtk_container_add().
-Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="range">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkRange
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> The current fill level
-
+<return> The newly created #GtkButton widget.
</return>
</function>
@@ -26740,28 +26963,22 @@ mnemonic set up it returns #GDK_VoidSymbol.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_page_setup_set_bottom_margin">
+<function name="gtk_printer_get_location">
<description>
-Sets the bottom margin of the #GtkPageSetup.
+Returns a description of the location of the printer.
Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="setup">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPageSetup
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="margin">
-<parameter_description> the new bottom margin in units of @unit
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="unit">
-<parameter_description> the units for @margin
+<parameter name="printer">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrinter
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the location of @printer
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_action_set_gicon">
@@ -26803,22 +27020,15 @@ Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_accel_map_foreach_unfiltered">
+<function name="gtk_notebook_prev_page">
<description>
-Loops over all entries in the accelerator map, and execute
- foreach_func on each. The signature of @foreach_func is that of
-#GtkAccelMapForeach, the @changed parameter indicates whether
-this accelerator was changed during runtime (thus, would need
-saving during an accelerator map dump).
+Switches to the previous page. Nothing happens if the current page
+is the first page.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="data">
-<parameter_description> data to be passed into @foreach_func
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="foreach_func">
-<parameter_description> function to be executed for each accel map entry
+<parameter name="notebook">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkNotebook
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -26855,42 +27065,30 @@ Since: 2.6
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_iter_forward_char">
+<function name="gtk_image_get_icon_set">
<description>
-Moves @iter forward by one character offset. Note that images
-embedded in the buffer occupy 1 character slot, so
-gtk_text_iter_forward_char () may actually move onto an image instead
-of a character, if you have images in your buffer. If @iter is the
-end iterator or one character before it, @iter will now point at
-the end iterator, and gtk_text_iter_forward_char () returns %FALSE for
-convenience when writing loops.
-
+Gets the icon set and size being displayed by the #GtkImage.
+The storage type of the image must be %GTK_IMAGE_EMPTY or
+%GTK_IMAGE_ICON_SET (see gtk_image_get_storage_type()).
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> an iterator
+<parameter name="image">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkImage
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> whether @iter moved and is dereferenceable
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_text_tag_table_get_size">
-<description>
-Returns the size of the table (number of tags)
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="table">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextTagTable
+<parameter name="icon_set">
+<parameter_description> location to store a
+#GtkIconSet, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="size">
+<parameter_description> location to store a stock
+icon size, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> number of tags in @table
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_text_buffer_get_selection_bounds">
@@ -27045,34 +27243,47 @@ Since: 2.2
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_set_window">
+<function name="gtk_about_dialog_set_program_name">
<description>
-Sets a widget's window. This function should only be used in a
-widget's GtkWidget::realize() implementation. The %window passed is
-usually either new window created with gdk_window_new(), or the
-window of its parent widget as returned by
-gtk_widget_get_parent_window().
-
-Widgets must indicate whether they will create their own #GdkWindow
-by calling gtk_widget_set_has_window(). This is usually done in the
-widget's init() function.
+Sets the name to display in the about dialog.
+If this is not set, it defaults to g_get_application_name().
-Since: 2.18
+Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+<parameter name="about">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAboutDialog
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
+<parameter name="name">
+<parameter_description> the program name
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_get_search_entry">
+<description>
+Returns the #GtkEntry which is currently in use as interactive search
+entry for @tree_view. In case the built-in entry is being used, %NULL
+will be returned.
+
+Since: 2.10
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="tree_view">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeView
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the entry currently in use as search entry.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_label_set_selectable">
<description>
Selectable labels allow the user to select text from the label, for
@@ -27108,6 +27319,30 @@ Gets the update policy of @range. See gtk_range_set_update_policy().
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_container_set_focus_chain">
+<description>
+Sets a focus chain, overriding the one computed automatically by GTK+.
+
+In principle each widget in the chain should be a descendant of the
+container, but this is not enforced by this method, since it's allowed
+to set the focus chain before you pack the widgets, or have a widget
+in the chain that isn't always packed. The necessary checks are done
+when the focus chain is actually traversed.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="container">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkContainer
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="focusable_widgets">
+<parameter_description> the new focus chain
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_widget_class_list_style_properties">
<description>
Returns all style properties of a widget class.
@@ -27167,59 +27402,63 @@ Since: 2.16
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_window_deiconify">
+<function name="gtk_file_chooser_get_preview_uri">
<description>
-Asks to deiconify (i.e. unminimize) the specified @window. Note
-that you shouldn't assume the window is definitely deiconified
-afterward, because other entities (e.g. the user or <link
-linkend="gtk-X11-arch">window manager</link>) could iconify it
-again before your code which assumes deiconification gets to run.
+Gets the URI that should be previewed in a custom preview
+widget. See gtk_file_chooser_set_preview_widget().
-You can track iconification via the "window-state-event" signal
-on #GtkWidget.
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
+<parameter name="chooser">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the URI for the file to preview, or %NULL if no file is
+selected. Free with g_free().
+
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_settings_get_quality">
+<function name="gtk_file_chooser_unselect_uri">
<description>
-Gets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_QUALITY.
+Unselects the file referred to by @uri. If the file
+is not in the current directory, does not exist, or
+is otherwise not currently selected, does nothing.
-Since: 2.10
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="settings">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
+<parameter name="chooser">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="uri">
+<parameter_description> the URI to unselect
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the print quality
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_unix_dialog_set_support_selection">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_focus_cell">
<description>
-Sets whether the print dialog allows user to print a selection.
+Sets the current keyboard focus to be at @cell, if the column contains
+2 or more editable and activatable cells.
-Since: 2.18
+Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="dialog">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintUnixDialog
+<parameter name="tree_column">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeViewColumn
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="support_selection">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE to allow print selection
+<parameter name="cell">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkCellRenderer
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -27230,6 +27469,7 @@ Since: 2.18
<description>
Returns the current grab widget for @device, or %NULL if none.
+Since: 3.0
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -27243,9 +27483,31 @@ Returns the current grab widget for @device, or %NULL if none.
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return> The grab widget, or %NULL
+
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_window_deiconify">
+<description>
+Asks to deiconify (i.e. unminimize) the specified @window. Note
+that you shouldn't assume the window is definitely deiconified
+afterward, because other entities (e.g. the user or <link
+linkend="gtk-X11-arch">window manager</link>) could iconify it
+again before your code which assumes deiconification gets to run.
+
+You can track iconification via the "window-state-event" signal
+on #GtkWidget.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_cell_renderer_pixbuf_new">
<description>
Creates a new #GtkCellRendererPixbuf. Adjust rendering
@@ -27291,14 +27553,20 @@ Since: 2.10
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_clear">
+<function name="remove_file">
<description>
-Unsets all the mappings on all renderers on the @tree_column.
+Removes the given file from the model. If the file is not part of
+ model, this function does nothing.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_column">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeViewColumn
+<parameter name="model">
+<parameter_description> the model
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="file">
+<parameter_description> file to remove from the model. The file must have been
+added to the model previously
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -27335,21 +27603,20 @@ Returns the justification of the label. See gtk_label_set_justify().
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_focus_cell">
+<function name="gtk_print_unix_dialog_set_support_selection">
<description>
-Sets the current keyboard focus to be at @cell, if the column contains
-2 or more editable and activatable cells.
+Sets whether the print dialog allows user to print a selection.
-Since: 2.2
+Since: 2.18
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_column">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeViewColumn
+<parameter name="dialog">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintUnixDialog
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="cell">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkCellRenderer
+<parameter name="support_selection">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE to allow print selection
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -27444,24 +27711,6 @@ is indeed the case.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_theme_get_default">
-<description>
-Gets the icon theme for the default screen. See
-gtk_icon_theme_get_for_screen().
-
-Since: 2.4
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-</parameters>
-<return> A unique #GtkIconTheme associated with
-the default screen. This icon theme is associated with
-the screen and can be used as long as the screen
-is open. Do not ref or unref it.
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_box_set_spacing">
<description>
Sets the #GtkBox:spacing property of @box, which is the
@@ -27481,6 +27730,36 @@ number of pixels to place between children of @box.
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_list_store_set">
+<description>
+Sets the value of one or more cells in the row referenced by @iter.
+The variable argument list should contain integer column numbers,
+each column number followed by the value to be set.
+The list is terminated by a -1. For example, to set column 0 with type
+%G_TYPE_STRING to "Foo", you would write <literal>gtk_list_store_set (store, iter,
+0, "Foo", -1)</literal>.
+
+The value will be referenced by the store if it is a %G_TYPE_OBJECT, and it
+will be copied if it is a %G_TYPE_STRING or %G_TYPE_BOXED.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="list_store">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkListStore
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> row iterator
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="Varargs">
+<parameter_description> pairs of column number and value, terminated with -1
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_buildable_custom_tag_start">
<description>
This is called for each unknown element under <child>.
@@ -27540,22 +27819,16 @@ Since: 2.8
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_settings_set_resolution">
+<function name="gtk_scale_clear_marks">
<description>
-Sets the values of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_RESOLUTION,
-%GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_RESOLUTION_X and
-%GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_RESOLUTION_Y.
+Removes any marks that have been added with gtk_scale_add_mark().
-Since: 2.10
+Since: 2.16
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="settings">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="resolution">
-<parameter_description> the resolution in dpi
+<parameter name="scale">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkScale
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -27605,6 +27878,24 @@ used for the mnemonic accelerator key.
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_wrap_box_set_horizontal_spacing">
+<description>
+Sets the horizontal space to add between children.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="box">
+<parameter_description> An #GtkWrapBox
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="spacing">
+<parameter_description> The spacing to use.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_tree_model_filter_convert_path_to_child_path">
<description>
Converts @filter_path to a path on the child model of @filter. That is,
@@ -27630,20 +27921,24 @@ Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_recent_chooser_get_current_uri">
+<function name="gtk_notebook_get_tab_detachable">
<description>
-Gets the URI currently selected by @chooser.
+Returns whether the tab contents can be detached from @notebook.
Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="chooser">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentChooser
+<parameter name="notebook">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkNotebook
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="child">
+<parameter_description> a child #GtkWidget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a newly allocated string holding a URI.
+<return> TRUE if the tab is detachable.
</return>
</function>
@@ -27714,20 +28009,22 @@ spin button is always updated or only when a valid value is set.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_recent_chooser_get_show_icons">
+<function name="gtk_tool_shell_get_text_orientation">
<description>
-Retrieves whether @chooser should show an icon near the resource.
+Retrieves the current text orientation for the tool shell. Tool items must not
+call this function directly, but rely on gtk_tool_item_get_text_orientation()
+instead.
-Since: 2.10
+Since: 2.20
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="chooser">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentChooser
+<parameter name="shell">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolShell
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the icons should be displayed, %FALSE otherwise.
+<return> the current text orientation of @shell
</return>
</function>
@@ -27767,35 +28064,6 @@ action, or %NULL
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_model_filter_convert_child_iter_to_iter">
-<description>
-Sets @filter_iter to point to the row in @filter that corresponds to the
-row pointed at by @child_iter. If @filter_iter was not set, %FALSE is
-returned.
-
-Since: 2.4
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="filter">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeModelFilter.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="filter_iter">
-<parameter_description> An uninitialized #GtkTreeIter.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="child_iter">
-<parameter_description> A valid #GtkTreeIter pointing to a row on the child model.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE, if @filter_iter was set, i.e. if @child_iter is a
-valid iterator pointing to a visible row in child model.
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_text_layout_validate">
<description>
Validate regions of a #GtkTextLayout. The ::changed signal will
@@ -27850,25 +28118,22 @@ Since: 2.10
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_target_table_free">
+<function name="gtk_icon_theme_get_default">
<description>
-This function frees a target table as returned by
-gtk_target_table_new_from_list()
+Gets the icon theme for the default screen. See
+gtk_icon_theme_get_for_screen().
-Since: 2.10
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="targets">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTargetEntry array
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="n_targets">
-<parameter_description> the number of entries in the array
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> A unique #GtkIconTheme associated with
+the default screen. This icon theme is associated with
+the screen and can be used as long as the screen
+is open. Do not ref or unref it.
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_widget_add_device_events">
@@ -27955,6 +28220,54 @@ Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_selection_data_targets_include_rich_text">
+<description>
+Given a #GtkSelectionData object holding a list of targets,
+determines if any of the targets in @targets can be used to
+provide rich text.
+
+Since: 2.10
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="selection_data">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkSelectionData object
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="buffer">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextBuffer
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if @selection_data holds a list of targets,
+and a suitable target for rich text is included,
+otherwise %FALSE.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_text_view_starts_display_line">
+<description>
+Determines whether @iter is at the start of a display line.
+See gtk_text_view_forward_display_line() for an explanation of
+display lines vs. paragraphs.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="text_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextView
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if @iter begins a wrapped line
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_widget_get_requisition">
<description>
Retrieves the widget's requisition.
@@ -28041,49 +28354,6 @@ with the widget.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_scrolled_window_set_placement">
-<description>
-Sets the placement of the contents with respect to the scrollbars
-for the scrolled window.
-
-The default is %GTK_CORNER_TOP_LEFT, meaning the child is
-in the top left, with the scrollbars underneath and to the right.
-Other values in #GtkCornerType are %GTK_CORNER_TOP_RIGHT,
-%GTK_CORNER_BOTTOM_LEFT, and %GTK_CORNER_BOTTOM_RIGHT.
-
-See also gtk_scrolled_window_get_placement() and
-gtk_scrolled_window_unset_placement().
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="scrolled_window">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkScrolledWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="window_placement">
-<parameter_description> position of the child window
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_widget_thaw_child_notify">
-<description>
-Reverts the effect of a previous call to gtk_widget_freeze_child_notify().
-This causes all queued #GtkWidget::child-notify signals on @widget to be
-emitted.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_container_foreach">
<description>
Invokes @callback on each non-internal child of @container. See
@@ -28112,7 +28382,7 @@ gtk_container_foreach(), rather than gtk_container_forall().
<function name="gtk_widget_region_intersect">
<description>
Computes the intersection of a @widget's area and @region, returning
-the intersection. The result may be empty, use gdk_region_empty() to
+the intersection. The result may be empty, use cairo_region_is_empty() to
check.
</description>
@@ -28122,7 +28392,7 @@ check.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="region">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkRegion, in the same coordinate system as
+<parameter_description> a #cairo_region_t, in the same coordinate system as
@widget->allocation. That is, relative to @widget->window
for %NO_WINDOW widgets; relative to the parent window
of @widget->window for widgets with their own window.
@@ -28143,9 +28413,9 @@ Specifies whether @widget has a #GdkWindow of its own. Note that
all realized widgets have a non-%NULL "window" pointer
(gtk_widget_get_window() never returns a %NULL window when a widget
is realized), but for many of them it's actually the #GdkWindow of
-one of its parent widgets. Widgets that create a %window for
-themselves in GtkWidget::realize() however must announce this by
-calling this function with @has_window = %TRUE.
+one of its parent widgets. Widgets that do not create a %window for
+themselves in GtkWidget::realize() must announce this by
+calling this function with @has_window = %FALSE.
This function should only be called by widget implementations,
and they should call it in their init() function.
@@ -28217,25 +28487,30 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_button_new_from_stock">
+<function name="gtk_label_set_line_wrap">
<description>
-Creates a new #GtkButton containing the image and text from a stock item.
-Some stock ids have preprocessor macros like #GTK_STOCK_OK and
-#GTK_STOCK_APPLY.
-
-If @stock_id is unknown, then it will be treated as a mnemonic
-label (as for gtk_button_new_with_mnemonic()).
+Toggles line wrapping within the #GtkLabel widget. %TRUE makes it break
+lines if text exceeds the widget's size. %FALSE lets the text get cut off
+by the edge of the widget if it exceeds the widget size.
+Note that setting line wrapping to %TRUE does not make the label
+wrap at its parent container's width, because GTK+ widgets
+conceptually can't make their requisition depend on the parent
+container's size. For a label that wraps at a specific position,
+set the label's width using gtk_widget_set_size_request().
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="stock_id">
-<parameter_description> the name of the stock item
+<parameter name="label">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkLabel
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="wrap">
+<parameter_description> the setting
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a new #GtkButton
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_tool_palette_get_exclusive">
@@ -28261,14 +28536,45 @@ Since: 2.20
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_image_menu_item_new">
+<function name="gtk_entry_get_buffer">
<description>
-Creates a new #GtkImageMenuItem with an empty label.
+Get the #GtkEntryBuffer object which holds the text for
+this widget.
+
+Since: 2.18
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="entry">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkEntry
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> A #GtkEntryBuffer object.
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_text_iter_compare">
+<description>
+A qsort()-style function that returns negative if @lhs is less than
+ rhs, positive if @lhs is greater than @rhs, and 0 if they're equal.
+Ordering is in character offset order, i.e. the first character in the buffer
+is less than the second character in the buffer.
+
</description>
<parameters>
+<parameter name="lhs">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="rhs">
+<parameter_description> another #GtkTextIter
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a new #GtkImageMenuItem.
+<return> -1 if @lhs is less than @rhs, 1 if @lhs is greater, 0 if they are equal
</return>
</function>
@@ -28307,51 +28613,29 @@ gtk_frame_set_label_widget().
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_init_with_args">
+<function name="gtk_accelerator_name">
<description>
-This function does the same work as gtk_init_check().
-Additionally, it allows you to add your own commandline options,
-and it automatically generates nicely formatted
-<option>--help</option> output. Note that your program will
-be terminated after writing out the help output.
+Converts an accelerator keyval and modifier mask
+into a string parseable by gtk_accelerator_parse().
+For example, if you pass in #GDK_q and #GDK_CONTROL_MASK,
+this function returns "<Control>q".
+
+If you need to display accelerators in the user interface,
+see gtk_accelerator_get_label().
-Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="argc">
-<parameter_description> a pointer to the number of command line arguments.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="argv">
-<parameter_description> a pointer to the array of command line arguments.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="parameter_string">
-<parameter_description> a string which is displayed in
-the first line of <option>--help</option> output, after
-<literal><replaceable>programname</replaceable> [OPTION...]</literal>
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="entries">
-<parameter_description> a %NULL-terminated array of #GOptionEntry<!-- -->s
-describing the options of your program
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="translation_domain">
-<parameter_description> a translation domain to use for translating
-the <option>--help</option> output for the options in @entries
-with gettext(), or %NULL
+<parameter name="accelerator_key">
+<parameter_description> accelerator keyval
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="error">
-<parameter_description> a return location for errors
+<parameter name="accelerator_mods">
+<parameter_description> accelerator modifier mask
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the GUI has been successfully initialized,
-%FALSE otherwise.
-
+<return> a newly-allocated accelerator name
</return>
</function>
@@ -28456,21 +28740,22 @@ Fills @color in with the original color value.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_target_list_add_text_targets">
+<function name="gtk_icon_view_set_item_width">
<description>
-Appends the text targets supported by #GtkSelection to
-the target list. All targets are added with the same @info.
+Sets the ::item-width property which specifies the width
+to use for each item. If it is set to -1, the icon view will
+automatically determine a suitable item size.
Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="list">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTargetList
+<parameter name="icon_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIconView
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="info">
-<parameter_description> an ID that will be passed back to the application
+<parameter name="item_width">
+<parameter_description> the width for each item
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -28498,70 +28783,69 @@ located within the currently-visible text area.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_statusbar_get_context_id">
+<function name="gtk_widget_thaw_child_notify">
<description>
-Returns a new context identifier, given a description
-of the actual context. Note that the description is
-<emphasis>not</emphasis> shown in the UI.
-
+Reverts the effect of a previous call to gtk_widget_freeze_child_notify().
+This causes all queued #GtkWidget::child-notify signals on @widget to be
+emitted.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="statusbar">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkStatusbar
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="context_description">
-<parameter_description> textual description of what context
-the new message is being used in
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> an integer id
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_file_chooser_set_preview_widget_active">
+<function name="gtk_image_set_from_icon_set">
<description>
-Sets whether the preview widget set by
-gtk_file_chooser_set_preview_widget() should be shown for the
-current filename. When @active is set to false, the file chooser
-may display an internally generated preview of the current file
-or it may display no preview at all. See
-gtk_file_chooser_set_preview_widget() for more details.
-
-Since: 2.4
+See gtk_image_new_from_icon_set() for details.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="chooser">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
+<parameter name="image">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkImage
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="active">
-<parameter_description> whether to display the user-specified preview widget
+<parameter name="icon_set">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIconSet
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="size">
+<parameter_description> a stock icon size
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_combo_box_get_model">
+<function name="gtk_tooltip_set_tip_area">
<description>
-Returns the #GtkTreeModel which is acting as data source for @combo_box.
+Sets the area of the widget, where the contents of this tooltip apply,
+to be @rect (in widget coordinates). This is especially useful for
+properly setting tooltips on #GtkTreeView rows and cells, #GtkIconViews,
+etc.
-Since: 2.4
+For setting tooltips on #GtkTreeView, please refer to the convenience
+functions for this: gtk_tree_view_set_tooltip_row() and
+gtk_tree_view_set_tooltip_cell().
+
+Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="combo_box">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkComboBox
+<parameter name="tooltip">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTooltip
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="rect">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkRectangle
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> A #GtkTreeModel which was passed during construction.
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_page_setup_set_paper_size">
@@ -28698,44 +28982,18 @@ Since: 2.8
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_window_begin_resize_drag">
+<function name="gtk_ui_manager_new">
<description>
-Starts resizing a window. This function is used if an application
-has window resizing controls. When GDK can support it, the resize
-will be done using the standard mechanism for the <link
-linkend="gtk-X11-arch">window manager</link> or windowing
-system. Otherwise, GDK will try to emulate window resizing,
-potentially not all that well, depending on the windowing system.
+Creates a new ui manager object.
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="button">
-<parameter_description> mouse button that initiated the drag
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="edge">
-<parameter_description> position of the resize control
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="root_x">
-<parameter_description> X position where the user clicked to initiate the drag, in root window coordinates
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="root_y">
-<parameter_description> Y position where the user clicked to initiate the drag
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="timestamp">
-<parameter_description> timestamp from the click event that initiated the drag
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> a new ui manager object.
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_about_dialog_set_documenters">
@@ -28759,20 +29017,21 @@ Since: 2.6
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_layout_get_buffer">
+<function name="gtk_print_job_get_title">
<description>
-Gets the text buffer used by the layout. See
-gtk_text_layout_set_buffer().
+Gets the job title.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="layout">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextLayout
+<parameter name="job">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintJob
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the text buffer used by the layout.
+<return> the title of @job
+
</return>
</function>
@@ -28833,27 +29092,26 @@ the entry
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_printer_compare">
+<function name="gtk_text_buffer_get_iter_at_child_anchor">
<description>
-Compares two printers.
-
-Since: 2.10
+Obtains the location of @anchor within @buffer.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="a">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrinter
+<parameter name="buffer">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextBuffer
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="b">
-<parameter_description> another #GtkPrinter
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> an iterator to be initialized
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="anchor">
+<parameter_description> a child anchor that appears in @buffer
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> 0 if the printer match, a negative value if @a < @b,
-or a positive value if @a > @b
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_entry_new">
@@ -28950,49 +29208,6 @@ Since: 2.10
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_file_chooser_select_filename">
-<description>
-Selects a filename. If the file name isn't in the current
-folder of @chooser, then the current folder of @chooser will
-be changed to the folder containing @filename.
-
-Since: 2.4
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="chooser">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="filename">
-<parameter_description> the filename to select
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if both the folder could be changed and the file was
-selected successfully, %FALSE otherwise.
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_color_button_get_use_alpha">
-<description>
-Does the color selection dialog use the alpha channel?
-
-Since: 2.4
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="color_button">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkColorButton.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the color sample uses alpha channel, %FALSE if not.
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_radio_button_get_group">
<description>
Retrieves the group assigned to a radio button.
@@ -29037,48 +29252,37 @@ Since: 2.10
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_view_get_line_at_y">
+<function name="gtk_clipboard_request_text">
<description>
-Gets the #GtkTextIter at the start of the line containing
-the coordinate @y. @y is in buffer coordinates, convert from
-window coordinates with gtk_text_view_window_to_buffer_coords().
-If non-%NULL, @line_top will be filled with the coordinate of the top
-edge of the line.
+Requests the contents of the clipboard as text. When the text is
+later received, it will be converted to UTF-8 if necessary, and
+ callback will be called.
+
+The @text parameter to @callback will contain the resulting text if
+the request succeeded, or %NULL if it failed. This could happen for
+various reasons, in particular if the clipboard was empty or if the
+contents of the clipboard could not be converted into text form.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="text_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextView
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="target_iter">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
+<parameter name="clipboard">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkClipboard
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="y">
-<parameter_description> a y coordinate
+<parameter name="callback">
+<parameter_description> a function to call when the text is received,
+or the retrieval fails. (It will always be called
+one way or the other.)
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="line_top">
-<parameter_description> return location for top coordinate of the line
+<parameter name="user_data">
+<parameter_description> user data to pass to @callback.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_toolbar_new">
-<description>
-Creates a new toolbar.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-</parameters>
-<return> the newly-created toolbar.
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_tree_model_sort_set_model">
<description>
Sets the model of @tree_model_sort to be @model. If @model is %NULL,
@@ -29121,22 +29325,6 @@ Sets the currently selected font.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_paper_size_is_custom">
-<description>
-Returns %TRUE if @size is not a standard paper size.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="size">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPaperSize object
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> whether @size is a custom paper size.
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_text_iter_in_range">
<description>
Checks whether @iter falls in the range [ start, @end).
@@ -29204,8 +29392,6 @@ Since: 2.6
Sets the current active item to be the one referenced by @iter, or
unsets the active item if @iter is %NULL.
- iter must correspond to a path of depth one, or be %NULL.
-
Since: 2.4
</description>
@@ -29343,20 +29529,30 @@ Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_get_search_equal_func">
+<function name="gtk_entry_completion_insert_action_text">
<description>
-Returns the compare function currently in use.
+Inserts an action in @completion's action item list at position @index_
+with text @text. If you want the action item to have markup, use
+gtk_entry_completion_insert_action_markup().
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_view">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeView
+<parameter name="completion">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkEntryCompletion.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="index_">
+<parameter_description> The index of the item to insert.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="text">
+<parameter_description> Text of the item to insert.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the currently used compare function for the search code.
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_activatable_sync_action_properties">
@@ -29440,26 +29636,6 @@ context id.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_settings_set_scale">
-<description>
-Sets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_SCALE.
-
-Since: 2.10
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="settings">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="scale">
-<parameter_description> the scale in percent
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_clipboard_get_display">
<description>
Gets the #GdkDisplay associated with @clipboard
@@ -29513,38 +29689,27 @@ Returns the previous alpha value.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_buffer_register_deserialize_format">
+<function name="gtk_target_table_new_from_list">
<description>
-This function registers a rich text deserialization @function along with
-its @mime_type with the passed @buffer.
+This function creates an #GtkTargetEntry array that contains the
+same targets as the passed %list. The returned table is newly
+allocated and should be freed using gtk_target_table_free() when no
+longer needed.
Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="buffer">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextBuffer
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="mime_type">
-<parameter_description> the format's mime-type
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="function">
-<parameter_description> the deserialize function to register
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="user_data">
-<parameter_description> @function's user_data
+<parameter name="list">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTargetList
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="user_data_destroy">
-<parameter_description> a function to call when @user_data is no longer needed
+<parameter name="n_targets">
+<parameter_description> return location for the number ot targets in the table
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the #GdkAtom that corresponds to the newly registered
-format's mime-type.
+<return> the new table.
</return>
</function>
@@ -29647,6 +29812,28 @@ The @text is used to show how the selected font looks.
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_text_iter_forward_char">
+<description>
+Moves @iter forward by one character offset. Note that images
+embedded in the buffer occupy 1 character slot, so
+gtk_text_iter_forward_char () may actually move onto an image instead
+of a character, if you have images in your buffer. If @iter is the
+end iterator or one character before it, @iter will now point at
+the end iterator, and gtk_text_iter_forward_char () returns %FALSE for
+convenience when writing loops.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> an iterator
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> whether @iter moved and is dereferenceable
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_widget_error_bell">
<description>
Notifies the user about an input-related error on this widget.
@@ -29691,32 +29878,22 @@ of times.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_list_store_set">
+<function name="gtk_entry_get_invisible_char">
<description>
-Sets the value of one or more cells in the row referenced by @iter.
-The variable argument list should contain integer column numbers,
-each column number followed by the value to be set.
-The list is terminated by a -1. For example, to set column 0 with type
-%G_TYPE_STRING to "Foo", you would write <literal>gtk_list_store_set (store, iter,
-0, "Foo", -1)</literal>.
-The value will be copied or referenced by the store if appropriate.
+Retrieves the character displayed in place of the real characters
+for entries with visibility set to false. See gtk_entry_set_invisible_char().
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="list_store">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkListStore
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> row iterator
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="Varargs">
-<parameter_description> pairs of column number and value, terminated with -1
+<parameter name="entry">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkEntry
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the current invisible char, or 0, if the entry does not
+show invisible text at all.
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_widget_unparent">
@@ -29763,50 +29940,6 @@ widget
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_unix_dialog_get_support_selection">
-<description>
-Gets the value of #GtkPrintUnixDialog::support-selection property.
-
-Since: 2.18
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="dialog">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintUnixDialog
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> whether the application supports print of selection
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_text_iter_backward_lines">
-<description>
-Moves @count lines backward, if possible (if @count would move
-past the start or end of the buffer, moves to the start or end of
-the buffer). The return value indicates whether the iterator moved
-onto a dereferenceable position; if the iterator didn't move, or
-moved onto the end iterator, then %FALSE is returned. If @count is 0,
-the function does nothing and returns %FALSE. If @count is negative,
-moves forward by 0 - @count lines.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="count">
-<parameter_description> number of lines to move backward
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> whether @iter moved and is dereferenceable
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_notebook_get_scrollable">
<description>
Returns whether the tab label area has arrows for scrolling. See
@@ -29845,6 +29978,22 @@ Since: 2.20
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_icon_set_ref">
+<description>
+Increments the reference count on @icon_set.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="icon_set">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIconSet.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> @icon_set.
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_print_settings_get_n_copies">
<description>
Gets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_N_COPIES.
@@ -29945,22 +30094,20 @@ Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tool_shell_get_text_orientation">
+<function name="gtk_selection_data_get_target">
<description>
-Retrieves the current text orientation for the tool shell. Tool items must not
-call this function directly, but rely on gtk_tool_item_get_text_orientation()
-instead.
+Retrieves the target of the selection.
-Since: 2.20
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="shell">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolShell
+<parameter name="selection_data">
+<parameter_description> a pointer to a #GtkSelectionData structure.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the current text orientation of @shell
+<return> the target of the selection.
</return>
</function>
@@ -29985,28 +30132,61 @@ Returns %TRUE if the row at @iter is currently selected.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_iter_forward_visible_word_end">
+<function name="gtk_print_unix_dialog_get_settings">
<description>
-Moves forward to the next visible word end. (If @iter is currently on a
-word end, moves forward to the next one after that.) Word breaks
-are determined by Pango and should be correct for nearly any
-language (if not, the correct fix would be to the Pango word break
-algorithms).
+Gets a new #GtkPrintSettings object that represents the
+current values in the print dialog. Note that this creates a
+<emphasis>new object</emphasis>, and you need to unref it
+if don't want to keep it.
-Since: 2.4
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
+<parameter name="dialog">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintUnixDialog
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if @iter moved and is not the end iterator
+<return> a new #GtkPrintSettings object with the values from @dialog
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_scrolled_window_add_with_viewport">
+<description>
+Used to add children without native scrolling capabilities. This
+is simply a convenience function; it is equivalent to adding the
+unscrollable child to a viewport, then adding the viewport to the
+scrolled window. If a child has native scrolling, use
+gtk_container_add() instead of this function.
+
+The viewport scrolls the child by moving its #GdkWindow, and takes
+the size of the child to be the size of its toplevel #GdkWindow.
+This will be very wrong for most widgets that support native scrolling;
+for example, if you add a widget such as #GtkTreeView with a viewport,
+the whole widget will scroll, including the column headings. Thus,
+widgets with native scrolling support should not be used with the
+#GtkViewport proxy.
+
+A widget supports scrolling natively if the
+set_scroll_adjustments_signal field in #GtkWidgetClass is non-zero,
+i.e. has been filled in with a valid signal identifier.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="scrolled_window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkScrolledWindow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="child">
+<parameter_description> the widget you want to scroll
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_cell_view_set_value">
<description>
Sets a property of a cell renderer of @cell_view, and
@@ -30224,60 +30404,15 @@ is owned by GTK+ and should not be modified.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_paint_diamond">
+<function name="gtk_accelerator_get_default_mod_mask">
<description>
-Draws a diamond in the given rectangle on @window using the given
-parameters.
+Gets the value set by gtk_accelerator_set_default_mod_mask().
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="style">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="state_type">
-<parameter_description> a state
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="shadow_type">
-<parameter_description> the type of shadow to draw
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="area">
-<parameter_description> clip rectangle, or %NULL if the
-output should not be clipped
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> the widget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="detail">
-<parameter_description> a style detail
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="x">
-<parameter_description> x origin of the rectangle to draw the diamond in
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="y">
-<parameter_description> y origin of the rectangle to draw the diamond in
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="width">
-<parameter_description> width of the rectangle to draw the diamond in
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="height">
-<parameter_description> height of the rectangle to draw the diamond in
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the default accelerator modifier mask
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_ruler_get_metric">
@@ -30320,6 +30455,50 @@ for array of sizes
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_page_setup_get_orientation">
+<description>
+Gets the page orientation of the #GtkPageSetup.
+
+Since: 2.10
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="setup">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPageSetup
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the page orientation
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_text_iter_backward_to_tag_toggle">
+<description>
+Moves backward to the next toggle (on or off) of the
+#GtkTextTag @tag, or to the next toggle of any tag if
+ tag is %NULL. If no matching tag toggles are found,
+returns %FALSE, otherwise %TRUE. Does not return toggles
+located at @iter, only toggles before @iter. Sets @iter
+to the location of the toggle, or the start of the buffer
+if no toggle is found.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="tag">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextTag, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> whether we found a tag toggle before @iter
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_tree_view_scroll_to_cell">
<description>
Moves the alignments of @tree_view to the position specified by @column and
@@ -30381,31 +30560,6 @@ Creates a new #GtkTreePath. This structure refers to a row.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_size_request_is_height_for_width">
-<description>
-Gets whether the widget prefers a height-for-width layout
-or a width-for-height layout.
-
-<note><para>#GtkBin widgets generally propagate the preference of
-their child, container widgets need to request something either in
-context of their children or in context of their allocation
-capabilities.</para></note>
-
-Since: 3.0
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkSizeRequest instance
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the widget prefers height-for-width, %FALSE if
-the widget should be treated with a width-for-height preference.
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_text_view_get_hadjustment">
<description>
Gets the horizontal-scrolling #GtkAdjustment.
@@ -30445,24 +30599,20 @@ Since: 2.16
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_notebook_get_tab_detachable">
+<function name="gtk_recent_chooser_get_current_uri">
<description>
-Returns whether the tab contents can be detached from @notebook.
+Gets the URI currently selected by @chooser.
Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="notebook">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkNotebook
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="child">
-<parameter_description> a child #GtkWidget
+<parameter name="chooser">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentChooser
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> TRUE if the tab is detachable.
+<return> a newly allocated string holding a URI.
</return>
</function>
@@ -30489,10 +30639,22 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_drag_source_set_icon_stock">
+<function name="gtk_widget_set_redraw_on_allocate">
<description>
-Sets the icon that will be used for drags from a particular source
-to a stock icon.
+Sets whether the entire widget is queued for drawing when its size
+allocation changes. By default, this setting is %TRUE and
+the entire widget is redrawn on every size change. If your widget
+leaves the upper left unchanged when made bigger, turning this
+setting off will improve performance.
+
+Note that for %NO_WINDOW widgets setting this flag to %FALSE turns
+off all allocation on resizing: the widget will not even redraw if
+its position changes; this is to allow containers that don't draw
+anything to avoid excess invalidations. If you set this flag on a
+%NO_WINDOW widget that <emphasis>does</emphasis> draw on @widget->window,
+you are responsible for invalidating both the old and new allocation
+of the widget when the widget is moved and responsible for invalidating
+regions newly when the widget increases size.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -30500,8 +30662,10 @@ to a stock icon.
<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="stock_id">
-<parameter_description> the ID of the stock icon to use
+<parameter name="redraw_on_allocate">
+<parameter_description> if %TRUE, the entire widget will be redrawn
+when it is allocated to a new size. Otherwise, only the
+new portion of the widget will be redrawn.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -30541,78 +30705,24 @@ Since: 2.12
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_send_expose">
+<function name="gtk_cell_renderer_toggle_new">
<description>
-Very rarely-used function. This function is used to emit
-an expose event signals on a widget. This function is not
-normally used directly. The only time it is used is when
-propagating an expose event to a child %NO_WINDOW widget, and
-that is normally done using gtk_container_propagate_expose().
-
-If you want to force an area of a window to be redrawn,
-use gdk_window_invalidate_rect() or gdk_window_invalidate_region().
-To cause the redraw to be done immediately, follow that call
-with a call to gdk_window_process_updates().
+Creates a new #GtkCellRendererToggle. Adjust rendering
+parameters using object properties. Object properties can be set
+globally (with g_object_set()). Also, with #GtkTreeViewColumn, you
+can bind a property to a value in a #GtkTreeModel. For example, you
+can bind the "active" property on the cell renderer to a boolean value
+in the model, thus causing the check button to reflect the state of
+the model.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="event">
-<parameter_description> a expose #GdkEvent
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> return from the event signal emission (%TRUE if
-the event was handled)
+<return> the new cell renderer
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_scrolled_window_unset_placement">
-<description>
-Unsets the placement of the contents with respect to the scrollbars
-for the scrolled window. If no window placement is set for a scrolled
-window, it obeys the "gtk-scrolled-window-placement" XSETTING.
-
-See also gtk_scrolled_window_set_placement() and
-gtk_scrolled_window_get_placement().
-
-Since: 2.10
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="scrolled_window">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkScrolledWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_menu_set_screen">
-<description>
-Sets the #GdkScreen on which the menu will be displayed.
-
-Since: 2.2
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="menu">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkMenu.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="screen">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkScreen, or %NULL if the screen should be
-determined by the widget the menu is attached to.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_recent_info_get_added">
<description>
Gets the timestamp (seconds from system's Epoch) when the resource
@@ -30633,29 +30743,34 @@ the resource was added to the list, or -1 on failure.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_model_filter_convert_child_path_to_path">
+<function name="gtk_text_iter_forward_find_char">
<description>
-Converts @child_path to a path relative to @filter. That is, @child_path
-points to a path in the child model. The rerturned path will point to the
-same row in the filtered model. If @child_path isn't a valid path on the
-child model or points to a row which is not visible in @filter, then %NULL
-is returned.
+Advances @iter, calling @pred on each character. If
+ pred returns %TRUE, returns %TRUE and stops scanning.
+If @pred never returns %TRUE, @iter is set to @limit if
+ limit is non-%NULL, otherwise to the end iterator.
-Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="filter">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeModelFilter.
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="child_path">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreePath to convert.
+<parameter name="pred">
+<parameter_description> a function to be called on each character
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="user_data">
+<parameter_description> user data for @pred
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="limit">
+<parameter_description> search limit, or %NULL for none
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> A newly allocated #GtkTreePath, or %NULL.
-
+<return> whether a match was found
</return>
</function>
@@ -30714,27 +30829,29 @@ or %NULL if the mark is deleted.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_button_set_image">
+<function name="gtk_rc_parse_color">
<description>
-Set the image of @button to the given widget. Note that
-it depends on the #GtkSettings:gtk-button-images setting whether the
-image will be displayed or not, you don't have to call
-gtk_widget_show() on @image yourself.
+Parses a color in the <link linkend="color=format">format</link> expected
+in a RC file.
+
+Note that theme engines should use gtk_rc_parse_color_full() in
+order to support symbolic colors.
-Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="button">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkButton
+<parameter name="scanner">
+<parameter_description> a #GScanner
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="image">
-<parameter_description> a widget to set as the image for the button
+<parameter name="color">
+<parameter_description> a pointer to a #GdkColor structure in which to store the result
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %G_TOKEN_NONE if parsing succeeded, otherwise the token
+that was expected but not found
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_text_layout_get_cursor_visible">
@@ -30754,42 +30871,33 @@ shown, even if the text is editable.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_status_icon_get_gicon">
+<function name="gtk_widget_set_direction">
<description>
-Retrieves the #GIcon being displayed by the #GtkStatusIcon.
-The storage type of the status icon must be %GTK_IMAGE_EMPTY or
-%GTK_IMAGE_GICON (see gtk_status_icon_get_storage_type()).
-The caller of this function does not own a reference to the
-returned #GIcon.
-
-If this function fails, @icon is left unchanged;
+Sets the reading direction on a particular widget. This direction
+controls the primary direction for widgets containing text,
+and also the direction in which the children of a container are
+packed. The ability to set the direction is present in order
+so that correct localization into languages with right-to-left
+reading directions can be done. Generally, applications will
+let the default reading direction present, except for containers
+where the containers are arranged in an order that is explicitely
+visual rather than logical (such as buttons for text justification).
-Since: 2.14
+If the direction is set to %GTK_TEXT_DIR_NONE, then the value
+set by gtk_widget_set_default_direction() will be used.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="status_icon">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkStatusIcon
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="dir">
+<parameter_description> the new direction
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the displayed icon, or %NULL if the image is empty
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_rc_reparse_all">
-<description>
-If the modification time on any previously read file for the
-default #GtkSettings has changed, discard all style information
-and then reread all previously read RC files.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the files were reread.
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_text_buffer_end_user_action">
@@ -30903,48 +31011,57 @@ Emits the "row-changed" signal on @tree_model.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_im_multicontext_get_context_id">
+<function name="gtk_recent_info_get_modified">
<description>
-Gets the id of the currently active slave of the @context.
+Gets the timestamp (seconds from system's Epoch) when the resource
+was last modified.
-Since: 2.16
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="context">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkIMMulticontext
+<parameter name="info">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentInfo
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the id of the currently active slave
+<return> the number of seconds elapsed from system's Epoch when
+the resource was last modified, or -1 on failure.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_style_get_style_property">
+<function name="gtk_font_selection_get_face">
<description>
-Queries the value of a style property corresponding to a
-widget class is in the given style.
+Gets the #PangoFontFace representing the selected font group
+details (i.e. family, slant, weight, width, etc).
-Since: 2.16
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="style">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="widget_type">
-<parameter_description> the #GType of a descendant of #GtkWidget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="property_name">
-<parameter_description> the name of the style property to get
+<parameter name="fontsel">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFontSelection
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="value">
-<parameter_description> a #GValue where the value of the property being
-queried will be stored
+</parameters>
+<return> A #PangoFontFace representing the selected font
+group details. The returned object is owned by @fontsel and
+must not be modified or freed.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_icon_factory_remove_default">
+<description>
+Removes an icon factory from the list of default icon
+factories. Not normally used; you might use it for a library that
+can be unloaded or shut down.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="factory">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIconFactory previously added with gtk_icon_factory_add_default()
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -31046,6 +31163,34 @@ Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_widget_get_size_request">
+<description>
+Gets the size request that was explicitly set for the widget using
+gtk_widget_set_size_request(). A value of -1 stored in @width or
+ height indicates that that dimension has not been set explicitly
+and the natural requisition of the widget will be used intead. See
+gtk_widget_set_size_request(). To get the size a widget will
+actually use, call gtk_widget_size_request() instead of
+this function.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="width">
+<parameter_description> return location for width, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="height">
+<parameter_description> return location for height, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_tool_button_get_icon_name">
<description>
Returns the name of the themed icon for the tool button,
@@ -31066,19 +31211,21 @@ no themed icon
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_stock_item_copy">
+<function name="gtk_toggle_action_get_draw_as_radio">
<description>
-Copies a stock item, mostly useful for language bindings and not in applications.
+Returns whether the action should have proxies like a radio action.
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="item">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkStockItem
+<parameter name="action">
+<parameter_description> the action object
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a new #GtkStockItem
+<return> whether the action should have proxies like a radio action.
+
</return>
</function>
@@ -31235,6 +31382,26 @@ Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_text_view_set_pixels_below_lines">
+<description>
+Sets the default number of pixels of blank space
+to put below paragraphs in @text_view. May be overridden
+by tags applied to @text_view's buffer.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="text_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextView
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="pixels_below_lines">
+<parameter_description> pixels below paragraphs
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_icon_factory_add_default">
<description>
Adds an icon factory to the list of icon factories searched by
@@ -31335,36 +31502,6 @@ in the buffer may override the default.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_file_chooser_set_do_overwrite_confirmation">
-<description>
-Sets whether a file chooser in %GTK_FILE_CHOOSER_ACTION_SAVE mode will present
-a confirmation dialog if the user types a file name that already exists. This
-is %FALSE by default.
-
-Regardless of this setting, the @chooser will emit the
-#GtkFileChooser::confirm-overwrite signal when appropriate.
-
-If all you need is the stock confirmation dialog, set this property to %TRUE.
-You can override the way confirmation is done by actually handling the
-#GtkFileChooser::confirm-overwrite signal; please refer to its documentation
-for the details.
-
-Since: 2.8
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="chooser">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="do_overwrite_confirmation">
-<parameter_description> whether to confirm overwriting in save mode
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_print_settings_set_print_pages">
<description>
Sets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_PRINT_PAGES.
@@ -31690,27 +31827,20 @@ is 0, the function does nothing and returns %FALSE.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_is_composited">
+<function name="gtk_link_button_new">
<description>
-Whether @widget can rely on having its alpha channel
-drawn correctly. On X11 this function returns whether a
-compositing manager is running for @widget's screen.
-
-Please note that the semantics of this call will change
-in the future if used on a widget that has a composited
-window in its hierarchy (as set by gdk_window_set_composited()).
+Creates a new #GtkLinkButton with the URI as its text.
Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+<parameter name="uri">
+<parameter_description> a valid URI
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the widget can rely on its alpha
-channel being drawn correctly.
+<return> a new link button widget.
</return>
</function>
@@ -31773,24 +31903,6 @@ Since: 2.20
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_printer_get_icon_name">
-<description>
-Gets the name of the icon to use for the printer.
-
-Since: 2.10
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="printer">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrinter
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the icon name for @printer
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_tree_view_set_destroy_count_func">
<description>
This function should almost never be used. It is meant for private use by
@@ -31863,27 +31975,22 @@ Since: 2.10
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_plug_construct_for_display">
+<function name="gtk_label_set_line_wrap_mode">
<description>
-Finish the initialization of @plug for a given #GtkSocket identified by
- socket_id which is currently displayed on @display.
-This function will generally only be used by classes deriving from #GtkPlug.
+If line wrapping is on (see gtk_label_set_line_wrap()) this controls how
+the line wrapping is done. The default is %PANGO_WRAP_WORD which means
+wrap on word boundaries.
-Since: 2.2
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="plug">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPlug.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="display">
-<parameter_description> the #GdkDisplay associated with @socket_id's
-#GtkSocket.
+<parameter name="label">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkLabel
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="socket_id">
-<parameter_description> the XID of the socket's window.
+<parameter name="wrap_mode">
+<parameter_description> the line wrapping mode
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -31908,25 +32015,6 @@ Since: 2.6
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_combo_box_new_text">
-<description>
-Convenience function which constructs a new text combo box, which is a
-#GtkComboBox just displaying strings. If you use this function to create
-a text combo box, you should only manipulate its data source with the
-following convenience functions: gtk_combo_box_append_text(),
-gtk_combo_box_insert_text(), gtk_combo_box_prepend_text() and
-gtk_combo_box_remove_text().
-
-Since: 2.4
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-</parameters>
-<return> A new text combo box.
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_cell_renderer_set_fixed_size">
<description>
Sets the renderer size to be explicit, independent of the properties set.
@@ -32063,37 +32151,6 @@ gtk_widget_set_style() and go back to the default style
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_selection_get_selected_rows">
-<description>
-Creates a list of path of all selected rows. Additionally, if you are
-planning on modifying the model after calling this function, you may
-want to convert the returned list into a list of #GtkTreeRowReference<!-- -->s.
-To do this, you can use gtk_tree_row_reference_new().
-
-To free the return value, use:
-|[
-g_list_foreach (list, (GFunc) gtk_tree_path_free, NULL);
-g_list_free (list);
-]|
-
-Since: 2.2
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="selection">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeSelection.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="model">
-<parameter_description> A pointer to set to the #GtkTreeModel, or NULL.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> A #GList containing a #GtkTreePath for each selected row.
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_tree_view_insert_column_with_attributes">
<description>
Creates a new #GtkTreeViewColumn and inserts it into the @tree_view at
@@ -32150,6 +32207,25 @@ Look up a named tag.
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_icon_source_get_filename">
+<description>
+Retrieves the source filename, or %NULL if none is set. The
+filename is not a copy, and should not be modified or expected to
+persist beyond the lifetime of the icon source.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="source">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIconSource
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> image filename. This string must not be modified
+or freed.
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_device_grab_remove">
<description>
Removes a device grab from the given widget. You have to pair calls
@@ -32213,25 +32289,26 @@ Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_set_max_width">
+<function name="gtk_icon_info_get_display_name">
<description>
-Sets the maximum width of the @tree_column. If @max_width is -1, then the
-maximum width is unset. Note, the column can actually be wider than max
-width if it's the last column in a view. In this case, the column expands to
-fill any extra space.
+Gets the display name for an icon. A display name is a
+string to be used in place of the icon name in a user
+visible context like a list of icons.
+
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_column">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeViewColumn.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="max_width">
-<parameter_description> The maximum width of the column in pixels, or -1.
+<parameter name="icon_info">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIconInfo
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the display name for the icon or %NULL, if
+the icon doesn't have a specified display name. This value
+is owned @icon_info and must not be modified or free.
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_widget_set_support_multidevice">
@@ -32335,37 +32412,6 @@ owned by GTK+ and must not be freed.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_im_context_set_surrounding">
-<description>
-Sets surrounding context around the insertion point and preedit
-string. This function is expected to be called in response to the
-GtkIMContext::retrieve_surrounding signal, and will likely have no
-effect if called at other times.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="context">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkIMContext
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="text">
-<parameter_description> text surrounding the insertion point, as UTF-8.
-the preedit string should not be included within
- text
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="len">
-<parameter_description> the length of @text, or -1 if @text is nul-terminated
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="cursor_index">
-<parameter_description> the byte index of the insertion cursor within @text.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_recent_manager_remove_item">
<description>
Removes a resource pointed by @uri from the recently used resources
@@ -32408,28 +32454,40 @@ removed by the recently used resources list, and %FALSE otherwise.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_modify_symbolic_color">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_get_drag_dest_row">
<description>
-Sets a symbolic color for a widget.
-All other style values are left untouched. See also
-gtk_widget_modify_style().
-
-Since: 3.0
+Gets information about the row that is highlighted for feedback.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+<parameter name="tree_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeView
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="name">
-<parameter_description> the name of the symbolic color to modify
+<parameter name="path">
+<parameter_description> Return location for the path of the highlighted row, or %NULL.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="color">
-<parameter_description> the color to assign (does not need to be allocated),
-or %NULL to undo the effect of previous calls to
-of gtk_widget_modify_symbolic_color().
+<parameter name="pos">
+<parameter_description> Return location for the drop position, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_set_vadjustment">
+<description>
+Sets the #GtkAdjustment for the current vertical aspect.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="tree_view">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeView
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="adjustment">
+<parameter_description> The #GtkAdjustment to set, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -32502,21 +32560,24 @@ used.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_file_chooser_get_local_only">
+<function name="gtk_page_setup_get_top_margin">
<description>
-Gets whether only local files can be selected in the
-file selector. See gtk_file_chooser_set_local_only()
+Gets the top margin in units of @unit.
-Since: 2.4
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="chooser">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChoosre
+<parameter name="setup">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPageSetup
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="unit">
+<parameter_description> the unit for the return value
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if only local files can be selected.
+<return> the top margin
</return>
</function>
@@ -32539,23 +32600,32 @@ Since: 2.10
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_settings_get_orientation">
+<function name="gtk_file_chooser_set_local_only">
<description>
-Get the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_ORIENTATION,
-converted to a #GtkPageOrientation.
+Sets whether only local files can be selected in the
+file selector. If @local_only is %TRUE (the default),
+then the selected file are files are guaranteed to be
+accessible through the operating systems native file
+file system and therefore the application only
+needs to worry about the filename functions in
+#GtkFileChooser, like gtk_file_chooser_get_filename(),
+rather than the URI functions like
+gtk_file_chooser_get_uri(),
-Since: 2.10
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="settings">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
+<parameter name="chooser">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="local_only">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE if only local files can be selected
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the orientation
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_accel_group_activate">
@@ -32731,6 +32801,27 @@ See gtk_notebook_set_show_tabs().
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_tool_item_retrieve_proxy_menu_item">
+<description>
+Returns the #GtkMenuItem that was last set by
+gtk_tool_item_set_proxy_menu_item(), ie. the #GtkMenuItem
+that is going to appear in the overflow menu.
+
+Since: 2.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="tool_item">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItem
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> The #GtkMenuItem that is going to appear in the
+overflow menu for @tool_item.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="add_file">
<description>
Adds the given @file with its associated @info to the @model.
@@ -32805,21 +32896,23 @@ toplevel widget additionally has the global input focus.)
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_expand_to_path">
+<function name="gtk_misc_get_alignment">
<description>
-Expands the row at @path. This will also expand all parent rows of
- path as necessary.
-
-Since: 2.2
+Gets the X and Y alignment of the widget within its allocation.
+See gtk_misc_set_alignment().
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_view">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeView.
+<parameter name="misc">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkMisc
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="path">
-<parameter_description> path to a row.
+<parameter name="xalign">
+<parameter_description> location to store X alignment of @misc, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="yalign">
+<parameter_description> location to store Y alignment of @misc, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -32939,20 +33032,29 @@ Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_iter_get_chars_in_line">
+<function name="gtk_entry_get_icon_pixbuf">
<description>
-Returns the number of characters in the line containing @iter,
-including the paragraph delimiters.
+Retrieves the image used for the icon.
+Unlike the other methods of setting and getting icon data, this
+method will work regardless of whether the icon was set using a
+#GdkPixbuf, a #GIcon, a stock item, or an icon name.
+
+Since: 2.16
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> an iterator
+<parameter name="entry">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkEntry
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="icon_pos">
+<parameter_description> Icon position
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> number of characters in the line
+<return> A #GdkPixbuf, or %NULL if no icon is set for this position.
+
</return>
</function>
@@ -33126,24 +33228,6 @@ Since: 2.10
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_notebook_get_n_pages">
-<description>
-Gets the number of pages in a notebook.
-
-Since: 2.2
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="notebook">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkNotebook
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the number of pages in the notebook.
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_widget_show">
<description>
Flags a widget to be displayed. Any widget that isn't shown will
@@ -33260,6 +33344,41 @@ Since: 2.20
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_im_context_simple_add_table">
+<description>
+Adds an additional table to search to the input context.
+Each row of the table consists of @max_seq_len key symbols
+followed by two #guint16 interpreted as the high and low
+words of a #gunicode value. Tables are searched starting
+from the last added.
+
+The table must be sorted in dictionary order on the
+numeric value of the key symbol fields. (Values beyond
+the length of the sequence should be zero.)
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="context_simple">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkIMContextSimple
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="data">
+<parameter_description> the table
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="max_seq_len">
+<parameter_description> Maximum length of a sequence in the table
+(cannot be greater than #GTK_MAX_COMPOSE_LEN)
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="n_seqs">
+<parameter_description> number of sequences in the table
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_menu_get_reserve_toggle_size">
<description>
Returns whether the menu reserves space for toggles and
@@ -33279,6 +33398,21 @@ Since: 2.18
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_requisition_new">
+<description>
+Allocates a new #GtkRequisition structure and initializes its elements to zero.
+
+Since: 3.0
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+</parameters>
+<return> a new empty #GtkRequisition. The newly allocated #GtkRequisition should
+be freed with gtk_requisition_free().
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_drag_check_threshold">
<description>
Checks to see if a mouse drag starting at (@start_x, @start_y) and ending
@@ -33393,25 +33527,22 @@ Since: 2.18
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_layout_set_hadjustment">
+<function name="gtk_label_get_single_line_mode">
<description>
-Sets the horizontal scroll adjustment for the layout.
-
-See #GtkScrolledWindow, #GtkScrollbar, #GtkAdjustment for details.
+Returns whether the label is in single line mode.
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="layout">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkLayout
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="adjustment">
-<parameter_description> new scroll adjustment
+<parameter name="label">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkLabel
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE when the label is in single line mode.
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_pack_end">
@@ -33532,29 +33663,6 @@ g_free().
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_accelerator_valid">
-<description>
-Determines whether a given keyval and modifier mask constitute
-a valid keyboard accelerator. For example, the #GDK_a keyval
-plus #GDK_CONTROL_MASK is valid - this is a "Ctrl+a" accelerator.
-But, you can't, for instance, use the #GDK_Control_L keyval
-as an accelerator.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="keyval">
-<parameter_description> a GDK keyval
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="modifiers">
-<parameter_description> modifier mask
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the accelerator is valid
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_recent_chooser_set_sort_func">
<description>
Sets the comparison function used when sorting to be @sort_func. If
@@ -33625,6 +33733,22 @@ Since: 2.18
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_file_chooser_unselect_all">
+<description>
+Unselects all the files in the current folder of a file chooser.
+
+Since: 2.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="chooser">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_tree_model_get_valist">
<description>
See gtk_tree_model_get(), this version takes a <type>va_list</type>
@@ -33648,24 +33772,6 @@ for language bindings to use.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_calendar_unmark_day">
-<description>
-Removes the visual marker from a particular day.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="calendar">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkCalendar.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="day">
-<parameter_description> the day number to unmark between 1 and 31.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_label_set_markup_with_mnemonic">
<description>
Parses @str which is marked up with the <link linkend="PangoMarkupFormat">Pango text markup language</link>,
@@ -33798,47 +33904,45 @@ or %NULL if the image is empty.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_paper_size_get_paper_sizes">
+<function name="gtk_icon_view_scroll_to_path">
<description>
-Creates a list of known paper sizes.
-
-Since: 2.12
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="include_custom">
-<parameter_description> whether to include custom paper sizes
-as defined in the page setup dialog
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> a newly allocated list of newly
-allocated #GtkPaperSize objects
-
-</return>
-</function>
+Moves the alignments of @icon_view to the position specified by @path.
+ row_align determines where the row is placed, and @col_align determines
+where @column is placed. Both are expected to be between 0.0 and 1.0.
+0.0 means left/top alignment, 1.0 means right/bottom alignment, 0.5 means
+center.
-<function name="gtk_tool_button_set_use_underline">
-<description>
-If set, an underline in the label property indicates that the next character
-should be used for the mnemonic accelerator key in the overflow menu. For
-example, if the label property is "_Open" and @use_underline is %TRUE,
-the label on the tool button will be "Open" and the item on the overflow
-menu will have an underlined 'O'.
+If @use_align is %FALSE, then the alignment arguments are ignored, and the
+tree does the minimum amount of work to scroll the item onto the screen.
+This means that the item will be scrolled to the edge closest to its current
+position. If the item is currently visible on the screen, nothing is done.
-Labels shown on tool buttons never have mnemonics on them; this property
-only affects the menu item on the overflow menu.
+This function only works if the model is set, and @path is a valid row on
+the model. If the model changes before the @icon_view is realized, the
+centered path will be modified to reflect this change.
-Since: 2.4
+Since: 2.8
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="button">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolButton
+<parameter name="icon_view">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkIconView.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="use_underline">
-<parameter_description> whether the button label has the form "_Open"
+<parameter name="path">
+<parameter_description> The path of the item to move to.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="use_align">
+<parameter_description> whether to use alignment arguments, or %FALSE.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="row_align">
+<parameter_description> The vertical alignment of the item specified by @path.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="col_align">
+<parameter_description> The horizontal alignment of the item specified by @path.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -33889,24 +33993,39 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_drag_source_add_uri_targets">
+<function name="gtk_test_display_button_window">
<description>
-Add the URI targets supported by #GtkSelection to
-the target list of the drag source. The targets
-are added with @info = 0. If you need another value,
-use gtk_target_list_add_uri_targets() and
-gtk_drag_source_set_target_list().
+Create a window with window title @window_title, text contents @dialog_text,
+and a number of buttons, according to the paired argument list given
+as @... parameters.
+Each button is created with a @label and a ::clicked signal handler that
+incremrents the integer stored in @nump.
+The window will be automatically shown with gtk_widget_show_now() after
+creation, so when this function returns it has already been mapped,
+resized and positioned on screen.
+The window will quit any running gtk_main()-loop when destroyed, and it
+will automatically be destroyed upon test function teardown.
-Since: 2.6
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget that's is a drag source
+<parameter name="window_title">
+<parameter_description> Title of the window to be displayed.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="dialog_text">
+<parameter_description> Text inside the window to be displayed.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="Varargs">
+<parameter_description> %NULL terminated list of (const char *label, int *nump) pairs.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> a widget pointer to the newly created GtkWindow.
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_container_child_get">
@@ -34006,22 +34125,22 @@ Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_recent_manager_new">
+<function name="gtk_range_get_slider_size_fixed">
<description>
-Creates a new recent manager object. Recent manager objects are used to
-handle the list of recently used resources. A #GtkRecentManager object
-monitors the recently used resources list, and emits the "changed" signal
-each time something inside the list changes.
+This function is useful mainly for #GtkRange subclasses.
-#GtkRecentManager objects are expensive: be sure to create them only when
-needed. You should use gtk_recent_manager_get_default() instead.
+See gtk_range_set_slider_size_fixed().
-Since: 2.10
+Since: 2.20
</description>
<parameters>
+<parameter name="range">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkRange
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> A newly created #GtkRecentManager object.
+<return> whether the range's slider has a fixed size.
</return>
</function>
@@ -34166,6 +34285,26 @@ Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_get_tooltip_column">
+<description>
+Returns the column of @tree_view's model which is being used for
+displaying tooltips on @tree_view's rows.
+
+Since: 2.12
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="tree_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeView
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the index of the tooltip column that is currently being
+used, or -1 if this is disabled.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_check_menu_item_get_inconsistent">
<description>
Retrieves the value set by gtk_check_menu_item_set_inconsistent().
@@ -34374,6 +34513,22 @@ gtk_editable_set_editable().
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_get_sort_indicator">
+<description>
+Gets the value set by gtk_tree_view_column_set_sort_indicator().
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="tree_column">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeViewColumn
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> whether the sort indicator arrow is displayed
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_tree_path_new_first">
<description>
Creates a new #GtkTreePath. The string representation of this path is "0"
@@ -34487,22 +34642,24 @@ its toplevel, %FALSE otherwise
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_recent_chooser_get_sort_type">
+<function name="gtk_drag_dest_add_text_targets">
<description>
-Gets the value set by gtk_recent_chooser_set_sort_type().
+Add the text targets supported by #GtkSelection to
+the target list of the drag destination. The targets
+are added with @info = 0. If you need another value,
+use gtk_target_list_add_text_targets() and
+gtk_drag_dest_set_target_list().
-Since: 2.10
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="chooser">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentChooser
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget that's a drag destination
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the sorting order of the @chooser.
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_widget_set_default_direction">
@@ -34545,20 +34702,31 @@ Since: 2.10
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_viewport_get_hadjustment">
+<function name="gtk_entry_completion_set_text_column">
<description>
-Returns the horizontal adjustment of the viewport.
+Convenience function for setting up the most used case of this code: a
+completion list with just strings. This function will set up @completion
+to have a list displaying all (and just) strings in the completion list,
+and to get those strings from @column in the model of @completion.
+This functions creates and adds a #GtkCellRendererText for the selected
+column. If you need to set the text column, but don't want the cell
+renderer, use g_object_set() to set the ::text_column property directly.
+
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="viewport">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkViewport.
+<parameter name="completion">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkEntryCompletion.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="column">
+<parameter_description> The column in the model of @completion to get strings from.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the horizontal adjustment of @viewport.
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_icon_theme_set_search_path">
@@ -34620,6 +34788,33 @@ Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_selection_data_set_text">
+<description>
+Sets the contents of the selection from a UTF-8 encoded string.
+The string is converted to the form determined by
+ selection_data->target.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="selection_data">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkSelectionData
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="str">
+<parameter_description> a UTF-8 string
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="len">
+<parameter_description> the length of @str, or -1 if @str is nul-terminated.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if the selection was successfully set,
+otherwise %FALSE.
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_text_iter_is_end">
<description>
Returns %TRUE if @iter is the end iterator, i.e. one past the last
@@ -34639,6 +34834,28 @@ iterator.
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_tree_drag_source_row_draggable">
+<description>
+Asks the #GtkTreeDragSource whether a particular row can be used as
+the source of a DND operation. If the source doesn't implement
+this interface, the row is assumed draggable.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="drag_source">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeDragSource
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="path">
+<parameter_description> row on which user is initiating a drag
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if the row can be dragged
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_stock_lookup">
<description>
Fills @item with the registered values for @stock_id, returning %TRUE
@@ -34828,52 +35045,6 @@ and must not be modified.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_get_events">
-<description>
-Returns the event mask for the widget (a bitfield containing flags
-from the #GdkEventMask enumeration). These are the events that the widget
-will receive.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> event mask for @widget
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_print_settings_to_file">
-<description>
-This function saves the print settings from @settings to @file_name. If the
-file could not be loaded then error is set to either a #GFileError or
-#GKeyFileError.
-
-Since: 2.12
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="settings">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="file_name">
-<parameter_description> the file to save to
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="error">
-<parameter_description> return location for errors, or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE on success
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_builder_add_objects_from_file">
<description>
Parses a file containing a <link linkend="BUILDER-UI">GtkBuilder
@@ -34943,22 +35114,33 @@ library contains more information about accessible objects and their uses.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_get_expand">
+<function name="gtk_size_request_get_width_for_height">
<description>
-Return %TRUE if the column expands to take any available space.
+Retrieves a widget's minimum and natural width if it would be given
+the specified @height.
-Since: 2.4
+Since: 3.0
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_column">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeViewColumn
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkSizeRequest instance
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="height">
+<parameter_description> the height which is available for allocation
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="minimum_width">
+<parameter_description> location for storing the minimum width, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="natural_width">
+<parameter_description> location for storing the natural width, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE, if the column expands
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_text_iter_editable">
@@ -35052,30 +35234,53 @@ gtk_tree_store_set_value().
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_view_move_child">
+<function name="gtk_calendar_get_day_is_marked">
<description>
-Updates the position of a child, as for gtk_text_view_add_child_in_window().
+Returns if the @day of the @calendar is already marked.
+
+Since: 3.0
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="text_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextView
+<parameter name="calendar">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkCalendar
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="child">
-<parameter_description> child widget already added to the text view
+<parameter name="day">
+<parameter_description> the day number between 1 and 31.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="xpos">
-<parameter_description> new X position in window coordinates
+</parameters>
+<return> whether the day is marked.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_accel_groups_activate">
+<description>
+Finds the first accelerator in any #GtkAccelGroup attached
+to @object that matches @accel_key and @accel_mods, and
+activates that accelerator.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="object">
+<parameter_description> the #GObject, usually a #GtkWindow, on which
+to activate the accelerator.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="ypos">
-<parameter_description> new Y position in window coordinates
+<parameter name="accel_key">
+<parameter_description> accelerator keyval from a key event
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="accel_mods">
+<parameter_description> keyboard state mask from a key event
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if an accelerator was activated and handled this keypress
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_tool_palette_get_icon_size">
@@ -35097,6 +35302,37 @@ Since: 2.20
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_im_context_set_surrounding">
+<description>
+Sets surrounding context around the insertion point and preedit
+string. This function is expected to be called in response to the
+GtkIMContext::retrieve_surrounding signal, and will likely have no
+effect if called at other times.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="context">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIMContext
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="text">
+<parameter_description> text surrounding the insertion point, as UTF-8.
+the preedit string should not be included within
+ text
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="len">
+<parameter_description> the length of @text, or -1 if @text is nul-terminated
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="cursor_index">
+<parameter_description> the byte index of the insertion cursor within @text.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_progress_bar_get_orientation">
<description>
Retrieves the current progress bar orientation.
@@ -35138,25 +35374,6 @@ Since: 2.2
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_entry_get_buffer">
-<description>
-Get the #GtkEntryBuffer object which holds the text for
-this widget.
-
-Since: 2.18
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="entry">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkEntry
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> A #GtkEntryBuffer object.
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_widget_hide_all">
<description>
Recursively hides a widget and any child widgets.
@@ -35171,36 +35388,30 @@ Recursively hides a widget and any child widgets.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_page_setup_load_key_file">
+<function name="gtk_show_about_dialog">
<description>
-Reads the page setup from the group @group_name in the key file
- key_file
+This is a convenience function for showing an application's about box.
+The constructed dialog is associated with the parent window and
+reused for future invocations of this function.
-Since: 2.14
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="setup">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPageSetup
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="key_file">
-<parameter_description> the #GKeyFile to retrieve the page_setup from
+<parameter name="parent">
+<parameter_description> transient parent, or %NULL for none
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="group_name">
-<parameter_description> the name of the group in the key_file to read, or %NULL
-to use the default name "Page Setup"
+<parameter name="first_property_name">
+<parameter_description> the name of the first property
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="error">
-<parameter_description> return location for an error, or %NULL
+<parameter name="Varargs">
+<parameter_description> value of first property, followed by more properties, %NULL-terminated
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE on success
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_combo_box_get_wrap_width">
@@ -35248,45 +35459,19 @@ indices in the layout to byte indices in the entry contents.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_entry_get_current_icon_drag_source">
+<function name="gtk_wrap_box_get_natural_line_children">
<description>
-Returns the index of the icon which is the source of the current
-DND operation, or -1.
+Gets the natural amount of children per line.
-This function is meant to be used in a #GtkWidget::drag-data-get
-callback.
-
-Since: 2.16
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="entry">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkIconEntry
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> index of the icon which is the source of the current
-DND operation, or -1.
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_selection_data_get_text">
-<description>
-Gets the contents of the selection data as a UTF-8 string.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="selection_data">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkSelectionData
+<parameter name="box">
+<parameter_description> An #GtkWrapBox
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> if the selection data contained a recognized
-text type and it could be converted to UTF-8, a newly allocated
-string containing the converted text, otherwise %NULL.
-If the result is non-%NULL it must be freed with g_free().
+<return> The natural amount of children per line.
</return>
</function>
@@ -35335,25 +35520,20 @@ Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_mount_operation_set_parent">
+<function name="gtk_cell_renderer_toggle_get_radio">
<description>
-Sets the transient parent for windows shown by the
-#GtkMountOperation.
+Returns whether we're rendering radio toggles rather than checkboxes.
-Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="op">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkMountOperation
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="parent">
-<parameter_description> transient parent of the window, or %NULL
+<parameter name="toggle">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkCellRendererToggle
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if we're rendering radio toggles rather than checkboxes
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_layout_get_vadjustment">
@@ -35377,21 +35557,28 @@ See #GtkScrolledWindow, #GtkScrollbar, #GtkAdjustment for details.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_accel_map_add_filter">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_scroll_to_point">
<description>
-Adds a filter to the global list of accel path filters.
-
-Accel map entries whose accel path matches one of the filters
-are skipped by gtk_accel_map_foreach().
+Scrolls the tree view such that the top-left corner of the visible
+area is @tree_x, @tree_y, where @tree_x and @tree_y are specified
+in tree coordinates. The @tree_view must be realized before
+this function is called. If it isn't, you probably want to be
+using gtk_tree_view_scroll_to_cell().
-This function is intended for GTK+ modules that create their own
-menus, but don't want them to be saved into the applications accelerator
-map dump.
+If either @tree_x or @tree_y are -1, then that direction isn't scrolled.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="filter_pattern">
-<parameter_description> a pattern (see #GPatternSpec)
+<parameter name="tree_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeView
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="tree_x">
+<parameter_description> X coordinate of new top-left pixel of visible area, or -1
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="tree_y">
+<parameter_description> Y coordinate of new top-left pixel of visible area, or -1
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -35420,20 +35607,29 @@ Changes the menu label for the page containing @child.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_action_set_short_label">
+<function name="gtk_scrolled_window_set_policy">
<description>
-Sets a shorter label text on @action.
+Sets the scrollbar policy for the horizontal and vertical scrollbars.
-Since: 2.16
+The policy determines when the scrollbar should appear; it is a value
+from the #GtkPolicyType enumeration. If %GTK_POLICY_ALWAYS, the
+scrollbar is always present; if %GTK_POLICY_NEVER, the scrollbar is
+never present; if %GTK_POLICY_AUTOMATIC, the scrollbar is present only
+if needed (that is, if the slider part of the bar would be smaller
+than the trough - the display is larger than the page size).
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="action">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkAction
+<parameter name="scrolled_window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkScrolledWindow
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="short_label">
-<parameter_description> the label text to set
+<parameter name="hscrollbar_policy">
+<parameter_description> policy for horizontal bar
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="vscrollbar_policy">
+<parameter_description> policy for vertical bar
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -35597,21 +35793,49 @@ Since: 2.12
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_combo_box_get_column_span_column">
+<function name="gtk_binding_set_activate">
<description>
-Returns the column with column span information for @combo_box.
+Find a key binding matching @keyval and @modifiers within
+ binding_set and activate the binding on @object.
-Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="combo_box">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkComboBox
+<parameter name="binding_set">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkBindingSet set to activate
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="keyval">
+<parameter_description> key value of the binding
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="modifiers">
+<parameter_description> key modifier of the binding
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="object">
+<parameter_description> object to activate when binding found
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the column span column.
+<return> %TRUE if a binding was found and activated
+</return>
+</function>
+<function name="gtk_drag_dest_get_target_list">
+<description>
+Returns the list of targets this widget can accept from
+drag-and-drop.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the #GtkTargetList, or %NULL if none
</return>
</function>
@@ -35634,16 +35858,6 @@ Since: 2.6
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_printer_backend_load_modules">
-<description>
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-</parameters>
-<return>
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_window_set_icon">
<description>
Sets up the icon representing a #GtkWindow. This icon is used when
@@ -35724,6 +35938,28 @@ Since: 2.6
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_link_button_new_with_label">
+<description>
+Creates a new #GtkLinkButton containing a label.
+
+Since: 2.10
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="uri">
+<parameter_description> a valid URI
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="label">
+<parameter_description> the text of the button
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> a new link button widget.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_action_set_accel_group">
<description>
Sets the #GtkAccelGroup in which the accelerator for this action
@@ -35771,63 +36007,6 @@ Obtains the selected date from a #GtkCalendar.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_editable_delete_text">
-<description>
-Deletes a sequence of characters. The characters that are deleted are
-those characters at positions from @start_pos up to, but not including
- end_pos If @end_pos is negative, then the the characters deleted
-are those from @start_pos to the end of the text.
-
-Note that the positions are specified in characters, not bytes.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="editable">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkEditable
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="start_pos">
-<parameter_description> start position
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="end_pos">
-<parameter_description> end position
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_icon_view_get_cursor">
-<description>
-Fills in @path and @cell with the current cursor path and cell.
-If the cursor isn't currently set, then * path will be %NULL.
-If no cell currently has focus, then * cell will be %NULL.
-
-The returned #GtkTreePath must be freed with gtk_tree_path_free().
-
-Since: 2.8
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="icon_view">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkIconView
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="path">
-<parameter_description> Return location for the current cursor path, or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="cell">
-<parameter_description> Return location the current focus cell, or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the cursor is set.
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_entry_buffer_delete_text">
<description>
Deletes a sequence of characters from the buffer. @n_chars characters are
@@ -36065,35 +36244,6 @@ by GTK+
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_rc_parse_color_full">
-<description>
-Parses a color in the <link linkend="color=format">format</link> expected
-in a RC file. If @style is not %NULL, it will be consulted to resolve
-references to symbolic colors.
-
-Since: 2.12
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="scanner">
-<parameter_description> a #GScanner
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="style">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkRcStyle, or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="color">
-<parameter_description> a pointer to a #GdkColor structure in which to store the result
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> %G_TOKEN_NONE if parsing succeeded, otherwise the token
-that was expected but not found
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_paint_layout">
<description>
Draws a layout on @window using the given parameters.
@@ -36146,24 +36296,25 @@ output should not be clipped
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_container_class_list_child_properties">
+<function name="gtk_target_list_add_text_targets">
<description>
-Returns all child properties of a container class.
+Appends the text targets supported by #GtkSelection to
+the target list. All targets are added with the same @info.
+
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="cclass">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkContainerClass
+<parameter name="list">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTargetList
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="n_properties">
-<parameter_description> location to return the number of child properties found
+<parameter name="info">
+<parameter_description> an ID that will be passed back to the application
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a newly allocated %NULL-terminated array of #GParamSpec*.
-The array must be freed with g_free().
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_text_view_set_cursor_visible">
@@ -36301,24 +36452,6 @@ The function updates @position to point after the newly inserted text.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_action_group_list_actions">
-<description>
-Lists the actions in the action group.
-
-Since: 2.4
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="action_group">
-<parameter_description> the action group
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> an allocated list of the action objects in the action group
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_about_dialog_get_program_name">
<description>
Returns the program name displayed in the about dialog.
@@ -36338,45 +36471,28 @@ dialog and must not be modified.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_ui_manager_get_accel_group">
-<description>
-Returns the #GtkAccelGroup associated with @self.
-
-Since: 2.4
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="self">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkUIManager object
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the #GtkAccelGroup.
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_tool_item_set_use_drag_window">
+<function name="gtk_recent_info_match">
<description>
-Sets whether @tool_item has a drag window. When %TRUE the
-toolitem can be used as a drag source through gtk_drag_source_set().
-When @tool_item has a drag window it will intercept all events,
-even those that would otherwise be sent to a child of @tool_item.
+Checks whether two #GtkRecentInfo structures point to the same
+resource.
-Since: 2.4
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tool_item">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItem
+<parameter name="info_a">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentInfo
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="use_drag_window">
-<parameter_description> Whether @tool_item has a drag window.
+<parameter name="info_b">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentInfo
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if both #GtkRecentInfo structures point to se same
+resource, %FALSE otherwise.
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_requisition_free">
@@ -36520,22 +36636,47 @@ Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_context_create_pango_layout">
+<function name="gtk_page_setup_set_bottom_margin">
<description>
-Creates a new #PangoLayout that is suitable for use
-with the #GtkPrintContext.
+Sets the bottom margin of the #GtkPageSetup.
Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="context">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintContext
+<parameter name="setup">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPageSetup
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="margin">
+<parameter_description> the new bottom margin in units of @unit
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="unit">
+<parameter_description> the units for @margin
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a new Pango layout for @context
+<return></return>
+</function>
+<function name="gtk_list_store_newv">
+<description>
+Non-vararg creation function. Used primarily by language bindings.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="n_columns">
+<parameter_description> number of columns in the list store
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="types">
+<parameter_description> an array of #GType types for the columns, from first to last
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> a new #GtkListStore
</return>
</function>
@@ -36648,34 +36789,6 @@ Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_init_check">
-<description>
-This function does the same work as gtk_init() with only
-a single change: It does not terminate the program if the GUI can't be
-initialized. Instead it returns %FALSE on failure.
-
-This way the application can fall back to some other means of communication
-with the user - for example a curses or command line interface.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="argc">
-<parameter_description> Address of the <parameter>argc</parameter> parameter of your
-main() function. Changed if any arguments were handled.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="argv">
-<parameter_description> Address of the <parameter>argv</parameter> parameter of main().
-Any parameters understood by gtk_init() are stripped before return.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the GUI has been successfully initialized,
-%FALSE otherwise.
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_entry_set_icon_tooltip_markup">
<description>
Sets @tooltip as the contents of the tooltip for the icon at
@@ -36707,33 +36820,64 @@ Since: 2.16
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tooltip_set_tip_area">
+<function name="gtk_combo_box_set_add_tearoffs">
<description>
-Sets the area of the widget, where the contents of this tooltip apply,
-to be @rect (in widget coordinates). This is especially useful for
-properly setting tooltips on #GtkTreeView rows and cells, #GtkIconViews,
-etc.
-
-For setting tooltips on #GtkTreeView, please refer to the convenience
-functions for this: gtk_tree_view_set_tooltip_row() and
-gtk_tree_view_set_tooltip_cell().
+Sets whether the popup menu should have a tearoff
+menu item.
-Since: 2.12
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tooltip">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTooltip
+<parameter name="combo_box">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkComboBox
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="rect">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkRectangle
+<parameter name="add_tearoffs">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE to add tearoff menu items
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_combo_box_get_model">
+<description>
+Returns the #GtkTreeModel which is acting as data source for @combo_box.
+
+Since: 2.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="combo_box">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkComboBox
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> A #GtkTreeModel which was passed during construction.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_image_menu_item_get_always_show_image">
+<description>
+Returns whether the menu item will ignore the #GtkSettings:gtk-menu-images
+setting and always show the image, if available.
+
+Since: 2.16
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="image_menu_item">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkImageMenuItem
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if the menu item will always show the image
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_assistant_get_page_side_image">
<description>
Gets the header image for @page.
@@ -36814,52 +36958,28 @@ itself, excluding surrounding borders and the tree expander area.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_paint_hline">
+<function name="gtk_entry_get_icon_tooltip_text">
<description>
-Draws a horizontal line from (@x1, @y) to (@x2, @y) in @window
-using the given style and state.
+Gets the contents of the tooltip on the icon at the specified
+position in @entry.
+
+Since: 2.16
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="style">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="state_type">
-<parameter_description> a state
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="area">
-<parameter_description> rectangle to which the output is clipped, or %NULL if the
-output should not be clipped
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> the widget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="detail">
-<parameter_description> a style detail
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="x1">
-<parameter_description> the starting x coordinate
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="x2">
-<parameter_description> the ending x coordinate
+<parameter name="entry">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkEntry
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="y">
-<parameter_description> the y coordinate
+<parameter name="icon_pos">
+<parameter_description> the icon position
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the tooltip text, or %NULL. Free the returned string
+with g_free() when done.
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_print_context_get_cairo_context">
@@ -36932,6 +37052,84 @@ Recursively expands all nodes in the @tree_view.
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_frame_get_label">
+<description>
+If the frame's label widget is a #GtkLabel, returns the
+text in the label widget. (The frame will have a #GtkLabel
+for the label widget if a non-%NULL argument was passed
+to gtk_frame_new().)
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="frame">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFrame
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the text in the label, or %NULL if there
+was no label widget or the lable widget was not
+a #GtkLabel. This string is owned by GTK+ and
+must not be modified or freed.
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_clear_attributes">
+<description>
+Clears all existing attributes previously set with
+gtk_tree_view_column_set_attributes().
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="tree_column">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeViewColumn
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="cell_renderer">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkCellRenderer to clear the attribute mapping on.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_tool_item_group_new">
+<description>
+Creates a new tool item group with label @label.
+
+Since: 2.20
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="label">
+<parameter_description> the label of the new group
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> a new #GtkToolItemGroup.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_toggle_tool_button_get_active">
+<description>
+Queries a #GtkToggleToolButton and returns its current state.
+Returns %TRUE if the toggle button is pressed in and %FALSE if it is raised.
+
+Since: 2.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="button">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToggleToolButton
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if the toggle tool button is pressed in, %FALSE if not
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_text_view_get_cursor_visible">
<description>
Find out whether the cursor is being displayed.
@@ -36966,29 +37164,23 @@ Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_file_chooser_set_filter">
+<function name="gtk_widget_get_can_focus">
<description>
-Sets the current filter; only the files that pass the
-filter will be displayed. If the user-selectable list of filters
-is non-empty, then the filter should be one of the filters
-in that list. Setting the current filter when the list of
-filters is empty is useful if you want to restrict the displayed
-set of files without letting the user change it.
+Determines whether @widget can own the input focus. See
+gtk_widget_set_can_focus().
-Since: 2.4
+Since: 2.18
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="chooser">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="filter">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFileFilter
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if @widget can own the input focus, %FALSE otherwise
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_entry_set_activates_default">
@@ -37097,32 +37289,6 @@ Same as gtk_text_iter_forward_search(), but moves backward.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_window_set_type_hint">
-<description>
-By setting the type hint for the window, you allow the window
-manager to decorate and handle the window in a way which is
-suitable to the function of the window in your application.
-
-This function should be called before the window becomes visible.
-
-gtk_dialog_new_with_buttons() and other convenience functions in GTK+
-will sometimes call gtk_window_set_type_hint() on your behalf.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="hint">
-<parameter_description> the window type
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_im_multicontext_set_context_id">
<description>
Sets the context id for @context.
@@ -37164,24 +37330,53 @@ Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_unix_dialog_set_has_selection">
+<function name="gtk_entry_get_text_window">
<description>
-Sets whether a selection exists.
+Returns the #GdkWindow which contains the text. This function is
+useful when drawing something to the entry in an expose-event
+callback because it enables the callback to distinguish between
+the text window and entry's icon windows.
-Since: 2.18
+See also gtk_entry_get_icon_window().
+
+Since: 2.20
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="dialog">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintUnixDialog
+<parameter name="entry">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkEntry
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="has_selection">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE indicates that a selection exists
+</parameters>
+<return> the entry's text window.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_page_setup_get_page_width">
+<description>
+Returns the page width in units of @unit.
+
+Note that this function takes orientation and
+margins into consideration.
+See gtk_page_setup_get_paper_width().
+
+Since: 2.10
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="setup">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPageSetup
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="unit">
+<parameter_description> the unit for the return value
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the page width.
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_text_child_anchor_get_widgets">
@@ -37226,22 +37421,15 @@ the horizontal, in degrees, measured counterclockwise
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_printer_accepts_ps">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_new">
<description>
-Returns whether the printer accepts input in
-PostScript format.
+Creates a new #GtkTreeView widget.
-Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="printer">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrinter
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if @printer accepts PostScript
-
+<return> A newly created #GtkTreeView widget.
</return>
</function>
@@ -37458,21 +37646,20 @@ Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_job_get_title">
+<function name="gtk_text_layout_get_buffer">
<description>
-Gets the job title.
+Gets the text buffer used by the layout. See
+gtk_text_layout_set_buffer().
-Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="job">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintJob
+<parameter name="layout">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextLayout
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the title of @job
-
+<return> the text buffer used by the layout.
</return>
</function>
@@ -37501,6 +37688,25 @@ parent (or grandparent or great-grandparent) of @descendant.
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_cell_size_request_get_request_mode">
+<description>
+Gets whether the cell renderer prefers a height-for-width layout
+or a width-for-height layout.
+
+Since: 3.0
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="cell">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkCellSizeRequest instance
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> The #GtkSizeRequestMode preferred by this renderer.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_print_settings_set_use_color">
<description>
Sets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_USE_COLOR.
@@ -37521,55 +37727,27 @@ Since: 2.10
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_paint_polygon">
+<function name="gtk_hsv_is_adjusting">
<description>
-Draws a polygon on @window with the given parameters.
+An HSV color selector can be said to be adjusting if multiple rapid
+changes are being made to its value, for example, when the user is
+adjusting the value with the mouse. This function queries whether
+the HSV color selector is being adjusted or not.
+
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="style">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="state_type">
-<parameter_description> a state
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="shadow_type">
-<parameter_description> type of shadow to draw
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="area">
-<parameter_description> clip rectangle, or %NULL if the
-output should not be clipped
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> the widget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="detail">
-<parameter_description> a style detail
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="points">
-<parameter_description> an array of #GdkPoint<!-- -->s
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="n_points">
-<parameter_description> length of @points
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="fill">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE if the polygon should be filled
+<parameter name="hsv">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkHSV
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if clients can ignore changes to the color value,
+since they may be transitory, or %FALSE if they should consider
+the color value status to be final.
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_text_tag_set_priority">
@@ -37600,24 +37778,6 @@ automatically.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_job_get_settings">
-<description>
-Gets the #GtkPrintSettings of the print job.
-
-Since: 2.10
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="job">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintJob
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the settings of @job
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_range_set_show_fill_level">
<description>
Sets whether a graphical fill level is show on the trough. See
@@ -37782,6 +37942,26 @@ for the widget.
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_recent_chooser_remove_filter">
+<description>
+Removes @filter from the list of #GtkRecentFilter objects held by @chooser.
+
+Since: 2.10
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="chooser">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentChooser
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="filter">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentFilter
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_tree_sortable_set_default_sort_func">
<description>
Sets the default comparison function used when sorting to be @sort_func.
@@ -37861,49 +38041,69 @@ Since: 2.18
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_entry_get_text_window">
+<function name="gtk_cell_size_request_get_height_for_width">
<description>
-Returns the #GdkWindow which contains the text. This function is
-useful when drawing something to the entry in an expose-event
-callback because it enables the callback to distinguish between
-the text window and entry's icon windows.
-
-See also gtk_entry_get_icon_window().
+Retreives a cell renderers's minimum and natural height if it were rendered to
+ widget with the specified @width.
-Since: 2.20
+Since: 3.0
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="entry">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkEntry
+<parameter name="cell">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkCellSizeRequest instance
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkWidget this cell will be rendering to
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="width">
+<parameter_description> the size which is available for allocation
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="minimum_height">
+<parameter_description> location for storing the minimum size, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="natural_height">
+<parameter_description> location for storing the preferred size, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the entry's text window.
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_row_activated">
+<function name="gtk_distribute_natural_allocation">
<description>
-Activates the cell determined by @path and @column.
+Distributes @extra_space to child @sizes by bringing up smaller
+children up to natural size first.
+
+The remaining space will be added to the @minimum_size member of the
+GtkRequestedSize struct. If all sizes reach their natural size then
+the remaining space is returned.
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_view">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeView
+<parameter name="extra_space">
+<parameter_description> Extra space to redistribute among children after subtracting
+minimum sizes and any child padding from the overall allocation
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="path">
-<parameter_description> The #GtkTreePath to be activated.
+<parameter name="n_requested_sizes">
+<parameter_description> Number of requests to fit into the allocation
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="column">
-<parameter_description> The #GtkTreeViewColumn to be activated.
+<parameter name="sizes">
+<parameter_description> An array of structs with a client pointer and a minimum/natural size
+in the orientation of the allocation.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> The remainder of @extra_space after redistributing space
+to @sizes.
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_entry_completion_set_model">
@@ -37928,40 +38128,46 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_notebook_append_page_menu">
+<function name="gtk_accel_group_unlock">
<description>
-Appends a page to @notebook, specifying the widget to use as the
-label in the popup menu.
+Undoes the last call to gtk_accel_group_lock() on this @accel_group.
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="accel_group">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAccelGroup
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_cell_size_request_get_height">
+<description>
+Retreives a renderer's natural size when rendered to @widget.
+
+Since: 3.0
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="notebook">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkNotebook
+<parameter name="cell">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkCellSizeRequest instance
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="child">
-<parameter_description> the #GtkWidget to use as the contents of the page.
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkWidget this cell will be rendering to
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="tab_label">
-<parameter_description> the #GtkWidget to be used as the label for the page,
-or %NULL to use the default label, 'page N'.
+<parameter name="minimum_size">
+<parameter_description> location to store the minimum size, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="menu_label">
-<parameter_description> the widget to use as a label for the page-switch
-menu, if that is enabled. If %NULL, and @tab_label
-is a #GtkLabel or %NULL, then the menu label will be
-a newly created label with the same text as @tab_label;
-If @tab_label is not a #GtkLabel, @menu_label must be
-specified if the page-switch menu is to be used.
+<parameter name="natural_size">
+<parameter_description> location to store the natural size, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the index (starting from 0) of the appended
-page in the notebook, or -1 if function fails
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_radio_menu_item_new_with_mnemonic_from_widget">
@@ -38030,23 +38236,39 @@ Alters the view of @toolbar to display either icons only, text only, or both.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_entry_set_completion">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_set_widget">
<description>
-Sets @completion to be the auxiliary completion object to use with @entry.
-All further configuration of the completion mechanism is done on
- completion using the #GtkEntryCompletion API. Completion is disabled if
- completion is set to %NULL.
+Sets the widget in the header to be @widget. If widget is %NULL, then the
+header button is set with a #GtkLabel set to the title of @tree_column.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="tree_column">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeViewColumn.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> A child #GtkWidget, or %NULL.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_tool_item_set_visible_horizontal">
+<description>
+Sets whether @tool_item is visible when the toolbar is docked horizontally.
Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="entry">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkEntry
+<parameter name="tool_item">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItem
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="completion">
-<parameter_description> The #GtkEntryCompletion or %NULL
+<parameter name="visible_horizontal">
+<parameter_description> Whether @tool_item is visible when in horizontal mode
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -38107,20 +38329,21 @@ be used instead.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_editable_set_editable">
+<function name="gtk_entry_set_progress_pulse_step">
<description>
-Determines if the user can edit the text in the editable
-widget or not.
+Sets the fraction of total entry width to move the progress
+bouncing block for each call to gtk_entry_progress_pulse().
+
+Since: 2.16
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="editable">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkEditable
+<parameter name="entry">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkEntry
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="is_editable">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE if the user is allowed to edit the text
-in the widget
+<parameter name="fraction">
+<parameter_description> fraction between 0.0 and 1.0
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -38145,6 +38368,27 @@ Removes a window from a #GtkWindowGroup.
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_action_block_activate">
+<description>
+Disable activation signals from the action
+
+This is needed when updating the state of your proxy
+#GtkActivatable widget could result in calling gtk_action_activate(),
+this is a convenience function to avoid recursing in those
+cases (updating toggle state for instance).
+
+Since: 2.16
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="action">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAction
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_range_set_update_policy">
<description>
Sets the update policy for the range. #GTK_UPDATE_CONTINUOUS means that
@@ -38170,42 +38414,72 @@ drag operation.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_recent_info_get_age">
+<function name="gtk_about_dialog_get_license_type">
<description>
-Gets the number of days elapsed since the last update of the resource
-pointed by @info.
+Retrieves the license set using gtk_about_dialog_set_license_type()
-Since: 2.10
+Since: 3.0
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="info">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentInfo
+<parameter name="about">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAboutDialog
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a positive integer containing the number of days elapsed
-since the time this resource was last modified.
+<return> a #GtkLicense value
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_entry_completion_get_inline_completion">
+<function name="gtk_text_buffer_new">
<description>
-Returns whether the common prefix of the possible completions should
-be automatically inserted in the entry.
+Creates a new text buffer.
-Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="completion">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkEntryCompletion
+<parameter name="table">
+<parameter_description> a tag table, or %NULL to create a new one
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if inline completion is turned on
+<return> a new text buffer
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_combo_box_popup">
+<description>
+Pops up the menu or dropdown list of @combo_box.
+
+This function is mostly intended for use by accessibility technologies;
+applications should have little use for it.
+
+Since: 2.4
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="combo_box">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkComboBox
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_spin_button_get_value">
+<description>
+Get the value in the @spin_button.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="spin_button">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkSpinButton
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the value of @spin_button
</return>
</function>
@@ -38227,24 +38501,60 @@ Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_menu_bar_set_child_pack_direction">
+<function name="gtk_clipboard_wait_for_rich_text">
<description>
-Sets how widgets should be packed inside the children of a menubar.
+Requests the contents of the clipboard as rich text. This function
+waits for the data to be received using the main loop, so events,
+timeouts, etc, may be dispatched during the wait.
-Since: 2.8
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="menubar">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkMenuBar
+<parameter name="clipboard">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkClipboard
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="child_pack_dir">
-<parameter_description> a new #GtkPackDirection
+<parameter name="buffer">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextBuffer
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="format">
+<parameter_description> return location for the format of the returned data
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="length">
+<parameter_description> return location for the length of the returned data
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> a newly-allocated binary block of data which must
+be freed with g_free(), or %NULL if retrieving
+the selection data failed. (This could happen
+for various reasons, in particular if the
+clipboard was empty or if the contents of the
+clipboard could not be converted into text form.)
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_widget_has_rc_style">
+<description>
+Determines if the widget style has been looked up through the rc mechanism.
+
+Since: 2.20
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if the widget has been looked up through the rc
+mechanism, %FALSE otherwise.
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_icon_view_convert_widget_to_bin_window_coords">
@@ -38372,41 +38682,22 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_calendar_set_detail_func">
+<function name="gtk_print_settings_get_dither">
<description>
-Installs a function which provides Pango markup with detail information
-for each day. Examples for such details are holidays or appointments. That
-information is shown below each day when #GtkCalendar:show-details is set.
-A tooltip containing with full detail information is provided, if the entire
-text should not fit into the details area, or if #GtkCalendar:show-details
-is not set.
-
-The size of the details area can be restricted by setting the
-#GtkCalendar:detail-width-chars and #GtkCalendar:detail-height-rows
-properties.
+Gets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_DITHER.
-Since: 2.14
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="calendar">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkCalendar.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="func">
-<parameter_description> a function providing details for each day.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="data">
-<parameter_description> data to pass to @func invokations.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="destroy">
-<parameter_description> a function for releasing @data.
+<parameter name="settings">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the dithering that is used
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_text_view_window_to_buffer_coords">
@@ -38467,31 +38758,6 @@ offset back into an iterator.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_store_iter_is_valid">
-<description>
-WARNING: This function is slow. Only use it for debugging and/or testing
-purposes.
-
-Checks if the given iter is a valid iter for this #GtkTreeStore.
-
-Since: 2.2
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_store">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeStore.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeIter.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the iter is valid, %FALSE if the iter is invalid.
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_color_button_set_color">
<description>
Sets the current color to be @color.
@@ -38596,22 +38862,53 @@ or freed.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_scale_clear_marks">
+<function name="gtk_print_settings_set_resolution">
<description>
-Removes any marks that have been added with gtk_scale_add_mark().
+Sets the values of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_RESOLUTION,
+%GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_RESOLUTION_X and
+%GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_RESOLUTION_Y.
-Since: 2.16
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="scale">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkScale
+<parameter name="settings">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="resolution">
+<parameter_description> the resolution in dpi
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_file_chooser_select_filename">
+<description>
+Selects a filename. If the file name isn't in the current
+folder of @chooser, then the current folder of @chooser will
+be changed to the folder containing @filename.
+
+Since: 2.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="chooser">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="filename">
+<parameter_description> the filename to select
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if both the folder could be changed and the file was
+selected successfully, %FALSE otherwise.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_print_unix_dialog_get_embed_page_setup">
<description>
Gets the value of #GtkPrintUnixDialog::embed-page-setup property.
@@ -38656,24 +38953,6 @@ as plaintext
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_action_get_is_important">
-<description>
-Checks whether @action is important or not
-
-Since: 2.16
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="action">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkAction
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> whether @action is important
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_radio_menu_item_new_with_label_from_widget">
<description>
Creates a new GtkRadioMenuItem whose child is a simple GtkLabel.
@@ -38741,6 +39020,24 @@ Sets the horizontal adjustment of the viewport.
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_color_button_get_use_alpha">
+<description>
+Does the color selection dialog use the alpha channel?
+
+Since: 2.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="color_button">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkColorButton.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if the color sample uses alpha channel, %FALSE if not.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_widget_set_tooltip_markup">
<description>
Sets @markup as the contents of the tooltip, which is marked up with
@@ -38785,82 +39082,55 @@ Since: 2.6
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_clipboard_wait_for_targets">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_set_sort_order">
<description>
-Returns a list of targets that are present on the clipboard, or %NULL
-if there aren't any targets available. The returned list must be
-freed with g_free().
-This function waits for the data to be received using the main
-loop, so events, timeouts, etc, may be dispatched during the wait.
-
-Since: 2.4
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="clipboard">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkClipboard
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="targets">
-<parameter_description> location to store an array of targets. The result
-stored here must be freed with g_free().
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="n_targets">
-<parameter_description> location to store number of items in @targets.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if any targets are present on the clipboard,
-otherwise %FALSE.
+Changes the appearance of the sort indicator.
-</return>
-</function>
+This <emphasis>does not</emphasis> actually sort the model. Use
+gtk_tree_view_column_set_sort_column_id() if you want automatic sorting
+support. This function is primarily for custom sorting behavior, and should
+be used in conjunction with gtk_tree_sortable_set_sort_column() to do
+that. For custom models, the mechanism will vary.
-<function name="gtk_text_buffer_get_iter_at_child_anchor">
-<description>
-Obtains the location of @anchor within @buffer.
+The sort indicator changes direction to indicate normal sort or reverse sort.
+Note that you must have the sort indicator enabled to see anything when
+calling this function; see gtk_tree_view_column_set_sort_indicator().
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="buffer">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextBuffer
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> an iterator to be initialized
+<parameter name="tree_column">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeViewColumn
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="anchor">
-<parameter_description> a child anchor that appears in @buffer
+<parameter name="order">
+<parameter_description> sort order that the sort indicator should indicate
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_settings_foreach">
+<function name="gtk_printer_compare">
<description>
-Calls @func for each key-value pair of @settings.
+Compares two printers.
Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="settings">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="func">
-<parameter_description> (scope call) the function to call
+<parameter name="a">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrinter
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="user_data">
-<parameter_description> user data for @func
+<parameter name="b">
+<parameter_description> another #GtkPrinter
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> 0 if the printer match, a negative value if @a < @b,
+or a positive value if @a > @b
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_print_operation_set_has_selection">
@@ -38887,6 +39157,34 @@ Since: 2.18
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_wrap_box_new">
+<description>
+Creates an #GtkWrapBox.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="allocation_mode">
+<parameter_description> The #GtkWrapAllocationMode to use
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="spreading">
+<parameter_description> The #GtkWrapBoxSpreading policy to use
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="horizontal_spacing">
+<parameter_description> The horizontal spacing to add between children
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="vertical_spacing">
+<parameter_description> The vertical spacing to add between children
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> A new #GtkWrapBox container
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_action_get_label">
<description>
Gets the label text of @action.
@@ -38905,17 +39203,15 @@ Since: 2.16
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_ui_manager_new">
+<function name="gtk_toolbar_new">
<description>
-Creates a new ui manager object.
-
-Since: 2.4
+Creates a new toolbar.
+
</description>
<parameters>
</parameters>
-<return> a new ui manager object.
-
+<return> the newly-created toolbar.
</return>
</function>
@@ -39003,136 +39299,117 @@ Note that this position is in characters, not in bytes.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_vbox_new">
+<function name="gtk_print_operation_get_status_string">
<description>
-Creates a new #GtkVBox.
+Returns a string representation of the status of the
+print operation. The string is translated and suitable
+for displaying the print status e.g. in a #GtkStatusbar.
+Use gtk_print_operation_get_status() to obtain a status
+value that is suitable for programmatic use.
+
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="homogeneous">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE if all children are to be given equal space allotments.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="spacing">
-<parameter_description> the number of pixels to place by default between children.
+<parameter name="op">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintOperation
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a new #GtkVBox.
+<return> a string representation of the status
+of the print operation
+
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_iter_forward_find_char">
+<function name="gtk_text_view_get_line_at_y">
<description>
-Advances @iter, calling @pred on each character. If
- pred returns %TRUE, returns %TRUE and stops scanning.
-If @pred never returns %TRUE, @iter is set to @limit if
- limit is non-%NULL, otherwise to the end iterator.
-
+Gets the #GtkTextIter at the start of the line containing
+the coordinate @y. @y is in buffer coordinates, convert from
+window coordinates with gtk_text_view_window_to_buffer_coords().
+If non-%NULL, @line_top will be filled with the coordinate of the top
+edge of the line.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
+<parameter name="text_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextView
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="pred">
-<parameter_description> a function to be called on each character
+<parameter name="target_iter">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="user_data">
-<parameter_description> user data for @pred
+<parameter name="y">
+<parameter_description> a y coordinate
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="limit">
-<parameter_description> search limit, or %NULL for none
+<parameter name="line_top">
+<parameter_description> return location for top coordinate of the line
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> whether a match was found
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_about_dialog_get_copyright">
+<function name="gtk_border_free">
<description>
-Returns the copyright string.
-
-Since: 2.6
+Frees a #GtkBorder structure.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="about">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkAboutDialog
+<parameter name="border_">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkBorder.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> The copyright string. The string is owned by the about
-dialog and must not be modified.
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_stock_set_translate_func">
+<function name="gtk_tree_model_filter_convert_child_path_to_path">
<description>
-Sets a function to be used for translating the @label of
-a stock item.
-
-If no function is registered for a translation domain,
-g_dgettext() is used.
-
-The function is used for all stock items whose
- translation_domain matches @domain. Note that it is possible
-to use strings different from the actual gettext translation domain
-of your application for this, as long as your #GtkTranslateFunc uses
-the correct domain when calling dgettext(). This can be useful, e.g.
-when dealing with message contexts:
-
-|[
-GtkStockItem items[] = {
-{ MY_ITEM1, NC_("odd items", "Item 1"), 0, 0, "odd-item-domain" },
-{ MY_ITEM2, NC_("even items", "Item 2"), 0, 0, "even-item-domain" },
-};
-
-gchar *
-my_translate_func (const gchar *msgid,
-gpointer data)
-{
-gchar *msgctxt = data;
-
-return (gchar*)g_dpgettext2 (GETTEXT_PACKAGE, msgctxt, msgid);
-}
-
-/ * ... * /
-
-gtk_stock_add (items, G_N_ELEMENTS (items));
-gtk_stock_set_translate_func ("odd-item-domain", my_translate_func, "odd items");
-gtk_stock_set_translate_func ("even-item-domain", my_translate_func, "even items");
-]|
+Converts @child_path to a path relative to @filter. That is, @child_path
+points to a path in the child model. The rerturned path will point to the
+same row in the filtered model. If @child_path isn't a valid path on the
+child model or points to a row which is not visible in @filter, then %NULL
+is returned.
-Since: 2.8
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="domain">
-<parameter_description> the translation domain for which @func shall be used
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="func">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTranslateFunc
+<parameter name="filter">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeModelFilter.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="data">
-<parameter_description> data to pass to @func
+<parameter name="child_path">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreePath to convert.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="notify">
-<parameter_description> a #GDestroyNotify that is called when @data is
-no longer needed
+</parameters>
+<return> A newly allocated #GtkTreePath, or %NULL.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_about_dialog_get_copyright">
+<description>
+Returns the copyright string.
+
+Since: 2.6
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="about">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAboutDialog
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> The copyright string. The string is owned by the about
+dialog and must not be modified.
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_combo_box_get_row_separator_func">
@@ -39232,29 +39509,21 @@ the currently selected day.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_accel_group_disconnect_key">
+<function name="gtk_widget_push_colormap">
<description>
-Removes an accelerator previously installed through
-gtk_accel_group_connect().
+Pushes @cmap onto a global stack of colormaps; the topmost
+colormap on the stack will be used to create all widgets.
+Remove @cmap with gtk_widget_pop_colormap(). There's little
+reason to use this function.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="accel_group">
-<parameter_description> the accelerator group to install an accelerator in
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="accel_key">
-<parameter_description> key value of the accelerator
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="accel_mods">
-<parameter_description> modifier combination of the accelerator
+<parameter name="cmap">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkColormap
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if there was an accelerator which could be
-removed, %FALSE otherwise
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_window_stick">
@@ -39446,26 +39715,31 @@ value changes.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_selection_data_get_uris">
+<function name="gtk_tool_button_set_use_underline">
<description>
-Gets the contents of the selection data as array of URIs.
+If set, an underline in the label property indicates that the next character
+should be used for the mnemonic accelerator key in the overflow menu. For
+example, if the label property is "_Open" and @use_underline is %TRUE,
+the label on the tool button will be "Open" and the item on the overflow
+menu will have an underlined 'O'.
-Since: 2.6
+Labels shown on tool buttons never have mnemonics on them; this property
+only affects the menu item on the overflow menu.
+
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="selection_data">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkSelectionData
+<parameter name="button">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolButton
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="use_underline">
+<parameter_description> whether the button label has the form "_Open"
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> if
-the selection data contains a list of
-URIs, a newly allocated %NULL-terminated string array
-containing the URIs, otherwise %NULL. If the result is
-non-%NULL it must be freed with g_strfreev().
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_widget_input_shape_combine_mask">
@@ -39498,60 +39772,65 @@ Since: 2.10
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_get_extension_events">
+<function name="gtk_image_new_from_animation">
<description>
-Retrieves the extension events the widget will receive; see
-gdk_input_set_extension_events().
+Creates a #GtkImage displaying the given animation.
+The #GtkImage does not assume a reference to the
+animation; you still need to unref it if you own references.
+#GtkImage will add its own reference rather than adopting yours.
+
+Note that the animation frames are shown using a timeout with
+#G_PRIORITY_DEFAULT. When using animations to indicate busyness,
+keep in mind that the animation will only be shown if the main loop
+is not busy with something that has a higher priority.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+<parameter name="animation">
+<parameter_description> an animation
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> extension events for @widget
+<return> a new #GtkImage widget
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_range_set_upper_stepper_sensitivity">
+<function name="gtk_paper_size_is_custom">
<description>
-Sets the sensitivity policy for the stepper that points to the
-'upper' end of the GtkRange's adjustment.
+Returns %TRUE if @size is not a standard paper size.
-Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="range">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkRange
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="sensitivity">
-<parameter_description> the upper stepper's sensitivity policy.
+<parameter name="size">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPaperSize object
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> whether @size is a custom paper size.
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_printer_is_default">
+<function name="gtk_range_set_upper_stepper_sensitivity">
<description>
-Returns whether the printer is the default printer.
+Sets the sensitivity policy for the stepper that points to the
+'upper' end of the GtkRange's adjustment.
Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="printer">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrinter
+<parameter name="range">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkRange
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="sensitivity">
+<parameter_description> the upper stepper's sensitivity policy.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if @printer is the default
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_targets_include_rich_text">
@@ -39646,32 +39925,32 @@ Since: 2.18
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_scroll_to_point">
+<function name="gtk_widget_remove_accelerator">
<description>
-Scrolls the tree view such that the top-left corner of the visible
-area is @tree_x, @tree_y, where @tree_x and @tree_y are specified
-in tree coordinates. The @tree_view must be realized before
-this function is called. If it isn't, you probably want to be
-using gtk_tree_view_scroll_to_cell().
-
-If either @tree_x or @tree_y are -1, then that direction isn't scrolled.
+Removes an accelerator from @widget, previously installed with
+gtk_widget_add_accelerator().
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeView
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> widget to install an accelerator on
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="tree_x">
-<parameter_description> X coordinate of new top-left pixel of visible area, or -1
+<parameter name="accel_group">
+<parameter_description> accel group for this widget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="tree_y">
-<parameter_description> Y coordinate of new top-left pixel of visible area, or -1
+<parameter name="accel_key">
+<parameter_description> GDK keyval of the accelerator
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="accel_mods">
+<parameter_description> modifier key combination of the accelerator
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> whether an accelerator was installed and could be removed
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_tree_view_get_hover_expand">
@@ -39851,20 +40130,29 @@ Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_range_get_inverted">
+<function name="gtk_tool_item_group_insert">
<description>
-Gets the value set by gtk_range_set_inverted().
+Inserts @item at @position in the list of children of @group.
+Since: 2.20
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="range">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkRange
+<parameter name="group">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItemGroup
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="item">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkToolItem to insert into @group
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="position">
+<parameter_description> the position of @item in @group, starting with 0.
+The position -1 means end of list.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the range is inverted
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_notebook_set_window_creation_hook">
@@ -39892,25 +40180,21 @@ Since: 2.10
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_frame_get_label">
+<function name="gtk_window_get_mnemonic_modifier">
<description>
-If the frame's label widget is a #GtkLabel, returns the
-text in the label widget. (The frame will have a #GtkLabel
-for the label widget if a non-%NULL argument was passed
-to gtk_frame_new().)
+Returns the mnemonic modifier for this window. See
+gtk_window_set_mnemonic_modifier().
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="frame">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFrame
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the text in the label, or %NULL if there
-was no label widget or the lable widget was not
-a #GtkLabel. This string is owned by GTK+ and
-must not be modified or freed.
+<return> the modifier mask used to activate
+mnemonics on this window.
</return>
</function>
@@ -39937,34 +40221,22 @@ or should all have the same requisition in both directions
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_buffer_begin_user_action">
+<function name="gtk_widget_get_events">
<description>
-Called to indicate that the buffer operations between here and a
-call to gtk_text_buffer_end_user_action() are part of a single
-user-visible operation. The operations between
-gtk_text_buffer_begin_user_action() and
-gtk_text_buffer_end_user_action() can then be grouped when creating
-an undo stack. #GtkTextBuffer maintains a count of calls to
-gtk_text_buffer_begin_user_action() that have not been closed with
-a call to gtk_text_buffer_end_user_action(), and emits the
-"begin-user-action" and "end-user-action" signals only for the
-outermost pair of calls. This allows you to build user actions
-from other user actions.
+Returns the event mask for the widget (a bitfield containing flags
+from the #GdkEventMask enumeration). These are the events that the widget
+will receive.
-The "interactive" buffer mutation functions, such as
-gtk_text_buffer_insert_interactive(), automatically call begin/end
-user action around the buffer operations they perform, so there's
-no need to add extra calls if you user action consists solely of a
-single call to one of those functions.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="buffer">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextBuffer
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> event mask for @widget
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_tool_item_group_set_ellipsize">
@@ -39987,57 +40259,82 @@ Since: 2.20
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_new">
+<function name="gtk_cell_renderer_get_alignment">
<description>
-Creates a new #GtkTreeView widget.
+Fills in @xalign and @yalign with the appropriate values of @cell.
+Since: 2.18
</description>
<parameters>
+<parameter name="cell">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkCellRenderer
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="xalign">
+<parameter_description> location to fill in with the x alignment of the cell, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="yalign">
+<parameter_description> location to fill in with the y alignment of the cell, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> A newly created #GtkTreeView widget.
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_file_chooser_set_current_folder">
+<function name="gtk_printer_accepts_ps">
<description>
-Sets the current folder for @chooser from a local filename.
-The user will be shown the full contents of the current folder,
-plus user interface elements for navigating to other folders.
+Returns whether the printer accepts input in
+PostScript format.
-Since: 2.4
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="chooser">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
+<parameter name="printer">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrinter
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="filename">
-<parameter_description> the full path of the new current folder
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if @printer accepts PostScript
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_print_job_get_settings">
+<description>
+Gets the #GtkPrintSettings of the print job.
+
+Since: 2.10
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="job">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintJob
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the folder could be changed successfully, %FALSE
-otherwise.
+<return> the settings of @job
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_combo_box_get_row_span_column">
+<function name="gtk_print_context_get_dpi_y">
<description>
-Returns the column with row span information for @combo_box.
+Obtains the vertical resolution of the #GtkPrintContext,
+in dots per inch.
-Since: 2.6
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="combo_box">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkComboBox
+<parameter name="context">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintContext
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the row span column.
+<return> the vertical resolution of @context
</return>
</function>
@@ -40072,44 +40369,23 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_label_get_single_line_mode">
-<description>
-Returns whether the label is in single line mode.
-
-Since: 2.6
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="label">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkLabel
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE when the label is in single line mode.
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_entry_completion_insert_action_text">
+<function name="gtk_entry_set_completion">
<description>
-Inserts an action in @completion's action item list at position @index_
-with text @text. If you want the action item to have markup, use
-gtk_entry_completion_insert_action_markup().
+Sets @completion to be the auxiliary completion object to use with @entry.
+All further configuration of the completion mechanism is done on
+ completion using the #GtkEntryCompletion API. Completion is disabled if
+ completion is set to %NULL.
Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="completion">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkEntryCompletion.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="index_">
-<parameter_description> The index of the item to insert.
+<parameter name="entry">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkEntry
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="text">
-<parameter_description> Text of the item to insert.
+<parameter name="completion">
+<parameter_description> The #GtkEntryCompletion or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -40183,6 +40459,30 @@ Since: 2.16
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_cell_renderer_get_padding">
+<description>
+Fills in @xpad and @ypad with the appropriate values of @cell.
+
+Since: 2.18
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="cell">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkCellRenderer
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="xpad">
+<parameter_description> location to fill in with the x padding of the cell, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="ypad">
+<parameter_description> location to fill in with the y padding of the cell, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_window_get_title">
<description>
Retrieves the title of the window. See gtk_window_set_title().
@@ -40268,29 +40568,6 @@ Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_clipboard_set_image">
-<description>
-Sets the contents of the clipboard to the given #GdkPixbuf.
-GTK+ will take responsibility for responding for requests
-for the image, and for converting the image into the
-requested format.
-
-Since: 2.6
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="clipboard">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkClipboard object
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="pixbuf">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkPixbuf
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_file_chooser_get_show_hidden">
<description>
Gets whether hidden files and folders are displayed in the file selector.
@@ -40328,17 +40605,69 @@ Since: 2.6
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_push_colormap">
+<function name="gtk_accel_group_disconnect_key">
<description>
-Pushes @cmap onto a global stack of colormaps; the topmost
-colormap on the stack will be used to create all widgets.
-Remove @cmap with gtk_widget_pop_colormap(). There's little
-reason to use this function.
+Removes an accelerator previously installed through
+gtk_accel_group_connect().
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="cmap">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkColormap
+<parameter name="accel_group">
+<parameter_description> the accelerator group to install an accelerator in
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="accel_key">
+<parameter_description> key value of the accelerator
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="accel_mods">
+<parameter_description> modifier combination of the accelerator
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if there was an accelerator which could be
+removed, %FALSE otherwise
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_icon_set_new">
+<description>
+Creates a new #GtkIconSet. A #GtkIconSet represents a single icon
+in various sizes and widget states. It can provide a #GdkPixbuf
+for a given size and state on request, and automatically caches
+some of the rendered #GdkPixbuf objects.
+
+Normally you would use gtk_widget_render_icon() instead of
+using #GtkIconSet directly. The one case where you'd use
+#GtkIconSet is to create application-specific icon sets to place in
+a #GtkIconFactory.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+</parameters>
+<return> a new #GtkIconSet
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_print_settings_foreach">
+<description>
+Calls @func for each key-value pair of @settings.
+
+Since: 2.10
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="settings">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="func">
+<parameter_description> (scope call) the function to call
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="user_data">
+<parameter_description> user data for @func
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -40372,27 +40701,21 @@ interested in whether there was an intersection.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_image_new_from_animation">
+<function name="gtk_print_settings_get_duplex">
<description>
-Creates a #GtkImage displaying the given animation.
-The #GtkImage does not assume a reference to the
-animation; you still need to unref it if you own references.
-#GtkImage will add its own reference rather than adopting yours.
-
-Note that the animation frames are shown using a timeout with
-#G_PRIORITY_DEFAULT. When using animations to indicate busyness,
-keep in mind that the animation will only be shown if the main loop
-is not busy with something that has a higher priority.
+Gets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_DUPLEX.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="animation">
-<parameter_description> an animation
+<parameter name="settings">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a new #GtkImage widget
+<return> whether to print the output in duplex.
+
</return>
</function>
@@ -40486,30 +40809,24 @@ same size). See gtk_box_set_homogeneous().
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_target_list_add">
+<function name="gtk_container_class_list_child_properties">
<description>
-Appends another target to a #GtkTargetList.
+Returns all child properties of a container class.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="list">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTargetList
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="target">
-<parameter_description> the interned atom representing the target
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="flags">
-<parameter_description> the flags for this target
+<parameter name="cclass">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkContainerClass
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="info">
-<parameter_description> an ID that will be passed back to the application
+<parameter name="n_properties">
+<parameter_description> location to return the number of child properties found
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> a newly allocated %NULL-terminated array of #GParamSpec*.
+The array must be freed with g_free().
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_border_new">
@@ -40527,27 +40844,6 @@ freed with gtk_border_free()
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_socket_get_id">
-<description>
-Gets the window ID of a #GtkSocket widget, which can then
-be used to create a client embedded inside the socket, for
-instance with gtk_plug_new().
-
-The #GtkSocket must have already be added into a toplevel window
-before you can make this call.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="socket_">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkSocket.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the window ID for the socket
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_entry_progress_pulse">
<description>
Indicates that some progress is made, but you don't know how much.
@@ -40569,33 +40865,70 @@ Since: 2.16
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_buildable_construct_child">
+<function name="gtk_window_get_size">
<description>
-Constructs a child of @buildable with the name @name.
+Obtains the current size of @window. If @window is not onscreen,
+it returns the size GTK+ will suggest to the <link
+linkend="gtk-X11-arch">window manager</link> for the initial window
+size (but this is not reliably the same as the size the window
+manager will actually select). The size obtained by
+gtk_window_get_size() is the last size received in a
+#GdkEventConfigure, that is, GTK+ uses its locally-stored size,
+rather than querying the X server for the size. As a result, if you
+call gtk_window_resize() then immediately call
+gtk_window_get_size(), the size won't have taken effect yet. After
+the window manager processes the resize request, GTK+ receives
+notification that the size has changed via a configure event, and
+the size of the window gets updated.
-#GtkBuilder calls this function if a "constructor" has been
-specified in the UI definition.
+Note 1: Nearly any use of this function creates a race condition,
+because the size of the window may change between the time that you
+get the size and the time that you perform some action assuming
+that size is the current size. To avoid race conditions, connect to
+"configure-event" on the window and adjust your size-dependent
+state to match the size delivered in the #GdkEventConfigure.
+
+Note 2: The returned size does <emphasis>not</emphasis> include the
+size of the window manager decorations (aka the window frame or
+border). Those are not drawn by GTK+ and GTK+ has no reliable
+method of determining their size.
+
+Note 3: If you are getting a window size in order to position
+the window onscreen, there may be a better way. The preferred
+way is to simply set the window's semantic type with
+gtk_window_set_type_hint(), which allows the window manager to
+e.g. center dialogs. Also, if you set the transient parent of
+dialogs with gtk_window_set_transient_for() window managers
+will often center the dialog over its parent window. It's
+much preferred to let the window manager handle these
+things rather than doing it yourself, because all apps will
+behave consistently and according to user prefs if the window
+manager handles it. Also, the window manager can take the size
+of the window decorations/border into account, while your
+application cannot.
+
+In any case, if you insist on application-specified window
+positioning, there's <emphasis>still</emphasis> a better way than
+doing it yourself - gtk_window_set_position() will frequently
+handle the details for you.
-Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="buildable">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkBuildable
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="builder">
-<parameter_description> #GtkBuilder used to construct this object
+<parameter name="width">
+<parameter_description> return location for width, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="name">
-<parameter_description> name of child to construct
+<parameter name="height">
+<parameter_description> return location for height, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the constructed child
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_viewport_get_vadjustment">
@@ -40790,32 +41123,44 @@ Since: 2.10
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_model_get_value">
+<function name="gtk_drag_dest_set_target_list">
<description>
-Initializes and sets @value to that at @column.
-When done with @value, g_value_unset() needs to be called
-to free any allocated memory.
+Sets the target types that this widget can accept from drag-and-drop.
+The widget must first be made into a drag destination with
+gtk_drag_dest_set().
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_model">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeModel.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> The #GtkTreeIter.
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget that's a drag destination
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="column">
-<parameter_description> The column to lookup the value at.
+<parameter name="target_list">
+<parameter_description> list of droppable targets, or %NULL for none
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="value">
-<parameter_description> (out) (transfer none) An empty #GValue to set.
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_widget_get_no_show_all">
+<description>
+Returns the current value of the GtkWidget:no-show-all property,
+which determines whether calls to gtk_widget_show_all() and
+gtk_widget_hide_all() will affect this widget.
+
+Since: 2.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the current value of the "no-show-all" property.
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_text_buffer_delete">
@@ -40864,24 +41209,19 @@ Since: 2.20
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tool_item_retrieve_proxy_menu_item">
+<function name="gtk_tree_path_get_depth">
<description>
-Returns the #GtkMenuItem that was last set by
-gtk_tool_item_set_proxy_menu_item(), ie. the #GtkMenuItem
-that is going to appear in the overflow menu.
+Returns the current depth of @path.
-Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tool_item">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItem
+<parameter name="path">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreePath.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> The #GtkMenuItem that is going to appear in the
-overflow menu for @tool_item.
-
+<return> The depth of @path
</return>
</function>
@@ -40964,27 +41304,38 @@ If there is no current event, the function returns %NULL.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_target_table_new_from_list">
+<function name="gtk_text_buffer_register_deserialize_format">
<description>
-This function creates an #GtkTargetEntry array that contains the
-same targets as the passed %list. The returned table is newly
-allocated and should be freed using gtk_target_table_free() when no
-longer needed.
+This function registers a rich text deserialization @function along with
+its @mime_type with the passed @buffer.
Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="list">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTargetList
+<parameter name="buffer">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextBuffer
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="n_targets">
-<parameter_description> return location for the number ot targets in the table
+<parameter name="mime_type">
+<parameter_description> the format's mime-type
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="function">
+<parameter_description> the deserialize function to register
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="user_data">
+<parameter_description> @function's user_data
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="user_data_destroy">
+<parameter_description> a function to call when @user_data is no longer needed
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the new table.
+<return> the #GdkAtom that corresponds to the newly registered
+format's mime-type.
</return>
</function>
@@ -41003,24 +41354,24 @@ Disables the popup menu.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_recent_chooser_remove_filter">
+<function name="gtk_icon_set_new_from_pixbuf">
<description>
-Removes @filter from the list of #GtkRecentFilter objects held by @chooser.
+Creates a new #GtkIconSet with @pixbuf as the default/fallback
+source image. If you don't add any additional #GtkIconSource to the
+icon set, all variants of the icon will be created from @pixbuf,
+using scaling, pixelation, etc. as required to adjust the icon size
+or make the icon look insensitive/prelighted.
-Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="chooser">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentChooser
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="filter">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentFilter
+<parameter name="pixbuf">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkPixbuf
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> a new #GtkIconSet
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_application_new">
@@ -41135,32 +41486,50 @@ Since: 2.12
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_cell_renderer_stop_editing">
+<function name="gtk_print_unix_dialog_set_embed_page_setup">
<description>
-Informs the cell renderer that the editing is stopped.
-If @canceled is %TRUE, the cell renderer will emit the
-#GtkCellRenderer::editing-canceled signal.
-
-This function should be called by cell renderer implementations
-in response to the #GtkCellEditable::editing-done signal of
-#GtkCellEditable.
+Embed page size combo box and orientation combo box into page setup page.
-Since: 2.6
+Since: 2.18
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="cell">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkCellRenderer
+<parameter name="dialog">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintUnixDialog
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="canceled">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE if the editing has been canceled
+<parameter name="embed">
+<parameter_description> embed page setup selection
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_status_icon_get_gicon">
+<description>
+Retrieves the #GIcon being displayed by the #GtkStatusIcon.
+The storage type of the status icon must be %GTK_IMAGE_EMPTY or
+%GTK_IMAGE_GICON (see gtk_status_icon_get_storage_type()).
+The caller of this function does not own a reference to the
+returned #GIcon.
+
+If this function fails, @icon is left unchanged;
+
+Since: 2.14
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="status_icon">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkStatusIcon
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the displayed icon, or %NULL if the image is empty
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_entry_get_icon_window">
<description>
Returns the #GdkWindow which contains the entry's icon at
@@ -41252,24 +41621,75 @@ Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_layout_get_size">
+<function name="gtk_icon_view_get_tooltip_context">
<description>
-Gets the size that has been set on the layout, and that determines
-the total extents of the layout's scrollbar area. See
-gtk_layout_set_size ().
+This function is supposed to be used in a #GtkWidget::query-tooltip
+signal handler for #GtkIconView. The @x, @y and @keyboard_tip values
+which are received in the signal handler, should be passed to this
+function without modification.
+
+The return value indicates whether there is an icon view item at the given
+coordinates (%TRUE) or not (%FALSE) for mouse tooltips. For keyboard
+tooltips the item returned will be the cursor item. When %TRUE, then any of
+ model, @path and @iter which have been provided will be set to point to
+that row and the corresponding model. @x and @y will always be converted
+to be relative to @icon_view's bin_window if @keyboard_tooltip is %FALSE.
+
+Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="layout">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkLayout
+<parameter name="icon_view">
+<parameter_description> an #GtkIconView
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="width">
-<parameter_description> location to store the width set on @layout, or %NULL
+<parameter name="x">
+<parameter_description> the x coordinate (relative to widget coordinates)
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="height">
-<parameter_description> location to store the height set on @layout, or %NULL
+<parameter name="y">
+<parameter_description> the y coordinate (relative to widget coordinates)
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="keyboard_tip">
+<parameter_description> whether this is a keyboard tooltip or not
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="model">
+<parameter_description> a pointer to receive a #GtkTreeModel or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="path">
+<parameter_description> a pointer to receive a #GtkTreePath or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> a pointer to receive a #GtkTreeIter or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> whether or not the given tooltip context points to a item
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_clipboard_set_image">
+<description>
+Sets the contents of the clipboard to the given #GdkPixbuf.
+GTK+ will take responsibility for responding for requests
+for the image, and for converting the image into the
+requested format.
+
+Since: 2.6
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="clipboard">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkClipboard object
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="pixbuf">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkPixbuf
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -41415,6 +41835,28 @@ by @widget are invalidated.
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_paper_size_get_default_bottom_margin">
+<description>
+Gets the default bottom margin for the #GtkPaperSize.
+
+Since: 2.10
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="size">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPaperSize object
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="unit">
+<parameter_description> the unit for the return value
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the default bottom margin
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_recent_filter_add_age">
<description>
Adds a rule that allows resources based on their age - that is, the number
@@ -41470,6 +41912,30 @@ Since: 2.20
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_tree_model_get_iter">
+<description>
+Sets @iter to a valid iterator pointing to @path.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="tree_model">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeModel.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> The uninitialized #GtkTreeIter.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="path">
+<parameter_description> The #GtkTreePath.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE, if @iter was set.
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_accel_map_load">
<description>
Parses a file previously saved with gtk_accel_map_save() for
@@ -41591,48 +42057,22 @@ leave for the text
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_image_set_from_image">
-<description>
-See gtk_image_new_from_image() for details.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="image">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkImage
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="gdk_image">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkImage or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="mask">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkBitmap or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_page_setup_get_top_margin">
+<function name="gtk_tool_item_toolbar_reconfigured">
<description>
-Gets the top margin in units of @unit.
+Emits the signal #GtkToolItem::toolbar_reconfigured on @tool_item.
+#GtkToolbar and other #GtkToolShell implementations use this function
+to notify children, when some aspect of their configuration changes.
-Since: 2.10
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="setup">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPageSetup
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="unit">
-<parameter_description> the unit for the return value
+<parameter name="tool_item">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItem
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the top margin
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_selection_data_copy">
@@ -41651,20 +42091,30 @@ Makes a copy of a #GtkSelectionData structure and its data.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_accel_map_save_fd">
+<function name="gtk_selection_data_targets_include_image">
<description>
-Filedescriptor variant of gtk_accel_map_save().
+Given a #GtkSelectionData object holding a list of targets,
+determines if any of the targets in @targets can be used to
+provide a #GdkPixbuf.
-Note that the file descriptor will not be closed by this function.
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="fd">
-<parameter_description> a valid writable file descriptor
+<parameter name="selection_data">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkSelectionData object
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="writable">
+<parameter_description> whether to accept only targets for which GTK+ knows
+how to convert a pixbuf into the format
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if @selection_data holds a list of targets,
+and a suitable target for images is included, otherwise %FALSE.
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_adjustment_get_page_increment">
@@ -41759,45 +42209,54 @@ scrollbar, or %NULL.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_entry_get_invisible_char">
+<function name="gtk_widget_class_path">
<description>
-Retrieves the character displayed in place of the real characters
-for entries with visibility set to false. See gtk_entry_set_invisible_char().
+Same as gtk_widget_path(), but always uses the name of a widget's type,
+never uses a custom name set with gtk_widget_set_name().
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="entry">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkEntry
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="path_length">
+<parameter_description> location to store the length of the class path, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="path">
+<parameter_description> location to store the class path as an allocated string, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="path_reversed">
+<parameter_description> location to store the reverse class path as an allocated
+string, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the current invisible char, or 0, if the entry does not
-show invisible text at all.
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_set_hover_selection">
+<function name="gtk_tree_model_get_iter_first">
<description>
-Enables of disables the hover selection mode of @tree_view.
-Hover selection makes the selected row follow the pointer.
-Currently, this works only for the selection modes
-%GTK_SELECTION_SINGLE and %GTK_SELECTION_BROWSE.
+Initializes @iter with the first iterator in the tree (the one at the path
+"0") and returns %TRUE. Returns %FALSE if the tree is empty.
-Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeView
+<parameter name="tree_model">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeModel.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="hover">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE to enable hover selection mode
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> The uninitialized #GtkTreeIter.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE, if @iter was set.
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_spin_button_set_value">
@@ -41873,6 +42332,28 @@ values, you need to call gtk_list_store_set() or gtk_list_store_set_value().
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_accel_map_foreach_unfiltered">
+<description>
+Loops over all entries in the accelerator map, and execute
+ foreach_func on each. The signature of @foreach_func is that of
+#GtkAccelMapForeach, the @changed parameter indicates whether
+this accelerator was changed during runtime (thus, would need
+saving during an accelerator map dump).
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="data">
+<parameter_description> data to be passed into @foreach_func
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="foreach_func">
+<parameter_description> function to be executed for each accel map entry
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_icon_source_free">
<description>
Frees a dynamically-allocated icon source, along with its
@@ -41888,22 +42369,20 @@ filename, size, and pixbuf fields if those are not %NULL.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tool_item_get_visible_vertical">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_get_fixed_width">
<description>
-Returns whether @tool_item is visible when the toolbar is docked vertically.
-See gtk_tool_item_set_visible_vertical().
+Gets the fixed width of the column. This value is only meaning may not be
+the actual width of the column on the screen, just what is requested.
-Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tool_item">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItem
+<parameter name="tree_column">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeViewColumn
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> Whether @tool_item is visible when the toolbar is docked vertically
-
+<return> the fixed width of the column
</return>
</function>
@@ -41928,20 +42407,6 @@ resource's URI or %NULL. Use g_free() when done using it.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_accel_group_unlock">
-<description>
-Undoes the last call to gtk_accel_group_lock() on this @accel_group.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="accel_group">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkAccelGroup
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_print_settings_set_dither">
<description>
Sets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_DITHER.
@@ -41996,6 +42461,32 @@ gtk_widget_queue_draw() instead of making up expose events.
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_buildable_get_internal_child">
+<description>
+Get the internal child called @childname of the @buildable object.
+
+Since: 2.12
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="buildable">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkBuildable
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="builder">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkBuilder
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="childname">
+<parameter_description> name of child
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the internal child of the buildable object
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_tool_palette_set_exclusive">
<description>
Sets whether the group should be exclusive or not.
@@ -42048,26 +42539,36 @@ get a #GtkTextTag, then calls gtk_text_buffer_apply_tag().
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_layout_new">
+<function name="gtk_application_add_window">
<description>
-Creates a new #GtkLayout. Unless you have a specific adjustment
-you'd like the layout to use for scrolling, pass %NULL for
- hadjustment and @vadjustment.
+Adds a window to the #GtkApplication.
+If all the windows managed by #GtkApplication are closed, the
+#GtkApplication will call gtk_application_quit(), and quit
+the application.
+
+If your application uses only a single toplevel window, you can
+use gtk_application_get_window(). If you are using a sub-class
+of #GtkApplication you should call gtk_application_create_window()
+to let the #GtkApplication instance create a #GtkWindow and add
+it to the list of toplevels of the application. You should call
+this function only to add #GtkWindow<!-- -->s that you created
+directly using gtk_window_new().
+
+Since: 3.0
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="hadjustment">
-<parameter_description> horizontal scroll adjustment, or %NULL
+<parameter name="app">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkApplication
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="vadjustment">
-<parameter_description> vertical scroll adjustment, or %NULL
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a toplevel window to add to @app
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a new #GtkLayout
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_entry_set_max_length">
@@ -42098,25 +42599,6 @@ be clamped to the range 0-65536.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_recent_manager_get_limit">
-<description>
-Gets the maximum number of items that the gtk_recent_manager_get_items()
-function should return.
-
-Since: 2.10
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="manager">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentManager
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the number of items to return, or -1 for every item.
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_hsv_get_metrics">
<description>
Queries the size and ring width of an HSV color selector.
@@ -42176,64 +42658,21 @@ Since: 2.22
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_link_button_new_with_label">
-<description>
-Creates a new #GtkLinkButton containing a label.
-
-Since: 2.10
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="uri">
-<parameter_description> a valid URI
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="label">
-<parameter_description> the text of the button
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> a new link button widget.
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_menu_tool_button_new_from_stock">
+<function name="gtk_about_dialog_get_website">
<description>
-Creates a new #GtkMenuToolButton.
-The new #GtkMenuToolButton will contain an icon and label from
-the stock item indicated by @stock_id.
+Returns the website URL.
Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="stock_id">
-<parameter_description> the name of a stock item
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the new #GtkMenuToolButton
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_file_chooser_get_do_overwrite_confirmation">
-<description>
-Queries whether a file chooser is set to confirm for overwriting when the user
-types a file name that already exists.
-
-Since: 2.8
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="chooser">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
+<parameter name="about">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAboutDialog
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the file chooser will present a confirmation dialog;
-%FALSE otherwise.
+<return> The website URL. The string is owned by the about
+dialog and must not be modified.
</return>
</function>
@@ -42271,39 +42710,34 @@ destroyed and when the translation function is changed again
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_alignment_set_padding">
+<function name="gtk_text_mark_new">
<description>
-Sets the padding on the different sides of the widget.
-The padding adds blank space to the sides of the widget. For instance,
-this can be used to indent the child widget towards the right by adding
-padding on the left.
+Creates a text mark. Add it to a buffer using gtk_text_buffer_add_mark().
+If @name is %NULL, the mark is anonymous; otherwise, the mark can be
+retrieved by name using gtk_text_buffer_get_mark(). If a mark has left
+gravity, and text is inserted at the mark's current location, the mark
+will be moved to the left of the newly-inserted text. If the mark has
+right gravity (@left_gravity = %FALSE), the mark will end up on the
+right of newly-inserted text. The standard left-to-right cursor is a
+mark with right gravity (when you type, the cursor stays on the right
+side of the text you're typing).
-Since: 2.4
+Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="alignment">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkAlignment
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="padding_top">
-<parameter_description> the padding at the top of the widget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="padding_bottom">
-<parameter_description> the padding at the bottom of the widget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="padding_left">
-<parameter_description> the padding at the left of the widget
+<parameter name="name">
+<parameter_description> mark name or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="padding_right">
-<parameter_description> the padding at the right of the widget.
+<parameter name="left_gravity">
+<parameter_description> whether the mark should have left gravity
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> new #GtkTextMark
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_tree_store_set">
@@ -42314,7 +42748,9 @@ each column number followed by the value to be set.
The list is terminated by a -1. For example, to set column 0 with type
%G_TYPE_STRING to "Foo", you would write
<literal>gtk_tree_store_set (store, iter, 0, "Foo", -1)</literal>.
-The value will be copied or referenced by the store if appropriate.
+
+The value will be referenced by the store if it is a %G_TYPE_OBJECT, and it
+will be copied if it is a %G_TYPE_STRING or %G_TYPE_BOXED.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -42334,6 +42770,31 @@ The value will be copied or referenced by the store if appropriate.
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_tree_selection_unselect_range">
+<description>
+Unselects a range of nodes, determined by @start_path and @end_path
+inclusive.
+
+Since: 2.2
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="selection">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeSelection.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="start_path">
+<parameter_description> The initial node of the range.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="end_path">
+<parameter_description> The initial node of the range.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_entry_completion_get_minimum_key_length">
<description>
Returns the minimum key length as set for @completion.
@@ -42371,99 +42832,28 @@ gtk_text_buffer_delete_mark() for details.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_file_filter_new">
-<description>
-Creates a new #GtkFileFilter with no rules added to it.
-Such a filter doesn't accept any files, so is not
-particularly useful until you add rules with
-gtk_file_filter_add_mime_type(), gtk_file_filter_add_pattern(),
-or gtk_file_filter_add_custom(). To create a filter
-that accepts any file, use:
-|[
-GtkFileFilter *filter = gtk_file_filter_new ();
-gtk_file_filter_add_pattern (filter, "*");
-]|
-
-Since: 2.4
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-</parameters>
-<return> a new #GtkFileFilter
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_widget_get_no_show_all">
-<description>
-Returns the current value of the GtkWidget:no-show-all property,
-which determines whether calls to gtk_widget_show_all() and
-gtk_widget_hide_all() will affect this widget.
-
-Since: 2.4
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the current value of the "no-show-all" property.
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_paint_resize_grip">
+<function name="gtk_tree_model_get_value">
<description>
-Draws a resize grip in the given rectangle on @window using the given
-parameters.
+Initializes and sets @value to that at @column.
+When done with @value, g_value_unset() needs to be called
+to free any allocated memory.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="style">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="state_type">
-<parameter_description> a state
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="area">
-<parameter_description> clip rectangle, or %NULL if the
-output should not be clipped
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> the widget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="detail">
-<parameter_description> a style detail
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="edge">
-<parameter_description> the edge in which to draw the resize grip
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="x">
-<parameter_description> the x origin of the rectangle in which to draw the resize grip
+<parameter name="tree_model">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeModel.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="y">
-<parameter_description> the y origin of the rectangle in which to draw the resize grip
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> The #GtkTreeIter.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="width">
-<parameter_description> the width of the rectangle in which to draw the resize grip
+<parameter name="column">
+<parameter_description> The column to lookup the value at.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="height">
-<parameter_description> the height of the rectangle in which to draw the resize grip
+<parameter name="value">
+<parameter_description> An empty #GValue to set.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -42485,6 +42875,30 @@ if the reference count reaches 0.
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_adjustment_set_step_increment">
+<description>
+Sets the step increment of the adjustment.
+
+See gtk_adjustment_set_lower() about how to compress multiple
+emissions of the "changed" signal when setting multiple adjustment
+properties.
+
+Since: 2.14
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="adjustment">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAdjustment
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="step_increment">
+<parameter_description> the new step increment
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_about_dialog_get_artists">
<description>
Returns the string which are displayed in the artists tab
@@ -42506,6 +42920,33 @@ and must not be modified.
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_selection_add_target">
+<description>
+Appends a specified target to the list of supported targets for a
+given widget and selection.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTarget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="selection">
+<parameter_description> the selection
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="target">
+<parameter_description> target to add.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="info">
+<parameter_description> A unsigned integer which will be passed back to the application.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_print_settings_get_paper_height">
<description>
Gets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_PAPER_HEIGHT,
@@ -42547,28 +42988,22 @@ far right if added to a menu bar.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_buffer_remove_tag">
+<function name="gtk_image_set_from_stock">
<description>
-Emits the "remove-tag" signal. The default handler for the signal
-removes all occurrences of @tag from the given range. @start and
- end don't have to be in order.
+See gtk_image_new_from_stock() for details.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="buffer">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextBuffer
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="tag">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextTag
+<parameter name="image">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkImage
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="start">
-<parameter_description> one bound of range to be untagged
+<parameter name="stock_id">
+<parameter_description> a stock icon name
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="end">
-<parameter_description> other bound of range to be untagged
+<parameter name="size">
+<parameter_description> a stock icon size
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -42590,24 +43025,6 @@ see the docs for <envar>GTK_PATH</envar> in
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_settings_get_dither">
-<description>
-Gets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_DITHER.
-
-Since: 2.10
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="settings">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the dithering that is used
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_tree_model_foreach">
<description>
Calls func on each node in model in a depth-first fashion.
@@ -42773,6 +43190,24 @@ Since: 2.10
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_recent_chooser_get_sort_type">
+<description>
+Gets the value set by gtk_recent_chooser_set_sort_type().
+
+Since: 2.10
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="chooser">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentChooser
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the sorting order of the @chooser.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_get_current_event_state">
<description>
If there is a current event and it has a state field, place
@@ -42791,20 +43226,21 @@ that state field in @state and return %TRUE, otherwise return
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_get_visible">
+<function name="gtk_file_chooser_button_get_width_chars">
<description>
-Returns %TRUE if @tree_column is visible.
+Retrieves the width in characters of the @button widget's entry and/or label.
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_column">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeViewColumn.
+<parameter name="button">
+<parameter_description> the button widget to examine.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> whether the column is visible or not. If it is visible, then
-the tree will show the column.
+<return> an integer width (in characters) that the button will use to size itself.
+
</return>
</function>
@@ -42859,27 +43295,28 @@ Since: 2.10
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_recent_info_has_group">
+<function name="gtk_text_layout_move_iter_to_x">
<description>
-Checks whether @group_name appears inside the groups registered for the
-recently used item @info.
-
-Since: 2.10
+Keeping the iterator on the same line of the layout, move it to the
+specified X coordinate. The lines of a wrapped paragraph are
+treated as distinct for this operation.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="info">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentInfo
+<parameter name="layout">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextLayout
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="group_name">
-<parameter_description> name of a group
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="x">
+<parameter_description> X coordinate
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the group was found.
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_selection_remove_all">
@@ -43068,49 +43505,56 @@ Since: 2.20
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_set_new">
+<function name="gtk_progress_bar_set_show_text">
<description>
-Creates a new #GtkIconSet. A #GtkIconSet represents a single icon
-in various sizes and widget states. It can provide a #GdkPixbuf
-for a given size and state on request, and automatically caches
-some of the rendered #GdkPixbuf objects.
-
-Normally you would use gtk_widget_render_icon() instead of
-using #GtkIconSet directly. The one case where you'd use
-#GtkIconSet is to create application-specific icon sets to place in
-a #GtkIconFactory.
+Sets whether the progressbar will show text superimposed
+over the bar. The shown text is either the value of
+the #GtkProgressBar::text property or, if that is %NULL,
+the #GtkProgressBar::fraction value, as a percentage.
+Since: 3.0
</description>
<parameters>
+<parameter name="pbar">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkProgressBar
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="show_text">
+<parameter_description> whether to show superimposed text
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a new #GtkIconSet
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_ui_manager_get_toplevels">
+<function name="gtk_entry_buffer_set_text">
<description>
-Obtains a list of all toplevel widgets of the requested types.
+Sets the text in the buffer.
-Since: 2.4
+This is roughly equivalent to calling gtk_entry_buffer_delete_text()
+and gtk_entry_buffer_insert_text().
+
+Note that @n_chars is in characters, not in bytes.
+
+Since: 2.18
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="self">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkUIManager
+<parameter name="buffer">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkEntryBuffer
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="types">
-<parameter_description> specifies the types of toplevel widgets to include. Allowed
-types are #GTK_UI_MANAGER_MENUBAR, #GTK_UI_MANAGER_TOOLBAR and
-#GTK_UI_MANAGER_POPUP.
+<parameter name="chars">
+<parameter_description> the new text
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="n_chars">
+<parameter_description> the number of characters in @text, or -1
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a newly-allocated #GSList of
-all toplevel widgets of the requested types. Free the returned list with g_slist_free().
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_icon_view_set_drag_dest_item">
@@ -43183,25 +43627,6 @@ Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_path_append_index">
-<description>
-Appends a new index to a path. As a result, the depth of the path is
-increased.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="path">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreePath.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="index_">
-<parameter_description> The index.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_image_new_from_icon_set">
<description>
Creates a #GtkImage displaying an icon set. Sample stock sizes are
@@ -43250,26 +43675,6 @@ Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_set_new_from_pixbuf">
-<description>
-Creates a new #GtkIconSet with @pixbuf as the default/fallback
-source image. If you don't add any additional #GtkIconSource to the
-icon set, all variants of the icon will be created from @pixbuf,
-using scaling, pixelation, etc. as required to adjust the icon size
-or make the icon look insensitive/prelighted.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="pixbuf">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkPixbuf
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> a new #GtkIconSet
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_box_set_homogeneous">
<description>
Sets the #GtkBox:homogeneous property of @box, controlling
@@ -43353,28 +43758,6 @@ Since: 2.16
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_set_fixed_width">
-<description>
-Sets the size of the column in pixels. This is meaningful only if the sizing
-type is #GTK_TREE_VIEW_COLUMN_FIXED. The size of the column is clamped to
-the min/max width for the column. Please note that the min/max width of the
-column doesn't actually affect the "fixed_width" property of the widget, just
-the actual size when displayed.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_column">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeViewColumn.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="fixed_width">
-<parameter_description> The size to set @tree_column to. Must be greater than 0.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_info_bar_response">
<description>
Emits the 'response' signal with the given @response_id.
@@ -43395,29 +43778,33 @@ Since: 2.18
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_assistant_set_page_header_image">
+<function name="gtk_tree_model_filter_convert_child_iter_to_iter">
<description>
-Sets a header image for @page. This image is displayed in the header
-area of the assistant when @page is the current page.
+Sets @filter_iter to point to the row in @filter that corresponds to the
+row pointed at by @child_iter. If @filter_iter was not set, %FALSE is
+returned.
-Since: 2.10
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="assistant">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkAssistant
+<parameter name="filter">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeModelFilter.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="page">
-<parameter_description> a page of @assistant
+<parameter name="filter_iter">
+<parameter_description> An uninitialized #GtkTreeIter.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="pixbuf">
-<parameter_description> the new header image @page
+<parameter name="child_iter">
+<parameter_description> A valid #GtkTreeIter pointing to a row on the child model.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE, if @filter_iter was set, i.e. if @child_iter is a
+valid iterator pointing to a visible row in child model.
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_hsv_set_metrics">
@@ -43444,6 +43831,38 @@ Since: 2.14
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_clipboard_wait_for_targets">
+<description>
+Returns a list of targets that are present on the clipboard, or %NULL
+if there aren't any targets available. The returned list must be
+freed with g_free().
+This function waits for the data to be received using the main
+loop, so events, timeouts, etc, may be dispatched during the wait.
+
+Since: 2.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="clipboard">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkClipboard
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="targets">
+<parameter_description> location to store an array of targets. The result
+stored here must be freed with g_free().
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="n_targets">
+<parameter_description> location to store number of items in @targets.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if any targets are present on the clipboard,
+otherwise %FALSE.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_tool_item_set_expand">
<description>
Sets whether @tool_item is allocated extra space when there
@@ -43598,22 +44017,15 @@ Since: 2.12
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_set_rubber_banding">
+<function name="gtk_editable_cut_clipboard">
<description>
-Enables or disables rubber banding in @tree_view. If the selection mode
-is #GTK_SELECTION_MULTIPLE, rubber banding will allow the user to select
-multiple rows by dragging the mouse.
-
-Since: 2.10
+Removes the contents of the currently selected content in the editable and
+puts it on the clipboard.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeView
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="enable">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE to enable rubber banding
+<parameter name="editable">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkEditable
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -43639,62 +44051,47 @@ and should not be modified or freed.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_set_no_show_all">
+<function name="gtk_text_iter_forward_visible_word_end">
<description>
-Sets the #GtkWidget:no-show-all property, which determines whether
-calls to gtk_widget_show_all() and gtk_widget_hide_all() will affect
-this widget.
-
-This is mostly for use in constructing widget hierarchies with externally
-controlled visibility, see #GtkUIManager.
+Moves forward to the next visible word end. (If @iter is currently on a
+word end, moves forward to the next one after that.) Word breaks
+are determined by Pango and should be correct for nearly any
+language (if not, the correct fix would be to the Pango word break
+algorithms).
Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="no_show_all">
-<parameter_description> the new value for the "no-show-all" property
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if @iter moved and is not the end iterator
+
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_clipboard_request_rich_text">
+<function name="gtk_widget_set_no_show_all">
<description>
-Requests the contents of the clipboard as rich text. When the rich
-text is later received, @callback will be called.
+Sets the #GtkWidget:no-show-all property, which determines whether
+calls to gtk_widget_show_all() and gtk_widget_hide_all() will affect
+this widget.
-The @text parameter to @callback will contain the resulting rich
-text if the request succeeded, or %NULL if it failed. The @length
-parameter will contain @text's length. This function can fail for
-various reasons, in particular if the clipboard was empty or if the
-contents of the clipboard could not be converted into rich text form.
+This is mostly for use in constructing widget hierarchies with externally
+controlled visibility, see #GtkUIManager.
-Since: 2.10
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="clipboard">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkClipboard
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="buffer">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextBuffer
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="callback">
-<parameter_description> a function to call when the text is received,
-or the retrieval fails. (It will always be called
-one way or the other.)
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="user_data">
-<parameter_description> user data to pass to @callback.
+<parameter name="no_show_all">
+<parameter_description> the new value for the "no-show-all" property
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -43740,34 +44137,26 @@ Since: 2.2
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_file_chooser_add_shortcut_folder_uri">
+<function name="gtk_wrap_box_reorder_child">
<description>
-Adds a folder URI to be displayed with the shortcut folders in a file
-chooser. Note that shortcut folders do not get saved, as they are provided
-by the application. For example, you can use this to add a
-"file:///usr/share/mydrawprogram/Clipart" folder to the volume list.
-
-Since: 2.4
+Reorders the child @widget in @box's list of children.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="chooser">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
+<parameter name="box">
+<parameter_description> An #GtkWrapBox
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="uri">
-<parameter_description> URI of the folder to add
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> The child to reorder
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="error">
-<parameter_description> location to store error, or %NULL
+<parameter name="index">
+<parameter_description> The new child position
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the folder could be added successfully, %FALSE
-otherwise. In the latter case, the @error will be set as appropriate.
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_button_set_label">
@@ -43792,28 +44181,6 @@ This will also clear any previously set labels.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_recent_manager_set_limit">
-<description>
-Sets the maximum number of item that the gtk_recent_manager_get_items()
-function should return. If @limit is set to -1, then return all the
-items.
-
-Since: 2.10
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="manager">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentManager
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="limit">
-<parameter_description> the maximum number of items to return, or -1.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_notebook_get_current_page">
<description>
Returns the page number of the current page.
@@ -43902,44 +44269,51 @@ g_intern_static_string().
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_recent_manager_has_item">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_add_attribute">
<description>
-Checks whether there is a recently used resource registered
-with @uri inside the recent manager.
-
-Since: 2.10
+Adds an attribute mapping to the list in @tree_column. The @column is the
+column of the model to get a value from, and the @attribute is the
+parameter on @cell_renderer to be set from the value. So for example
+if column 2 of the model contains strings, you could have the
+"text" attribute of a #GtkCellRendererText get its values from
+column 2.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="manager">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentManager
+<parameter name="tree_column">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeViewColumn.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="uri">
-<parameter_description> a URI
+<parameter name="cell_renderer">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkCellRenderer to set attributes on
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="attribute">
+<parameter_description> An attribute on the renderer
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="column">
+<parameter_description> The column position on the model to get the attribute from.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the resource was found, %FALSE otherwise.
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_context_get_dpi_y">
+<function name="gtk_action_get_visible_horizontal">
<description>
-Obtains the vertical resolution of the #GtkPrintContext,
-in dots per inch.
+Checks whether @action is visible when horizontal
-Since: 2.10
+Since: 2.16
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="context">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintContext
+<parameter name="action">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAction
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the vertical resolution of @context
+<return> whether @action is visible when horizontal
</return>
</function>
@@ -44016,32 +44390,6 @@ gtk_text_view_get_editable() is appropriate here.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_source_set_direction_wildcarded">
-<description>
-If the text direction is wildcarded, this source can be used
-as the base image for an icon in any #GtkTextDirection.
-If the text direction is not wildcarded, then the
-text direction the icon source applies to should be set
-with gtk_icon_source_set_direction(), and the icon source
-will only be used with that text direction.
-
-#GtkIconSet prefers non-wildcarded sources (exact matches) over
-wildcarded sources, and will use an exact match when possible.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="source">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkIconSource
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="setting">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE to wildcard the text direction
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_assistant_get_page_title">
<description>
Gets the title for @page.
@@ -44190,24 +44538,24 @@ defined as @widget->window coordinates for widgets that are not
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_adjustment_set_step_increment">
+<function name="gtk_layout_get_size">
<description>
-Sets the step increment of the adjustment.
-
-See gtk_adjustment_set_lower() about how to compress multiple
-emissions of the "changed" signal when setting multiple adjustment
-properties.
-
-Since: 2.14
+Gets the size that has been set on the layout, and that determines
+the total extents of the layout's scrollbar area. See
+gtk_layout_set_size ().
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="adjustment">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkAdjustment
+<parameter name="layout">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkLayout
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="step_increment">
-<parameter_description> the new step increment
+<parameter name="width">
+<parameter_description> location to store the width set on @layout, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="height">
+<parameter_description> location to store the height set on @layout, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -44234,6 +44582,37 @@ algorithms).
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_widget_realize">
+<description>
+Creates the GDK (windowing system) resources associated with a
+widget. For example, @widget->window will be created when a widget
+is realized. Normally realization happens implicitly; if you show
+a widget and all its parent containers, then the widget will be
+realized and mapped automatically.
+
+Realizing a widget requires all
+the widget's parent widgets to be realized; calling
+gtk_widget_realize() realizes the widget's parents in addition to
+ widget itself. If a widget is not yet inside a toplevel window
+when you realize it, bad things will happen.
+
+This function is primarily used in widget implementations, and
+isn't very useful otherwise. Many times when you think you might
+need it, a better approach is to connect to a signal that will be
+called after the widget is realized automatically, such as
+GtkWidget::expose-event. Or simply g_signal_connect () to the
+GtkWidget::realize signal.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_widget_unrealize">
<description>
This function is only useful in widget implementations.
@@ -44269,24 +44648,6 @@ dialog and must not be modified.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_iter_get_line">
-<description>
-Returns the line number containing the iterator. Lines in
-a #GtkTextBuffer are numbered beginning with 0 for the first
-line in the buffer.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> an iterator
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> a line number
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_menu_get_for_attach_widget">
<description>
Returns a list of the menus which are attached to this widget.
@@ -44441,44 +44802,51 @@ gtk_init(), or gtk_init_check().
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_menu_set_title">
+<function name="gtk_selection_owner_set">
<description>
-Sets the title string for the menu. The title is displayed when the menu
-is shown as a tearoff menu. If @title is %NULL, the menu will see if it is
-attached to a parent menu item, and if so it will try to use the same text as
-that menu item's label.
+Claims ownership of a given selection for a particular widget,
+or, if @widget is %NULL, release ownership of the selection.
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="menu">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkMenu
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget, or %NULL.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="title">
-<parameter_description> a string containing the title for the menu.
+<parameter name="selection">
+<parameter_description> an interned atom representing the selection to claim
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="time_">
+<parameter_description> timestamp with which to claim the selection
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if the operation succeeded
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_view_set_right_margin">
+<function name="gtk_tool_button_new_from_stock">
<description>
-Sets the default right margin for text in the text view.
-Tags in the buffer may override the default.
+Creates a new #GtkToolButton containing the image and text from a
+stock item. Some stock ids have preprocessor macros like #GTK_STOCK_OK
+and #GTK_STOCK_APPLY.
+
+It is an error if @stock_id is not a name of a stock item.
+
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="text_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextView
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="right_margin">
-<parameter_description> right margin in pixels
+<parameter name="stock_id">
+<parameter_description> the name of the stock item
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> A new #GtkToolButton
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_icon_source_get_size_wildcarded">
@@ -44497,29 +44865,24 @@ Gets the value set by gtk_icon_source_set_size_wildcarded().
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_path_get_indices_with_depth">
+<function name="gtk_file_filter_add_mime_type">
<description>
-Returns the current indices of @path.
-This is an array of integers, each representing a node in a tree.
-It also returns the number of elements in the array.
-The array should not be freed.
+Adds a rule allowing a given mime type to @filter.
-Since: 3.0
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="path">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreePath.
+<parameter name="filter">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkFileFilter
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="depth">
-<parameter_description> Number of elements returned in the integer array
+<parameter name="mime_type">
+<parameter_description> name of a MIME type
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> The current indices, or %NULL.
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_paint_spinner">
@@ -44601,44 +44964,76 @@ Since: 2.10
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_notebook_get_tab_pos">
+<function name="gtk_wrap_box_get_vertical_spacing">
<description>
-Gets the edge at which the tabs for switching pages in the
-notebook are drawn.
+Gets the vertical spacing.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="notebook">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkNotebook
+<parameter name="box">
+<parameter_description> An #GtkWrapBox
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the edge at which the tabs are drawn
+<return> The vertical spacing.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_file_chooser_get_filenames">
+<function name="gtk_paint_diamond">
<description>
-Lists all the selected files and subfolders in the current folder of
- chooser The returned names are full absolute paths. If files in the current
-folder cannot be represented as local filenames they will be ignored. (See
-gtk_file_chooser_get_uris())
-
-Since: 2.4
+Draws a diamond in the given rectangle on @window using the given
+parameters.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="chooser">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
+<parameter name="style">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="state_type">
+<parameter_description> a state
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="shadow_type">
+<parameter_description> the type of shadow to draw
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="area">
+<parameter_description> clip rectangle, or %NULL if the
+output should not be clipped
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> the widget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="detail">
+<parameter_description> a style detail
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="x">
+<parameter_description> x origin of the rectangle to draw the diamond in
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="y">
+<parameter_description> y origin of the rectangle to draw the diamond in
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="width">
+<parameter_description> width of the rectangle to draw the diamond in
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="height">
+<parameter_description> height of the rectangle to draw the diamond in
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a #GSList containing the filenames of all selected
-files and subfolders in the current folder. Free the returned list
-with g_slist_free(), and the filenames with g_free().
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_tree_view_get_cursor">
@@ -44732,25 +45127,16 @@ Since: 2.14
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_range_set_increments">
+<function name="gtk_button_released">
<description>
-Sets the step and page sizes for the range.
-The step size is used when the user clicks the #GtkScrollbar
-arrows or moves #GtkScale via arrow keys. The page size
-is used for example when moving via Page Up or Page Down keys.
+Emits a #GtkButton::released signal to the given #GtkButton.
+
+Deprecated: 2.20: Use the #GtkWidget::button-release-event signal.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="range">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkRange
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="step">
-<parameter_description> step size
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="page">
-<parameter_description> page size
+<parameter name="button">
+<parameter_description> The #GtkButton you want to send the signal to.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -44841,27 +45227,15 @@ with a context for the source side of a drag)
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_entry_set_cursor_hadjustment">
+<function name="gtk_widget_hide">
<description>
-Hooks up an adjustment to the cursor position in an entry, so that when
-the cursor is moved, the adjustment is scrolled to show that position.
-See gtk_scrolled_window_get_hadjustment() for a typical way of obtaining
-the adjustment.
-
-The adjustment has to be in pixel units and in the same coordinate system
-as the entry.
-
-Since: 2.12
+Reverses the effects of gtk_widget_show(), causing the widget to be
+hidden (invisible to the user).
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="entry">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkEntry
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="adjustment">
-<parameter_description> an adjustment which should be adjusted when the cursor
-is moved, or %NULL
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -44908,6 +45282,31 @@ title.
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_assistant_set_page_title">
+<description>
+Sets a title for @page. The title is displayed in the header
+area of the assistant when @page is the current page.
+
+Since: 2.10
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="assistant">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAssistant
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="page">
+<parameter_description> a page of @assistant
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="title">
+<parameter_description> the new title for @page
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_clipboard_wait_is_rich_text_available">
<description>
Test to see if there is rich text available to be pasted
@@ -44938,58 +45337,32 @@ Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_cell_set_cell_data">
+<function name="gtk_tool_palette_set_group_position">
<description>
-Sets the cell renderer based on the @tree_model and @iter. That is, for
-every attribute mapping in @tree_column, it will get a value from the set
-column on the @iter, and use that value to set the attribute on the cell
-renderer. This is used primarily by the #GtkTreeView.
+Sets the position of the group as an index of the tool palette.
+If position is 0 the group will become the first child, if position is
+-1 it will become the last child.
+
+Since: 2.20
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_column">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeViewColumn.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="tree_model">
-<parameter_description> The #GtkTreeModel to to get the cell renderers attributes from.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> The #GtkTreeIter to to get the cell renderer's attributes from.
+<parameter name="palette">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolPalette
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="is_expander">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE, if the row has children
+<parameter name="group">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItemGroup which is a child of palette
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="is_expanded">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE, if the row has visible children
+<parameter name="position">
+<parameter_description> a new index for group
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_font_selection_get_face_list">
-<description>
-This returns the #GtkTreeView which lists all styles available for
-the selected font. For example, 'Regular', 'Bold', etc.
-
-Since: 2.14
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="fontsel">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFontSelection
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> A #GtkWidget that is part of @fontsel
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_table_get_size">
<description>
Returns the number of rows and columns in the table.
@@ -45118,39 +45491,69 @@ Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_context_get_width">
+<function name="gtk_list_store_insert_before">
<description>
-Obtains the width of the #GtkPrintContext, in pixels.
+Inserts a new row before @sibling. If @sibling is %NULL, then the row will
+be appended to the end of the list. @iter will be changed to point to this
+new row. The row will be empty after this function is called. To fill in
+values, you need to call gtk_list_store_set() or gtk_list_store_set_value().
-Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="context">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintContext
+<parameter name="list_store">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkListStore
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> An unset #GtkTreeIter to set to the new row
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="sibling">
+<parameter_description> A valid #GtkTreeIter, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the width of @context
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_settings_get_default_source">
+<function name="gtk_widget_render_icon">
<description>
-Gets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_DEFAULT_SOURCE.
+A convenience function that uses the theme engine and RC file
+settings for @widget to look up @stock_id and render it to
+a pixbuf. @stock_id should be a stock icon ID such as
+#GTK_STOCK_OPEN or #GTK_STOCK_OK. @size should be a size
+such as #GTK_ICON_SIZE_MENU. @detail should be a string that
+identifies the widget or code doing the rendering, so that
+theme engines can special-case rendering for that widget or code.
+
+The pixels in the returned #GdkPixbuf are shared with the rest of
+the application and should not be modified. The pixbuf should be freed
+after use with g_object_unref().
-Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="settings">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="stock_id">
+<parameter_description> a stock ID
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="size">
+<parameter_description> (type int) a stock size. A size of (GtkIconSize)-1 means
+render at the size of the source and don't scale (if there are
+multiple source sizes, GTK+ picks one of the available sizes).
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="detail">
+<parameter_description> render detail to pass to theme engine
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the default source
-
+<return> a new pixbuf, or %NULL if the stock ID wasn't known
</return>
</function>
@@ -45172,27 +45575,6 @@ Since: 2.2
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tool_item_group_set_label">
-<description>
-Sets the label of the tool item group. The label is displayed in the header
-of the group.
-
-Since: 2.20
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="group">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItemGroup
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="label">
-<parameter_description> the new human-readable label of of the group
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_info_bar_add_button">
<description>
Adds a button with the given text (or a stock button, if button_text
@@ -45223,6 +45605,32 @@ Since: 2.18
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_target_list_add">
+<description>
+Appends another target to a #GtkTargetList.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="list">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTargetList
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="target">
+<parameter_description> the interned atom representing the target
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="flags">
+<parameter_description> the flags for this target
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="info">
+<parameter_description> an ID that will be passed back to the application
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_image_get_pixmap">
<description>
Gets the pixmap and mask being displayed by the #GtkImage.
@@ -45251,24 +45659,25 @@ mask, or %NULL
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tool_palette_set_drag_source">
+<function name="gtk_file_chooser_add_filter">
<description>
-Sets the tool palette as a drag source.
-Enables all groups and items in the tool palette as drag sources
-on button 1 and button 3 press with copy and move actions.
-See gtk_drag_source_set().
+Adds @filter to the list of filters that the user can select between.
+When a filter is selected, only files that are passed by that
+filter are displayed.
-Since: 2.20
+Note that the @chooser takes ownership of the filter, so you have to
+ref and sink it if you want to keep a reference.
+
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="palette">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolPalette
+<parameter name="chooser">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="targets">
-<parameter_description> the #GtkToolPaletteDragTarget<!-- -->s
-which the widget should support
+<parameter name="filter">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFileFilter
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -45316,6 +45725,33 @@ e.g. for #GtkTreeView, a string representation of #GtkTreePath
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_print_settings_get_int_with_default">
+<description>
+Returns the value of @key, interpreted as
+an integer, or the default value.
+
+Since: 2.10
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="settings">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="key">
+<parameter_description> a key
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="def">
+<parameter_description> the default value
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the integer value of @key
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_status_icon_get_storage_type">
<description>
Gets the type of representation being used by the #GtkStatusIcon
@@ -45428,6 +45864,24 @@ is in vertical mode
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_tree_row_reference_get_model">
+<description>
+Returns the model that the row reference is monitoring.
+
+Since: 2.8
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="reference">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeRowReference
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the model
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_widget_set_parent">
<description>
This function is useful only when implementing subclasses of
@@ -45635,40 +46089,34 @@ Since: 2.6
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tool_item_group_get_ellipsize">
+<function name="gtk_window_get_icon_list">
<description>
-Gets the ellipsization mode of @group.
+Retrieves the list of icons set by gtk_window_set_icon_list().
+The list is copied, but the reference count on each
+member won't be incremented.
-Since: 2.20
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="group">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItemGroup
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the #PangoEllipsizeMode of @group
-
+<return> copy of window's icon list
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_about_dialog_set_logo_icon_name">
+<function name="gtk_button_pressed">
<description>
-Sets the pixbuf to be displayed as logo in the about dialog.
-If it is %NULL, the default window icon set with
-gtk_window_set_default_icon() will be used.
+Emits a #GtkButton::pressed signal to the given #GtkButton.
-Since: 2.6
+Deprecated: 2.20: Use the #GtkWidget::button-press-event signal.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="about">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkAboutDialog
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="icon_name">
-<parameter_description> an icon name, or %NULL
+<parameter name="button">
+<parameter_description> The #GtkButton you want to send the signal to.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -45702,26 +46150,48 @@ Since: 2.6
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_factory_lookup_default">
+<function name="gtk_printer_is_paused">
<description>
-Looks for an icon in the list of default icon factories. For
-display to the user, you should use gtk_style_lookup_icon_set() on
-the #GtkStyle for the widget that will display the icon, instead of
-using this function directly, so that themes are taken into
-account.
+Returns whether the printer is currently paused.
+A paused printer still accepts jobs, but it is not
+printing them.
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="stock_id">
-<parameter_description> an icon name
+<parameter name="printer">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrinter
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a #GtkIconSet, or %NULL
+<return> %TRUE if @printer is paused
+
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_widget_style_get_property">
+<description>
+Gets the value of a style property of @widget.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="property_name">
+<parameter_description> the name of a style property
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="value">
+<parameter_description> location to return the property value
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_tree_view_row_expanded">
<description>
Returns %TRUE if the node pointed to by @path is expanded in @tree_view.
@@ -45742,6 +46212,31 @@ Returns %TRUE if the node pointed to by @path is expanded in @tree_view.
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_file_chooser_set_current_folder">
+<description>
+Sets the current folder for @chooser from a local filename.
+The user will be shown the full contents of the current folder,
+plus user interface elements for navigating to other folders.
+
+Since: 2.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="chooser">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="filename">
+<parameter_description> the full path of the new current folder
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if the folder could be changed successfully, %FALSE
+otherwise.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_notebook_get_tab_reorderable">
<description>
Gets whether the tab can be reordered via drag and drop or not.
@@ -45766,10 +46261,12 @@ Since: 2.10
<function name="gtk_tree_selection_set_select_function">
<description>
-Sets the selection function. If set, this function is called before any node
-is selected or unselected, giving some control over which nodes are selected.
-The select function should return %TRUE if the state of the node may be toggled,
-and %FALSE if the state of the node should be left unchanged.
+Sets the selection function.
+
+If set, this function is called before any node is selected or unselected,
+giving some control over which nodes are selected. The select function
+should return %TRUE if the state of the node may be toggled, and %FALSE
+if the state of the node should be left unchanged.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -45778,36 +46275,37 @@ and %FALSE if the state of the node should be left unchanged.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="func">
-<parameter_description> The selection function.
+<parameter_description> The selection function. May be %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="data">
-<parameter_description> The selection function's data.
+<parameter_description> The selection function's data. May be %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="destroy">
-<parameter_description> The destroy function for user data. May be NULL.
+<parameter_description> The destroy function for user data. May be %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_theme_append_search_path">
+<function name="gtk_image_set_from_pixmap">
<description>
-Appends a directory to the search path.
-See gtk_icon_theme_set_search_path().
-
-Since: 2.4
+See gtk_image_new_from_pixmap() for details.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="icon_theme">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkIconTheme
+<parameter name="image">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkImage
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="path">
-<parameter_description> directory name to append to the icon path
+<parameter name="pixmap">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkPixmap or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="mask">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkBitmap or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -45841,23 +46339,38 @@ views, since they depend on the contents of the #GtkTextBuffer.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_range_get_range_rect">
+<function name="gtk_file_filter_add_custom">
<description>
-This function returns the area that contains the range's trough
-and its steppers, in widget->window coordinates.
-
-This function is useful mainly for #GtkRange subclasses.
+Adds rule to a filter that allows files based on a custom callback
+function. The bitfield @needed which is passed in provides information
+about what sorts of information that the filter function needs;
+this allows GTK+ to avoid retrieving expensive information when
+it isn't needed by the filter.
-Since: 2.20
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="range">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkRange
+<parameter name="filter">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFileFilter
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="range_rect">
-<parameter_description> return location for the range rectangle
+<parameter name="needed">
+<parameter_description> bitfield of flags indicating the information that the custom
+filter function needs.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="func">
+<parameter_description> callback function; if the function returns %TRUE, then
+the file will be displayed.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="data">
+<parameter_description> data to pass to @func
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="notify">
+<parameter_description> function to call to free @data when it is no longer needed.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -45896,75 +46409,29 @@ Creates a new vertical button box.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_iter_forward_search">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_set_attributes">
<description>
-Searches forward for @str. Any match is returned by setting
- match_start to the first character of the match and @match_end to the
-first character after the match. The search will not continue past
- limit Note that a search is a linear or O(n) operation, so you
-may wish to use @limit to avoid locking up your UI on large
-buffers.
-
-If the #GTK_TEXT_SEARCH_VISIBLE_ONLY flag is present, the match may
-have invisible text interspersed in @str. i.e. @str will be a
-possibly-noncontiguous subsequence of the matched range. similarly,
-if you specify #GTK_TEXT_SEARCH_TEXT_ONLY, the match may have
-pixbufs or child widgets mixed inside the matched range. If these
-flags are not given, the match must be exact; the special 0xFFFC
-character in @str will match embedded pixbufs or child widgets.
-
+Sets the attributes in the list as the attributes of @tree_column.
+The attributes should be in attribute/column order, as in
+gtk_tree_view_column_add_attribute(). All existing attributes
+are removed, and replaced with the new attributes.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> start of search
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="str">
-<parameter_description> a search string
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="flags">
-<parameter_description> flags affecting how the search is done
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="match_start">
-<parameter_description> return location for start of match, or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="match_end">
-<parameter_description> return location for end of match, or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="limit">
-<parameter_description> bound for the search, or %NULL for the end of the buffer
+<parameter name="tree_column">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeViewColumn.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> whether a match was found
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_file_chooser_button_new">
-<description>
-Creates a new file-selecting button widget.
-
-Since: 2.6
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="title">
-<parameter_description> the title of the browse dialog.
+<parameter name="cell_renderer">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkCellRenderer we're setting the attributes of
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="action">
-<parameter_description> the open mode for the widget.
+<parameter name="Varargs">
+<parameter_description> A %NULL-terminated list of attributes.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a new button widget.
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_clipboard_request_uris">
@@ -45999,68 +46466,49 @@ one way or the other.)
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_entry_get_icon_stock">
+<function name="gtk_icon_info_get_builtin_pixbuf">
<description>
-Retrieves the stock id used for the icon, or %NULL if there is
-no icon or if the icon was set by some other method (e.g., by
-pixbuf, icon name or gicon).
+Gets the built-in image for this icon, if any. To allow
+GTK+ to use built in icon images, you must pass the
+%GTK_ICON_LOOKUP_USE_BUILTIN to
+gtk_icon_theme_lookup_icon().
-Since: 2.16
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="entry">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkEntry
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="icon_pos">
-<parameter_description> Icon position
+<parameter name="icon_info">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIconInfo structure
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> A stock id, or %NULL if no icon is set or if the icon
-wasn't set from a stock id
+<return> the built-in image pixbuf, or %NULL. No
+extra reference is added to the returned pixbuf, so if
+you want to keep it around, you must use g_object_ref().
+The returned image must not be modified.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_file_chooser_button_get_title">
+<function name="gtk_scale_new">
<description>
-Retrieves the title of the browse dialog used by @button. The returned value
-should not be modified or freed.
+Creates a new #GtkScale.
-Since: 2.6
+Since: 3.0
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="button">
-<parameter_description> the button widget to examine.
+<parameter name="orientation">
+<parameter_description> the scale's orientation.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> a pointer to the browse dialog's title.
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_icon_info_get_display_name">
-<description>
-Gets the display name for an icon. A display name is a
-string to be used in place of the icon name in a user
-visible context like a list of icons.
-
-Since: 2.4
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="icon_info">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkIconInfo
+<parameter name="adjustment">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkAdjustment which sets the range of the scale, or
+%NULL to create a new adjustment.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the display name for the icon or %NULL, if
-the icon doesn't have a specified display name. This value
-is owned @icon_info and must not be modified or free.
+<return> a new #GtkScale
</return>
</function>
@@ -46161,29 +46609,35 @@ Retrieves the pulse step set with gtk_progress_bar_set_pulse_step()
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_selection_data_targets_include_image">
+<function name="gtk_selection_convert">
<description>
-Given a #GtkSelectionData object holding a list of targets,
-determines if any of the targets in @targets can be used to
-provide a #GdkPixbuf.
+Requests the contents of a selection. When received,
+a "selection-received" signal will be generated.
-Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="selection_data">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkSelectionData object
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> The widget which acts as requestor
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="writable">
-<parameter_description> whether to accept only targets for which GTK+ knows
-how to convert a pixbuf into the format
+<parameter name="selection">
+<parameter_description> Which selection to get
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="target">
+<parameter_description> Form of information desired (e.g., STRING)
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="time_">
+<parameter_description> Time of request (usually of triggering event)
+ In emergency, you could use #GDK_CURRENT_TIME
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if @selection_data holds a list of targets,
-and a suitable target for images is included, otherwise %FALSE.
-
+<return> %TRUE if requested succeeded. %FALSE if we could not process
+request. (e.g., there was already a request in process for
+this widget).
</return>
</function>
@@ -46236,16 +46690,23 @@ by another #GtkWidget than @widget.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_vseparator_new">
+<function name="gtk_image_set_from_animation">
<description>
-Creates a new #GtkVSeparator.
-
+Causes the #GtkImage to display the given animation (or display
+nothing, if you set the animation to %NULL).
</description>
<parameters>
+<parameter name="image">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkImage
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="animation">
+<parameter_description> the #GdkPixbufAnimation
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a new #GtkVSeparator.
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_widget_set_tooltip_text">
@@ -46272,6 +46733,25 @@ Since: 2.12
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_tool_item_get_text_size_group">
+<description>
+Returns the size group used for labels in @tool_item. Custom subclasses of
+#GtkToolItem should call this function and use the size group for labels.
+
+Since: 2.20
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="tool_item">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItem
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> a #GtkSizeGroup
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_window_set_skip_pager_hint">
<description>
Windows may set a hint asking the desktop environment not to display
@@ -46554,29 +47034,40 @@ See gtk_spin_button_set_numeric().
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_combo_box_set_model">
+<function name="gtk_text_buffer_register_serialize_format">
<description>
-Sets the model used by @combo_box to be @model. Will unset a previously set
-model (if applicable). If model is %NULL, then it will unset the model.
-
-Note that this function does not clear the cell renderers, you have to
-call gtk_cell_layout_clear() yourself if you need to set up different
-cell renderers for the new model.
+This function registers a rich text serialization @function along with
+its @mime_type with the passed @buffer.
-Since: 2.4
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="combo_box">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkComboBox
+<parameter name="buffer">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextBuffer
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="model">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeModel
+<parameter name="mime_type">
+<parameter_description> the format's mime-type
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="function">
+<parameter_description> the serialize function to register
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="user_data">
+<parameter_description> %function's user_data
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="user_data_destroy">
+<parameter_description> a function to call when @user_data is no longer needed
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the #GdkAtom that corresponds to the newly registered
+format's mime-type.
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_file_chooser_set_action">
@@ -46657,22 +47148,34 @@ Since: 3.0
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_paper_size_get_name">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_set_reorderable">
<description>
-Gets the name of the #GtkPaperSize.
+This function is a convenience function to allow you to reorder
+models that support the #GtkDragSourceIface and the
+#GtkDragDestIface. Both #GtkTreeStore and #GtkListStore support
+these. If @reorderable is %TRUE, then the user can reorder the
+model by dragging and dropping rows. The developer can listen to
+these changes by connecting to the model's row_inserted and
+row_deleted signals. The reordering is implemented by setting up
+the tree view as a drag source and destination. Therefore, drag and
+drop can not be used in a reorderable view for any other purpose.
-Since: 2.10
+This function does not give you any degree of control over the order -- any
+reordering is allowed. If more control is needed, you should probably
+handle drag and drop manually.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="size">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPaperSize object
+<parameter name="tree_view">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeView.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="reorderable">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE, if the tree can be reordered.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the name of @size
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_color_selection_set_previous_alpha">
@@ -46760,24 +47263,18 @@ also set the original color to be @color too.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_settings_set_printer_lpi">
+<function name="gtk_cell_renderer_progress_new">
<description>
-Sets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_PRINTER_LPI.
+Creates a new #GtkCellRendererProgress.
-Since: 2.16
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="settings">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="lpi">
-<parameter_description> the resolution in lpi (lines per inch)
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the new cell renderer
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_tree_model_sort_convert_iter_to_child_iter">
@@ -46802,29 +47299,41 @@ Sets @child_iter to point to the row pointed to by @sorted_iter.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_class_path">
+<function name="gtk_wrap_box_set_vertical_spacing">
<description>
-Same as gtk_widget_path(), but always uses the name of a widget's type,
-never uses a custom name set with gtk_widget_set_name().
-
+Sets the vertical space to add between children.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+<parameter name="box">
+<parameter_description> An #GtkWrapBox
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="path_length">
-<parameter_description> location to store the length of the class path, or %NULL
+<parameter name="spacing">
+<parameter_description> The spacing to use.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="path">
-<parameter_description> (out) (allow-none) location to store the class path as an allocated string, or %NULL
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_set_hover_selection">
+<description>
+Enables of disables the hover selection mode of @tree_view.
+Hover selection makes the selected row follow the pointer.
+Currently, this works only for the selection modes
+%GTK_SELECTION_SINGLE and %GTK_SELECTION_BROWSE.
+
+Since: 2.6
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="tree_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeView
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="path_reversed">
-<parameter_description> (out) (allow-none) location to store the reverse class path as an allocated
-string, or %NULL
+<parameter name="hover">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE to enable hover selection mode
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -46870,35 +47379,21 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_cell_renderer_toggle_new">
-<description>
-Creates a new #GtkCellRendererToggle. Adjust rendering
-parameters using object properties. Object properties can be set
-globally (with g_object_set()). Also, with #GtkTreeViewColumn, you
-can bind a property to a value in a #GtkTreeModel. For example, you
-can bind the "active" property on the cell renderer to a boolean value
-in the model, thus causing the check button to reflect the state of
-the model.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-</parameters>
-<return> the new cell renderer
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_icon_view_unset_model_drag_dest">
+<function name="gtk_menu_set_screen">
<description>
-Undoes the effect of gtk_icon_view_enable_model_drag_dest(). Calling this
-method sets #GtkIconView:reorderable to %FALSE.
+Sets the #GdkScreen on which the menu will be displayed.
-Since: 2.8
+Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="icon_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkIconView
+<parameter name="menu">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkMenu.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="screen">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkScreen, or %NULL if the screen should be
+determined by the widget the menu is attached to.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -46981,23 +47476,21 @@ Since: 2.20
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_scrolled_window_get_placement">
+<function name="gtk_action_get_icon_name">
<description>
-Gets the placement of the contents with respect to the scrollbars
-for the scrolled window. See gtk_scrolled_window_set_placement().
+Gets the icon name of @action.
+Since: 2.16
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="scrolled_window">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkScrolledWindow
+<parameter name="action">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAction
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the current placement value.
+<return> the icon name
-See also gtk_scrolled_window_set_placement() and
-gtk_scrolled_window_unset_placement().
</return>
</function>
@@ -47021,6 +47514,29 @@ Same as gtk_stock_add(), but doesn't copy @items, so
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_spin_button_get_range">
+<description>
+Gets the range allowed for @spin_button. See
+gtk_spin_button_set_range().
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="spin_button">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkSpinButton
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="min">
+<parameter_description> location to store minimum allowed value, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="max">
+<parameter_description> location to store maximum allowed value, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_assistant_get_page_type">
<description>
Gets the page type of @page.
@@ -47080,6 +47596,65 @@ Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_font_selection_dialog_get_preview_text">
+<description>
+Gets the text displayed in the preview area.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="fsd">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFontSelectionDialog
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the text displayed in the preview area.
+This string is owned by the widget and should not be
+modified or freed
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_window_set_icon_list">
+<description>
+Sets up the icon representing a #GtkWindow. The icon is used when
+the window is minimized (also known as iconified). Some window
+managers or desktop environments may also place it in the window
+frame, or display it in other contexts.
+
+gtk_window_set_icon_list() allows you to pass in the same icon in
+several hand-drawn sizes. The list should contain the natural sizes
+your icon is available in; that is, don't scale the image before
+passing it to GTK+. Scaling is postponed until the last minute,
+when the desired final size is known, to allow best quality.
+
+By passing several sizes, you may improve the final image quality
+of the icon, by reducing or eliminating automatic image scaling.
+
+Recommended sizes to provide: 16x16, 32x32, 48x48 at minimum, and
+larger images (64x64, 128x128) if you have them.
+
+See also gtk_window_set_default_icon_list() to set the icon
+for all windows in your application in one go.
+
+Note that transient windows (those who have been set transient for another
+window using gtk_window_set_transient_for()) will inherit their
+icon from their transient parent. So there's no need to explicitly
+set the icon on transient windows.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="list">
+<parameter_description> list of #GdkPixbuf
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_ui_manager_add_ui_from_string">
<description>
Parses a string containing a <link linkend="XML-UI">UI definition</link> and
@@ -47114,31 +47689,6 @@ the return value is 0.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_printer_get_capabilities">
-<description>
-Returns the printer's capabilities.
-
-This is useful when you're using #GtkPrintUnixDialog's manual-capabilities
-setting and need to know which settings the printer can handle and which
-you must handle yourself.
-
-This will return 0 unless the printer's details are available, see
-gtk_printer_has_details() and gtk_printer_request_details().
-
-Since: 2.12
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="printer">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrinter
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the printer's capabilities
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_tool_item_group_set_header_relief">
<description>
Set the button relief of the group header.
@@ -47160,6 +47710,20 @@ Since: 2.20
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_tree_store_clear">
+<description>
+Removes all rows from @tree_store
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="tree_store">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeStore
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_icon_view_get_visible_range">
<description>
Sets @start_path and @end_path to be the first and last visible path.
@@ -47225,6 +47789,26 @@ Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_file_chooser_button_set_title">
+<description>
+Modifies the @title of the browse dialog used by @button.
+
+Since: 2.6
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="button">
+<parameter_description> the button widget to modify.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="title">
+<parameter_description> the new browse dialog title.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_label_new_with_mnemonic">
<description>
Creates a new #GtkLabel, containing the text in @str.
@@ -47285,56 +47869,24 @@ Gets the value set by gtk_window_set_gravity().
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tool_palette_unset_icon_size">
-<description>
-Unsets the tool palette icon size set with gtk_tool_palette_set_icon_size(),
-so that user preferences will be used to determine the icon size.
-
-Since: 2.20
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="palette">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolPalette
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_window_get_mnemonic_modifier">
-<description>
-Returns the mnemonic modifier for this window. See
-gtk_window_set_mnemonic_modifier().
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the modifier mask used to activate
-mnemonics on this window.
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_about_dialog_get_license">
+<function name="gtk_selection_data_get_uris">
<description>
-Returns the license information.
+Gets the contents of the selection data as array of URIs.
Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="about">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkAboutDialog
+<parameter name="selection_data">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkSelectionData
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> The license information. The string is owned by the about
-dialog and must not be modified.
+<return> if
+the selection data contains a list of
+URIs, a newly allocated %NULL-terminated string array
+containing the URIs, otherwise %NULL. If the result is
+non-%NULL it must be freed with g_strfreev().
</return>
</function>
@@ -47464,26 +48016,6 @@ A convenient way to sensitize/desensitize dialog buttons.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_recent_chooser_get_limit">
-<description>
-Gets the number of items returned by gtk_recent_chooser_get_items()
-and gtk_recent_chooser_get_uris().
-
-Since: 2.10
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="chooser">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentChooser
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> A positive integer, or -1 meaning that all items are
-returned.
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_tree_view_get_visible_rect">
<description>
Fills @visible_rect with the currently-visible region of the
@@ -47639,77 +48171,56 @@ this operation.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_model_sort_convert_path_to_child_path">
+<function name="gtk_entry_buffer_emit_inserted_text">
<description>
-Converts @sorted_path to a path on the child model of @tree_model_sort.
-That is, @sorted_path points to a location in @tree_model_sort. The
-returned path will point to the same location in the model not being
-sorted. If @sorted_path does not point to a location in the child model,
-%NULL is returned.
+Used when subclassing #GtkEntryBuffer
+Since: 2.18
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_model_sort">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeModelSort
+<parameter name="buffer">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkEntryBuffer
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="sorted_path">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreePath to convert
+<parameter name="position">
+<parameter_description> position at which text was inserted
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> A newly allocated #GtkTreePath, or %NULL
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_about_dialog_set_authors">
-<description>
-Sets the strings which are displayed in the authors tab
-of the secondary credits dialog.
-
-Since: 2.6
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="about">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkAboutDialog
+<parameter name="chars">
+<parameter_description> text that was inserted
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="authors">
-<parameter_description> a %NULL-terminated array of strings
+<parameter name="n_chars">
+<parameter_description> number of characters inserted
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_entry_buffer_emit_inserted_text">
+<function name="gtk_targets_include_uri">
<description>
-Used when subclassing #GtkEntryBuffer
+Determines if any of the targets in @targets can be used to
+provide an uri list.
-Since: 2.18
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="buffer">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkEntryBuffer
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="position">
-<parameter_description> position at which text was inserted
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="chars">
-<parameter_description> text that was inserted
+<parameter name="targets">
+<parameter_description> an array of #GdkAtom<!-- -->s
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="n_chars">
-<parameter_description> number of characters inserted
+<parameter name="n_targets">
+<parameter_description> the length of @targets
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if @targets include a suitable target for uri lists,
+otherwise %FALSE.
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_radio_button_new_from_widget">
@@ -47768,62 +48279,6 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_paint_tab">
-<description>
-Draws an option menu tab (i.e. the up and down pointing arrows)
-in the given rectangle on @window using the given parameters.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="style">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="state_type">
-<parameter_description> a state
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="shadow_type">
-<parameter_description> the type of shadow to draw
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="area">
-<parameter_description> clip rectangle, or %NULL if the
-output should not be clipped
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> the widget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="detail">
-<parameter_description> a style detail
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="x">
-<parameter_description> x origin of the rectangle to draw the tab in
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="y">
-<parameter_description> y origin of the rectangle to draw the tab in
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="width">
-<parameter_description> the width of the rectangle to draw the tab in
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="height">
-<parameter_description> the height of the rectangle to draw the tab in
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_widget_set_child_visible">
<description>
Sets whether @widget should be mapped along with its when its parent
@@ -47879,6 +48334,38 @@ Since: 2.10
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_test_find_widget">
+<description>
+This function will search the descendants of @widget for a widget
+of type @widget_type that has a label matching @label_pattern next
+to it. This is most useful for automated GUI testing, e.g. to find
+the "OK" button in a dialog and synthesize clicks on it.
+However see gtk_test_find_label(), gtk_test_find_sibling() and
+gtk_test_widget_click() for possible caveats involving the search of
+such widgets and synthesizing widget events.
+
+Since: 2.14
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> Container widget, usually a GtkWindow.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="label_pattern">
+<parameter_description> Shell-glob pattern to match a label string.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="widget_type">
+<parameter_description> Type of a aearched for label sibling widget.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> a valid widget if any is found or %NULL.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_print_operation_set_n_pages">
<description>
Sets the number of pages in the document.
@@ -47909,6 +48396,20 @@ Since: 2.10
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_rc_reparse_all">
+<description>
+If the modification time on any previously read file for the
+default #GtkSettings has changed, discard all style information
+and then reread all previously read RC files.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if the files were reread.
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_container_class_install_child_property">
<description>
Installs a child property on a container class.
@@ -48049,25 +48550,22 @@ Creates a new #GtkFontSelectionDialog.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_settings_unset">
+<function name="gtk_icon_source_get_direction">
<description>
-Removes any value associated with @key.
-This has the same effect as setting the value to %NULL.
+Obtains the text direction this icon source applies to. The return
+value is only useful/meaningful if the text direction is <emphasis>not</emphasis>
+wildcarded.
-Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="settings">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="key">
-<parameter_description> a key
+<parameter name="source">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIconSource
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> text direction this source matches
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_ui_manager_get_widget">
@@ -48105,60 +48603,39 @@ was found.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_accel_group_query">
+<function name="gtk_scale_get_draw_value">
<description>
-Queries an accelerator group for all entries matching @accel_key and
- accel_mods
+Returns whether the current value is displayed as a string
+next to the slider.
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="accel_group">
-<parameter_description> the accelerator group to query
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="accel_key">
-<parameter_description> key value of the accelerator
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="accel_mods">
-<parameter_description> modifier combination of the accelerator
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="n_entries">
-<parameter_description> location to return the number of entries found, or %NULL
+<parameter name="scale">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkScale
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> an array of @n_entries #GtkAccelGroupEntry elements, or %NULL. The array is owned by GTK+ and must not be freed.
+<return> whether the current value is displayed as a string
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_cell_layout_pack_start">
+<function name="gtk_plug_get_socket_window">
<description>
-Packs the @cell into the beginning of @cell_layout. If @expand is %FALSE,
-then the @cell is allocated no more space than it needs. Any unused space
-is divided evenly between cells for which @expand is %TRUE.
-
-Note that reusing the same cell renderer is not supported.
+Retrieves the socket the plug is embedded in.
-Since: 2.4
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="cell_layout">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkCellLayout.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="cell">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkCellRenderer.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="expand">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE if @cell is to be given extra space allocated to @cell_layout.
+<parameter name="plug">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPlug
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the window of the socket, or %NULL
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_vscale_new">
@@ -48177,32 +48654,6 @@ Creates a new #GtkVScale.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_buildable_get_internal_child">
-<description>
-Get the internal child called @childname of the @buildable object.
-
-Since: 2.12
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="buildable">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkBuildable
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="builder">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkBuilder
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="childname">
-<parameter_description> name of child
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the internal child of the buildable object
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_print_settings_get_resolution_x">
<description>
Gets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_RESOLUTION_X.
@@ -48258,21 +48709,25 @@ also set the original opacity to be @alpha too.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_label_get_mnemonic_widget">
+<function name="gtk_print_settings_has_key">
<description>
-Retrieves the target of the mnemonic (keyboard shortcut) of this
-label. See gtk_label_set_mnemonic_widget().
+Returns %TRUE, if a value is associated with @key.
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="label">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkLabel
+<parameter name="settings">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="key">
+<parameter_description> a key
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the target of the label's mnemonic, or %NULL if none
-has been set and the default algorithm will be used.
+<return> %TRUE, if @key has a value
+
</return>
</function>
@@ -48296,82 +48751,6 @@ Since: 2.20
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_expander_get_label">
-<description>
-Fetches the text from a label widget including any embedded
-underlines indicating mnemonics and Pango markup, as set by
-gtk_expander_set_label(). If the label text has not been set the
-return value will be %NULL. This will be the case if you create an
-empty button with gtk_button_new() to use as a container.
-
-Note that this function behaved differently in versions prior to
-2.14 and used to return the label text stripped of embedded
-underlines indicating mnemonics and Pango markup. This problem can
-be avoided by fetching the label text directly from the label
-widget.
-
-Since: 2.4
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="expander">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkExpander
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> The text of the label widget. This string is owned
-by the widget and must not be modified or freed.
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_menu_bar_get_child_pack_direction">
-<description>
-Retrieves the current child pack direction of the menubar.
-See gtk_menu_bar_set_child_pack_direction().
-
-Since: 2.8
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="menubar">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkMenuBar
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the child pack direction
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_print_settings_load_file">
-<description>
-Reads the print settings from @file_name. If the file could not be loaded
-then error is set to either a #GFileError or #GKeyFileError.
-See gtk_print_settings_to_file().
-
-Since: 2.14
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="settings">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="file_name">
-<parameter_description> the filename to read the settings from
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="error">
-<parameter_description> return location for errors, or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE on success
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_about_dialog_get_translator_credits">
<description>
Returns the translator credits string which is displayed
@@ -48392,21 +48771,27 @@ owned by the about dialog and must not be modified.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_model_sort_reset_default_sort_func">
+<function name="gtk_paper_size_get_width">
<description>
-This resets the default sort function to be in the 'unsorted' state. That
-is, it is in the same order as the child model. It will re-sort the model
-to be in the same order as the child model only if the #GtkTreeModelSort
-is in 'unsorted' state.
+Gets the paper width of the #GtkPaperSize, in
+units of @unit.
+
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_model_sort">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeModelSort
+<parameter name="size">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPaperSize object
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="unit">
+<parameter_description> the unit for the return value
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the paper width
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_size_group_set_ignore_hidden">
@@ -48453,6 +48838,24 @@ then 0 is returned.
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_notebook_get_tab_vborder">
+<description>
+Returns the vertical width of a tab border.
+
+Since: 2.22
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="notebook">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkNotebook
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> vertical width of a tab border
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_combo_box_get_focus_on_click">
<description>
Returns whether the combo box grabs focus when it is clicked
@@ -48590,6 +48993,22 @@ Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_wrap_box_get_spreading">
+<description>
+Gets the spreading mode.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="box">
+<parameter_description> An #GtkWrapBox
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> The #GtkWrapBoxSpreading for @box.
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_icon_source_get_pixbuf">
<description>
Retrieves the source pixbuf, or %NULL if none is set.
@@ -48712,46 +49131,59 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_window_set_icon_name">
+<function name="gtk_file_chooser_get_local_only">
<description>
-Sets the icon for the window from a named themed icon. See
-the docs for #GtkIconTheme for more details.
-
-Note that this has nothing to do with the WM_ICON_NAME
-property which is mentioned in the ICCCM.
+Gets whether only local files can be selected in the
+file selector. See gtk_file_chooser_set_local_only()
-Since: 2.6
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
+<parameter name="chooser">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChoosre
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="name">
-<parameter_description> the name of the themed icon
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if only local files can be selected.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_icon_size_get_name">
+<description>
+Gets the canonical name of the given icon size. The returned string
+is statically allocated and should not be freed.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="size">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIconSize.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the name of the given icon size.
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_entry_set_progress_fraction">
+<function name="gtk_window_set_icon_name">
<description>
-Causes the entry's progress indicator to "fill in" the given
-fraction of the bar. The fraction should be between 0.0 and 1.0,
-inclusive.
+Sets the icon for the window from a named themed icon. See
+the docs for #GtkIconTheme for more details.
-Since: 2.16
+Note that this has nothing to do with the WM_ICON_NAME
+property which is mentioned in the ICCCM.
+
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="entry">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkEntry
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="fraction">
-<parameter_description> fraction of the task that's been completed
+<parameter name="name">
+<parameter_description> the name of the themed icon
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -48816,6 +49248,36 @@ default widget for the toplevel.
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_style_get_style_property">
+<description>
+Queries the value of a style property corresponding to a
+widget class is in the given style.
+
+Since: 2.16
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="style">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="widget_type">
+<parameter_description> the #GType of a descendant of #GtkWidget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="property_name">
+<parameter_description> the name of the style property to get
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="value">
+<parameter_description> a #GValue where the value of the property being
+queried will be stored
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_tree_row_reference_new">
<description>
Creates a row reference based on @path. This reference will keep pointing
@@ -48914,27 +49376,38 @@ is not a #GIcon
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_range_get_slider_range">
+<function name="gtk_text_view_set_editable">
<description>
-This function returns sliders range along the long dimension,
-in widget->window coordinates.
-
-This function is useful mainly for #GtkRange subclasses.
-
-Since: 2.20
+Sets the default editability of the #GtkTextView. You can override
+this default setting with tags in the buffer, using the "editable"
+attribute of tags.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="range">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkRange
+<parameter name="text_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextView
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="slider_start">
-<parameter_description> return location for the slider's start, or %NULL
+<parameter name="setting">
+<parameter_description> whether it's editable
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="slider_end">
-<parameter_description> return location for the slider's end, or %NULL
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_calendar_unmark_day">
+<description>
+Removes the visual marker from a particular day.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="calendar">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkCalendar.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="day">
+<parameter_description> the day number to unmark between 1 and 31.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -48997,15 +49470,47 @@ expander column to a hidden column.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_editable_copy_clipboard">
+<function name="gtk_widget_get_modifier_style">
<description>
-Copies the contents of the currently selected content in the editable and
-puts it on the clipboard.
+Returns the current modifier style for the widget. (As set by
+gtk_widget_modify_style().) If no style has previously set, a new
+#GtkRcStyle will be created with all values unset, and set as the
+modifier style for the widget. If you make changes to this rc
+style, you must call gtk_widget_modify_style(), passing in the
+returned rc style, to make sure that your changes take effect.
+
+Caution: passing the style back to gtk_widget_modify_style() will
+normally end up destroying it, because gtk_widget_modify_style() copies
+the passed-in style and sets the copy as the new modifier style,
+thus dropping any reference to the old modifier style. Add a reference
+to the modifier style if you want to keep it alive.
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="editable">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkEditable
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the modifier style for the widget. This rc style is
+owned by the widget. If you want to keep a pointer to value this
+around, you must add a refcount using g_object_ref().
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_wrap_box_set_allocation_mode">
+<description>
+Sets the allocation mode for @box's children.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="box">
+<parameter_description> An #GtkWrapBox
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="mode">
+<parameter_description> The #GtkWrapAllocationMode to use.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -49195,44 +49700,56 @@ Creates a new #GtkViewport with the given adjustments.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_im_multicontext_append_menuitems">
+<function name="gtk_icon_theme_get_example_icon_name">
<description>
-Add menuitems for various available input methods to a menu;
-the menuitems, when selected, will switch the input method
-for the context and the global default input method.
+Gets the name of an icon that is representative of the
+current theme (for instance, to use when presenting
+a list of themes to the user.)
+
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="context">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkIMMulticontext
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="menushell">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkMenuShell
+<parameter name="icon_theme">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIconTheme
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the name of an example icon or %NULL.
+Free with g_free().
+
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_container_child_type">
+<function name="gtk_dialog_set_alternative_button_order_from_array">
<description>
-Returns the type of the children supported by the container.
+Sets an alternative button order. If the
+#GtkSettings:gtk-alternative-button-order setting is set to %TRUE,
+the dialog buttons are reordered according to the order of the
+response ids in @new_order.
-Note that this may return %G_TYPE_NONE to indicate that no more
-children can be added, e.g. for a #GtkPaned which already has two
-children.
+See gtk_dialog_set_alternative_button_order() for more information.
+
+This function is for use by language bindings.
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="container">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkContainer
+<parameter name="dialog">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkDialog
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="n_params">
+<parameter_description> the number of response ids in @new_order
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="new_order">
+<parameter_description> an array of response ids of @dialog's buttons
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a #GType.
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_bin_get_child">
@@ -49357,20 +49874,14 @@ Since: 2.6
</return>
</function>
-<function name="remove_file">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_clear">
<description>
-Removes the given file from the model. If the file is not part of
- model, this function does nothing.
+Unsets all the mappings on all renderers on the @tree_column.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="model">
-<parameter_description> the model
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="file">
-<parameter_description> file to remove from the model. The file must have been
-added to the model previously
+<parameter name="tree_column">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeViewColumn
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -49435,6 +49946,28 @@ remove the item pointed by @uri in the list
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_combo_box_get_active_iter">
+<description>
+Sets @iter to point to the current active item, if it exists.
+
+Since: 2.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="combo_box">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkComboBox
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> The uninitialized #GtkTreeIter
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE, if @iter was set
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_text_buffer_get_paste_target_list">
<description>
This function returns the list of targets this text buffer supports
@@ -49476,6 +50009,26 @@ be freed.
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_menu_tool_button_new_from_stock">
+<description>
+Creates a new #GtkMenuToolButton.
+The new #GtkMenuToolButton will contain an icon and label from
+the stock item indicated by @stock_id.
+
+Since: 2.6
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="stock_id">
+<parameter_description> the name of a stock item
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the new #GtkMenuToolButton
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_ruler_new">
<description>
Creates a new #GtkRuler with the given orientation.
@@ -49494,6 +50047,22 @@ Since: 3.0
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_accel_map_save_fd">
+<description>
+Filedescriptor variant of gtk_accel_map_save().
+
+Note that the file descriptor will not be closed by this function.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="fd">
+<parameter_description> a valid writable file descriptor
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_entry_get_text">
<description>
Retrieves the contents of the entry widget.
@@ -49520,21 +50089,22 @@ stored.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_about_dialog_get_website">
+<function name="gtk_file_chooser_get_do_overwrite_confirmation">
<description>
-Returns the website URL.
+Queries whether a file chooser is set to confirm for overwriting when the user
+types a file name that already exists.
-Since: 2.6
+Since: 2.8
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="about">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkAboutDialog
+<parameter name="chooser">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> The website URL. The string is owned by the about
-dialog and must not be modified.
+<return> %TRUE if the file chooser will present a confirmation dialog;
+%FALSE otherwise.
</return>
</function>
@@ -49668,6 +50238,22 @@ of properties to set on the tag, as with g_object_set().
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_new_with_model">
+<description>
+Creates a new #GtkTreeView widget with the model initialized to @model.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="model">
+<parameter_description> the model.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> A newly created #GtkTreeView widget.
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_icon_info_get_attach_points">
<description>
Fetches the set of attach points for an icon. An attach point
@@ -49810,51 +50396,48 @@ gtk_tree_view_column_cell_set_cell_data()
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_iter_backward_to_tag_toggle">
+<function name="gtk_expander_get_label">
<description>
-Moves backward to the next toggle (on or off) of the
-#GtkTextTag @tag, or to the next toggle of any tag if
- tag is %NULL. If no matching tag toggles are found,
-returns %FALSE, otherwise %TRUE. Does not return toggles
-located at @iter, only toggles before @iter. Sets @iter
-to the location of the toggle, or the start of the buffer
-if no toggle is found.
+Fetches the text from a label widget including any embedded
+underlines indicating mnemonics and Pango markup, as set by
+gtk_expander_set_label(). If the label text has not been set the
+return value will be %NULL. This will be the case if you create an
+empty button with gtk_button_new() to use as a container.
+Note that this function behaved differently in versions prior to
+2.14 and used to return the label text stripped of embedded
+underlines indicating mnemonics and Pango markup. This problem can
+be avoided by fetching the label text directly from the label
+widget.
+
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="tag">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextTag, or %NULL
+<parameter name="expander">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkExpander
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> whether we found a tag toggle before @iter
+<return> The text of the label widget. This string is owned
+by the widget and must not be modified or freed.
+
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_recent_chooser_set_show_not_found">
+<function name="gtk_image_menu_item_new_with_label">
<description>
-Sets whether @chooser should display the recently used resources that
-it didn't find. This only applies to local resources.
-
-Since: 2.10
+Creates a new #GtkImageMenuItem containing a label.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="chooser">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentChooser
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="show_not_found">
-<parameter_description> whether to show the local items we didn't find
+<parameter name="label">
+<parameter_description> the text of the menu item.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> a new #GtkImageMenuItem.
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_recent_filter_filter">
@@ -49904,6 +50487,58 @@ Sets whether to show the tabs for the notebook or not.
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_scrolled_window_unset_placement">
+<description>
+Unsets the placement of the contents with respect to the scrollbars
+for the scrolled window. If no window placement is set for a scrolled
+window, it obeys the "gtk-scrolled-window-placement" XSETTING.
+
+See also gtk_scrolled_window_set_placement() and
+gtk_scrolled_window_get_placement().
+
+Since: 2.10
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="scrolled_window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkScrolledWindow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_tree_model_rows_reordered">
+<description>
+Emits the "rows-reordered" signal on @tree_model. This should be called by
+models when their rows have been reordered.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="tree_model">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeModel
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="path">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreePath pointing to the tree node whose children have been
+reordered
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> A valid #GtkTreeIter pointing to the node whose children have been
+reordered, or %NULL if the depth of @path is 0.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="new_order">
+<parameter_description> an array of integers mapping the current position of each child
+to its old position before the re-ordering,
+i.e. @new_order<literal>[newpos] = oldpos</literal>.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_icon_view_get_column_spacing">
<description>
Returns the value of the ::column-spacing property.
@@ -50065,6 +50700,36 @@ previously selected.
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_file_chooser_set_do_overwrite_confirmation">
+<description>
+Sets whether a file chooser in %GTK_FILE_CHOOSER_ACTION_SAVE mode will present
+a confirmation dialog if the user types a file name that already exists. This
+is %FALSE by default.
+
+Regardless of this setting, the @chooser will emit the
+#GtkFileChooser::confirm-overwrite signal when appropriate.
+
+If all you need is the stock confirmation dialog, set this property to %TRUE.
+You can override the way confirmation is done by actually handling the
+#GtkFileChooser::confirm-overwrite signal; please refer to its documentation
+for the details.
+
+Since: 2.8
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="chooser">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="do_overwrite_confirmation">
+<parameter_description> whether to confirm overwriting in save mode
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_im_context_focus_out">
<description>
Notify the input method that the widget to which this
@@ -50127,29 +50792,6 @@ by the builder object and must not be modified or freed.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tool_palette_get_drag_item">
-<description>
-Get the dragged item from the selection.
-This could be a #GtkToolItem or a #GtkToolItemGroup.
-
-Since: 2.20
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="palette">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolPalette
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="selection">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkSelectionData
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the dragged item in selection
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_builder_connect_signals_full">
<description>
This function can be thought of the interpreted language binding
@@ -50216,35 +50858,6 @@ Since: 2.12
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_notebook_set_action_widget">
-<description>
-Sets @widget as one of the action widgets. Depending on the pack type
-the widget will be placed before or after the tabs. You can use
-a #GtkBox if you need to pack more than one widget on the same side.
-
-Note that action widgets are "internal" children of the notebook and thus
-not included in the list returned from gtk_container_foreach().
-
-Since: 2.20
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="notebook">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkNotebook
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="pack_type">
-<parameter_description> pack type of the action widget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_label_get_line_wrap_mode">
<description>
Returns line wrap mode used by the label. See gtk_label_set_line_wrap_mode().
@@ -50342,23 +50955,6 @@ Emits the #GtkCellEditable::remove-widget signal.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_drag_dest_get_target_list">
-<description>
-Returns the list of targets this widget can accept from
-drag-and-drop.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the #GtkTargetList, or %NULL if none
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_text_view_im_context_filter_keypress">
<description>
Allow the #GtkTextView input method to internally handle key press
@@ -50460,26 +51056,20 @@ Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_recent_info_match">
+<function name="gtk_action_group_list_actions">
<description>
-Checks whether two #GtkRecentInfo structures point to the same
-resource.
+Lists the actions in the action group.
-Since: 2.10
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="info_a">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentInfo
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="info_b">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentInfo
+<parameter name="action_group">
+<parameter_description> the action group
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if both #GtkRecentInfo structures point to se same
-resource, %FALSE otherwise.
+<return> an allocated list of the action objects in the action group
</return>
</function>
@@ -50598,25 +51188,6 @@ Since: 3.0
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_image_menu_item_get_always_show_image">
-<description>
-Returns whether the menu item will ignore the #GtkSettings:gtk-menu-images
-setting and always show the image, if available.
-
-Since: 2.16
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="image_menu_item">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkImageMenuItem
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the menu item will always show the image
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_mount_operation_set_screen">
<description>
Sets the screen to show windows of the #GtkMountOperation on.
@@ -50637,27 +51208,6 @@ Since: 2.14
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_page_setup_set_paper_size_and_default_margins">
-<description>
-Sets the paper size of the #GtkPageSetup and modifies
-the margins according to the new paper size.
-
-Since: 2.10
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="setup">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPageSetup
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="size">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPaperSize
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_color_button_get_alpha">
<description>
Returns the current alpha value.
@@ -50725,24 +51275,20 @@ Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_paper_size_get_default_bottom_margin">
+<function name="gtk_font_selection_dialog_get_font_selection">
<description>
-Gets the default bottom margin for the #GtkPaperSize.
+Retrieves the #GtkFontSelection widget embedded in the dialog.
-Since: 2.10
+Since: 2.22
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="size">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPaperSize object
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="unit">
-<parameter_description> the unit for the return value
+<parameter name="colorsel">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFontSelectionDialog
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the default bottom margin
+<return> the embedded #GtkFontSelection
</return>
</function>
@@ -50825,6 +51371,33 @@ Since: 2.14
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_size_request_get_width">
+<description>
+Retrieves a widget's initial minimum and natural width.
+
+<note><para>This call is specific to height-for-width
+requests.</para></note>
+
+Since: 3.0
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkSizeRequest instance
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="minimum_width">
+<parameter_description> location to store the minimum width, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="natural_width">
+<parameter_description> location to store the natural width, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_action_group_add_toggle_actions">
<description>
This is a convenience function to create a number of toggle actions and add them
@@ -50881,27 +51454,6 @@ Since: 2.10
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_action_block_activate">
-<description>
-Disable activation signals from the action
-
-This is needed when updating the state of your proxy
-#GtkActivatable widget could result in calling gtk_action_activate(),
-this is a convenience function to avoid recursing in those
-cases (updating toggle state for instance).
-
-Since: 2.16
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="action">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkAction
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_notebook_get_tab_label_text">
<description>
Retrieves the text of the tab label for the page containing
@@ -50926,43 +51478,6 @@ be freed.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_clipboard_wait_for_rich_text">
-<description>
-Requests the contents of the clipboard as rich text. This function
-waits for the data to be received using the main loop, so events,
-timeouts, etc, may be dispatched during the wait.
-
-Since: 2.10
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="clipboard">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkClipboard
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="buffer">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextBuffer
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="format">
-<parameter_description> return location for the format of the returned data
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="length">
-<parameter_description> return location for the length of the returned data
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> a newly-allocated binary block of data which must
-be freed with g_free(), or %NULL if retrieving
-the selection data failed. (This could happen
-for various reasons, in particular if the
-clipboard was empty or if the contents of the
-clipboard could not be converted into text form.)
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_window_get_group">
<description>
Returns the group for @window or the default group, if
@@ -51004,34 +51519,6 @@ associated with, for example.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_editable_get_selection_bounds">
-<description>
-Retrieves the selection bound of the editable. start_pos will be filled
-with the start of the selection and @end_pos with end. If no text was
-selected both will be identical and %FALSE will be returned.
-
-Note that positions are specified in characters, not bytes.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="editable">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkEditable
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="start_pos">
-<parameter_description> location to store the starting position, or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="end_pos">
-<parameter_description> location to store the end position, or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if an area is selected, %FALSE otherwise
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_cell_render">
<description>
Renders the cell contained by #tree_column. This is used primarily by the
@@ -51233,6 +51720,36 @@ parent of @dest_path doesn't exist, though.
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_text_buffer_begin_user_action">
+<description>
+Called to indicate that the buffer operations between here and a
+call to gtk_text_buffer_end_user_action() are part of a single
+user-visible operation. The operations between
+gtk_text_buffer_begin_user_action() and
+gtk_text_buffer_end_user_action() can then be grouped when creating
+an undo stack. #GtkTextBuffer maintains a count of calls to
+gtk_text_buffer_begin_user_action() that have not been closed with
+a call to gtk_text_buffer_end_user_action(), and emits the
+"begin-user-action" and "end-user-action" signals only for the
+outermost pair of calls. This allows you to build user actions
+from other user actions.
+
+The "interactive" buffer mutation functions, such as
+gtk_text_buffer_insert_interactive(), automatically call begin/end
+user action around the buffer operations they perform, so there's
+no need to add extra calls if you user action consists solely of a
+single call to one of those functions.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="buffer">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextBuffer
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_tree_view_set_fixed_height_mode">
<description>
Enables or disables the fixed height mode of @tree_view.
@@ -51319,29 +51836,33 @@ Since: 2.12
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_cell_layout_reorder">
+<function name="gtk_buildable_construct_child">
<description>
-Re-inserts @cell at @position. Note that @cell has already to be packed
-into @cell_layout for this to function properly.
+Constructs a child of @buildable with the name @name.
-Since: 2.4
+#GtkBuilder calls this function if a "constructor" has been
+specified in the UI definition.
+
+Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="cell_layout">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkCellLayout.
+<parameter name="buildable">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkBuildable
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="cell">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkCellRenderer to reorder.
+<parameter name="builder">
+<parameter_description> #GtkBuilder used to construct this object
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="position">
-<parameter_description> New position to insert @cell at.
+<parameter name="name">
+<parameter_description> name of child to construct
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the constructed child
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_entry_completion_set_popup_single_match">
@@ -51368,95 +51889,53 @@ match
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_model_get_iter_first">
+<function name="gtk_widget_set_mapped">
<description>
-Initializes @iter with the first iterator in the tree (the one at the path
-"0") and returns %TRUE. Returns %FALSE if the tree is empty.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_model">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeModel.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> The uninitialized #GtkTreeIter.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE, if @iter was set.
-</return>
-</function>
+Marks the widget as being realized.
-<function name="gtk_print_unix_dialog_set_embed_page_setup">
-<description>
-Embed page size combo box and orientation combo box into page setup page.
+This function should only ever be called in a derived widget's
+"map" or "unmap" implementation.
-Since: 2.18
+Since: 2.20
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="dialog">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintUnixDialog
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="embed">
-<parameter_description> embed page setup selection
+<parameter name="mapped">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE to mark the widget as mapped
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_view_get_tooltip_context">
+<function name="gtk_text_iter_forward_visible_lines">
<description>
-This function is supposed to be used in a #GtkWidget::query-tooltip
-signal handler for #GtkIconView. The @x, @y and @keyboard_tip values
-which are received in the signal handler, should be passed to this
-function without modification.
-
-The return value indicates whether there is an icon view item at the given
-coordinates (%TRUE) or not (%FALSE) for mouse tooltips. For keyboard
-tooltips the item returned will be the cursor item. When %TRUE, then any of
- model, @path and @iter which have been provided will be set to point to
-that row and the corresponding model. @x and @y will always be converted
-to be relative to @icon_view's bin_window if @keyboard_tooltip is %FALSE.
+Moves @count visible lines forward, if possible (if @count would move
+past the start or end of the buffer, moves to the start or end of
+the buffer). The return value indicates whether the iterator moved
+onto a dereferenceable position; if the iterator didn't move, or
+moved onto the end iterator, then %FALSE is returned. If @count is 0,
+the function does nothing and returns %FALSE. If @count is negative,
+moves backward by 0 - @count lines.
-Since: 2.12
+Since: 2.8
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="icon_view">
-<parameter_description> an #GtkIconView
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="x">
-<parameter_description> the x coordinate (relative to widget coordinates)
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="y">
-<parameter_description> the y coordinate (relative to widget coordinates)
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="keyboard_tip">
-<parameter_description> whether this is a keyboard tooltip or not
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="model">
-<parameter_description> a pointer to receive a #GtkTreeModel or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="path">
-<parameter_description> a pointer to receive a #GtkTreePath or %NULL
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> a pointer to receive a #GtkTreeIter or %NULL
+<parameter name="count">
+<parameter_description> number of lines to move forward
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> whether or not the given tooltip context points to a item
+<return> whether @iter moved and is dereferenceable
</return>
</function>
@@ -51489,6 +51968,34 @@ of gtk_widget_modify_text().
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_text_buffer_remove_tag">
+<description>
+Emits the "remove-tag" signal. The default handler for the signal
+removes all occurrences of @tag from the given range. @start and
+ end don't have to be in order.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="buffer">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextBuffer
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="tag">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextTag
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="start">
+<parameter_description> one bound of range to be untagged
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="end">
+<parameter_description> other bound of range to be untagged
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_calendar_get_detail_width_chars">
<description>
Queries the width of detail cells, in characters.
@@ -51547,35 +52054,27 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_modify_cursor">
+<function name="gtk_file_filter_new">
<description>
-Sets the cursor color to use in a widget, overriding the
-#GtkWidget:cursor-color and #GtkWidget:secondary-cursor-color
-style properties. All other style values are left untouched.
-See also gtk_widget_modify_style().
+Creates a new #GtkFileFilter with no rules added to it.
+Such a filter doesn't accept any files, so is not
+particularly useful until you add rules with
+gtk_file_filter_add_mime_type(), gtk_file_filter_add_pattern(),
+or gtk_file_filter_add_custom(). To create a filter
+that accepts any file, use:
+|[
+GtkFileFilter *filter = gtk_file_filter_new ();
+gtk_file_filter_add_pattern (filter, "*");
+]|
-Since: 2.12
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="primary">
-<parameter_description> the color to use for primary cursor (does not need to be
-allocated), or %NULL to undo the effect of previous calls to
-of gtk_widget_modify_cursor().
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="secondary">
-<parameter_description> the color to use for secondary cursor (does not need to be
-allocated), or %NULL to undo the effect of previous calls to
-of gtk_widget_modify_cursor().
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> a new #GtkFileFilter
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_tree_view_set_column_drag_function">
@@ -51766,22 +52265,19 @@ Since: 2.6
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_entry_completion_get_text_column">
+<function name="gtk_selection_data_free">
<description>
-Returns the column in the model of @completion to get strings from.
-
-Since: 2.6
+Frees a #GtkSelectionData structure returned from
+gtk_selection_data_copy().
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="completion">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkEntryCompletion
+<parameter name="data">
+<parameter_description> a pointer to a #GtkSelectionData structure.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the column containing the strings
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_print_settings_set_collate">
@@ -51824,30 +52320,22 @@ and must not be freed or modified.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_view_forward_display_line">
+<function name="gtk_mount_operation_get_screen">
<description>
-Moves the given @iter forward by one display (wrapped) line.
-A display line is different from a paragraph. Paragraphs are
-separated by newlines or other paragraph separator characters.
-Display lines are created by line-wrapping a paragraph. If
-wrapping is turned off, display lines and paragraphs will be the
-same. Display lines are divided differently for each view, since
-they depend on the view's width; paragraphs are the same in all
-views, since they depend on the contents of the #GtkTextBuffer.
+Gets the screen on which windows of the #GtkMountOperation
+will be shown.
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="text_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextView
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
+<parameter name="op">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkMountOperation
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if @iter was moved and is not on the end iterator
+<return> the screen on which windows of @op are shown
+
</return>
</function>
@@ -51887,21 +52375,26 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_font_selection_dialog_get_preview_text">
+<function name="gtk_accelerator_valid">
<description>
-Gets the text displayed in the preview area.
-
+Determines whether a given keyval and modifier mask constitute
+a valid keyboard accelerator. For example, the #GDK_a keyval
+plus #GDK_CONTROL_MASK is valid - this is a "Ctrl+a" accelerator.
+But, you can't, for instance, use the #GDK_Control_L keyval
+as an accelerator.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="fsd">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFontSelectionDialog
+<parameter name="keyval">
+<parameter_description> a GDK keyval
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="modifiers">
+<parameter_description> modifier mask
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the text displayed in the preview area.
-This string is owned by the widget and should not be
-modified or freed
+<return> %TRUE if the accelerator is valid
</return>
</function>
@@ -52004,6 +52497,27 @@ the window manager to save your window sizes and positions.
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_socket_get_id">
+<description>
+Gets the window ID of a #GtkSocket widget, which can then
+be used to create a client embedded inside the socket, for
+instance with gtk_plug_new().
+
+The #GtkSocket must have already be added into a toplevel window
+before you can make this call.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="socket_">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkSocket.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the window ID for the socket
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_widget_set_parent_window">
<description>
Sets a non default parent window for @widget.
@@ -52337,33 +52851,6 @@ output should not be clipped
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_container_set_focus_vadjustment">
-<description>
-Hooks up an adjustment to focus handling in a container, so when a
-child of the container is focused, the adjustment is scrolled to
-show that widget. This function sets the vertical alignment. See
-gtk_scrolled_window_get_vadjustment() for a typical way of obtaining
-the adjustment and gtk_container_set_focus_hadjustment() for setting
-the horizontal adjustment.
-
-The adjustments have to be in pixel units and in the same coordinate
-system as the allocation for immediate children of the container.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="container">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkContainer
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="adjustment">
-<parameter_description> an adjustment which should be adjusted when the focus
-is moved among the descendents of @container
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_text_view_set_indent">
<description>
Sets the default indentation for paragraphs in @text_view.
@@ -52422,44 +52909,52 @@ Gets the value set by gtk_toggle_button_set_inconsistent().
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_handle_box_get_snap_edge">
+<function name="gtk_window_set_wmclass">
<description>
-Gets the edge used for determining reattachment of the handle box. See
-gtk_handle_box_set_snap_edge().
+Don't use this function. It sets the X Window System "class" and
+"name" hints for a window. According to the ICCCM, you should
+always set these to the same value for all windows in an
+application, and GTK+ sets them to that value by default, so calling
+this function is sort of pointless. However, you may want to call
+gtk_window_set_role() on each window in your application, for the
+benefit of the session manager. Setting the role allows the window
+manager to restore window positions when loading a saved session.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="handle_box">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkHandleBox
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="wmclass_name">
+<parameter_description> window name hint
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="wmclass_class">
+<parameter_description> window class hint
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the edge used for determining reattachment, or (GtkPositionType)-1 if this
-is determined (as per default) from the handle position.
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_label_set_text_with_mnemonic">
+<function name="gtk_file_chooser_get_use_preview_label">
<description>
-Sets the label's text from the string @str.
-If characters in @str are preceded by an underscore, they are underlined
-indicating that they represent a keyboard accelerator called a mnemonic.
-The mnemonic key can be used to activate another widget, chosen
-automatically, or explicitly using gtk_label_set_mnemonic_widget().
+Gets whether a stock label should be drawn with the name of the previewed
+file. See gtk_file_chooser_set_use_preview_label().
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="label">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkLabel
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="str">
-<parameter_description> a string
+<parameter name="chooser">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if the file chooser is set to display a label with the
+name of the previewed file, %FALSE otherwise.
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_text_layout_get_cursor_locations">
@@ -52538,29 +53033,6 @@ button or key press event) which triggered this call
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_list_store_reorder">
-<description>
-Reorders @store to follow the order indicated by @new_order. Note that
-this function only works with unsorted stores.
-
-Since: 2.2
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="store">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkListStore.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="new_order">
-<parameter_description> an array of integers mapping the new position of each child
-to its old position before the re-ordering,
-i.e. @new_order<literal>[newpos] = oldpos</literal>.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_text_buffer_get_serialize_formats">
<description>
This function returns the rich text serialize formats registered
@@ -52630,6 +53102,24 @@ Since: 2.18
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_print_unix_dialog_get_support_selection">
+<description>
+Gets the value of #GtkPrintUnixDialog::support-selection property.
+
+Since: 2.18
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="dialog">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintUnixDialog
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> whether the application supports print of selection
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_color_selection_palette_to_string">
<description>
Encodes a palette as a string, useful for persistent storage.
@@ -52650,6 +53140,18 @@ Encodes a palette as a string, useful for persistent storage.
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_widget_get_default_colormap">
+<description>
+Obtains the default colormap used to create widgets.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+</parameters>
+<return> default widget colormap
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_selection_clear_targets">
<description>
Remove all targets registered for the given selection for the
@@ -52669,18 +53171,19 @@ widget.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_font_selection_dialog_set_preview_text">
+<function name="gtk_tooltip_trigger_tooltip_query">
<description>
-Sets the text displayed in the preview area.
+Triggers a new tooltip query on @display, in order to update the current
+visible tooltip, or to show/hide the current tooltip. This function is
+useful to call when, for example, the state of the widget changed by a
+key press.
+
+Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="fsd">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFontSelectionDialog
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="text">
-<parameter_description> the text to display in the preview area
+<parameter name="display">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkDisplay
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -52745,41 +53248,62 @@ Since: 2.16
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_iter_forward_cursor_positions">
+<function name="gtk_button_get_event_window">
<description>
-Moves up to @count cursor positions. See
-gtk_text_iter_forward_cursor_position() for details.
+Returns the button's event window if it is realized, %NULL otherwise.
+This function should be rarely needed.
+Since: 2.22
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
+<parameter name="button">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkButton
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="count">
-<parameter_description> number of positions to move
+</parameters>
+<return> @button's event window.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_get_title">
+<description>
+Returns the title of the widget.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="tree_column">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeViewColumn.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if we moved and the new position is dereferenceable
+<return> the title of the column. This string should not be
+modified or freed.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_size_get_name">
+<function name="gtk_entry_set_progress_fraction">
<description>
-Gets the canonical name of the given icon size. The returned string
-is statically allocated and should not be freed.
+Causes the entry's progress indicator to "fill in" the given
+fraction of the bar. The fraction should be between 0.0 and 1.0,
+inclusive.
+
+Since: 2.16
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="size">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkIconSize.
+<parameter name="entry">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkEntry
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="fraction">
+<parameter_description> fraction of the task that's been completed
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the name of the given icon size.
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_button_get_label">
@@ -52871,77 +53395,26 @@ Determines whether the mark has left gravity.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tool_palette_set_expand">
+<function name="gtk_recent_info_get_visited">
<description>
-Sets whether the group should be given extra space.
+Gets the timestamp (seconds from system's Epoch) when the resource
+was last visited.
-Since: 2.20
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="palette">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolPalette
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="group">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItemGroup which is a child of palette
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="expand">
-<parameter_description> whether the group should be given extra space
+<parameter name="info">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentInfo
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_accelerator_name">
-<description>
-Converts an accelerator keyval and modifier mask
-into a string parseable by gtk_accelerator_parse().
-For example, if you pass in #GDK_q and #GDK_CONTROL_MASK,
-this function returns "<Control>q".
-
-If you need to display accelerators in the user interface,
-see gtk_accelerator_get_label().
-
+<return> the number of seconds elapsed from system's Epoch when
+the resource was last visited, or -1 on failure.
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="accelerator_key">
-<parameter_description> accelerator keyval
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="accelerator_mods">
-<parameter_description> accelerator modifier mask
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> a newly-allocated accelerator name
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_set_colormap">
-<description>
-Sets the colormap for the widget to the given value. Widget must not
-have been previously realized. This probably should only be used
-from an <function>init()</function> function (i.e. from the constructor
-for the widget).
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="colormap">
-<parameter_description> a colormap
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_window_set_urgency_hint">
<description>
Windows may set a hint asking the desktop environment to draw
@@ -52963,19 +53436,25 @@ Since: 2.8
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_image_menu_item_new_with_label">
+<function name="gtk_recent_chooser_set_show_not_found">
<description>
-Creates a new #GtkImageMenuItem containing a label.
+Sets whether @chooser should display the recently used resources that
+it didn't find. This only applies to local resources.
+
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="label">
-<parameter_description> the text of the menu item.
+<parameter name="chooser">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentChooser
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="show_not_found">
+<parameter_description> whether to show the local items we didn't find
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a new #GtkImageMenuItem.
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_action_set_icon_name">
@@ -53201,6 +53680,24 @@ Since: 2.2
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_recent_chooser_get_show_icons">
+<description>
+Retrieves whether @chooser should show an icon near the resource.
+
+Since: 2.10
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="chooser">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentChooser
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if the icons should be displayed, %FALSE otherwise.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_text_buffer_get_modified">
<description>
Indicates whether the buffer has been modified since the last call
@@ -53246,23 +53743,6 @@ that add tags.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_get_min_width">
-<description>
-Returns the minimum width in pixels of the @tree_column, or -1 if no minimum
-width is set.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_column">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeViewColumn.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> The minimum width of the @tree_column.
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_entry_get_layout_offsets">
<description>
Obtains the position of the #PangoLayout used to render text
@@ -53326,28 +53806,15 @@ Since: 2.6
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_buffer_register_deserialize_tagset">
+<function name="gtk_socket_new">
<description>
-This function registers GTK+'s internal rich text serialization
-format with the passed @buffer. See
-gtk_text_buffer_register_serialize_tagset() for details.
+Create a new empty #GtkSocket.
-Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="buffer">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextBuffer
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="tagset_name">
-<parameter_description> an optional tagset name, on %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the #GdkAtom that corresponds to the newly registered
-format's mime-type.
-
+<return> the new #GtkSocket.
</return>
</function>
@@ -53369,63 +53836,75 @@ Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_class_install_style_property_parser">
+<function name="gtk_action_set_accel_path">
<description>
-Installs a style property on a widget class.
+Sets the accel path for this action. All proxy widgets associated
+with the action will have this accel path, so that their
+accelerators are consistent.
+
+Note that @accel_path string will be stored in a #GQuark. Therefore, if you
+pass a static string, you can save some memory by interning it first with
+g_intern_static_string().
+
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="klass">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidgetClass
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="pspec">
-<parameter_description> the #GParamSpec for the style property
+<parameter name="action">
+<parameter_description> the action object
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="parser">
-<parameter_description> the parser for the style property
+<parameter name="accel_path">
+<parameter_description> the accelerator path
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_file_chooser_get_use_preview_label">
+<function name="gtk_label_set_text_with_mnemonic">
<description>
-Gets whether a stock label should be drawn with the name of the previewed
-file. See gtk_file_chooser_set_use_preview_label().
-
+Sets the label's text from the string @str.
+If characters in @str are preceded by an underscore, they are underlined
+indicating that they represent a keyboard accelerator called a mnemonic.
+The mnemonic key can be used to activate another widget, chosen
+automatically, or explicitly using gtk_label_set_mnemonic_widget().
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="chooser">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
+<parameter name="label">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkLabel
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="str">
+<parameter_description> a string
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the file chooser is set to display a label with the
-name of the previewed file, %FALSE otherwise.
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_source_get_filename">
+<function name="gtk_list_store_reorder">
<description>
-Retrieves the source filename, or %NULL if none is set. The
-filename is not a copy, and should not be modified or expected to
-persist beyond the lifetime of the icon source.
+Reorders @store to follow the order indicated by @new_order. Note that
+this function only works with unsorted stores.
+Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="source">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkIconSource
+<parameter name="store">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkListStore.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="new_order">
+<parameter_description> an array of integers mapping the new position of each child
+to its old position before the re-ordering,
+i.e. @new_order<literal>[newpos] = oldpos</literal>.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> image filename. This string must not be modified
-or freed.
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_menu_get_tearoff_state">
@@ -53500,8 +53979,10 @@ value from column 0 with type %G_TYPE_STRING, you would
write: <literal>gtk_tree_model_get (model, iter, 0, &place_string_here, -1)</literal>,
where <literal>place_string_here</literal> is a <type>gchar*</type> to be
filled with the string.
-If appropriate, the returned values have to be freed or unreferenced.
+Returned values with type %G_TYPE_OBJECT have to be unreferenced, values
+with type %G_TYPE_STRING or %G_TYPE_BOXED have to be freed. Other values are
+passed by value.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -53521,22 +54002,49 @@ If appropriate, the returned values have to be freed or unreferenced.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_page_setup_get_orientation">
+<function name="gtk_file_chooser_set_show_hidden">
<description>
-Gets the page orientation of the #GtkPageSetup.
+Sets whether hidden files and folders are displayed in the file selector.
-Since: 2.10
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="setup">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPageSetup
+<parameter name="chooser">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="show_hidden">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE if hidden files and folders should be displayed.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the page orientation
+<return></return>
+</function>
-</return>
+<function name="gtk_range_set_increments">
+<description>
+Sets the step and page sizes for the range.
+The step size is used when the user clicks the #GtkScrollbar
+arrows or moves #GtkScale via arrow keys. The page size
+is used for example when moving via Page Up or Page Down keys.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="range">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkRange
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="step">
+<parameter_description> step size
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="page">
+<parameter_description> page size
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_viewport_set_vadjustment">
@@ -53651,53 +54159,45 @@ with #GTK_TEXT_WINDOW_WIDGET, #GTK_TEXT_WINDOW_TEXT, or
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_settings_new_from_file">
+<function name="gtk_container_get_focus_hadjustment">
<description>
-Reads the print settings from @file_name. Returns a new #GtkPrintSettings
-object with the restored settings, or %NULL if an error occurred. If the
-file could not be loaded then error is set to either a #GFileError or
-#GKeyFileError. See gtk_print_settings_to_file().
+Retrieves the horizontal focus adjustment for the container. See
+gtk_container_set_focus_hadjustment ().
-Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="file_name">
-<parameter_description> the filename to read the settings from
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="error">
-<parameter_description> return location for errors, or %NULL
+<parameter name="container">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkContainer
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the restored #GtkPrintSettings
-
+<return> the horizontal focus adjustment, or %NULL if
+none has been set.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_layout_move_iter_to_x">
+<function name="gtk_recent_info_has_group">
<description>
-Keeping the iterator on the same line of the layout, move it to the
-specified X coordinate. The lines of a wrapped paragraph are
-treated as distinct for this operation.
+Checks whether @group_name appears inside the groups registered for the
+recently used item @info.
+
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="layout">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextLayout
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
+<parameter name="info">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentInfo
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="x">
-<parameter_description> X coordinate
+<parameter name="group_name">
+<parameter_description> name of a group
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if the group was found.
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_queue_resize">
@@ -53717,22 +54217,42 @@ Since: 2.8
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_label_set_line_wrap_mode">
+<function name="gtk_action_group_add_radio_actions_full">
<description>
-If line wrapping is on (see gtk_label_set_line_wrap()) this controls how
-the line wrapping is done. The default is %PANGO_WRAP_WORD which means
-wrap on word boundaries.
+This variant of gtk_action_group_add_radio_actions() adds a
+#GDestroyNotify callback for @user_data.
-Since: 2.10
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="label">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkLabel
+<parameter name="action_group">
+<parameter_description> the action group
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="wrap_mode">
-<parameter_description> the line wrapping mode
+<parameter name="entries">
+<parameter_description> an array of radio action descriptions
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="n_entries">
+<parameter_description> the number of entries
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="value">
+<parameter_description> the value of the action to activate initially, or -1 if
+no action should be activated
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="on_change">
+<parameter_description> the callback to connect to the changed signal
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="user_data">
+<parameter_description> data to pass to the action callbacks
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="destroy">
+<parameter_description> destroy notification callback for @user_data
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -53855,6 +54375,25 @@ iterator in this range.
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_combo_box_new_text">
+<description>
+Convenience function which constructs a new text combo box, which is a
+#GtkComboBox just displaying strings. If you use this function to create
+a text combo box, you should only manipulate its data source with the
+following convenience functions: gtk_combo_box_append_text(),
+gtk_combo_box_insert_text(), gtk_combo_box_prepend_text() and
+gtk_combo_box_remove_text().
+
+Since: 2.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+</parameters>
+<return> A new text combo box.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_builder_value_from_string_type">
<description>
Like gtk_builder_value_from_string(), this function demarshals
@@ -53958,53 +54497,26 @@ Since: 2.6
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_about_dialog_set_translator_credits">
+<function name="gtk_assistant_get_page_header_image">
<description>
-Sets the translator credits string which is displayed in
-the translators tab of the secondary credits dialog.
-
-The intended use for this string is to display the translator
-of the language which is currently used in the user interface.
-Using gettext(), a simple way to achieve that is to mark the
-string for translation:
-|[
-gtk_about_dialog_set_translator_credits (about, _("translator-credits"));
-]|
-It is a good idea to use the customary msgid "translator-credits" for this
-purpose, since translators will already know the purpose of that msgid, and
-since #GtkAboutDialog will detect if "translator-credits" is untranslated
-and hide the tab.
+Gets the header image for @page.
-Since: 2.6
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="about">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkAboutDialog
+<parameter name="assistant">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAssistant
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="translator_credits">
-<parameter_description> the translator credits
+<parameter name="page">
+<parameter_description> a page of @assistant
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_get_fixed_width">
-<description>
-Gets the fixed width of the column. This value is only meaning may not be
-the actual width of the column on the screen, just what is requested.
-
+<return> the header image for @page, or %NULL
+if there's no header image for the page.
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_column">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeViewColumn
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the fixed width of the column
</return>
</function>
@@ -54069,20 +54581,23 @@ Since: 2.12
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_color_selection_is_adjusting">
+<function name="gtk_action_get_visible">
<description>
-Gets the current state of the @colorsel.
+Returns whether the action itself is visible. Note that this doesn't
+necessarily mean effective visibility. See gtk_action_is_sensitive()
+for that.
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="colorsel">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkColorSelection.
+<parameter name="action">
+<parameter_description> the action object
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the user is currently dragging a color around, and %FALSE
-if the selection has stopped.
+<return> %TRUE if the action itself is visible.
+
</return>
</function>
@@ -54140,45 +54655,22 @@ Since: 2.8
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_view_scroll_to_mark">
+<function name="gtk_print_job_get_status">
<description>
-Scrolls @text_view so that @mark is on the screen in the position
-indicated by @xalign and @yalign. An alignment of 0.0 indicates
-left or top, 1.0 indicates right or bottom, 0.5 means center.
-If @use_align is %FALSE, the text scrolls the minimal distance to
-get the mark onscreen, possibly not scrolling at all. The effective
-screen for purposes of this function is reduced by a margin of size
- within_margin
+Gets the status of the print job.
+
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="text_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextView
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="mark">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextMark
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="within_margin">
-<parameter_description> margin as a [0.0,0.5) fraction of screen size
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="use_align">
-<parameter_description> whether to use alignment arguments (if %FALSE, just
-get the mark onscreen)
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="xalign">
-<parameter_description> horizontal alignment of mark within visible area
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="yalign">
-<parameter_description> vertical alignment of mark within visible area
+<parameter name="job">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintJob
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the status of @job
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_print_settings_set_paper_width">
@@ -54205,42 +54697,43 @@ Since: 2.10
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_move_column_after">
+<function name="gtk_icon_theme_choose_icon">
<description>
-Moves @column to be after to @base_column. If @base_column is %NULL, then
- column is placed in the first position.
+Looks up a named icon and returns a structure containing
+information such as the filename of the icon. The icon
+can then be rendered into a pixbuf using
+gtk_icon_info_load_icon(). (gtk_icon_theme_load_icon()
+combines these two steps if all you need is the pixbuf.)
+
+If @icon_names contains more than one name, this function
+tries them all in the given order before falling back to
+inherited icon themes.
+
+Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_view">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeView
+<parameter name="icon_theme">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIconTheme
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="column">
-<parameter_description> The #GtkTreeViewColumn to be moved.
+<parameter name="icon_names">
+<parameter_description> %NULL-terminated array of icon names to lookup
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="base_column">
-<parameter_description> The #GtkTreeViewColumn to be moved relative to, or %NULL.
+<parameter name="size">
+<parameter_description> desired icon size
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_range_get_value">
-<description>
-Gets the current value of the range.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="range">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkRange
+<parameter name="flags">
+<parameter_description> flags modifying the behavior of the icon lookup
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> current value of the range.
+<return> a #GtkIconInfo structure containing information
+about the icon, or %NULL if the icon wasn't found. Free with
+gtk_icon_info_free()
+
</return>
</function>
@@ -54268,6 +54761,54 @@ Since: 2.6
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_paint_hline">
+<description>
+Draws a horizontal line from (@x1, @y) to (@x2, @y) in @window
+using the given style and state.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="style">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="state_type">
+<parameter_description> a state
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="area">
+<parameter_description> rectangle to which the output is clipped, or %NULL if the
+output should not be clipped
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> the widget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="detail">
+<parameter_description> a style detail
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="x1">
+<parameter_description> the starting x coordinate
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="x2">
+<parameter_description> the ending x coordinate
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="y">
+<parameter_description> the y coordinate
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_paper_size_get_ppd_name">
<description>
Gets the PPD name of the #GtkPaperSize, which
@@ -54287,20 +54828,18 @@ Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_object_destroy">
+<function name="gtk_widget_trigger_tooltip_query">
<description>
-Emits the #GtkObject::destroy signal notifying all reference holders that they should
-release the #GtkObject. See the overview documentation at the top of the
-page for more details.
+Triggers a tooltip query on the display where the toplevel of @widget
+is located. See gtk_tooltip_trigger_tooltip_query() for more
+information.
-The memory for the object itself won't be deleted until
-its reference count actually drops to 0; gtk_object_destroy() merely asks
-reference holders to release their references, it does not free the object.
+Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="object">
-<parameter_description> the object to destroy.
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -54340,22 +54879,20 @@ with a context for the source side of a drag)
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tool_item_group_new">
+<function name="gtk_button_leave">
<description>
-Creates a new tool item group with label @label.
+Emits a #GtkButton::leave signal to the given #GtkButton.
-Since: 2.20
+Deprecated: 2.20: Use the #GtkWidget::leave-notify-event signal.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="label">
-<parameter_description> the label of the new group
+<parameter name="button">
+<parameter_description> The #GtkButton you want to send the signal to.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a new #GtkToolItemGroup.
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_widget_keynav_failed">
@@ -54473,56 +55010,24 @@ Since: 2.10
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_file_chooser_set_uri">
+<function name="gtk_entry_get_icon_activatable">
<description>
-Sets the file referred to by @uri as the current file for the file chooser,
-by changing to the URI's parent folder and actually selecting the URI in the
-list. If the @chooser is %GTK_FILE_CHOOSER_ACTION_SAVE mode, the URI's base
-name will also appear in the dialog's file name entry.
-
-If the URI isn't in the current folder of @chooser, then the current folder
-of @chooser will be changed to the folder containing @uri. This is equivalent
-to a sequence of gtk_file_chooser_unselect_all() followed by
-gtk_file_chooser_select_uri().
-
-Note that the URI must exist, or nothing will be done except for the
-directory change.
-If you are implementing a <guimenuitem>File/Save As...</guimenuitem> dialog,
-you should use this function if you already have a file name to which the
-user may save; for example, when the user opens an existing file and then
-does <guimenuitem>File/Save As...</guimenuitem> on it. If you don't have
-a file name already — for example, if the user just created a new
-file and is saving it for the first time, do not call this function.
-Instead, use something similar to this:
-|[
-if (document_is_new)
-{
-/ * the user just created a new document * /
-gtk_file_chooser_set_current_folder_uri (chooser, default_folder_for_saving);
-gtk_file_chooser_set_current_name (chooser, "Untitled document");
-}
-else
-{
-/ * the user edited an existing document * /
-gtk_file_chooser_set_uri (chooser, existing_uri);
-}
-]|
+Returns whether the icon is activatable.
-Since: 2.4
+Since: 2.16
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="chooser">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
+<parameter name="entry">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkEntry
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="uri">
-<parameter_description> the URI to set as current
+<parameter name="icon_pos">
+<parameter_description> Icon position
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if both the folder could be changed and the URI was
-selected successfully, %FALSE otherwise.
+<return> %TRUE if the icon is activatable.
</return>
</function>
@@ -54545,6 +55050,32 @@ Since: 2.16
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_icon_source_set_direction_wildcarded">
+<description>
+If the text direction is wildcarded, this source can be used
+as the base image for an icon in any #GtkTextDirection.
+If the text direction is not wildcarded, then the
+text direction the icon source applies to should be set
+with gtk_icon_source_set_direction(), and the icon source
+will only be used with that text direction.
+
+#GtkIconSet prefers non-wildcarded sources (exact matches) over
+wildcarded sources, and will use an exact match when possible.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="source">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIconSource
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="setting">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE to wildcard the text direction
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_page_setup_set_orientation">
<description>
Sets the page orientation of the #GtkPageSetup.
@@ -54648,6 +55179,25 @@ optionally by more name/return location pairs, followed by %NULL
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_recent_chooser_get_filter">
+<description>
+Gets the #GtkRecentFilter object currently used by @chooser to affect
+the display of the recently used resources.
+
+Since: 2.10
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="chooser">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentChooser
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> a #GtkRecentFilter object.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_icon_view_set_cursor">
<description>
Sets the current keyboard focus to be at @path, and selects it. This is
@@ -54703,6 +55253,37 @@ Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_tree_selection_get_selected_rows">
+<description>
+Creates a list of path of all selected rows. Additionally, if you are
+planning on modifying the model after calling this function, you may
+want to convert the returned list into a list of #GtkTreeRowReference<!-- -->s.
+To do this, you can use gtk_tree_row_reference_new().
+
+To free the return value, use:
+|[
+g_list_foreach (list, (GFunc) gtk_tree_path_free, NULL);
+g_list_free (list);
+]|
+
+Since: 2.2
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="selection">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeSelection.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="model">
+<parameter_description> A pointer to set to the #GtkTreeModel, or %NULL.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> A #GList containing a #GtkTreePath for each selected row.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_plug_new">
<description>
Creates a new plug widget inside the #GtkSocket identified
@@ -54758,30 +55339,6 @@ unused space, from 0 to 1. The values are similar to @xscale.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_file_filter_get_needed">
-<description>
-Gets the fields that need to be filled in for the structure
-passed to gtk_file_filter_filter()
-
-This function will not typically be used by applications; it
-is intended principally for use in the implementation of
-#GtkFileChooser.
-
-Since: 2.4
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="filter">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFileFilter
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> bitfield of flags indicating needed fields when
-calling gtk_file_filter_filter()
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_text_buffer_get_deserialize_formats">
<description>
This function returns the rich text deserialize formats registered
@@ -54849,48 +55406,44 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_list_store_insert_after">
+<function name="gtk_scale_button_get_value">
<description>
-Inserts a new row after @sibling. If @sibling is %NULL, then the row will be
-prepended to the beginning of the list. @iter will be changed to point to
-this new row. The row will be empty after this function is called. To fill
-in values, you need to call gtk_list_store_set() or gtk_list_store_set_value().
+Gets the current value of the scale button.
+Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="list_store">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkListStore
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> An unset #GtkTreeIter to set to the new row
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="sibling">
-<parameter_description> A valid #GtkTreeIter, or %NULL
+<parameter name="button">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkScaleButton
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> current value of the scale button
+
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_scale_button_get_value">
+<function name="gtk_calendar_select_month">
<description>
-Gets the current value of the scale button.
-
-Since: 2.12
+Shifts the calendar to a different month.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="button">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkScaleButton
+<parameter name="calendar">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkCalendar
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="month">
+<parameter_description> a month number between 0 and 11.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="year">
+<parameter_description> the year the month is in.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> current value of the scale button
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_tree_store_set_valuesv">
@@ -54999,6 +55552,24 @@ gtk_widget_set_direction().
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_adjustment_get_step_increment">
+<description>
+Retrieves the step increment of the adjustment.
+
+Since: 2.14
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="adjustment">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAdjustment
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> The current step increment of the adjustment.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_adjustment_get_upper">
<description>
Retrieves the maximum value of the adjustment.
@@ -55068,28 +55639,26 @@ Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_targets_include_uri">
+<function name="gtk_text_iter_set_line_index">
<description>
-Determines if any of the targets in @targets can be used to
-provide an uri list.
+Same as gtk_text_iter_set_line_offset(), but works with a
+<emphasis>byte</emphasis> index. The given byte index must be at
+the start of a character, it can't be in the middle of a UTF-8
+encoded character.
-Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="targets">
-<parameter_description> an array of #GdkAtom<!-- -->s
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="n_targets">
-<parameter_description> the length of @targets
+<parameter name="byte_on_line">
+<parameter_description> a byte index relative to the start of @iter's current line
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if @targets include a suitable target for uri lists,
-otherwise %FALSE.
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_rc_property_parse_color">
@@ -55178,6 +55747,30 @@ typically either you or gtk_dialog_run() will be monitoring the
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_cell_renderer_set_alignment">
+<description>
+Sets the renderer's alignment within its available space.
+
+Since: 2.18
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="cell">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkCellRenderer
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="xalign">
+<parameter_description> the x alignment of the cell renderer
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="yalign">
+<parameter_description> the y alignment of the cell renderer
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_text_buffer_delete_mark">
<description>
Deletes @mark, so that it's no longer located anywhere in the
@@ -55281,22 +55874,57 @@ Gets the column searched on by the interactive search code.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_calendar_get_detail_height_rows">
+<function name="gtk_widget_get_device_events">
<description>
-Queries the height of detail cells, in rows.
-See #GtkCalendar:detail-width-chars.
+Returns the events mask for the widget corresponding to an specific device. These
+are the events that the widget will receive when @device operates on it.
-Since: 2.14
+Since: 3.0
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="device">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkDevice
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> device event mask for @widget
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_drag_dest_find_target">
+<description>
+Looks for a match between @context->targets and the
+ dest_target_list, returning the first matching target, otherwise
+returning %GDK_NONE. @dest_target_list should usually be the return
+value from gtk_drag_dest_get_target_list(), but some widgets may
+have different valid targets for different parts of the widget; in
+that case, they will have to implement a drag_motion handler that
+passes the correct target list to this function.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="calendar">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkCalendar.
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> drag destination widget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="context">
+<parameter_description> drag context
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="target_list">
+<parameter_description> list of droppable targets, or %NULL to use
+gtk_drag_dest_get_target_list (@widget).
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> The height of detail cells, in rows.
+<return> first target that the source offers and the dest can accept, or %GDK_NONE
</return>
</function>
@@ -55452,23 +56080,20 @@ Since: 2.6
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_recent_chooser_get_show_not_found">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_get_widget">
<description>
-Retrieves whether @chooser should show the recently used resources that
-were not found.
+Returns the #GtkWidget in the button on the column header. If a custom
+widget has not been set then %NULL is returned.
-Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="chooser">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentChooser
+<parameter name="tree_column">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeViewColumn.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the resources not found should be displayed, and
-%FALSE otheriwse.
-
+<return> The #GtkWidget in the column header, or %NULL
</return>
</function>
@@ -55518,32 +56143,77 @@ Since: 2.6
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_scrolled_window_set_vadjustment">
+<function name="gtk_paint_resize_grip">
<description>
-Sets the #GtkAdjustment for the vertical scrollbar.
+Draws a resize grip in the given rectangle on @window using the given
+parameters.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="scrolled_window">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkScrolledWindow
+<parameter name="style">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="vadjustment">
-<parameter_description> vertical scroll adjustment
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkWindow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="state_type">
+<parameter_description> a state
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="area">
+<parameter_description> clip rectangle, or %NULL if the
+output should not be clipped
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> the widget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="detail">
+<parameter_description> a style detail
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="edge">
+<parameter_description> the edge in which to draw the resize grip
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="x">
+<parameter_description> the x origin of the rectangle in which to draw the resize grip
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="y">
+<parameter_description> the y origin of the rectangle in which to draw the resize grip
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="width">
+<parameter_description> the width of the rectangle in which to draw the resize grip
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="height">
+<parameter_description> the height of the rectangle in which to draw the resize grip
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_store_clear">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_set_max_width">
<description>
-Removes all rows from @tree_store
+Sets the maximum width of the @tree_column. If @max_width is -1, then the
+maximum width is unset. Note, the column can actually be wider than max
+width if it's the last column in a view. In this case, the column expands to
+fill any extra space.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_store">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeStore
+<parameter name="tree_column">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeViewColumn.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="max_width">
+<parameter_description> The maximum width of the column in pixels, or -1.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -55569,65 +56239,68 @@ Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_progress_bar_set_show_text">
+<function name="gtk_ui_manager_get_toplevels">
<description>
-Sets whether the progressbar will show text superimposed
-over the bar. The shown text is either the value of
-the #GtkProgressBar::text property or, if that is %NULL,
-the #GtkProgressBar::fraction value, as a percentage.
+Obtains a list of all toplevel widgets of the requested types.
-Since: 3.0
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="pbar">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkProgressBar
+<parameter name="self">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkUIManager
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="show_text">
-<parameter_description> whether to show superimposed text
+<parameter name="types">
+<parameter_description> specifies the types of toplevel widgets to include. Allowed
+types are #GTK_UI_MANAGER_MENUBAR, #GTK_UI_MANAGER_TOOLBAR and
+#GTK_UI_MANAGER_POPUP.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> a newly-allocated #GSList of
+all toplevel widgets of the requested types. Free the returned list with g_slist_free().
+
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_accel_map_lookup_entry">
+<function name="gtk_recent_info_ref">
<description>
-Looks up the accelerator entry for @accel_path and fills in @key.
+Increases the reference count of @recent_info by one.
+
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="accel_path">
-<parameter_description> a valid accelerator path
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="key">
-<parameter_description> the accelerator key to be filled in (optional)
+<parameter name="info">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentInfo
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if @accel_path is known, %FALSE otherwise
+<return> the recent info object with its reference count increased
+by one.
+
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_context_get_page_setup">
+<function name="gtk_print_settings_set_finishings">
<description>
-Obtains the #GtkPageSetup that determines the page
-dimensions of the #GtkPrintContext.
+Sets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_FINISHINGS.
Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="context">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintContext
+<parameter name="settings">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="finishings">
+<parameter_description> the finishings
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the page setup of @context
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_tree_view_map_expanded_rows">
@@ -55652,22 +56325,23 @@ Calls @func on all expanded rows.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_info_bar_get_action_area">
+<function name="gtk_plug_construct">
<description>
-Returns the action area of @info_bar.
-
-Since: 2.18
+Finish the initialization of @plug for a given #GtkSocket identified by
+ socket_id This function will generally only be used by classes deriving from #GtkPlug.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="info_bar">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkInfoBar
+<parameter name="plug">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPlug.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="socket_id">
+<parameter_description> the XID of the socket's window.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the action area.
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_label_select_region">
@@ -55695,39 +56369,6 @@ this function has no effect. If @start_offset or
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_buffer_insert_interactive_at_cursor">
-<description>
-Calls gtk_text_buffer_insert_interactive() at the cursor
-position.
-
- default_editable indicates the editability of text that doesn't
-have a tag affecting editability applied to it. Typically the
-result of gtk_text_view_get_editable() is appropriate here.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="buffer">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextBuffer
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="text">
-<parameter_description> text in UTF-8 format
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="len">
-<parameter_description> length of text in bytes, or -1
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="default_editable">
-<parameter_description> default editability of buffer
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> whether text was actually inserted
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_text_iter_set_line_offset">
<description>
Moves @iter within a line, to a new <emphasis>character</emphasis>
@@ -55838,26 +56479,6 @@ Since: 2.14
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_action_get_visible">
-<description>
-Returns whether the action itself is visible. Note that this doesn't
-necessarily mean effective visibility. See gtk_action_is_sensitive()
-for that.
-
-Since: 2.4
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="action">
-<parameter_description> the action object
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the action itself is visible.
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_print_operation_set_show_progress">
<description>
If @show_progress is %TRUE, the print operation will show a
@@ -55914,27 +56535,6 @@ Tags in the buffer may override the default.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_link_button_set_uri">
-<description>
-Sets @uri as the URI where the #GtkLinkButton points. As a side-effect
-this unsets the 'visited' state of the button.
-
-Since: 2.10
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="link_button">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkLinkButton
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="uri">
-<parameter_description> a valid URI
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_tree_view_insert_column_with_data_func">
<description>
Convenience function that inserts a new column into the #GtkTreeView
@@ -56041,19 +56641,68 @@ Create a new #GtkVPaned
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_editable_delete_selection">
+<function name="gtk_size_request_get_request_mode">
<description>
-Deletes the currently selected text of the editable.
-This call doesn't do anything if there is no selected text.
+Gets whether the widget prefers a height-for-width layout
+or a width-for-height layout.
+
+<note><para>#GtkBin widgets generally propagate the preference of
+their child, container widgets need to request something either in
+context of their children or in context of their allocation
+capabilities.</para></note>
+
+Since: 3.0
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="editable">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkEditable
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkSizeRequest instance
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> The #GtkSizeRequestMode preferred by @widget.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_im_context_get_surrounding">
+<description>
+Retrieves context around the insertion point. Input methods
+typically want context in order to constrain input text based on
+existing text; this is important for languages such as Thai where
+only some sequences of characters are allowed.
+
+This function is implemented by emitting the
+GtkIMContext::retrieve_surrounding signal on the input method; in
+response to this signal, a widget should provide as much context as
+is available, up to an entire paragraph, by calling
+gtk_im_context_set_surrounding(). Note that there is no obligation
+for a widget to respond to the ::retrieve_surrounding signal, so input
+methods must be prepared to function without context.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="context">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIMContext
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="text">
+<parameter_description> location to store a UTF-8 encoded string of text
+holding context around the insertion point.
+If the function returns %TRUE, then you must free
+the result stored in this location with g_free().
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="cursor_index">
+<parameter_description> location to store byte index of the insertion cursor
+within @text.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if surrounding text was provided; in this case
+you must free the result stored in *text.
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_text_iter_backward_visible_word_starts">
@@ -56096,30 +56745,22 @@ Places a visual marker on a particular day.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_set_visible">
+<function name="gtk_activatable_get_related_action">
<description>
-Sets the visibility state of @widget. Note that setting this to
-%TRUE doesn't mean the widget is actually viewable, see
-gtk_widget_get_visible().
-
-This function simply calls gtk_widget_show() or gtk_widget_hide()
-but is nicer to use when the visibility of the widget depends on
-some condition.
+Gets the related #GtkAction for @activatable.
-Since: 2.18
+Since: 2.16
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="visible">
-<parameter_description> whether the widget should be shown or not
+<parameter name="activatable">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkActivatable
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the related #GtkAction if one is set.
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_print_settings_get_number_up">
@@ -56212,22 +56853,45 @@ Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_job_get_status">
+<function name="gtk_text_view_scroll_to_mark">
<description>
-Gets the status of the print job.
-
-Since: 2.10
+Scrolls @text_view so that @mark is on the screen in the position
+indicated by @xalign and @yalign. An alignment of 0.0 indicates
+left or top, 1.0 indicates right or bottom, 0.5 means center.
+If @use_align is %FALSE, the text scrolls the minimal distance to
+get the mark onscreen, possibly not scrolling at all. The effective
+screen for purposes of this function is reduced by a margin of size
+ within_margin
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="job">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintJob
+<parameter name="text_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextView
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="mark">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextMark
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="within_margin">
+<parameter_description> margin as a [0.0,0.5) fraction of screen size
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="use_align">
+<parameter_description> whether to use alignment arguments (if %FALSE, just
+get the mark onscreen)
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="xalign">
+<parameter_description> horizontal alignment of mark within visible area
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="yalign">
+<parameter_description> vertical alignment of mark within visible area
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the status of @job
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_tree_view_get_cell_area">
@@ -56363,52 +57027,75 @@ Since: 2.6
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_get_drag_dest_row">
+<function name="gtk_container_set_focus_child">
<description>
-Gets information about the row that is highlighted for feedback.
+Sets, or unsets if @child is %NULL, the focused child of @container.
+
+This function emits the GtkContainer::set_focus_child signal of
+ container Implementations of #GtkContainer can override the
+default behaviour by overriding the class closure of this signal.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeView
+<parameter name="container">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkContainer
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="path">
-<parameter_description> Return location for the path of the highlighted row, or %NULL.
+<parameter name="child">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="pos">
-<parameter_description> Return location for the drop position, or %NULL
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_get_resizable">
+<description>
+Returns %TRUE if the @tree_column can be resized by the end user.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="tree_column">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeViewColumn
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE, if the @tree_column can be resized.
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_toolbar_unset_style">
+<function name="gtk_tool_item_get_expand">
<description>
-Unsets a toolbar style set with gtk_toolbar_set_style(), so that
-user preferences will be used to determine the toolbar style.
+Returns whether @tool_item is allocated extra space.
+See gtk_tool_item_set_expand().
+
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="toolbar">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolbar
+<parameter name="tool_item">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItem
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if @tool_item is allocated extra space.
+
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_get_size_request">
+<function name="gtk_widget_set_tooltip_window">
<description>
-Gets the size request that was explicitly set for the widget using
-gtk_widget_set_size_request(). A value of -1 stored in @width or
- height indicates that that dimension has not been set explicitly
-and the natural requisition of the widget will be used intead. See
-gtk_widget_set_size_request(). To get the size a widget will
-actually use, call gtk_widget_size_request() instead of
-this function.
+Replaces the default, usually yellow, window used for displaying
+tooltips with @custom_window. GTK+ will take care of showing and
+hiding @custom_window at the right moment, to behave likewise as
+the default tooltip window. If @custom_window is %NULL, the default
+tooltip window will be used.
+
+If the custom window should have the default theming it needs to
+have the name "gtk-tooltip", see gtk_widget_set_name().
+
+Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -56416,12 +57103,31 @@ this function.
<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="width">
-<parameter_description> return location for width, or %NULL
+<parameter name="custom_window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="height">
-<parameter_description> return location for height, or %NULL
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_move_column_after">
+<description>
+Moves @column to be after to @base_column. If @base_column is %NULL, then
+ column is placed in the first position.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="tree_view">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeView
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="column">
+<parameter_description> The #GtkTreeViewColumn to be moved.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="base_column">
+<parameter_description> The #GtkTreeViewColumn to be moved relative to, or %NULL.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -56452,25 +57158,62 @@ or %NULL if no widget was found.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_theme_prepend_search_path">
+<function name="gtk_icon_size_lookup_for_settings">
<description>
-Prepends a directory to the search path.
-See gtk_icon_theme_set_search_path().
+Obtains the pixel size of a semantic icon size, possibly
+modified by user preferences for a particular
+#GtkSettings. Normally @size would be
+#GTK_ICON_SIZE_MENU, #GTK_ICON_SIZE_BUTTON, etc. This function
+isn't normally needed, gtk_widget_render_icon() is the usual
+way to get an icon for rendering, then just look at the size of
+the rendered pixbuf. The rendered pixbuf may not even correspond to
+the width/height returned by gtk_icon_size_lookup(), because themes
+are free to render the pixbuf however they like, including changing
+the usual size.
-Since: 2.4
+Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="icon_theme">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkIconTheme
+<parameter name="settings">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkSettings object, used to determine
+which set of user preferences to used.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="path">
-<parameter_description> directory name to prepend to the icon path
+<parameter name="size">
+<parameter_description> an icon size
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="width">
+<parameter_description> location to store icon width
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="height">
+<parameter_description> location to store icon height
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if @size was a valid size
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_tool_palette_get_hadjustment">
+<description>
+Gets the horizontal adjustment of the tool palette.
+
+Since: 2.20
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="palette">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolPalette
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the horizontal adjustment of @palette
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_clipboard_wait_is_text_available">
@@ -56747,41 +57490,44 @@ Since: 2.12
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_view_set_markup_column">
+<function name="gtk_about_dialog_set_license_type">
<description>
-Sets the column with markup information for @icon_view to be
- column The markup column must be of type #G_TYPE_STRING.
-If the markup column is set to something, it overrides
-the text column set by gtk_icon_view_set_text_column().
+Sets the license of the application showing the @about dialog from a
+list of known licenses.
-Since: 2.6
+This function overrides the license set using
+gtk_about_dialog_set_license().
+
+Since: 3.0
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="icon_view">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkIconView.
+<parameter name="about">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAboutDialog
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="column">
-<parameter_description> A column in the currently used model, or -1 to display no text
+<parameter name="license_type">
+<parameter_description> the type of license
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_trigger_tooltip_query">
+<function name="gtk_object_destroy">
<description>
-Triggers a tooltip query on the display where the toplevel of @widget
-is located. See gtk_tooltip_trigger_tooltip_query() for more
-information.
+Emits the #GtkObject::destroy signal notifying all reference holders that they should
+release the #GtkObject. See the overview documentation at the top of the
+page for more details.
-Since: 2.12
+The memory for the object itself won't be deleted until
+its reference count actually drops to 0; gtk_object_destroy() merely asks
+reference holders to release their references, it does not free the object.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+<parameter name="object">
+<parameter_description> the object to destroy.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -56886,22 +57632,30 @@ Creates a new empty #GtkImage widget.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tool_item_group_get_label_widget">
+<function name="gtk_rc_find_pixmap_in_path">
<description>
-Gets the label widget of @group.
-See gtk_tool_item_group_set_label_widget().
+Looks up a file in pixmap path for the specified #GtkSettings.
+If the file is not found, it outputs a warning message using
+g_warning() and returns %NULL.
-Since: 2.20
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="group">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItemGroup
+<parameter name="settings">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkSettings
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="scanner">
+<parameter_description> Scanner used to get line number information for the
+warning message, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="pixmap_file">
+<parameter_description> name of the pixmap file to locate.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the label widget of @group
-
+<return> the filename.
</return>
</function>
@@ -56944,22 +57698,6 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_factory_remove_default">
-<description>
-Removes an icon factory from the list of default icon
-factories. Not normally used; you might use it for a library that
-can be unloaded or shut down.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="factory">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkIconFactory previously added with gtk_icon_factory_add_default()
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_combo_box_set_focus_on_click">
<description>
Sets whether the combo box will grab focus when it is clicked with
@@ -57070,74 +57808,6 @@ Since: 2.20
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_get_modifier_style">
-<description>
-Returns the current modifier style for the widget. (As set by
-gtk_widget_modify_style().) If no style has previously set, a new
-#GtkRcStyle will be created with all values unset, and set as the
-modifier style for the widget. If you make changes to this rc
-style, you must call gtk_widget_modify_style(), passing in the
-returned rc style, to make sure that your changes take effect.
-
-Caution: passing the style back to gtk_widget_modify_style() will
-normally end up destroying it, because gtk_widget_modify_style() copies
-the passed-in style and sets the copy as the new modifier style,
-thus dropping any reference to the old modifier style. Add a reference
-to the modifier style if you want to keep it alive.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the modifier style for the widget. This rc style is
-owned by the widget. If you want to keep a pointer to value this
-around, you must add a refcount using g_object_ref().
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_window_get_frame_dimensions">
-<description>
-(Note: this is a special-purpose function intended for the
-framebuffer port; see gtk_window_set_has_frame(). It will not
-return the size of the window border drawn by the <link
-linkend="gtk-X11-arch">window manager</link>, which is the normal
-case when using a windowing system. See
-gdk_window_get_frame_extents() to get the standard window border
-extents.)
-
-Retrieves the dimensions of the frame window for this toplevel.
-See gtk_window_set_has_frame(), gtk_window_set_frame_dimensions().
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="left">
-<parameter_description> location to store the width of the frame at the left, or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="top">
-<parameter_description> location to store the height of the frame at the top, or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="right">
-<parameter_description> location to store the width of the frame at the returns, or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="bottom">
-<parameter_description> location to store the height of the frame at the bottom, or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_file_chooser_set_select_multiple">
<description>
Sets whether multiple files can be selected in the file selector. This is
@@ -57239,24 +57909,49 @@ Since: 2.16
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_queue_resize">
+<function name="gtk_entry_set_icon_activatable">
<description>
-This function is only for use in widget implementations.
-Flags a widget to have its size renegotiated; should
-be called when a widget for some reason has a new size request.
-For example, when you change the text in a #GtkLabel, #GtkLabel
-queues a resize to ensure there's enough space for the new text.
+Sets whether the icon is activatable.
+
+Since: 2.16
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+<parameter name="entry">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkEntry
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="icon_pos">
+<parameter_description> Icon position
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="activatable">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE if the icon should be activatable
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_print_settings_get_paper_size">
+<description>
+Gets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_PAPER_FORMAT,
+converted to a #GtkPaperSize.
+
+Since: 2.10
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="settings">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the paper size
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_tree_store_move_before">
<description>
Moves @iter in @tree_store to the position before @position. @iter and
@@ -57341,26 +58036,6 @@ Since: 2.20
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_list_store_newv">
-<description>
-Non-vararg creation function. Used primarily by language bindings.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="n_columns">
-<parameter_description> number of columns in the list store
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="types">
-<parameter_description> an array of #GType types for the columns, from first to last
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> a new #GtkListStore
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_print_operation_run">
<description>
Runs the print operation, by first letting the user modify
@@ -57467,44 +58142,20 @@ the tab labels, a menu with all the pages will be popped up.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_entry_set_icon_drag_source">
+<function name="gtk_wrap_box_get_allocation_mode">
<description>
-Sets up the icon at the given position so that GTK+ will start a drag
-operation when the user clicks and drags the icon.
-
-To handle the drag operation, you need to connect to the usual
-#GtkWidget::drag-data-get (or possibly #GtkWidget::drag-data-delete)
-signal, and use gtk_entry_get_current_icon_drag_source() in
-your signal handler to find out if the drag was started from
-an icon.
-
-By default, GTK+ uses the icon as the drag icon. You can use the
-#GtkWidget::drag-begin signal to set a different icon. Note that you
-have to use g_signal_connect_after() to ensure that your signal handler
-gets executed after the default handler.
+Gets the allocation mode.
-Since: 2.16
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="entry">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkIconEntry
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="icon_pos">
-<parameter_description> icon position
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="target_list">
-<parameter_description> the targets (data formats) in which the data can be provided
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="actions">
-<parameter_description> a bitmask of the allowed drag actions
+<parameter name="box">
+<parameter_description> An #GtkWrapBox
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> The #GtkWrapAllocationMode for @box.
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_hscale_new_with_range">
@@ -57581,40 +58232,6 @@ Returns the type of the column.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_container_propagate_expose">
-<description>
-When a container receives an expose event, it must send synthetic
-expose events to all children that don't have their own #GdkWindows.
-This function provides a convenient way of doing this. A container,
-when it receives an expose event, calls gtk_container_propagate_expose()
-once for each child, passing in the event the container received.
-
-gtk_container_propagate_expose() takes care of deciding whether
-an expose event needs to be sent to the child, intersecting
-the event's area with the child area, and sending the event.
-
-In most cases, a container can simply either simply inherit the
-#GtkWidget::expose implementation from #GtkContainer, or, do some drawing
-and then chain to the ::expose implementation from #GtkContainer.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="container">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkContainer
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="child">
-<parameter_description> a child of @container
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="event">
-<parameter_description> a expose event sent to container
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_icon_theme_list_icons">
<description>
Lists the icons in the current icon theme. Only a subset
@@ -57645,6 +58262,24 @@ with g_list_free().
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_printer_get_job_count">
+<description>
+Gets the number of jobs currently queued on the printer.
+
+Since: 2.10
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="printer">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrinter
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the number of jobs on @printer
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_icon_view_create_drag_icon">
<description>
Creates a #GdkPixmap representation of the item at @path.
@@ -57668,25 +58303,38 @@ Since: 2.8
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_selection_data_get_pixbuf">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_set_cell_data_func">
<description>
-Gets the contents of the selection data as a #GdkPixbuf.
-
-Since: 2.6
+Sets the #GtkTreeViewColumnFunc to use for the column. This
+function is used instead of the standard attributes mapping for
+setting the column value, and should set the value of @tree_column's
+cell renderer as appropriate. @func may be %NULL to remove an
+older one.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="selection_data">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkSelectionData
+<parameter name="tree_column">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeViewColumn
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="cell_renderer">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkCellRenderer
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="func">
+<parameter_description> The #GtkTreeViewColumnFunc to use.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="func_data">
+<parameter_description> The user data for @func.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="destroy">
+<parameter_description> The destroy notification for @func_data
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> if the selection data contained a recognized
-image type and it could be converted to a #GdkPixbuf, a
-newly allocated pixbuf is returned, otherwise %NULL.
-If the result is non-%NULL it must be freed with g_object_unref().
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_window_get_mnemonics_visible">
@@ -57708,26 +58356,19 @@ in this window.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_entry_get_icon_activatable">
+<function name="gtk_toolbar_unset_style">
<description>
-Returns whether the icon is activatable.
-
-Since: 2.16
+Unsets a toolbar style set with gtk_toolbar_set_style(), so that
+user preferences will be used to determine the toolbar style.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="entry">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkEntry
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="icon_pos">
-<parameter_description> Icon position
+<parameter name="toolbar">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolbar
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the icon is activatable.
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_status_icon_get_tooltip_markup">
@@ -57749,83 +58390,104 @@ returned string with g_free() when done.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_accel_groups_activate">
+<function name="gtk_cell_renderer_activate">
<description>
-Finds the first accelerator in any #GtkAccelGroup attached
-to @object that matches @accel_key and @accel_mods, and
-activates that accelerator.
+Passes an activate event to the cell renderer for possible processing.
+Some cell renderers may use events; for example, #GtkCellRendererToggle
+toggles when it gets a mouse click.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="object">
-<parameter_description> the #GObject, usually a #GtkWindow, on which
-to activate the accelerator.
+<parameter name="cell">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkCellRenderer
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="accel_key">
-<parameter_description> accelerator keyval from a key event
+<parameter name="event">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkEvent
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="accel_mods">
-<parameter_description> keyboard state mask from a key event
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> widget that received the event
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="path">
+<parameter_description> widget-dependent string representation of the event location;
+e.g. for #GtkTreeView, a string representation of #GtkTreePath
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="background_area">
+<parameter_description> background area as passed to gtk_cell_renderer_render()
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="cell_area">
+<parameter_description> cell area as passed to gtk_cell_renderer_render()
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="flags">
+<parameter_description> render flags
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if an accelerator was activated and handled this keypress
+<return> %TRUE if the event was consumed/handled
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_ui_manager_get_action_groups">
+<function name="gtk_font_selection_dialog_set_preview_text">
<description>
-Returns the list of action groups associated with @self.
-
-Since: 2.4
+Sets the text displayed in the preview area.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="self">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkUIManager object
+<parameter name="fsd">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFontSelectionDialog
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="text">
+<parameter_description> the text to display in the preview area
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a #GList of
-action groups. The list is owned by GTK+
-and should not be modified.
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_selection_data_set">
+<function name="gtk_text_buffer_add_selection_clipboard">
<description>
-Stores new data into a #GtkSelectionData object. Should
-<emphasis>only</emphasis> be called from a selection handler callback.
-Zero-terminates the stored data.
+Adds @clipboard to the list of clipboards in which the selection
+contents of @buffer are available. In most cases, @clipboard will be
+the #GtkClipboard of type %GDK_SELECTION_PRIMARY for a view of @buffer.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="selection_data">
-<parameter_description> a pointer to a #GtkSelectionData structure.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="type">
-<parameter_description> the type of selection data
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="format">
-<parameter_description> format (number of bits in a unit)
+<parameter name="buffer">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextBuffer
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="data">
-<parameter_description> pointer to the data (will be copied)
+<parameter name="clipboard">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkClipboard
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="length">
-<parameter_description> length of the data
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_window_get_focus_on_map">
+<description>
+Gets the value set by gtk_window_set_focus_on_map().
+
+Since: 2.6
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if window should receive the input focus when
+mapped.
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_builder_connect_signals">
@@ -57880,43 +58542,6 @@ stock id to select the stock item for the button.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_get_state">
-<description>
-Returns the widget's state. See gtk_widget_set_state().
-
-Since: 2.18
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the state of @widget.
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_tool_item_get_expand">
-<description>
-Returns whether @tool_item is allocated extra space.
-See gtk_tool_item_set_expand().
-
-Since: 2.4
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="tool_item">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItem
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if @tool_item is allocated extra space.
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_radio_tool_button_get_group">
<description>
Returns the radio button group @button belongs to.
@@ -58052,23 +58677,26 @@ model is unset.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_label_get_max_width_chars">
+<function name="gtk_container_set_resize_mode">
<description>
-Retrieves the desired maximum width of @label, in characters. See
-gtk_label_set_width_chars().
+Sets the resize mode for the container.
-Since: 2.6
+The resize mode of a container determines whether a resize request
+will be passed to the container's parent, queued for later execution
+or executed immediately.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="label">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkLabel
+<parameter name="container">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkContainer
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="resize_mode">
+<parameter_description> the new resize mode
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the maximum width of the label in characters.
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_paint_shadow">
@@ -58205,53 +58833,26 @@ Since: 2.20
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_theme_load_icon">
+<function name="gtk_status_icon_set_screen">
<description>
-Looks up an icon in an icon theme, scales it to the given size
-and renders it into a pixbuf. This is a convenience function;
-if more details about the icon are needed, use
-gtk_icon_theme_lookup_icon() followed by gtk_icon_info_load_icon().
-
-Note that you probably want to listen for icon theme changes and
-update the icon. This is usually done by connecting to the
-GtkWidget::style-set signal. If for some reason you do not want to
-update the icon when the icon theme changes, you should consider
-using gdk_pixbuf_copy() to make a private copy of the pixbuf
-returned by this function. Otherwise GTK+ may need to keep the old
-icon theme loaded, which would be a waste of memory.
+Sets the #GdkScreen where @status_icon is displayed; if
+the icon is already mapped, it will be unmapped, and
+then remapped on the new screen.
-Since: 2.4
+Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="icon_theme">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkIconTheme
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="icon_name">
-<parameter_description> the name of the icon to lookup
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="size">
-<parameter_description> the desired icon size. The resulting icon may not be
-exactly this size; see gtk_icon_info_load_icon().
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="flags">
-<parameter_description> flags modifying the behavior of the icon lookup
+<parameter name="status_icon">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkStatusIcon
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="error">
-<parameter_description> Location to store error information on failure, or %NULL.
+<parameter name="screen">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkScreen
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the rendered icon; this may be a newly created icon
-or a new reference to an internal icon, so you must not modify
-the icon. Use g_object_unref() to release your reference to the
-icon. %NULL if the icon isn't found.
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_text_buffer_get_text">
@@ -58324,6 +58925,57 @@ Determines whether the colorsel has an opacity control.
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_widget_set_device_events">
+<description>
+Sets the device event mask (see #GdkEventMask) for a widget. The event
+mask determines which events a widget will receive from @device. Keep
+in mind that different widgets have different default event masks, and by
+changing the event mask you may disrupt a widget's functionality,
+so be careful. This function must be called while a widget is
+unrealized. Consider gtk_widget_add_device_events() for widgets that are
+already realized, or if you want to preserve the existing event
+mask. This function can't be used with #GTK_NO_WINDOW widgets;
+to get events on those widgets, place them inside a #GtkEventBox
+and receive events on the event box.
+
+Since: 3.0
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="device">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkDevice
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="events">
+<parameter_description> event mask
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_print_unix_dialog_get_selected_printer">
+<description>
+Gets the currently selected printer.
+
+Since: 2.10
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="dialog">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintUnixDialog
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the currently selected printer
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_drag_begin">
<description>
Initiates a drag on the source side. The function
@@ -58331,6 +58983,29 @@ only needs to be used when the application is
starting drags itself, and is not needed when
gtk_drag_source_set() is used.
+The @event is used to retrieve the timestamp that will be used internally to
+grab the pointer. If @event is #NULL, then GDK_CURRENT_TIME will be used.
+However, you should try to pass a real event in all cases, since that can be
+used by GTK+ to get information about the start position of the drag, for
+example if the @event is a GDK_MOTION_NOTIFY.
+
+Generally there are three cases when you want to start a drag by hand by calling
+this function:
+
+1. During a button-press-event handler, if you want to start a drag immediately
+when the user presses the mouse button. Pass the @event that you have in your
+button-press-event handler.
+
+2. During a motion-notify-event handler, if you want to start a drag when the mouse
+moves past a certain threshold distance after a button-press. Pass the @event that you
+have in your motion-notify-event handler.
+
+3. During a timeout handler, if you want to start a drag after the mouse
+button is held down for some time. Try to save the last event that you got
+from the mouse, using gdk_event_copy(), and pass it to this function
+(remember to free the event with gdk_event_free() when you are done). If you
+can really not pass a real event, pass #NULL instead.
+
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -58399,19 +59074,48 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_recent_chooser_widget_new">
+<function name="gtk_draw_insertion_cursor">
<description>
-Creates a new #GtkRecentChooserWidget object. This is an embeddable widget
-used to access the recently used resources list.
+Draws a text caret on @drawable at @location. This is not a style function
+but merely a convenience function for drawing the standard cursor shape.
-Since: 2.10
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="drawable">
+<parameter_description> a #GdkDrawable
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="area">
+<parameter_description> rectangle to which the output is clipped, or %NULL if the
+output should not be clipped
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="location">
+<parameter_description> location where to draw the cursor (@location->width is ignored)
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="is_primary">
+<parameter_description> if the cursor should be the primary cursor color.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="direction">
+<parameter_description> whether the cursor is left-to-right or
+right-to-left. Should never be #GTK_TEXT_DIR_NONE
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="draw_arrow">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE to draw a directional arrow on the
+cursor. Should be %FALSE unless the cursor is split.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a new #GtkRecentChooserWidget
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_tool_item_set_proxy_menu_item">
@@ -58462,15 +59166,22 @@ Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_editable_cut_clipboard">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_set_rubber_banding">
<description>
-Removes the contents of the currently selected content in the editable and
-puts it on the clipboard.
+Enables or disables rubber banding in @tree_view. If the selection mode
+is #GTK_SELECTION_MULTIPLE, rubber banding will allow the user to select
+multiple rows by dragging the mouse.
+
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="editable">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkEditable
+<parameter name="tree_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeView
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="enable">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE to enable rubber banding
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -58581,52 +59292,25 @@ left-to-right insertion and right-to-left insertion.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_rc_get_style_by_paths">
+<function name="gtk_about_dialog_set_artists">
<description>
-Creates up a #GtkStyle from styles defined in a RC file by providing
-the raw components used in matching. This function may be useful
-when creating pseudo-widgets that should be themed like widgets but
-don't actually have corresponding GTK+ widgets. An example of this
-would be items inside a GNOME canvas widget.
-
-The action of gtk_rc_get_style() is similar to:
-|[
-gtk_widget_path (widget, NULL, &path, NULL);
-gtk_widget_class_path (widget, NULL, &class_path, NULL);
-gtk_rc_get_style_by_paths (gtk_widget_get_settings (widget),
-path, class_path,
-G_OBJECT_TYPE (widget));
-]|
+Sets the strings which are displayed in the artists tab
+of the secondary credits dialog.
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="settings">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkSettings object
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="widget_path">
-<parameter_description> the widget path to use when looking up the style, or %NULL
-if no matching against the widget path should be done
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="class_path">
-<parameter_description> the class path to use when looking up the style, or %NULL
-if no matching against the class path should be done.
+<parameter name="about">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAboutDialog
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="type">
-<parameter_description> a type that will be used along with parent types of this type
-when matching against class styles, or #G_TYPE_NONE
+<parameter name="artists">
+<parameter_description> a %NULL-terminated array of strings
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> A style created by matching with the supplied paths,
-or %NULL if nothing matching was specified and the default style should
-be used. The returned value is owned by GTK+ as part of an internal cache,
-so you must call g_object_ref() on the returned value if you want to
-keep a reference to it.
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_action_get_accel_closure">
@@ -58648,45 +59332,46 @@ owned by GTK+ and must not be unreffed or modified.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_calendar_select_month">
+<function name="gtk_tree_row_reference_free">
<description>
-Shifts the calendar to a different month.
+Free's @reference. @reference may be %NULL.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="calendar">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkCalendar
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="month">
-<parameter_description> a month number between 0 and 11.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="year">
-<parameter_description> the year the month is in.
+<parameter name="reference">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeRowReference, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_get_has_tooltip">
+<function name="gtk_text_layout_set_preedit_string">
<description>
-Returns the current value of the has-tooltip property. See
-GtkWidget:has-tooltip for more information.
-
-Since: 2.12
+Set the preedit string and attributes. The preedit string is a
+string showing text that is currently being edited and not
+yet committed into the buffer.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+<parameter name="layout">
+<parameter_description> a #PangoLayout
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="preedit_string">
+<parameter_description> a string to display at the insertion point
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="preedit_attrs">
+<parameter_description> a #PangoAttrList of attributes that apply to @preedit_string
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="cursor_pos">
+<parameter_description> position of cursor within preedit string in chars
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> current value of has-tooltip on @widget.
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_radio_tool_button_new_from_stock">
@@ -58713,40 +59398,6 @@ Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_view_get_dest_item_at_pos">
-<description>
-Determines the destination item for a given position.
-
-Since: 2.8
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="icon_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkIconView
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="drag_x">
-<parameter_description> the position to determine the destination item for
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="drag_y">
-<parameter_description> the position to determine the destination item for
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="path">
-<parameter_description> Return location for the path of the item, or %NULL.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="pos">
-<parameter_description> Return location for the drop position, or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> whether there is an item at the given position.
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_combo_box_get_active_text">
<description>
Returns the currently active string in @combo_box or %NULL if none
@@ -58928,9 +59579,31 @@ direction, widget state, or icon size.
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_expander_set_expanded">
+<description>
+Sets the state of the expander. Set to %TRUE, if you want
+the child widget to be revealed, and %FALSE if you want the
+child widget to be hidden.
+
+Since: 2.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="expander">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkExpander
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="expanded">
+<parameter_description> whether the child widget is revealed
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_size_request_get_height_for_width">
<description>
-Retrieves a widget's desired height if it would be given
+Retrieves a widget's minimum and natural height if it would be given
the specified @width.
Since: 3.0
@@ -58977,6 +59650,30 @@ Since: 2.20
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_cell_renderer_toggle_set_radio">
+<description>
+If @radio is %TRUE, the cell renderer renders a radio toggle
+(i.e. a toggle in a group of mutually-exclusive toggles).
+If %FALSE, it renders a check toggle (a standalone boolean option).
+This can be set globally for the cell renderer, or changed just
+before rendering each cell in the model (for #GtkTreeView, you set
+up a per-row setting using #GtkTreeViewColumn to associate model
+columns with cell renderer properties).
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="toggle">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkCellRendererToggle
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="radio">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE to make the toggle look like a radio button
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_adjustment_set_upper">
<description>
Sets the maximum value of the adjustment.
@@ -59133,32 +59830,41 @@ Since: 2.20
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_style_lookup_color">
+<function name="gtk_wrap_box_set_minimum_line_children">
<description>
-Looks up @color_name in the style's logical color mappings,
-filling in @color and returning %TRUE if found, otherwise
-returning %FALSE. Do not cache the found mapping, because
-it depends on the #GtkStyle and might change when a theme
-switch occurs.
-
-Since: 2.10
+Sets the minimum amount of children to line up
+in @box's orientation before wrapping.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="style">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkStyle
+<parameter name="box">
+<parameter_description> An #GtkWrapBox
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="color_name">
-<parameter_description> the name of the logical color to look up
+<parameter name="n_children">
+<parameter_description> The minimum amount of children per line.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="color">
-<parameter_description> the #GdkColor to fill in
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_widget_is_toplevel">
+<description>
+Determines whether @widget is a toplevel widget. Currently only
+#GtkWindow and #GtkInvisible are toplevel widgets. Toplevel
+widgets have no parent widget.
+
+Since: 2.18
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the mapping was found.
+<return> %TRUE if @widget is a toplevel, %FALSE otherwise
</return>
</function>
@@ -59231,28 +59937,6 @@ Since: 2.16
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_view_starts_display_line">
-<description>
-Determines whether @iter is at the start of a display line.
-See gtk_text_view_forward_display_line() for an explanation of
-display lines vs. paragraphs.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="text_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextView
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if @iter begins a wrapped line
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_get_default_language">
<description>
Returns the #PangoLanguage for the default language currently in
@@ -59290,6 +59974,59 @@ pass %NULL to get an empty label widget.
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_file_chooser_add_shortcut_folder_uri">
+<description>
+Adds a folder URI to be displayed with the shortcut folders in a file
+chooser. Note that shortcut folders do not get saved, as they are provided
+by the application. For example, you can use this to add a
+"file:///usr/share/mydrawprogram/Clipart" folder to the volume list.
+
+Since: 2.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="chooser">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="uri">
+<parameter_description> URI of the folder to add
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="error">
+<parameter_description> location to store error, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if the folder could be added successfully, %FALSE
+otherwise. In the latter case, the @error will be set as appropriate.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_statusbar_get_context_id">
+<description>
+Returns a new context identifier, given a description
+of the actual context. Note that the description is
+<emphasis>not</emphasis> shown in the UI.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="statusbar">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkStatusbar
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="context_description">
+<parameter_description> textual description of what context
+the new message is being used in
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> an integer id
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_size_group_remove_widget">
<description>
Removes a widget from a #GtkSizeGroup.
@@ -59509,6 +60246,26 @@ this function.
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_widget_set_state">
+<description>
+This function is for use in widget implementations. Sets the state
+of a widget (insensitive, prelighted, etc.) Usually you should set
+the state using wrapper functions such as gtk_widget_set_sensitive().
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="state">
+<parameter_description> new state for @widget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_notebook_append_page">
<description>
Appends a page to @notebook.
@@ -59646,28 +60403,6 @@ See #GtkScrolledWindow, #GtkScrollbar, #GtkAdjustment for details.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_view_set_item_width">
-<description>
-Sets the ::item-width property which specifies the width
-to use for each item. If it is set to -1, the icon view will
-automatically determine a suitable item size.
-
-Since: 2.6
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="icon_view">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkIconView
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="item_width">
-<parameter_description> the width for each item
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_alignment_get_padding">
<description>
Gets the padding on the different sides of the widget.
@@ -59701,23 +60436,25 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_entry_completion_get_completion_prefix">
+<function name="gtk_print_unix_dialog_set_current_page">
<description>
-Get the original text entered by the user that triggered
-the completion or %NULL if there's no completion ongoing.
+Sets the current page number. If @current_page is not -1, this enables
+the current page choice for the range of pages to print.
-Since: 2.12
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="completion">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkEntryCompletion
+<parameter name="dialog">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintUnixDialog
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="current_page">
+<parameter_description> the current page number.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the prefix for the current completion
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_calendar_set_display_options">
@@ -59741,6 +60478,29 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_recent_manager_has_item">
+<description>
+Checks whether there is a recently used resource registered
+with @uri inside the recent manager.
+
+Since: 2.10
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="manager">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentManager
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="uri">
+<parameter_description> a URI
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> %TRUE if the resource was found, %FALSE otherwise.
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_recent_filter_add_custom">
<description>
Adds a rule to a filter that allows resources based on a custom callback
@@ -59797,50 +60557,61 @@ Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_iter_forward_visible_lines">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_get_expander_column">
<description>
-Moves @count visible lines forward, if possible (if @count would move
-past the start or end of the buffer, moves to the start or end of
-the buffer). The return value indicates whether the iterator moved
-onto a dereferenceable position; if the iterator didn't move, or
-moved onto the end iterator, then %FALSE is returned. If @count is 0,
-the function does nothing and returns %FALSE. If @count is negative,
-moves backward by 0 - @count lines.
+Returns the column that is the current expander column. This
+column has the expander arrow drawn next to it.
-Since: 2.8
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="count">
-<parameter_description> number of lines to move forward
+<parameter name="tree_view">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeView
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> whether @iter moved and is dereferenceable
-
+<return> The expander column.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tool_item_group_get_label">
+<function name="gtk_text_view_get_default_attributes">
<description>
-Gets the label of @group.
+Obtains a copy of the default text attributes. These are the
+attributes used for text unless a tag overrides them.
+You'd typically pass the default attributes in to
+gtk_text_iter_get_attributes() in order to get the
+attributes in effect at a given text position.
+
+The return value is a copy owned by the caller of this function,
+and should be freed.
-Since: 2.20
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="group">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItemGroup
+<parameter name="text_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextView
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the label of @group. The label is an internal string of @group
-and must not be modified. Note that %NULL is returned if a custom
-label has been set with gtk_tool_item_group_set_label_widget()
+<return> a new #GtkTextAttributes
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_combo_box_entry_new_text">
+<description>
+Convenience function which constructs a new editable text combo box, which
+is a #GtkComboBoxEntry just displaying strings. If you use this function to
+create a text combo box, you should only manipulate its data source with
+the following convenience functions: gtk_combo_box_append_text(),
+gtk_combo_box_insert_text(), gtk_combo_box_prepend_text() and
+gtk_combo_box_remove_text().
+
+Since: 2.4
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+</parameters>
+<return> A new text #GtkComboBoxEntry.
</return>
</function>
@@ -59952,20 +60723,27 @@ use by language bindings.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_font_selection_dialog_get_font_selection">
+<function name="gtk_label_get_current_uri">
<description>
-Retrieves the #GtkFontSelection widget embedded in the dialog.
+Returns the URI for the currently active link in the label.
+The active link is the one under the mouse pointer or, in a
+selectable label, the link in which the text cursor is currently
+positioned.
-Since: 2.22
+This function is intended for use in a #GtkLabel::activate-link handler
+or for use in a #GtkWidget::query-tooltip handler.
+
+Since: 2.18
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="colorsel">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFontSelectionDialog
+<parameter name="label">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkLabel
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the embedded #GtkFontSelection
+<return> the currently active URI. The string is owned by GTK+ and must
+not be freed or modified.
</return>
</function>
@@ -60122,26 +60900,22 @@ Since: 2.14
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_file_chooser_unselect_uri">
+<function name="gtk_print_settings_get_quality">
<description>
-Unselects the file referred to by @uri. If the file
-is not in the current directory, does not exist, or
-is otherwise not currently selected, does nothing.
+Gets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_QUALITY.
-Since: 2.4
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="chooser">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="uri">
-<parameter_description> the URI to unselect
+<parameter name="settings">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the print quality
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_image_new_from_gicon">
@@ -60304,30 +61078,25 @@ gtk_widget_set_can_focus() to modify that flag.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_label_set_line_wrap">
+<function name="gtk_button_new_from_stock">
<description>
-Toggles line wrapping within the #GtkLabel widget. %TRUE makes it break
-lines if text exceeds the widget's size. %FALSE lets the text get cut off
-by the edge of the widget if it exceeds the widget size.
+Creates a new #GtkButton containing the image and text from a stock item.
+Some stock ids have preprocessor macros like #GTK_STOCK_OK and
+#GTK_STOCK_APPLY.
+
+If @stock_id is unknown, then it will be treated as a mnemonic
+label (as for gtk_button_new_with_mnemonic()).
-Note that setting line wrapping to %TRUE does not make the label
-wrap at its parent container's width, because GTK+ widgets
-conceptually can't make their requisition depend on the parent
-container's size. For a label that wraps at a specific position,
-set the label's width using gtk_widget_set_size_request().
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="label">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkLabel
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="wrap">
-<parameter_description> the setting
+<parameter name="stock_id">
+<parameter_description> the name of the stock item
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> a new #GtkButton
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_check_menu_item_new_with_mnemonic">
@@ -60436,58 +61205,13 @@ Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_iter_set_line_index">
-<description>
-Same as gtk_text_iter_set_line_offset(), but works with a
-<emphasis>byte</emphasis> index. The given byte index must be at
-the start of a character, it can't be in the middle of a UTF-8
-encoded character.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="byte_on_line">
-<parameter_description> a byte index relative to the start of @iter's current line
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_tree_get_row_drag_data">
+<function name="gtk_printer_backend_load_modules">
<description>
-Obtains a @tree_model and @path from selection data of target type
-%GTK_TREE_MODEL_ROW. Normally called from a drag_data_received handler.
-This function can only be used if @selection_data originates from the same
-process that's calling this function, because a pointer to the tree model
-is being passed around. If you aren't in the same process, then you'll
-get memory corruption. In the #GtkTreeDragDest drag_data_received handler,
-you can assume that selection data of type %GTK_TREE_MODEL_ROW is
-in from the current process. The returned path must be freed with
-gtk_tree_path_free().
-
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="selection_data">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkSelectionData
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="tree_model">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeModel
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="path">
-<parameter_description> row in @tree_model
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if @selection_data had target type %GTK_TREE_MODEL_ROW and
-is otherwise valid
+<return>
</return>
</function>
@@ -60529,27 +61253,6 @@ be unreferenced.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_window_set_skip_taskbar_hint">
-<description>
-Windows may set a hint asking the desktop environment not to display
-the window in the task bar. This function sets this hint.
-
-Since: 2.2
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="window">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="setting">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE to keep this window from appearing in the task bar
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_widget_set_double_buffered">
<description>
Widgets are double buffered by default; you can use this function
@@ -60643,41 +61346,19 @@ Copies the currently-selected text to a clipboard.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_recent_info_get_modified">
-<description>
-Gets the timestamp (seconds from system's Epoch) when the resource
-was last modified.
-
-Since: 2.10
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="info">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentInfo
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the number of seconds elapsed from system's Epoch when
-the resource was last modified, or -1 on failure.
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_toggle_action_get_draw_as_radio">
+<function name="gtk_stock_item_copy">
<description>
-Returns whether the action should have proxies like a radio action.
+Copies a stock item, mostly useful for language bindings and not in applications.
-Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="action">
-<parameter_description> the action object
+<parameter name="item">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkStockItem
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> whether the action should have proxies like a radio action.
-
+<return> a new #GtkStockItem
</return>
</function>
@@ -60697,22 +61378,17 @@ Returns the #GtkTextBuffer this iterator is associated with.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_set_redraw_on_allocate">
+<function name="gtk_widget_is_composited">
<description>
-Sets whether the entire widget is queued for drawing when its size
-allocation changes. By default, this setting is %TRUE and
-the entire widget is redrawn on every size change. If your widget
-leaves the upper left unchanged when made bigger, turning this
-setting off will improve performance.
+Whether @widget can rely on having its alpha channel
+drawn correctly. On X11 this function returns whether a
+compositing manager is running for @widget's screen.
-Note that for %NO_WINDOW widgets setting this flag to %FALSE turns
-off all allocation on resizing: the widget will not even redraw if
-its position changes; this is to allow containers that don't draw
-anything to avoid excess invalidations. If you set this flag on a
-%NO_WINDOW widget that <emphasis>does</emphasis> draw on @widget->window,
-you are responsible for invalidating both the old and new allocation
-of the widget when the widget is moved and responsible for invalidating
-regions newly when the widget increases size.
+Please note that the semantics of this call will change
+in the future if used on a widget that has a composited
+window in its hierarchy (as set by gdk_window_set_composited()).
+
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -60720,30 +61396,27 @@ regions newly when the widget increases size.
<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="redraw_on_allocate">
-<parameter_description> if %TRUE, the entire widget will be redrawn
-when it is allocated to a new size. Otherwise, only the
-new portion of the widget will be redrawn.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if the widget can rely on its alpha
+channel being drawn correctly.
+
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_link_button_new">
+<function name="gtk_printer_get_icon_name">
<description>
-Creates a new #GtkLinkButton with the URI as its text.
+Gets the name of the icon to use for the printer.
Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="uri">
-<parameter_description> a valid URI
+<parameter name="printer">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrinter
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a new link button widget.
+<return> the icon name for @printer
</return>
</function>
@@ -60816,7 +61489,7 @@ Retrieves the method being used to arrange the buttons in a button box.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the method used to layout buttons in @widget.
+<return> the method used to lay out buttons in @widget.
</return>
</function>
@@ -60883,32 +61556,23 @@ gtk_widget_path()), so names with embedded periods may cause confusion.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_file_chooser_set_local_only">
+<function name="gtk_print_settings_get_orientation">
<description>
-Sets whether only local files can be selected in the
-file selector. If @local_only is %TRUE (the default),
-then the selected file are files are guaranteed to be
-accessible through the operating systems native file
-file system and therefore the application only
-needs to worry about the filename functions in
-#GtkFileChooser, like gtk_file_chooser_get_filename(),
-rather than the URI functions like
-gtk_file_chooser_get_uri(),
+Get the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_ORIENTATION,
+converted to a #GtkPageOrientation.
-Since: 2.4
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="chooser">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkFileChooser
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="local_only">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE if only local files can be selected
+<parameter name="settings">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the orientation
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_print_operation_set_default_page_setup">
@@ -60939,7 +61603,7 @@ Since: 2.10
<description>
Gets the shadow type of the #GtkViewport. See
gtk_viewport_set_shadow_type().
-
+
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -60952,27 +61616,20 @@ gtk_viewport_set_shadow_type().
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_label_get_current_uri">
+<function name="gtk_notebook_get_n_pages">
<description>
-Returns the URI for the currently active link in the label.
-The active link is the one under the mouse pointer or, in a
-selectable label, the link in which the text cursor is currently
-positioned.
-
-This function is intended for use in a #GtkLabel::activate-link handler
-or for use in a #GtkWidget::query-tooltip handler.
+Gets the number of pages in a notebook.
-Since: 2.18
+Since: 2.2
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="label">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkLabel
+<parameter name="notebook">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkNotebook
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the currently active URI. The string is owned by GTK+ and must
-not be freed or modified.
+<return> the number of pages in the notebook.
</return>
</function>
@@ -61039,6 +61696,22 @@ Since: 2.10
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_get_search_equal_func">
+<description>
+Returns the compare function currently in use.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="tree_view">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeView
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the currently used compare function for the search code.
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_file_chooser_remove_filter">
<description>
Removes @filter from the list of filters that the user can select between.
@@ -61102,22 +61775,44 @@ Since: 2.10
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_adjustment_get_step_increment">
+<function name="gtk_scale_add_mark">
<description>
-Retrieves the step increment of the adjustment.
+Adds a mark at @value.
-Since: 2.14
+A mark is indicated visually by drawing a tick mark next to the scale,
+and GTK+ makes it easy for the user to position the scale exactly at the
+marks value.
+
+If @markup is not %NULL, text is shown next to the tick mark.
+
+To remove marks from a scale, use gtk_scale_clear_marks().
+
+Since: 2.16
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="adjustment">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkAdjustment
+<parameter name="scale">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkScale
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="value">
+<parameter_description> the value at which the mark is placed, must be between
+the lower and upper limits of the scales' adjustment
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="position">
+<parameter_description> where to draw the mark. For a horizontal scale, #GTK_POS_TOP
+is drawn above the scale, anything else below. For a vertical scale,
+#GTK_POS_LEFT is drawn to the left of the scale, anything else to the
+right.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="markup">
+<parameter_description> Text to be shown at the mark, using <link linkend="PangoMarkupFormat">Pango markup</link>, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> The current step increment of the adjustment.
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_print_settings_set_orientation">
@@ -61212,18 +61907,22 @@ Since: 2.18
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_border_free">
+<function name="gtk_tree_selection_get_select_function">
<description>
-Frees a #GtkBorder structure.
+Returns the current selection function.
+
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="border_">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkBorder.
+<parameter name="selection">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeSelection.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> The function.
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_range_set_adjustment">
@@ -61262,7 +61961,7 @@ cursor position as the insertion point.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="text">
-<parameter_description> some text in UTF-8 format
+<parameter_description> text in UTF-8 format
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
<parameter name="len">
@@ -61508,40 +62207,6 @@ as a local filename. Free with g_free()
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_scrolled_window_add_with_viewport">
-<description>
-Used to add children without native scrolling capabilities. This
-is simply a convenience function; it is equivalent to adding the
-unscrollable child to a viewport, then adding the viewport to the
-scrolled window. If a child has native scrolling, use
-gtk_container_add() instead of this function.
-
-The viewport scrolls the child by moving its #GdkWindow, and takes
-the size of the child to be the size of its toplevel #GdkWindow.
-This will be very wrong for most widgets that support native scrolling;
-for example, if you add a widget such as #GtkTreeView with a viewport,
-the whole widget will scroll, including the column headings. Thus,
-widgets with native scrolling support should not be used with the
-#GtkViewport proxy.
-
-A widget supports scrolling natively if the
-set_scroll_adjustments_signal field in #GtkWidgetClass is non-zero,
-i.e. has been filled in with a valid signal identifier.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="scrolled_window">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkScrolledWindow
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="child">
-<parameter_description> the widget you want to scroll
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_cell_view_get_size_of_row">
<description>
Sets @requisition to the size needed by @cell_view to display
@@ -61549,6 +62214,9 @@ the model row pointed to by @path.
Since: 2.6
+Deprecated: 3.0: Use gtk_cell_view_get_desired_width_of_row() and
+gtk_cell_view_get_desired_height_for_width_of_row() instead.
+
</description>
<parameters>
<parameter name="cell_view">
@@ -61593,73 +62261,72 @@ function directly, so that themes are taken into account.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_get_clickable">
+<function name="gtk_toggle_tool_button_new_from_stock">
<description>
-Returns %TRUE if the user can click on the header for the column.
+Creates a new #GtkToggleToolButton containing the image and text from a
+stock item. Some stock ids have preprocessor macros like #GTK_STOCK_OK
+and #GTK_STOCK_APPLY.
+It is an error if @stock_id is not a name of a stock item.
+
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_column">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeViewColumn
+<parameter name="stock_id">
+<parameter_description> the name of the stock item
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if user can click the column header.
+<return> A new #GtkToggleToolButton
+
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_toggle_tool_button_new_from_stock">
+<function name="gtk_ui_manager_get_accel_group">
<description>
-Creates a new #GtkToggleToolButton containing the image and text from a
-stock item. Some stock ids have preprocessor macros like #GTK_STOCK_OK
-and #GTK_STOCK_APPLY.
-
-It is an error if @stock_id is not a name of a stock item.
+Returns the #GtkAccelGroup associated with @self.
Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="stock_id">
-<parameter_description> the name of the stock item
+<parameter name="self">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkUIManager object
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> A new #GtkToggleToolButton
+<return> the #GtkAccelGroup.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_realize">
+<function name="gtk_init_check">
<description>
-Creates the GDK (windowing system) resources associated with a
-widget. For example, @widget->window will be created when a widget
-is realized. Normally realization happens implicitly; if you show
-a widget and all its parent containers, then the widget will be
-realized and mapped automatically.
+This function does the same work as gtk_init() with only
+a single change: It does not terminate the program if the GUI can't be
+initialized. Instead it returns %FALSE on failure.
-Realizing a widget requires all
-the widget's parent widgets to be realized; calling
-gtk_widget_realize() realizes the widget's parents in addition to
- widget itself. If a widget is not yet inside a toplevel window
-when you realize it, bad things will happen.
+This way the application can fall back to some other means of communication
+with the user - for example a curses or command line interface.
-This function is primarily used in widget implementations, and
-isn't very useful otherwise. Many times when you think you might
-need it, a better approach is to connect to a signal that will be
-called after the widget is realized automatically, such as
-GtkWidget::expose-event. Or simply g_signal_connect () to the
-GtkWidget::realize signal.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+<parameter name="argc">
+<parameter_description> Address of the <parameter>argc</parameter> parameter of your
+main() function. Changed if any arguments were handled.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="argv">
+<parameter_description> Address of the <parameter>argv</parameter> parameter of main().
+Any parameters understood by gtk_init() are stripped before return.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if the GUI has been successfully initialized,
+%FALSE otherwise.
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_widget_get_default_style">
@@ -61737,21 +62404,30 @@ Since: 2.12
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_handle_box_get_handle_position">
+<function name="gtk_window_set_type_hint">
<description>
-Gets the handle position of the handle box. See
-gtk_handle_box_set_handle_position().
+By setting the type hint for the window, you allow the window
+manager to decorate and handle the window in a way which is
+suitable to the function of the window in your application.
+
+This function should be called before the window becomes visible.
+
+gtk_dialog_new_with_buttons() and other convenience functions in GTK+
+will sometimes call gtk_window_set_type_hint() on your behalf.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="handle_box">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkHandleBox
+<parameter name="window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWindow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="hint">
+<parameter_description> the window type
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the current handle position.
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_recent_chooser_set_current_uri">
@@ -61921,6 +62597,33 @@ Since: 2.16
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_plug_construct_for_display">
+<description>
+Finish the initialization of @plug for a given #GtkSocket identified by
+ socket_id which is currently displayed on @display.
+This function will generally only be used by classes deriving from #GtkPlug.
+
+Since: 2.2
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="plug">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPlug.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="display">
+<parameter_description> the #GdkDisplay associated with @socket_id's
+#GtkSocket.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="socket_id">
+<parameter_description> the XID of the socket's window.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_text_buffer_apply_tag">
<description>
Emits the "apply-tag" signal on @buffer. The default
@@ -61949,26 +62652,22 @@ handler for the signal applies @tag to the given range.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_get_device_events">
+<function name="gtk_calendar_get_detail_height_rows">
<description>
-Returns the events mask for the widget corresponding to an specific device. These
-are the events that the widget will receive when @device operates on it.
+Queries the height of detail cells, in rows.
+See #GtkCalendar:detail-width-chars.
+
+Since: 2.14
-Since: 3.0
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="device">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkDevice
+<parameter name="calendar">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkCalendar.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> device event mask for @widget
-
+<return> The height of detail cells, in rows.
</return>
</function>
@@ -62065,6 +62764,25 @@ Since: 2.10
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_print_context_create_pango_layout">
+<description>
+Creates a new #PangoLayout that is suitable for use
+with the #GtkPrintContext.
+
+Since: 2.10
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="context">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintContext
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> a new Pango layout for @context
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_text_view_get_pixels_below_lines">
<description>
Gets the value set by gtk_text_view_set_pixels_below_lines().
@@ -62104,47 +62822,22 @@ Since: 2.18
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_message_dialog_format_secondary_markup">
+<function name="gtk_text_iter_get_line">
<description>
-Sets the secondary text of the message dialog to be @message_format (with
-printf()-style), which is marked up with the
-<link linkend="PangoMarkupFormat">Pango text markup language</link>.
-
-Note that setting a secondary text makes the primary text become
-bold, unless you have provided explicit markup.
-
-Due to an oversight, this function does not escape special XML characters
-like gtk_message_dialog_new_with_markup() does. Thus, if the arguments
-may contain special XML characters, you should use g_markup_printf_escaped()
-to escape it.
-
-<informalexample><programlisting>
-gchar *msg;
-
-msg = g_markup_printf_escaped (message_format, ...);
-gtk_message_dialog_format_secondary_markup (message_dialog, "%s", msg);
-g_free (msg);
-</programlisting></informalexample>
+Returns the line number containing the iterator. Lines in
+a #GtkTextBuffer are numbered beginning with 0 for the first
+line in the buffer.
-Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="message_dialog">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkMessageDialog
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="message_format">
-<parameter_description> printf()-style markup string (see
- <link linkend="PangoMarkupFormat">Pango markup format</link>), or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="Varargs">
-<parameter_description> arguments for @message_format
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> an iterator
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> a line number
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_print_settings_set_output_bin">
@@ -62189,43 +62882,33 @@ Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_set_widget">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_convert_bin_window_to_widget_coords">
<description>
-Sets the widget in the header to be @widget. If widget is %NULL, then the
-header button is set with a #GtkLabel set to the title of @tree_column.
+Converts bin_window coordinates (see gtk_tree_view_get_bin_window())
+to widget relative coordinates.
+
+Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_column">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeViewColumn.
+<parameter name="tree_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeView
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> A child #GtkWidget, or %NULL.
+<parameter name="bx">
+<parameter_description> bin_window X coordinate
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_icon_source_set_direction">
-<description>
-Sets the text direction this icon source is intended to be used
-with.
-
-Setting the text direction on an icon source makes no difference
-if the text direction is wildcarded. Therefore, you should usually
-call gtk_icon_source_set_direction_wildcarded() to un-wildcard it
-in addition to calling this function.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="source">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkIconSource
+<parameter name="by">
+<parameter_description> bin_window Y coordinate
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="direction">
-<parameter_description> text direction this source applies to
+<parameter name="wx">
+<parameter_description> return location for widget X coordinate
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="wy">
+<parameter_description> return location for widget Y coordinate
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -62335,6 +63018,28 @@ Sets the way @child is packed into @box.
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_widget_set_can_focus">
+<description>
+Specifies whether @widget can own the input focus. See
+gtk_widget_grab_focus() for actually setting the input focus on a
+widget.
+
+Since: 2.18
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="can_focus">
+<parameter_description> whether or not @widget can own the input focus.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_image_set_from_pixbuf">
<description>
See gtk_image_new_from_pixbuf() for details.
@@ -62353,47 +63058,38 @@ See gtk_image_new_from_pixbuf() for details.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_drag_dest_set_target_list">
+<function name="gtk_tool_palette_unset_icon_size">
<description>
-Sets the target types that this widget can accept from drag-and-drop.
-The widget must first be made into a drag destination with
-gtk_drag_dest_set().
+Unsets the tool palette icon size set with gtk_tool_palette_set_icon_size(),
+so that user preferences will be used to determine the icon size.
+
+Since: 2.20
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget that's a drag destination
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="target_list">
-<parameter_description> list of droppable targets, or %NULL for none
+<parameter name="palette">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolPalette
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_selection_add_target">
+<function name="gtk_layout_set_hadjustment">
<description>
-Appends a specified target to the list of supported targets for a
-given widget and selection.
+Sets the horizontal scroll adjustment for the layout.
+
+See #GtkScrolledWindow, #GtkScrollbar, #GtkAdjustment for details.
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTarget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="selection">
-<parameter_description> the selection
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="target">
-<parameter_description> target to add.
+<parameter name="layout">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkLayout
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="info">
-<parameter_description> A unsigned integer which will be passed back to the application.
+<parameter name="adjustment">
+<parameter_description> new scroll adjustment
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -62473,28 +63169,18 @@ the image will be displayed or not.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_image_new_from_image">
+<function name="gtk_button_clicked">
<description>
-Creates a #GtkImage widget displaying a @image with a @mask.
-A #GdkImage is a client-side image buffer in the pixel format of the
-current display. The #GtkImage does not assume a reference to the
-image or mask; you still need to unref them if you own references.
-#GtkImage will add its own reference rather than adopting yours.
-
+Emits a #GtkButton::clicked signal to the given #GtkButton.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="image">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkImage, or %NULL
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="mask">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkBitmap, or %NULL
+<parameter name="button">
+<parameter_description> The #GtkButton you want to send the signal to.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a new #GtkImage
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_cell_renderer_spinner_new">
@@ -62582,6 +63268,23 @@ generally needed by most applications.
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_text_iter_get_chars_in_line">
+<description>
+Returns the number of characters in the line containing @iter,
+including the paragraph delimiters.
+
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> an iterator
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> number of characters in the line
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_selection_data_get_length">
<description>
Retrieves the length of the raw data of the selection.
@@ -62720,29 +63423,62 @@ said text if it's editable.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_entry_buffer_set_text">
+<function name="gtk_stock_set_translate_func">
<description>
-Sets the text in the buffer.
+Sets a function to be used for translating the @label of
+a stock item.
-This is roughly equivalent to calling gtk_entry_buffer_delete_text()
-and gtk_entry_buffer_insert_text().
+If no function is registered for a translation domain,
+g_dgettext() is used.
-Note that @n_chars is in characters, not in bytes.
+The function is used for all stock items whose
+ translation_domain matches @domain. Note that it is possible
+to use strings different from the actual gettext translation domain
+of your application for this, as long as your #GtkTranslateFunc uses
+the correct domain when calling dgettext(). This can be useful, e.g.
+when dealing with message contexts:
-Since: 2.18
+|[
+GtkStockItem items[] = {
+{ MY_ITEM1, NC_("odd items", "Item 1"), 0, 0, "odd-item-domain" },
+{ MY_ITEM2, NC_("even items", "Item 2"), 0, 0, "even-item-domain" },
+};
+
+gchar *
+my_translate_func (const gchar *msgid,
+gpointer data)
+{
+gchar *msgctxt = data;
+
+return (gchar*)g_dpgettext2 (GETTEXT_PACKAGE, msgctxt, msgid);
+}
+
+/ * ... * /
+
+gtk_stock_add (items, G_N_ELEMENTS (items));
+gtk_stock_set_translate_func ("odd-item-domain", my_translate_func, "odd items");
+gtk_stock_set_translate_func ("even-item-domain", my_translate_func, "even items");
+]|
+
+Since: 2.8
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="buffer">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkEntryBuffer
+<parameter name="domain">
+<parameter_description> the translation domain for which @func shall be used
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="chars">
-<parameter_description> the new text
+<parameter name="func">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTranslateFunc
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="n_chars">
-<parameter_description> the number of characters in @text, or -1
+<parameter name="data">
+<parameter_description> data to pass to @func
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="notify">
+<parameter_description> a #GDestroyNotify that is called when @data is
+no longer needed
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -62817,41 +63553,40 @@ zero, or the number of characters in the grapheme.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_iter_starts_sentence">
+<function name="gtk_print_operation_get_embed_page_setup">
<description>
-Determines whether @iter begins a sentence. Sentence boundaries are
-determined by Pango and should be correct for nearly any language
-(if not, the correct fix would be to the Pango text boundary
-algorithms).
+Gets the value of #GtkPrintOperation::embed-page-setup property.
+Since: 2.18
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
+<parameter name="op">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintOperation
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if @iter is at the start of a sentence.
+<return> whether page setup selection combos are embedded
+
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_operation_get_embed_page_setup">
+<function name="gtk_scrolled_window_set_vadjustment">
<description>
-Gets the value of #GtkPrintOperation::embed-page-setup property.
-
-Since: 2.18
+Sets the #GtkAdjustment for the vertical scrollbar.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="op">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintOperation
+<parameter name="scrolled_window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkScrolledWindow
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="vadjustment">
+<parameter_description> vertical scroll adjustment
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> whether page setup selection combos are embedded
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_icon_info_get_embedded_rect">
@@ -62911,21 +63646,34 @@ instance with gtk_socket_add_id().
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_cell_renderer_toggle_get_active">
+<function name="gtk_entry_set_icon_tooltip_text">
<description>
-Returns whether the cell renderer is active. See
-gtk_cell_renderer_toggle_set_active().
+Sets @tooltip as the contents of the tooltip for the icon
+at the specified position.
+
+Use %NULL for @tooltip to remove an existing tooltip.
+See also gtk_widget_set_tooltip_text() and
+gtk_entry_set_icon_tooltip_markup().
+
+Since: 2.16
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="toggle">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkCellRendererToggle
+<parameter name="entry">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkEntry
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="icon_pos">
+<parameter_description> the icon position
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="tooltip">
+<parameter_description> the contents of the tooltip for the icon, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the cell renderer is active.
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_about_dialog_set_license">
@@ -62986,76 +63734,90 @@ Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_accelerator_get_default_mod_mask">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_set_title">
<description>
-Gets the value set by gtk_accelerator_set_default_mod_mask().
+Sets the title of the @tree_column. If a custom widget has been set, then
+this value is ignored.
</description>
<parameters>
+<parameter name="tree_column">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeViewColumn.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="title">
+<parameter_description> The title of the @tree_column.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the default accelerator modifier mask
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_source_get_icon_name">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_cell_set_cell_data">
<description>
-Retrieves the source icon name, or %NULL if none is set. The
-icon_name is not a copy, and should not be modified or expected to
-persist beyond the lifetime of the icon source.
-
+Sets the cell renderer based on the @tree_model and @iter. That is, for
+every attribute mapping in @tree_column, it will get a value from the set
+column on the @iter, and use that value to set the attribute on the cell
+renderer. This is used primarily by the #GtkTreeView.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="source">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkIconSource
+<parameter name="tree_column">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeViewColumn.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="tree_model">
+<parameter_description> The #GtkTreeModel to to get the cell renderers attributes from.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> The #GtkTreeIter to to get the cell renderer's attributes from.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="is_expander">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE, if the row has children
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="is_expanded">
+<parameter_description> %TRUE, if the row has visible children
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> icon name. This string must not be modified or freed.
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_mark_set_visible">
+<function name="gtk_entry_get_alignment">
<description>
-Sets the visibility of @mark; the insertion point is normally
-visible, i.e. you can see it as a vertical bar. Also, the text
-widget uses a visible mark to indicate where a drop will occur when
-dragging-and-dropping text. Most other marks are not visible.
-Marks are not visible by default.
+Gets the value set by gtk_entry_set_alignment().
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="mark">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextMark
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="setting">
-<parameter_description> visibility of mark
+<parameter name="entry">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkEntry
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the alignment
+
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_set_state">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_get_clickable">
<description>
-This function is for use in widget implementations. Sets the state
-of a widget (insensitive, prelighted, etc.) Usually you should set
-the state using wrapper functions such as gtk_widget_set_sensitive().
+Returns %TRUE if the user can click on the header for the column.
+
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="state">
-<parameter_description> new state for @widget
+<parameter name="tree_column">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeViewColumn
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> %TRUE if user can click the column header.
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_tool_button_set_label">
@@ -63138,22 +63900,21 @@ functionality, or %NULL to unset the current path.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_image_set_from_pixmap">
+<function name="gtk_icon_theme_append_search_path">
<description>
-See gtk_image_new_from_pixmap() for details.
+Appends a directory to the search path.
+See gtk_icon_theme_set_search_path().
+
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="image">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkImage
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="pixmap">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkPixmap or %NULL
+<parameter name="icon_theme">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIconTheme
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="mask">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkBitmap or %NULL
+<parameter name="path">
+<parameter_description> directory name to append to the icon path
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -63263,22 +64024,22 @@ Since: 2.8
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_recent_info_ref">
+<function name="gtk_accel_map_lookup_entry">
<description>
-Increases the reference count of @recent_info by one.
-
-Since: 2.10
+Looks up the accelerator entry for @accel_path and fills in @key.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="info">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentInfo
+<parameter name="accel_path">
+<parameter_description> a valid accelerator path
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="key">
+<parameter_description> the accelerator key to be filled in (optional)
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the recent info object with its reference count increased
-by one.
-
+<return> %TRUE if @accel_path is known, %FALSE otherwise
</return>
</function>
@@ -63334,37 +64095,44 @@ Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_size_group_get_widgets">
+<function name="gtk_activatable_get_use_action_appearance">
<description>
-Returns the list of widgets associated with @size_group.
+Gets whether this activatable should reset its layout
+and appearance when setting the related action or when
+the action changes appearance.
-Since: 2.10
+Since: 2.16
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="size_group">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkSizeGroup
+<parameter name="activatable">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkActivatable
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a #GSList of
-widgets. The list is owned by GTK+ and should not be modified.
+<return> whether @activatable uses its actions appearance.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_cell_renderer_progress_new">
+<function name="gtk_print_settings_set_printer_lpi">
<description>
-Creates a new #GtkCellRendererProgress.
+Sets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_PRINTER_LPI.
-Since: 2.6
+Since: 2.16
</description>
<parameters>
+<parameter name="settings">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="lpi">
+<parameter_description> the resolution in lpi (lines per inch)
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the new cell renderer
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_cell_layout_add_attribute">
@@ -63399,42 +64167,37 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_widget_set_allocation">
+<function name="gtk_tree_path_free">
<description>
-Sets the widget's allocation. This should not be used
-directly, but from within a widget's size_allocate method.
-
-Since: 2.18
+Frees @path.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="allocation">
-<parameter_description> a pointer to a #GtkAllocation to copy from
+<parameter name="path">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreePath.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_action_get_icon_name">
+<function name="gtk_scrolled_window_get_placement">
<description>
-Gets the icon name of @action.
+Gets the placement of the contents with respect to the scrollbars
+for the scrolled window. See gtk_scrolled_window_set_placement().
-Since: 2.16
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="action">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkAction
+<parameter name="scrolled_window">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkScrolledWindow
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the icon name
+<return> the current placement value.
+See also gtk_scrolled_window_set_placement() and
+gtk_scrolled_window_unset_placement().
</return>
</function>
@@ -63458,26 +64221,6 @@ indicates the mnemonic accelerator keys.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_settings_set_finishings">
-<description>
-Sets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_FINISHINGS.
-
-Since: 2.10
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="settings">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="finishings">
-<parameter_description> the finishings
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_action_group_get_sensitive">
<description>
Returns %TRUE if the group is sensitive. The constituent actions
@@ -63570,42 +64313,48 @@ Since: 2.14
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_combo_box_entry_new_text">
+<function name="gtk_text_view_move_child">
<description>
-Convenience function which constructs a new editable text combo box, which
-is a #GtkComboBoxEntry just displaying strings. If you use this function to
-create a text combo box, you should only manipulate its data source with
-the following convenience functions: gtk_combo_box_append_text(),
-gtk_combo_box_insert_text(), gtk_combo_box_prepend_text() and
-gtk_combo_box_remove_text().
-
-Since: 2.4
+Updates the position of a child, as for gtk_text_view_add_child_in_window().
</description>
<parameters>
+<parameter name="text_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextView
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="child">
+<parameter_description> child widget already added to the text view
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="xpos">
+<parameter_description> new X position in window coordinates
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="ypos">
+<parameter_description> new Y position in window coordinates
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> A new text #GtkComboBoxEntry.
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_plug_construct">
+<function name="gtk_info_bar_get_action_area">
<description>
-Finish the initialization of @plug for a given #GtkSocket identified by
- socket_id This function will generally only be used by classes deriving from #GtkPlug.
+Returns the action area of @info_bar.
+
+Since: 2.18
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="plug">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPlug.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="socket_id">
-<parameter_description> the XID of the socket's window.
+<parameter name="info_bar">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkInfoBar
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the action area.
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_action_activate">
@@ -63646,38 +64395,42 @@ Since: 2.20
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_path_get_depth">
+<function name="gtk_dialog_get_action_area">
<description>
-Returns the current depth of @path.
+Returns the action area of @dialog.
+Since: 2.14
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="path">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreePath.
+<parameter name="dialog">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkDialog
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> The depth of @path
+<return> the action area.
+
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_dialog_get_action_area">
+<function name="gtk_im_multicontext_append_menuitems">
<description>
-Returns the action area of @dialog.
-
-Since: 2.14
+Add menuitems for various available input methods to a menu;
+the menuitems, when selected, will switch the input method
+for the context and the global default input method.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="dialog">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkDialog
+<parameter name="context">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIMMulticontext
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="menushell">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkMenuShell
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the action area.
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_info_bar_new">
@@ -63724,6 +64477,27 @@ or %NULL
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_menu_set_title">
+<description>
+Sets the title string for the menu. The title is displayed when the menu
+is shown as a tearoff menu. If @title is %NULL, the menu will see if it is
+attached to a parent menu item, and if so it will try to use the same text as
+that menu item's label.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="menu">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkMenu
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="title">
+<parameter_description> a string containing the title for the menu.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_widget_get_root_window">
<description>
Get the root window where this widget is located. This function can
@@ -63749,49 +64523,24 @@ Since: 2.2
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_view_scroll_to_path">
+<function name="gtk_paper_size_get_paper_sizes">
<description>
-Moves the alignments of @icon_view to the position specified by @path.
- row_align determines where the row is placed, and @col_align determines
-where @column is placed. Both are expected to be between 0.0 and 1.0.
-0.0 means left/top alignment, 1.0 means right/bottom alignment, 0.5 means
-center.
-
-If @use_align is %FALSE, then the alignment arguments are ignored, and the
-tree does the minimum amount of work to scroll the item onto the screen.
-This means that the item will be scrolled to the edge closest to its current
-position. If the item is currently visible on the screen, nothing is done.
-
-This function only works if the model is set, and @path is a valid row on
-the model. If the model changes before the @icon_view is realized, the
-centered path will be modified to reflect this change.
+Creates a list of known paper sizes.
-Since: 2.8
+Since: 2.12
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="icon_view">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkIconView.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="path">
-<parameter_description> The path of the item to move to.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="use_align">
-<parameter_description> whether to use alignment arguments, or %FALSE.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="row_align">
-<parameter_description> The vertical alignment of the item specified by @path.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="col_align">
-<parameter_description> The horizontal alignment of the item specified by @path.
+<parameter name="include_custom">
+<parameter_description> whether to include custom paper sizes
+as defined in the page setup dialog
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> a newly allocated list of newly
+allocated #GtkPaperSize objects
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_tool_button_set_stock_id">
@@ -63816,21 +64565,36 @@ Since: 2.4
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_printer_get_job_count">
+<function name="gtk_text_buffer_insert_interactive_at_cursor">
<description>
-Gets the number of jobs currently queued on the printer.
+Calls gtk_text_buffer_insert_interactive() at the cursor
+position.
+
+ default_editable indicates the editability of text that doesn't
+have a tag affecting editability applied to it. Typically the
+result of gtk_text_view_get_editable() is appropriate here.
-Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="printer">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrinter
+<parameter name="buffer">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextBuffer
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="text">
+<parameter_description> text in UTF-8 format
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="len">
+<parameter_description> length of text in bytes, or -1
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="default_editable">
+<parameter_description> default editability of buffer
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the number of jobs on @printer
-
+<return> whether text was actually inserted
</return>
</function>
@@ -64068,26 +64832,23 @@ used, or -1 if this is disabled.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tool_button_new_from_stock">
+<function name="gtk_text_view_set_right_margin">
<description>
-Creates a new #GtkToolButton containing the image and text from a
-stock item. Some stock ids have preprocessor macros like #GTK_STOCK_OK
-and #GTK_STOCK_APPLY.
-
-It is an error if @stock_id is not a name of a stock item.
-
-Since: 2.4
+Sets the default right margin for text in the text view.
+Tags in the buffer may override the default.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="stock_id">
-<parameter_description> the name of the stock item
+<parameter name="text_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextView
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="right_margin">
+<parameter_description> right margin in pixels
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> A new #GtkToolButton
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_print_run_page_setup_dialog_async">
@@ -64155,24 +64916,29 @@ Since: 2.14
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_file_filter_add_mime_type">
+<function name="gtk_tree_path_get_indices_with_depth">
<description>
-Adds a rule allowing a given mime type to @filter.
+Returns the current indices of @path.
+This is an array of integers, each representing a node in a tree.
+It also returns the number of elements in the array.
+The array should not be freed.
-Since: 2.4
+Since: 3.0
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="filter">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkFileFilter
+<parameter name="path">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkTreePath.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="mime_type">
-<parameter_description> name of a MIME type
+<parameter name="depth">
+<parameter_description> Number of elements returned in the integer array
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> The current indices, or %NULL.
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_cell_renderer_text_new">
@@ -64193,38 +64959,6 @@ of the #GtkTreeView
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_socket_new">
-<description>
-Create a new empty #GtkSocket.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-</parameters>
-<return> the new #GtkSocket.
-</return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_print_settings_set_quality">
-<description>
-Sets the value of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_QUALITY.
-
-Since: 2.10
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="settings">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintSettings
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="quality">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintQuality value
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_text_iter_forward_word_end">
<description>
Moves forward to the next word end. (If @iter is currently on a
@@ -64300,59 +65034,48 @@ Since: 2.16
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_recent_info_get_visited">
+<function name="gtk_tool_palette_set_expand">
<description>
-Gets the timestamp (seconds from system's Epoch) when the resource
-was last visited.
+Sets whether the group should be given extra space.
-Since: 2.10
+Since: 2.20
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="info">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkRecentInfo
+<parameter name="palette">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolPalette
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="group">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkToolItemGroup which is a child of palette
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="expand">
+<parameter_description> whether the group should be given extra space
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the number of seconds elapsed from system's Epoch when
-the resource was last visited, or -1 on failure.
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_test_display_button_window">
+<function name="gtk_drag_source_add_uri_targets">
<description>
-Create a window with window title @window_title, text contents @dialog_text,
-and a number of buttons, according to the paired argument list given
-as @... parameters.
-Each button is created with a @label and a ::clicked signal handler that
-incremrents the integer stored in @nump.
-The window will be automatically shown with gtk_widget_show_now() after
-creation, so when this function returns it has already been mapped,
-resized and positioned on screen.
-The window will quit any running gtk_main()-loop when destroyed, and it
-will automatically be destroyed upon test function teardown.
+Add the URI targets supported by #GtkSelection to
+the target list of the drag source. The targets
+are added with @info = 0. If you need another value,
+use gtk_target_list_add_uri_targets() and
+gtk_drag_source_set_target_list().
-Since: 2.14
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="window_title">
-<parameter_description> Title of the window to be displayed.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="dialog_text">
-<parameter_description> Text inside the window to be displayed.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="Varargs">
-<parameter_description> %NULL terminated list of (const char *label, int *nump) pairs.
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget that's is a drag source
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a widget pointer to the newly created GtkWindow.
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_dialog_get_content_area">
@@ -64373,21 +65096,45 @@ Since: 2.14
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_container_get_focus_hadjustment">
+<function name="gtk_notebook_get_tab_pos">
<description>
-Retrieves the horizontal focus adjustment for the container. See
-gtk_container_set_focus_hadjustment ().
+Gets the edge at which the tabs for switching pages in the
+notebook are drawn.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="container">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkContainer
+<parameter name="notebook">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkNotebook
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the horizontal focus adjustment, or %NULL if
-none has been set.
+<return> the edge at which the tabs are drawn
+</return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_print_settings_new_from_file">
+<description>
+Reads the print settings from @file_name. Returns a new #GtkPrintSettings
+object with the restored settings, or %NULL if an error occurred. If the
+file could not be loaded then error is set to either a #GFileError or
+#GKeyFileError. See gtk_print_settings_to_file().
+
+Since: 2.12
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="file_name">
+<parameter_description> the filename to read the settings from
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="error">
+<parameter_description> return location for errors, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the restored #GtkPrintSettings
+
</return>
</function>
@@ -64534,48 +65281,51 @@ Since: 2.6
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_print_unix_dialog_get_settings">
+<function name="gtk_about_dialog_set_authors">
<description>
-Gets a new #GtkPrintSettings object that represents the
-current values in the print dialog. Note that this creates a
-<emphasis>new object</emphasis>, and you need to unref it
-if don't want to keep it.
+Sets the strings which are displayed in the authors tab
+of the secondary credits dialog.
-Since: 2.10
+Since: 2.6
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="dialog">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintUnixDialog
+<parameter name="about">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkAboutDialog
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="authors">
+<parameter_description> a %NULL-terminated array of strings
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> a new #GtkPrintSettings object with the values from @dialog
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_assistant_get_page_header_image">
+<function name="gtk_list_store_insert_after">
<description>
-Gets the header image for @page.
+Inserts a new row after @sibling. If @sibling is %NULL, then the row will be
+prepended to the beginning of the list. @iter will be changed to point to
+this new row. The row will be empty after this function is called. To fill
+in values, you need to call gtk_list_store_set() or gtk_list_store_set_value().
-Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="assistant">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkAssistant
+<parameter name="list_store">
+<parameter_description> A #GtkListStore
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="page">
-<parameter_description> a page of @assistant
+<parameter name="iter">
+<parameter_description> An unset #GtkTreeIter to set to the new row
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="sibling">
+<parameter_description> A valid #GtkTreeIter, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the header image for @page, or %NULL
-if there's no header image for the page.
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_separator_new">
@@ -64835,20 +65585,19 @@ Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_get_title">
+<function name="gtk_color_selection_get_current_alpha">
<description>
-Returns the title of the widget.
+Returns the current alpha value.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_column">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeViewColumn.
+<parameter name="colorsel">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkColorSelection.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the title of the column. This string should not be
-modified or freed.
+<return> an integer between 0 and 65535.
</return>
</function>
@@ -64870,64 +65619,45 @@ longer needed.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_range_get_slider_size_fixed">
+<function name="gtk_recent_manager_new">
<description>
-This function is useful mainly for #GtkRange subclasses.
+Creates a new recent manager object. Recent manager objects are used to
+handle the list of recently used resources. A #GtkRecentManager object
+monitors the recently used resources list, and emits the "changed" signal
+each time something inside the list changes.
-See gtk_range_set_slider_size_fixed().
+#GtkRecentManager objects are expensive: be sure to create them only when
+needed. You should use gtk_recent_manager_get_default() instead.
-Since: 2.20
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="range">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkRange
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> whether the range's slider has a fixed size.
+<return> A newly created #GtkRecentManager object.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_size_lookup_for_settings">
+<function name="gtk_icon_theme_prepend_search_path">
<description>
-Obtains the pixel size of a semantic icon size, possibly
-modified by user preferences for a particular
-#GtkSettings. Normally @size would be
-#GTK_ICON_SIZE_MENU, #GTK_ICON_SIZE_BUTTON, etc. This function
-isn't normally needed, gtk_widget_render_icon() is the usual
-way to get an icon for rendering, then just look at the size of
-the rendered pixbuf. The rendered pixbuf may not even correspond to
-the width/height returned by gtk_icon_size_lookup(), because themes
-are free to render the pixbuf however they like, including changing
-the usual size.
+Prepends a directory to the search path.
+See gtk_icon_theme_set_search_path().
-Since: 2.2
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="settings">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkSettings object, used to determine
-which set of user preferences to used.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="size">
-<parameter_description> an icon size
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="width">
-<parameter_description> location to store icon width
+<parameter name="icon_theme">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIconTheme
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="height">
-<parameter_description> location to store icon height
+<parameter name="path">
+<parameter_description> directory name to prepend to the icon path
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if @size was a valid size
-
-</return>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_tree_model_sort_convert_child_path_to_path">
@@ -65014,24 +65744,18 @@ Since: 2.6
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_entry_set_icon_activatable">
+<function name="gtk_widget_queue_resize">
<description>
-Sets whether the icon is activatable.
-
-Since: 2.16
+This function is only for use in widget implementations.
+Flags a widget to have its size renegotiated; should
+be called when a widget for some reason has a new size request.
+For example, when you change the text in a #GtkLabel, #GtkLabel
+queues a resize to ensure there's enough space for the new text.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="entry">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkEntry
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="icon_pos">
-<parameter_description> Icon position
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="activatable">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE if the icon should be activatable
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -65083,49 +65807,6 @@ Since: 2.6
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_cell_renderer_activate">
-<description>
-Passes an activate event to the cell renderer for possible processing.
-Some cell renderers may use events; for example, #GtkCellRendererToggle
-toggles when it gets a mouse click.
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="cell">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkCellRenderer
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="event">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkEvent
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> widget that received the event
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="path">
-<parameter_description> widget-dependent string representation of the event location;
-e.g. for #GtkTreeView, a string representation of #GtkTreePath
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="background_area">
-<parameter_description> background area as passed to gtk_cell_renderer_render()
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="cell_area">
-<parameter_description> cell area as passed to gtk_cell_renderer_render()
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="flags">
-<parameter_description> render flags
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if the event was consumed/handled
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_widget_get_parent">
<description>
Returns the parent container of @widget.
@@ -65142,22 +65823,6 @@ Returns the parent container of @widget.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_source_get_state_wildcarded">
-<description>
-Gets the value set by gtk_icon_source_set_state_wildcarded().
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="source">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkIconSource
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if this icon source is a base for any widget state variant
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_notebook_get_menu_label_text">
<description>
Retrieves the text of the menu label for the page containing
@@ -65297,26 +65962,53 @@ Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_status_icon_set_screen">
+<function name="gtk_icon_theme_load_icon">
<description>
-Sets the #GdkScreen where @status_icon is displayed; if
-the icon is already mapped, it will be unmapped, and
-then remapped on the new screen.
+Looks up an icon in an icon theme, scales it to the given size
+and renders it into a pixbuf. This is a convenience function;
+if more details about the icon are needed, use
+gtk_icon_theme_lookup_icon() followed by gtk_icon_info_load_icon().
-Since: 2.12
+Note that you probably want to listen for icon theme changes and
+update the icon. This is usually done by connecting to the
+GtkWidget::style-set signal. If for some reason you do not want to
+update the icon when the icon theme changes, you should consider
+using gdk_pixbuf_copy() to make a private copy of the pixbuf
+returned by this function. Otherwise GTK+ may need to keep the old
+icon theme loaded, which would be a waste of memory.
+
+Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="status_icon">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkStatusIcon
+<parameter name="icon_theme">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIconTheme
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="screen">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkScreen
+<parameter name="icon_name">
+<parameter_description> the name of the icon to lookup
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="size">
+<parameter_description> the desired icon size. The resulting icon may not be
+exactly this size; see gtk_icon_info_load_icon().
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="flags">
+<parameter_description> flags modifying the behavior of the icon lookup
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="error">
+<parameter_description> Location to store error information on failure, or %NULL.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> the rendered icon; this may be a newly created icon
+or a new reference to an internal icon, so you must not modify
+the icon. Use g_object_unref() to release your reference to the
+icon. %NULL if the icon isn't found.
+
+</return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_recent_chooser_unselect_uri">
@@ -65339,93 +66031,51 @@ Since: 2.10
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_draw_insertion_cursor">
+<function name="gtk_recent_chooser_widget_new">
<description>
-Draws a text caret on @drawable at @location. This is not a style function
-but merely a convenience function for drawing the standard cursor shape.
+Creates a new #GtkRecentChooserWidget object. This is an embeddable widget
+used to access the recently used resources list.
-Since: 2.4
+Since: 2.10
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="widget">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkWidget
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="drawable">
-<parameter_description> a #GdkDrawable
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="area">
-<parameter_description> rectangle to which the output is clipped, or %NULL if the
-output should not be clipped
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="location">
-<parameter_description> location where to draw the cursor (@location->width is ignored)
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="is_primary">
-<parameter_description> if the cursor should be the primary cursor color.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="direction">
-<parameter_description> whether the cursor is left-to-right or
-right-to-left. Should never be #GTK_TEXT_DIR_NONE
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="draw_arrow">
-<parameter_description> %TRUE to draw a directional arrow on the
-cursor. Should be %FALSE unless the cursor is split.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return></return>
+<return> a new #GtkRecentChooserWidget
+
+</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_layout_set_preedit_string">
+<function name="gtk_icon_view_get_dest_item_at_pos">
<description>
-Set the preedit string and attributes. The preedit string is a
-string showing text that is currently being edited and not
-yet committed into the buffer.
+Determines the destination item for a given position.
+
+Since: 2.8
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="layout">
-<parameter_description> a #PangoLayout
+<parameter name="icon_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIconView
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="preedit_string">
-<parameter_description> a string to display at the insertion point
+<parameter name="drag_x">
+<parameter_description> the position to determine the destination item for
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="preedit_attrs">
-<parameter_description> a #PangoAttrList of attributes that apply to @preedit_string
+<parameter name="drag_y">
+<parameter_description> the position to determine the destination item for
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="cursor_pos">
-<parameter_description> position of cursor within preedit string in chars
+<parameter name="path">
+<parameter_description> Return location for the path of the item, or %NULL.
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
-<function name="gtk_toolbar_get_relief_style">
-<description>
-Returns the relief style of buttons on @toolbar. See
-gtk_button_set_relief().
-
-Since: 2.4
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="toolbar">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkToolbar
+<parameter name="pos">
+<parameter_description> Return location for the drop position, or %NULL
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> The relief style of buttons on @toolbar.
+<return> whether there is an item at the given position.
</return>
</function>
@@ -65550,6 +66200,43 @@ enable.
<return></return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_cell_size_request_get_size">
+<description>
+Retrieves the minimum and natural size of a cell taking
+into account the widget's preference for height-for-width management.
+
+If request_natural is specified, the non-contextual natural value will
+be used to make the contextual request; otherwise the minimum will be used.
+
+Since: 3.0
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="cell">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkCellSizeRequest instance
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> the #GtkWidget this cell will be rendering to
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="request_natural">
+<parameter_description> Whether to base the contextual request off of the
+base natural or the base minimum
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="minimum_size">
+<parameter_description> location for storing the minimum size, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="natural_size">
+<parameter_description> location for storing the natural size, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_page_setup_get_bottom_margin">
<description>
Gets the bottom margin in units of @unit.
@@ -65626,28 +66313,6 @@ Since: 2.10
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_icon_info_new_for_pixbuf">
-<description>
-Creates a #GtkIconInfo for a #GdkPixbuf.
-
-Since: 2.14
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="icon_theme">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkIconTheme
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="pixbuf">
-<parameter_description> the pixbuf to wrap in a #GtkIconInfo
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> a #GtkIconInfo
-
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_widget_add_mnemonic_label">
<description>
Adds a widget to the list of mnemonic labels for
@@ -65823,6 +66488,27 @@ underlying X11 Window
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_link_button_set_uri">
+<description>
+Sets @uri as the URI where the #GtkLinkButton points. As a side-effect
+this unsets the 'visited' state of the button.
+
+Since: 2.10
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="link_button">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkLinkButton
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="uri">
+<parameter_description> a valid URI
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_font_button_set_title">
<description>
Sets the title for the font selection dialog.
@@ -65934,6 +66620,57 @@ wildcarded.
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_entry_set_cursor_hadjustment">
+<description>
+Hooks up an adjustment to the cursor position in an entry, so that when
+the cursor is moved, the adjustment is scrolled to show that position.
+See gtk_scrolled_window_get_hadjustment() for a typical way of obtaining
+the adjustment.
+
+The adjustment has to be in pixel units and in the same coordinate system
+as the entry.
+
+Since: 2.12
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="entry">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkEntry
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="adjustment">
+<parameter_description> an adjustment which should be adjusted when the cursor
+is moved, or %NULL
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_icon_source_set_direction">
+<description>
+Sets the text direction this icon source is intended to be used
+with.
+
+Setting the text direction on an icon source makes no difference
+if the text direction is wildcarded. Therefore, you should usually
+call gtk_icon_source_set_direction_wildcarded() to un-wildcard it
+in addition to calling this function.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="source">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIconSource
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="direction">
+<parameter_description> text direction this source applies to
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_assistant_commit">
<description>
Erases the visited page history so the back button is not
@@ -66029,30 +66766,47 @@ treeview has been realized.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_entry_set_icon_tooltip_text">
+<function name="gtk_wrap_box_insert_child">
<description>
-Sets @tooltip as the contents of the tooltip for the icon
-at the specified position.
+Adds a child to an #GtkWrapBox with its packing options set
-Use %NULL for @tooltip to remove an existing tooltip.
-
-See also gtk_widget_set_tooltip_text() and
-gtk_entry_set_icon_tooltip_markup().
-
-Since: 2.16
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="entry">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkEntry
+<parameter name="box">
+<parameter_description> And #GtkWrapBox
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="icon_pos">
-<parameter_description> the icon position
+<parameter name="widget">
+<parameter_description> the child #GtkWidget to add
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="tooltip">
-<parameter_description> the contents of the tooltip for the icon, or %NULL
+<parameter name="index">
+<parameter_description> the position in the child list to insert, specify -1 to append to the list.
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="xpad">
+<parameter_description> horizontal spacing for this child
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="ypad">
+<parameter_description> vertical spacing for this child
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="xexpand">
+<parameter_description> whether this child expands horizontally
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="yexpand">
+<parameter_description> whether this child expands vertically
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="xfill">
+<parameter_description> whether this child fills its horizontal allocation
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="yfill">
+<parameter_description> whether this child fills its vertical allocation
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
@@ -66104,20 +66858,47 @@ dereferencable, returns %FALSE. Otherwise, returns %TRUE.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_entry_get_alignment">
+<function name="gtk_text_mark_set_visible">
<description>
-Gets the value set by gtk_entry_set_alignment().
+Sets the visibility of @mark; the insertion point is normally
+visible, i.e. you can see it as a vertical bar. Also, the text
+widget uses a visible mark to indicate where a drop will occur when
+dragging-and-dropping text. Most other marks are not visible.
+Marks are not visible by default.
-Since: 2.4
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="entry">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkEntry
+<parameter name="mark">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTextMark
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="setting">
+<parameter_description> visibility of mark
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> the alignment
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_application_get_windows">
+<description>
+Retrieves the list of windows previously registered with
+gtk_application_create_window() or gtk_application_add_window().
+
+Since: 3.0
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="app">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkApplication
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> A pointer
+to the list of #GtkWindow<!-- -->s registered by this application,
+or %NULL. The returned #GSList is owned by the #GtkApplication
+and it should not be modified or freed directly.
</return>
</function>
@@ -66164,37 +66945,6 @@ if the #GtkScale:draw-value property is %FALSE.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_tree_view_column_add_attribute">
-<description>
-Adds an attribute mapping to the list in @tree_column. The @column is the
-column of the model to get a value from, and the @attribute is the
-parameter on @cell_renderer to be set from the value. So for example
-if column 2 of the model contains strings, you could have the
-"text" attribute of a #GtkCellRendererText get its values from
-column 2.
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="tree_column">
-<parameter_description> A #GtkTreeViewColumn.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="cell_renderer">
-<parameter_description> the #GtkCellRenderer to set attributes on
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="attribute">
-<parameter_description> An attribute on the renderer
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="column">
-<parameter_description> The column position on the model to get the attribute from.
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return></return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_action_connect_accelerator">
<description>
Installs the accelerator for @action if @action has an
@@ -66272,7 +67022,10 @@ Causes @widget to become the default widget. @widget must have the
yourself by calling <literal>gtk_widget_set_can_default (@widget,
%TRUE)</literal>. The default widget is activated when
the user presses Enter in a window. Default widgets must be
-activatable, that is, gtk_widget_activate() should affect them.
+activatable, that is, gtk_widget_activate() should affect them. Note
+that #GtkEntry widgets require the "activates-default" property
+set to %TRUE before they activate the default widget when Enter
+is pressed and the #GtkEntry is focused.
</description>
<parameters>
@@ -66399,44 +67152,51 @@ to use as a base image when creating icon variants for #GtkIconSet.
<return></return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_im_context_get_surrounding">
+<function name="gtk_tree_view_enable_model_drag_source">
<description>
-Retrieves context around the insertion point. Input methods
-typically want context in order to constrain input text based on
-existing text; this is important for languages such as Thai where
-only some sequences of characters are allowed.
-
-This function is implemented by emitting the
-GtkIMContext::retrieve_surrounding signal on the input method; in
-response to this signal, a widget should provide as much context as
-is available, up to an entire paragraph, by calling
-gtk_im_context_set_surrounding(). Note that there is no obligation
-for a widget to respond to the ::retrieve_surrounding signal, so input
-methods must be prepared to function without context.
-
+Turns @tree_view into a drag source for automatic DND. Calling this
+method sets #GtkTreeView:reorderable to %FALSE.
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="context">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkIMContext
+<parameter name="tree_view">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkTreeView
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="text">
-<parameter_description> location to store a UTF-8 encoded string of text
-holding context around the insertion point.
-If the function returns %TRUE, then you must free
-the result stored in this location with g_free().
+<parameter name="start_button_mask">
+<parameter_description> Mask of allowed buttons to start drag
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
-<parameter name="cursor_index">
-<parameter_description> location to store byte index of the insertion cursor
-within @text.
+<parameter name="targets">
+<parameter_description> the table of targets that the drag will support
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="n_targets">
+<parameter_description> the number of items in @targets
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="actions">
+<parameter_description> the bitmask of possible actions for a drag from this
+widget
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if surrounding text was provided; in this case
-you must free the result stored in *text.
-</return>
+<return></return>
+</function>
+
+<function name="gtk_editable_delete_selection">
+<description>
+Deletes the currently selected text of the editable.
+This call doesn't do anything if there is no selected text.
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="editable">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkEditable
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return></return>
</function>
<function name="gtk_text_iter_backward_cursor_positions">
@@ -66545,6 +67305,28 @@ Returns the number of columns supported by @tree_model.
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_icon_info_new_for_pixbuf">
+<description>
+Creates a #GtkIconInfo for a #GdkPixbuf.
+
+Since: 2.14
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="icon_theme">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkIconTheme
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+<parameter name="pixbuf">
+<parameter_description> the pixbuf to wrap in a #GtkIconInfo
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> a #GtkIconInfo
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_file_chooser_remove_shortcut_folder_uri">
<description>
Removes a folder URI from a file chooser's list of shortcut folders.
@@ -66574,6 +67356,25 @@ See also: gtk_file_chooser_add_shortcut_folder_uri()
</return>
</function>
+<function name="gtk_print_context_get_page_setup">
+<description>
+Obtains the #GtkPageSetup that determines the page
+dimensions of the #GtkPrintContext.
+
+Since: 2.10
+
+</description>
+<parameters>
+<parameter name="context">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkPrintContext
+</parameter_description>
+</parameter>
+</parameters>
+<return> the page setup of @context
+
+</return>
+</function>
+
<function name="gtk_print_settings_set_resolution_xy">
<description>
Sets the values of %GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_RESOLUTION,
@@ -66617,22 +67418,6 @@ representing a node in a tree. This value should not be freed.
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_spin_button_get_adjustment">
-<description>
-Get the adjustment associated with a #GtkSpinButton
-
-
-</description>
-<parameters>
-<parameter name="spin_button">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkSpinButton
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-</parameters>
-<return> the #GtkAdjustment of @spin_button
-</return>
-</function>
-
<function name="gtk_window_set_focus">
<description>
If @focus is not the current focus widget, and is focusable, sets
@@ -66692,25 +67477,19 @@ Since: 2.4
</return>
</function>
-<function name="gtk_text_iter_forward_sentence_ends">
+<function name="gtk_spin_button_get_adjustment">
<description>
-Calls gtk_text_iter_forward_sentence_end() @count times (or until
-gtk_text_iter_forward_sentence_end() returns %FALSE). If @count is
-negative, moves backward instead of forward.
+Get the adjustment associated with a #GtkSpinButton
</description>
<parameters>
-<parameter name="iter">
-<parameter_description> a #GtkTextIter
-</parameter_description>
-</parameter>
-<parameter name="count">
-<parameter_description> number of sentences to move
+<parameter name="spin_button">
+<parameter_description> a #GtkSpinButton
</parameter_description>
</parameter>
</parameters>
-<return> %TRUE if @iter moved and is not the end iterator
+<return> the #GtkAdjustment of @spin_button
</return>
</function>
[
Date Prev][
Date Next] [
Thread Prev][
Thread Next]
[
Thread Index]
[
Date Index]
[
Author Index]
